[gtkmm] Regenerate docs with the new docextract_to_xml.py script.
- From: José Alburquerque <jaalburqu src gnome org>
- To: commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm] Regenerate docs with the new docextract_to_xml.py script.
- Date: Sun, 11 Apr 2010 21:00:34 +0000 (UTC)
commit dcfa6362fdeed20b2a4b06f8fc30be4f7f1a45f0
Author: José Alburquerque <jaalburqu svn gnome org>
Date: Sun Apr 11 16:39:43 2010 -0400
Regenerate docs with the new docextract_to_xml.py script.
* atk/src/atk_docs.xml:
* gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with the new documentation
extraction script to take advantage of the new generation method it
uses.
ChangeLog | 10 +
atk/src/atk_docs.xml | 1163 ++-
gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml | 6994 +++---------
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |31009 +++++++++++++++++++++++---------------------------
4 files changed, 16747 insertions(+), 22429 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index dfb445c..aa5c8d1 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,13 @@
+2010-04-11 José Alburquerque <jaalburqu svn gnome org>
+
+ Regenerate docs with the new docextract_to_xml.py script.
+
+ * atk/src/atk_docs.xml:
+ * gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with the new documentation
+ extraction script to take advantage of the new generation method it
+ uses.
+
2.20.1:
2010-04-07 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
diff --git a/atk/src/atk_docs.xml b/atk/src/atk_docs.xml
index 1bd4071..cfc41b6 100644
--- a/atk/src/atk_docs.xml
+++ b/atk/src/atk_docs.xml
@@ -35,8 +35,7 @@ the selected region
<function name="atk_image_get_image_position">
<description>
Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
-images top-left corner. The values of @x and @y are returned as -1
-if the values cannot be obtained.
+images top-left corner.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45,11 +44,11 @@ if the values cannot be obtained.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> address of #gint to put x coordinate position
+<parameter_description> address of #gint to put x coordinate position; otherwise, -1 if value cannot be obtained.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> address of #gint to put y coordinate position
+<parameter_description> address of #gint to put y coordinate position; otherwise, -1 if value cannot be obtained.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="coord_type">
@@ -61,6 +60,28 @@ or to the components top level window
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_table_set_column_header">
+<description>
+Sets the specified column header to @header.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in @table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="header">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkTable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_table_is_row_selected">
<description>
Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified @row
@@ -118,24 +139,19 @@ set of the accessible
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_object_connect_property_change_handler">
+<function name="atk_hyperlink_get_n_anchors">
<description>
-Specifies a function to be called when a property changes value.
+Gets the number of anchors associated with this hyperlink.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accessible">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="handler">
-<parameter_description> a function to be called when a property changes its value
+<parameter name="link_">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkHyperlink
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #guint which is the handler id used in
-atk_object_remove_property_change_handler()
+<return> the number of anchors associated with this hyperlink
</return>
</function>
@@ -192,41 +208,39 @@ container.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_add_row_selection">
+<function name="atk_focus_tracker_notify">
<description>
-Adds the specified @row to the selection.
-
+Cause the focus tracker functions which have been specified to be
+executed for the object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row">
-<parameter_description> a #gint representing a row in @table
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a gboolean representing if row was successfully added to selection,
-or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_no_op_object_new">
+<function name="atk_image_set_image_description">
<description>
-Provides a default (non-functioning stub) #AtkObject.
-Application maintainers should not use this method.
+Sets the textual description for this image.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="obj">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkImageIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="description">
+<parameter_description> a string description to set for @image
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a default (non-functioning stub) #AtkObject
+<return> boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could
+not be completed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -266,6 +280,8 @@ Gets the index with the hypertext document at which this link begins.
<description>
Gets the layer of the accessible.
+Deprecated: Use atk_component_get_layer instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -275,42 +291,33 @@ Gets the layer of the accessible.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> an #AtkLayer which is the layer of the accessible
-
- Deprecated: Use atk_component_get_layer instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_editable_text_insert_text">
+<function name="atk_table_get_column_header">
<description>
-Insert text at a given position.
+Gets the column header of a specified column in an accessible table.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkEditableText
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the text to insert
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of text to insert, in bytes
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The caller initializes this to
-the position at which to insert the text. After the call it
-points at the position after the newly inserted text.
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a AtkObject* representing the specified column header, or
+%NULL if value does not implement this interface.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="atk_implementor_ref_accessible">
<description>
-Gets a reference to an object's #AtkObject implementation, if
+Gets a reference to an object's #AtkObject implementation, if
the object implements #AtkObjectIface
@@ -322,7 +329,7 @@ if a non-null return value is required.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a reference to an object's #AtkObject implementation
+<return> a reference to an object's #AtkObject implementation
</return>
</function>
@@ -347,7 +354,7 @@ respect to the document it references) and %FALSE otherwise.
<function name="atk_text_get_offset_at_point">
<description>
Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates @x and @y. @x and @y
-are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
+are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
depending on @coords.
@@ -376,6 +383,24 @@ the specified @x and @y coordinates.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_object_set_role">
+<description>
+Sets the role of the accessible.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkRole to be set as the role
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_text_get_n_selections">
<description>
Gets the number of selected regions.
@@ -393,6 +418,24 @@ occurred.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_hyperlink_impl_get_hyperlink">
+<description>
+Gets the hyperlink associated with this object.
+
+Since: 1.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkHyperlinkImplIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return>an AtkHyperlink object which points to this implementing AtkObject.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_text_get_run_attributes">
<description>
Creates an #AtkAttributeSet which consists of the attributes explicitly
@@ -411,7 +454,8 @@ returned.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="offset">
-<parameter_description> the offset at which to get the attributes
+<parameter_description> the offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of
+the character to be inserted at the caret location.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_offset">
@@ -513,6 +557,29 @@ to set for @table
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_component_add_focus_handler">
+<description>
+Add the specified handler to the set of functions to be called
+when this object receives focus events (in or out). If the handler is
+already added it is not added again
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="component">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkComponent to attach the @handler to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="handler">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkFocusHandler to be attached to @component
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a handler id which can be used in atk_component_remove_focus_handler
+or zero if the handler was already added.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_editable_text_cut_text">
<description>
Copy text from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos
@@ -606,6 +673,28 @@ Creates an instance of an #AtkObjectFactory which generates primitive
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_value_get_minimum_increment">
+<description>
+Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. If zero,
+the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
+floating point precision of the platform.
+
+Since: 1.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkValueIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue representing the minimum increment by which the accessible value may be changed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_role_get_name">
<description>
Gets the description string describing the #AtkRole @role.
@@ -622,6 +711,28 @@ Gets the description string describing the #AtkRole @role.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_object_get_attributes">
+<description>
+Get a list of properties applied to this object as a whole, as an #AtkAttributeSet consisting of
+name-value pairs. As such these attributes may be considered weakly-typed properties or annotations,
+as distinct from strongly-typed object data available via other get/set methods.
+Not all objects have explicit "name-value pair" #AtkAttributeSet properties.
+
+Since: 1.12
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> An #AtkObject.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an #AtkAttributeSet consisting of all explicit properties/annotations applied to
+the object, or an empty set if the object has no name-value pair attributes assigned to it.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_text_get_default_attributes">
<description>
Creates an #AtkAttributeSet which consists of the default values of
@@ -726,10 +837,29 @@ Paste text from clipboard to specified @position.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_misc_threads_enter">
+<description>
+Take the thread mutex for the GUI toolkit,
+if one exists.
+(This method is implemented by the toolkit ATK implementation layer;
+for instance, for GTK+, GAIL implements this via GDK_THREADS_ENTER).
+
+Since: 1.13
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> an AtkMisc instance for this application.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_object_factory_get_accessible_type">
<description>
Gets the GType of the accessible which is created by the factory.
-The value G_TYPE_INVALID is returned if no type if found.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -739,28 +869,23 @@ The value G_TYPE_INVALID is returned if no type if found.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the type of the accessible which is created by the @factory.
+The value G_TYPE_INVALID is returned if no type if found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_hypertext_get_link">
+<function name="atk_component_get_layer">
<description>
-Gets the link in this hypertext document at index
- link_index
+Gets the layer of the component.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hypertext">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkHypertext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="link_index">
-<parameter_description> an integer specifying the desired link
+<parameter name="component">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkComponent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the link in this hypertext document at
-index @link_index
+<return> an #AtkLayer which is the layer of the component
</return>
</function>
@@ -768,6 +893,8 @@ index @link_index
<description>
Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
+Since: 1.3
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="text">
@@ -798,8 +925,7 @@ for which boundary information is required.
<function name="atk_table_get_column_at_index">
<description>
-Gets a #gint representing the column at the specified @index_, or -1
-if the table does not implement this interface
+Gets a #gint representing the column at the specified @index_.
</description>
@@ -813,7 +939,8 @@ if the table does not implement this interface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a gint representing the column at the specified index.
+<return> a gint representing the column at the specified index,
+or -1 if the table does not implement this interface
</return>
</function>
@@ -858,27 +985,25 @@ if @selection does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_text_add_selection">
+<function name="atk_table_is_column_selected">
<description>
-Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
+Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified @column
+is selected
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkText
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_offset">
-<parameter_description> the start position of the selected region
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_offset">
-<parameter_description> the offset of the first character after the selected region.
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in @table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if success, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> a gboolean representing if the column is selected, or 0
+if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
@@ -944,11 +1069,11 @@ Gets the GObject for which @obj is the accessible object.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="obj">
-<parameter_description> a #AtkObject
+<parameter_description> a #AtkGObjectAccessible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GObject which is the object for which @obj is the accessible objedct
+<return> a #GObject which is the object for which @obj is the accessible object
</return>
</function>
@@ -964,40 +1089,40 @@ Creates a new empty relation set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_relation_add_target">
+<function name="atk_text_attribute_register">
<description>
-Adds the specified AtkObject to the target for the relation, if it is
-not already present.
+Associate @name with a new #AtkTextAttribute
-Since: 1.9
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="relation">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkRelation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> a name string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an #AtkTextAttribute associated with @name
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_hyperlink_get_n_anchors">
+<function name="atk_object_connect_property_change_handler">
<description>
-Gets the number of anchors associated with this hyperlink.
+Specifies a function to be called when a property changes value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkHyperlink
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="handler">
+<parameter_description> a function to be called when a property changes its value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of anchors associated with this hyperlink
+<return> a #guint which is the handler id used in
+atk_object_remove_property_change_handler()
</return>
</function>
@@ -1023,6 +1148,12 @@ Sets the accessible name of the accessible.
<description>
Determines whether this AtkHyperlink is selected
+Since: 1.4
+
+ Deprecated: This method is deprecated since ATK version 1.8.
+Please use ATK_STATE_SELECTED to indicate when a hyperlink within a
+Hypertext container is selected.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1058,6 +1189,29 @@ of the accessible.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_document_get_attribute_value">
+<description>
+Since: 1.12
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="document">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkDocumentIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="attribute_name">
+<parameter_description> a character string representing the name of the attribute
+whose value is being queried.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a string value associated with the named attribute for this
+document, or NULL if a value for #attribute_name has not been specified
+for this document.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_relation_set_get_relation">
<description>
Determines the relation at the specified position in the relation set.
@@ -1099,23 +1253,23 @@ the selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_text_set_caret_offset">
+<function name="atk_state_set_remove_state">
<description>
-Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified @offset.
+Removes the state for the specified type from the state set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkText
+<parameter name="set">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkStateSet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset">
-<parameter_description> position
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkType
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if success, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> %TRUE if @type was the state type is in @set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1245,6 +1399,24 @@ Associate @name with a new #AtkRelationType
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_editable_text_set_text_contents">
+<description>
+Set text contents of @text.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkEditableText
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> string to set for text contents of @text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_relation_set_add_relation_by_type">
<description>
Add a new relation of the specified type with the specified target to
@@ -1333,19 +1505,25 @@ Emits a state-change signal for the specified state.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_focus_tracker_notify">
+<function name="atk_table_add_row_selection">
<description>
-Cause the focus tracker functions which have been specified to be
-executed for the object.
+Adds the specified @row to the selection.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row">
+<parameter_description> a #gint representing a row in @table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a gboolean representing if row was successfully added to selection,
+or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="atk_document_get_document_type">
@@ -1364,24 +1542,20 @@ Gets a string indicating the document type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_image_set_image_description">
+<function name="atk_no_op_object_new">
<description>
-Sets the textual description for this image.
+Provides a default (non-functioning stub) #AtkObject.
+Application maintainers should not use this method.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkImageIface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="description">
-<parameter_description> a string description to set for @image
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could
-not be completed.
+<return> a default (non-functioning stub) #AtkObject
</return>
</function>
@@ -1397,6 +1571,26 @@ Gets the root accessible container for the current application.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_relation_remove_target">
+<description>
+Remove the specified AtkObject from the target for the relation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="relation">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkRelation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return>TRUE if the removal is successful.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_editable_text_copy_text">
<description>
Copy text from @start_pos up to, but not including @end_pos
@@ -1445,7 +1639,7 @@ on behalf of @obj
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkObjectFactory associated with @obj's
+<parameter_description> The #AtkObjectFactory associated with @obj's
object type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -1647,6 +1841,8 @@ Gets the target list of @relation
<description>
Gets the currently focused object.
+Since: 1.6
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1655,47 +1851,49 @@ Gets the currently focused object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_object_remove_relationship">
+<function name="atk_hypertext_get_link">
<description>
-Removes a relationship of the specified type with the specified target.
+Gets the link in this hypertext document at index
+ link_index
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkObject from which an AtkRelation is to be removed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="relationship">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkRelationType of the relation
+<parameter name="hypertext">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkHypertext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkObject which is the target of the relation to be removed.
+<parameter name="link_index">
+<parameter_description> an integer specifying the desired link
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>TRUE if the relationship is removed.
+<return> the link in this hypertext document at
+index @link_index
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_state_set_remove_state">
+<function name="atk_object_remove_relationship">
<description>
-Removes the state for the specified type from the state set.
+Removes a relationship of the specified type with the specified target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="set">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkStateSet
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkObject from which an AtkRelation is to be removed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkType
+<parameter name="relationship">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkRelationType of the relation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkObject which is the target of the relation to be removed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @type was the state type is in @set.
+<return>TRUE if the relationship is removed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1750,43 +1948,22 @@ the extent of the @component or not
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_component_get_layer">
-<description>
-Gets the layer of the component.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="component">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkComponent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an #AtkLayer which is the layer of the component
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="atk_component_add_focus_handler">
+<function name="atk_value_get_maximum_value">
<description>
-Add the specified handler to the set of functions to be called
-when this object receives focus events (in or out). If the handler is
-already added it is not added again
-
+Gets the maximum value of this object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="component">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkComponent to attach the @handler to
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkValueIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="handler">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkFocusHandler to be attached to @component
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue representing the maximum accessible value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a handler id which can be used in atk_component_remove_focus_handler
-or zero if the handler was already added.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="atk_component_set_extents">
@@ -1829,7 +2006,7 @@ or to the components top level window
<function name="atk_relation_new">
<description>
Create a new relation for the specified key and the specified list
-of targets.
+of targets. See also atk_object_add_relationship().
</description>
@@ -1869,24 +2046,55 @@ of the accessible.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_get_column_header">
+<function name="atk_document_set_attribute_value">
<description>
-Gets the column header of a specified column in an accessible table.
+Since: 1.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+<parameter name="document">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkDocumentIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in the table
+<parameter name="attribute_name">
+<parameter_description> a character string representing the name of the attribute
+whose value is being set.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="attribute_value">
+<parameter_description> a string value to be associated with #attribute_name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a AtkObject* representing the specified column header, or
-%NULL if value does not implement this interface.
+<return> TRUE if #value is successfully associated with #attribute_name
+for this document, FALSE otherwise (e.g. if the document does not
+allow the attribute to be modified).
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_state_set_contains_states">
+<description>
+Checks whether the states for all the specified types are in the
+specified set.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="set">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkStateSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> an array of #AtkStateType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_types">
+<parameter_description> The number of elements in the array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if all the states for @type are in @set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -2025,7 +2233,7 @@ focus tracking.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="add_function">
+<parameter name="init">
<parameter_description> Function to be called for focus tracker initialization
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -2054,6 +2262,8 @@ if value does not implement this interface.
<description>
Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
+Since: 1.3
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2109,25 +2319,27 @@ if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_is_column_selected">
+<function name="atk_text_add_selection">
<description>
-Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified @column
-is selected
+Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkText
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in @table
+<parameter name="start_offset">
+<parameter_description> the start position of the selected region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_offset">
+<parameter_description> the offset of the first character after the selected region.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a gboolean representing if the column is selected, or 0
-if value does not implement this interface.
+<return> %TRUE if success, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -2203,11 +2415,9 @@ or #ATK_RELATION_NULL if no matching relation type is found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_get_selected_columns">
+<function name="atk_table_set_caption">
<description>
-Gets the selected columns of the table by initializing **selected with
-the selected column numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
-
+Sets the caption for the table.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2215,13 +2425,26 @@ the selected column numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selected">
-<parameter_description> a #gint** that is to contain the selected columns numbers
+<parameter name="caption">
+<parameter_description> a #AtkObject representing the caption to set for @table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a gint representing the number of selected columns,
-or %0 if value does not implement this interface.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_misc_get_instance">
+<description>
+Obtain the singleton instance of AtkMisc for this application.
+
+Since: 1.13
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> The singleton instance of AtkMisc for this application.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -2230,6 +2453,8 @@ or %0 if value does not implement this interface.
Gets the zorder of the accessible. The value G_MININT will be returned
if the layer of the accessible is not ATK_LAYER_MDI.
+Deprecated: Use atk_component_get_mdi_zorder instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2242,14 +2467,13 @@ if the layer of the accessible is not ATK_LAYER_MDI.
which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same
container.
- Deprecated: Use atk_component_get_mdi_zorder instead.
</return>
</function>
<function name="atk_component_get_position">
<description>
Gets the position of @component in the form of
-a point specifying @component's top-left corner.
+a point specifying @component's top-left corner.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2319,7 +2543,20 @@ in @set, %FALSE otherwise
<function name="atk_action_get_name">
<description>
-Returns the name of the specified action of the object.
+Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
+object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
+of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
+object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
+represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
+interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
+"click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
+The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
+object, if one exists.
+
+For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
+reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
+i.e. the result of some actions via atk_action_do_action() may be
+NIL.
</description>
@@ -2350,9 +2587,11 @@ Creates a new empty state set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_set_caption">
+<function name="atk_table_get_selected_columns">
<description>
-Sets the caption for the table.
+Gets the selected columns of the table by initializing **selected with
+the selected column numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2360,27 +2599,52 @@ Sets the caption for the table.
<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="caption">
-<parameter_description> a #AtkObject representing the caption to set for @table
+<parameter name="selected">
+<parameter_description> a #gint** that is to contain the selected columns numbers
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a gint representing the number of selected columns,
+or %0 if value does not implement this interface.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_relation_add_target">
+<description>
+Adds the specified AtkObject to the target for the relation, if it is
+not already present. See also atk_object_add_relationship().
+
+
+Since: 1.9
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="relation">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkRelation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_text_attribute_register">
+<function name="atk_plug_get_plug_id">
<description>
-Associate @name with a new #AtkTextAttribute
+Gets the unique ID of an #AtkPlug object, which can be used to embed inside
+of an #AtkSocket using atk_socket_embed().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> a name string
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an #AtkTextAttribute associated with @name
+<return> the unique ID for the plug
</return>
</function>
@@ -2405,11 +2669,42 @@ Perform the specified action on the object.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_streamable_content_get_uri">
+<description>
+Get a string representing a URI in IETF standard format
+(see http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2396.txt) from which the object's content
+may be streamed in the specified mime-type, if one is available.
+If mime_type is NULL, the URI for the default (and possibly only) mime-type is
+returned.
+
+Note that it is possible for get_uri to return NULL but for
+get_stream to work nonetheless, since not all GIOChannels connect to URIs.
+
+Since: 1.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="streamable">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkStreamableContentIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> a gchar* representing the mime type, or NULL to request a URI
+for the default mime type.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Returns a string representing a URI, or NULL if no corresponding URI
+can be constructed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_hyperlink_is_inline">
<description>
Indicates whether the link currently displays some or all of its
content inline. Ordinary HTML links will usually return
-%FALSE, but an inline &lt;src&gt; HTML element will return
+%FALSE, but an inline <src> HTML element will return
%TRUE.
a *
@@ -2425,22 +2720,55 @@ a *
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_role_get_localized_name">
+<function name="atk_table_get_row_header">
<description>
-Gets the localized description string describing the #AtkRole @role.
+Gets the row header of a specified row in an accessible table.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> The #AtkRole whose localized name is required
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row">
+<parameter_description> a #gint representing a row in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the localized string describing the AtkRole
+<return> a AtkObject* representing the specified row header, or
+%NULL if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_editable_text_insert_text">
+<description>
+Insert text at a given position.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkEditableText
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the text to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of text to insert, in bytes
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The caller initializes this to
+the position at which to insert the text. After the call it
+points at the position after the newly inserted text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_role_for_name">
<description>
Get the #AtkRole type corresponding to a rolew name.
@@ -2461,7 +2789,7 @@ or #ATK_ROLE_INVALID if no matching role is found.
<function name="atk_selection_remove_selection">
<description>
-Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
+Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
</description>
@@ -2486,6 +2814,8 @@ Frees the memory associated with an array of AtkTextRange. It is assumed
that the array was returned by the function atk_text_get_bounded_ranges
and is NULL terminated.
+Since: 1.3
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="ranges">
@@ -2589,38 +2919,37 @@ implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_relation_set_remove">
+<function name="atk_image_get_image_locale">
<description>
-Removes a relation from the relation set.
-This function unref's the #AtkRelation so it will be deleted unless there
-is another reference to it.
+Since ATK 1.12
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="set">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkRelationSet
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="relation">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkRelation
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> An #AtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return>a string corresponding to the POSIX LC_MESSAGES locale used by the image description, or NULL if the image does not specify a locale.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_object_set_role">
+<function name="atk_relation_set_remove">
<description>
-Sets the role of the accessible.
+Removes a relation from the relation set.
+This function unref's the #AtkRelation so it will be deleted unless there
+is another reference to it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accessible">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkObject
+<parameter name="set">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkRelationSet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkRole to be set as the role
+<parameter name="relation">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkRelation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2643,43 +2972,45 @@ Registers the role specified by @name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_text_get_character_extents">
+<function name="atk_component_get_alpha">
<description>
-Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
-a particular text offset.
+Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
+ component, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
+(fully opaque).
+
+Since: 1.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkText
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset">
-<parameter_description> The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> Pointer for the x cordinate of the bounding box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Pointer for the y cordinate of the bounding box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Pointer for the width of the bounding box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Pointer for the height of the bounding box
+<parameter name="component">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkComponent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="coords">
-<parameter_description> specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
+</parameters>
+<return> An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_document_get_locale">
+<description>
+Gets a UTF-8 string indicating the POSIX-style LC_MESSAGES locale
+of the content of this document instance. Individual
+text substrings or images within this document may have
+a different locale, see atk_text_get_attributes and
+atk_image_get_image_locale.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="document">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkDocumentIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a UTF-8 string indicating the POSIX-style LC_MESSAGES
+locale of the document content as a whole, or NULL if
+the document content does not specify a locale.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="atk_text_get_text">
@@ -2706,25 +3037,49 @@ Gets the specified text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_get_row_header">
+<function name="atk_document_get_attributes">
<description>
-Gets the row header of a specified row in an accessible table.
+Gets an AtkAttributeSet which describes document-wide
+attributes as name-value pairs.
+
+Since: 1.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+<parameter name="document">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkDocumentIface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="row">
-<parameter_description> a #gint representing a row in the table
+</parameters>
+<return> An AtkAttributeSet containing the explicitly
+set name-value-pair attributes associated with this document
+as a whole.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_image_get_image_size">
+<description>
+Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
+The values of @width and @height are returned as -1 if the
+values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkImageIface
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> filled with the image width, or -1 if the value cannot be obtained.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> filled with the image height, or -1 if the value cannot be obtained.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a AtkObject* representing the specified row header, or
-%NULL if value does not implement this interface.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="atk_state_set_contains_state">
@@ -2862,9 +3217,38 @@ Frees the memory used by an #AtkAttributeSet, including all its
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_get_default_registry">
+<description>
+Gets a default implementation of the #AtkObjectFactory/type
+registry.
+Note: For most toolkit maintainers, this will be the correct
+registry for registering new #AtkObject factories. Following
+a call to this function, maintainers may call atk_registry_set_factory_type()
+to associate an #AtkObjectFactory subclass with the GType of objects
+for whom accessibility information will be provided.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a default implementation of the #AtkObjectFactory/type
+registry
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_action_get_keybinding">
<description>
Returns a keybinding associated with this action, if one exists.
+The returned string is in the format "<a>;<b>;<c>"
+(i.e. semicolon-delimited), where <a> is the keybinding which
+activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen,
+<b> corresponds to the keybinding or sequence of keys
+which invokes the action even if the relevant element is not
+currently posted on screen (for instance, for a menu item it
+posts the parent menus before invoking). The last token in the
+above string, if non-empty, represents a keyboard shortcut which
+invokes the same action without posting the component or its
+enclosing menus or dialogs.
</description>
@@ -2878,7 +3262,7 @@ Returns a keybinding associated with this action, if one exists.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a string representing the keybinding, or %NULL
+<return>a string representing the available keybindings, or %NULL
if there is no keybinding for this action.
</return>
@@ -2961,8 +3345,6 @@ returned substring
<function name="atk_table_get_index_at">
<description>
Gets a #gint representing the index at the specified @row and @column.
-The value -1 is returned if the object at row,column is not a child
-of table or table does not implement this interface.
</description>
@@ -2980,7 +3362,9 @@ of table or table does not implement this interface.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #gint representing the index at specified position
+<return> a #gint representing the index at specified position.
+The value -1 is returned if the object at row,column is not a child
+of table or table does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3095,22 +3479,15 @@ or to the components top level window
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_get_default_registry">
+<function name="atk_get_version">
<description>
-Gets a default implementation of the #AtkObjectFactory/type
-registry.
-Note: For most toolkit maintainers, this will be the correct
-registry for registering new #AtkObject factories. Following
-a call to this function, maintainers may call atk_registry_set_factory_type()
-to associate an #AtkObjectFactory subclass with the GType of objects
-for whom accessibility information will be provided.
+Gets the current version for ATK.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a default implementation of the #AtkObjectFactory/type
-registry
+<return> version string for ATK
</return>
</function>
@@ -3136,29 +3513,6 @@ appropriate for @type.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_state_set_xor_sets">
-<description>
-Constructs the exclusive-or of the two sets, returning %NULL is empty.
-The set returned by this operation contains the states in exactly
-one of the two sets.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="set">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkStateSet
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="compare_set">
-<parameter_description> another #AtkStateSet
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #AtkStateSet which contains the states which are
-in exactly one of the two sets.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="atk_state_set_or_sets">
<description>
Constructs the union of the two sets.
@@ -3321,8 +3675,7 @@ the selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
<function name="atk_table_get_row_at_index">
<description>
-Gets a #gint representing the row at the specified @index_, or -1
-if the table does not implement this interface
+Gets a #gint representing the row at the specified @index_.
</description>
@@ -3336,7 +3689,8 @@ if the table does not implement this interface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a gint representing the row at the specified index.
+<return> a gint representing the row at the specified index,
+or -1 if the table does not implement this interface
</return>
</function>
@@ -3364,6 +3718,22 @@ Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_socket_is_occupied">
+<description>
+Determines whether or not the socket has an embedded plug.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkSocket
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> TRUE if a plug is embedded in the socket
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_component_set_size">
<description>
Set the size of the @component in terms of width and height.
@@ -3518,22 +3888,24 @@ or zero if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_editable_text_set_text_contents">
+<function name="atk_text_set_caret_offset">
<description>
-Set text contents of @text.
+Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified @offset.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkEditableText
+<parameter_description> an #AtkText
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> string to set for text contents of @text
+<parameter name="offset">
+<parameter_description> position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if success, %FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="atk_state_set_is_empty">
@@ -3552,24 +3924,6 @@ Checks whether the state set is empty, i.e. has no states set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_value_get_maximum_value">
-<description>
-Gets the maximum value of this object.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="obj">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkValueIface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a #GValue representing the maximum accessible value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="atk_relation_set_get_n_relations">
<description>
Determines the number of relations in a relation set.
@@ -3655,35 +4009,11 @@ returned substring
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_image_get_image_size">
-<description>
-Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
-The values of @width and @height are returned as -1 if the
-values cannot be obtained.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject instance that implements AtkImageIface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> filled with the image width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> filled with the image height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="atk_relation_set_add">
<description>
Add a new relation to the current relation set if it is not already
present.
-This function ref's the AtkRelation so the caller of this function
+This function ref's the AtkRelation so the caller of this function
should unref it to ensure that it will be destroyed when the AtkRelationSet
is destroyed.
@@ -3759,6 +4089,25 @@ if value does not implement this interface.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_socket_embed">
+<description>
+Embeds the children of an #AtkPlug as the children of the #AtkSocket. The
+plug may be in the same process or in a different process.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="obj">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkSocket
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="plug_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of an #AtkPlug
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_state_set_add_states">
<description>
Add the states for the specified types to the current state set.
@@ -3781,6 +4130,31 @@ Add the states for the specified types to the current state set.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="atk_misc_threads_leave">
+<description>
+Release the thread mutex for the GUI toolkit,
+if one exists. This method, and atk_misc_threads_enter,
+are needed in some situations by threaded application code which
+services ATK requests, since fulfilling ATK requests often
+requires calling into the GUI toolkit. If a long-running or
+potentially blocking call takes place inside such a block, it should
+be bracketed by atk_misc_threads_leave/atk_misc_threads_enter calls.
+(This method is implemented by the toolkit ATK implementation layer;
+for instance, for GTK+, GAIL implements this via GDK_THREADS_LEAVE).
+
+Since: 1.13
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> an AtkMisc instance for this application.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="atk_state_type_for_name">
<description>
Gets the #AtkStateType corresponding to the description string @name.
@@ -3800,8 +4174,7 @@ Gets the #AtkStateType corresponding to the description string @name.
<function name="atk_hypertext_get_link_index">
<description>
Gets the index into the array of hyperlinks that is associated with
-the character specified by @char_index, or -1 if there is no hyperlink
-associated with this character.
+the character specified by @char_index.
</description>
@@ -3815,7 +4188,8 @@ associated with this character.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an index into the array of hyperlinks in @hypertext
+<return> an index into the array of hyperlinks in @hypertext,
+or -1 if there is no hyperlink associated with this character.
</return>
</function>
@@ -3843,22 +4217,39 @@ Adds a relationship of the specified type with the specified target.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_table_set_column_header">
+<function name="atk_text_get_character_extents">
<description>
-Sets the specified column header to @header.
+Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
+a particular text offset.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a GObject instance that implements AtkTableIface
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> an #AtkText
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> a #gint representing a column in @table
+<parameter name="offset">
+<parameter_description> The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="header">
-<parameter_description> an #AtkTable
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> Pointer for the x cordinate of the bounding box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Pointer for the y cordinate of the bounding box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Pointer for the width of the bounding box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Pointer for the height of the bounding box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="coords">
+<parameter_description> specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3925,10 +4316,11 @@ Gets the value of this object.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="atk_state_set_contains_states">
+<function name="atk_state_set_xor_sets">
<description>
-Checks whether the states for all the specified types are in the
-specified set.
+Constructs the exclusive-or of the two sets, returning %NULL is empty.
+The set returned by this operation contains the states in exactly
+one of the two sets.
</description>
@@ -3937,16 +4329,29 @@ specified set.
<parameter_description> an #AtkStateSet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> an array of #AtkStateType
+<parameter name="compare_set">
+<parameter_description> another #AtkStateSet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_types">
-<parameter_description> The number of elements in the array
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #AtkStateSet which contains the states which are
+in exactly one of the two sets.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="atk_role_get_localized_name">
+<description>
+Gets the localized description string describing the #AtkRole @role.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> The #AtkRole whose localized name is required
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if all the states for @type are in @set.
+<return> the localized string describing the AtkRole
</return>
</function>
@@ -3997,7 +4402,7 @@ type is at position 0, the second at position 1, and so on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>: a gchar* representing the specified mime type; the caller
+<return> a gchar* representing the specified mime type; the caller
should not free the character string.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4005,7 +4410,7 @@ should not free the character string.
<function name="atk_selection_add_selection">
<description>
Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
-object's selection.
+object's selection.
</description>
diff --git a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
index 5a14747..157916a 100644
--- a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
+++ b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ This value is not generally useful, because you cannot
determine how this total height will be drawn in
relation to the baseline. See gdk_text_extents().
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20,7 +21,6 @@ relation to the baseline. See gdk_text_extents().
</parameters>
<return> the height of the character in pixels.
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51,7 +51,9 @@ XClientMessage event struct.
<function name="gdk_display_get_screen">
<description>
-Returns: the #GdkScreen object
+Returns a screen object for one of the screens of the display.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66,12 +68,14 @@ Returns: the #GdkScreen object
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkScreen object
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_screen_get_xscreen">
<description>
+Returns the screen of a #GdkScreen.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -80,10 +84,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>an Xlib <type>Screen*</type>
-the screen of a #GdkScreen.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> an Xlib <type>Screen*</type>
</return>
</function>
@@ -124,35 +125,32 @@ or %GDK_NONE to indicate that the request was rejected.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_constrain_size">
+<function name="gdk_window_move_region">
<description>
-Constrains a desired width and height according to a
-set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
+Move the part of @window indicated by @region by @dy pixels in the Y
+direction and @dx pixels in the X direction. The portions of @region
+that not covered by the new position of @region are invalidated.
+
+Child windows are not moved.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGeometry structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> a mask indicating what portions of @geometry are set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> desired width of window
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> desired height of the window
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> The #GdkRegion to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_width">
-<parameter_description> location to store resulting width
+<parameter name="dx">
+<parameter_description> Amount to move in the X direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store resulting height
+<parameter name="dy">
+<parameter_description> Amount to move in the Y direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -161,7 +159,8 @@ set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
<function name="gdk_screen_width">
<description>
-Return value: the width of the default screen in pixels.
+Returns the width of the default screen in pixels.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -255,7 +254,7 @@ for the new pixmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to a place to store a bitmap representing
+<parameter_description> (out) a pointer to a place to store a bitmap representing
the transparency mask of the XPM file. Can be %NULL,
in which case transparency will be ignored.
</parameter_description>
@@ -271,13 +270,14 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkPixmap
+<return> the #GdkPixmap
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_cursor_get_xcursor">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Cursor</type>.
+Returns the X cursor belonging to a #GdkCursor.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -356,23 +356,6 @@ This function works on both toplevel and child windows.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable">
-<description>
-Return value: whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_color_copy">
<description>
Makes a copy of a color structure. The result
@@ -427,7 +410,11 @@ origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
<function name="gdk_display_get_default_group">
<description>
-Return value: The default group leader window for @display
+Returns the default group leader window for all toplevel windows
+on @display. This window is implicitly created by GDK.
+See gdk_window_set_group().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -438,7 +425,6 @@ Return value: The default group leader window for @display
</parameters>
<return> The default group leader window for @display
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -468,22 +454,35 @@ are set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_cursor">
+<function name="gdk_window_constrain_size">
<description>
-Sets the mouse pointer for a #GdkWindow. Use gdk_cursor_new_for_display()
-or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap() to create the cursor. To make the cursor
-invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR. Passing %NULL for the @cursor argument
-to gdk_window_set_cursor() means that @window will use the cursor of its
-parent window. Most windows should use this default.
+Constrains a desired width and height according to a
+set of geometry hints (such as minimum and maximum size).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGeometry structure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor">
-<parameter_description> a cursor
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> a mask indicating what portions of @geometry are set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> desired width of window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> desired height of the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store resulting width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store resulting height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -523,7 +522,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description>the new GC to use for drawing, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the new GC to use for drawing, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -540,6 +539,7 @@ screen.
This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
on a specific screen.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -598,7 +598,6 @@ stderr, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if an error was set
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -606,6 +605,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Get the default #GdkScreen for @display.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -616,44 +616,13 @@ Get the default #GdkScreen for @display.
</parameters>
<return> the default #GdkScreen object for @display
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_type">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
-image data as if it were an image of type @image_type, instead of
-identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
-the image isn't the expected type, for loading image formats
-that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
-the user manually forces a specific type.
-
-The list of supported image formats depends on what image loaders
-are installed, but typically "png", "jpeg", "gif", "tiff" and
-"xpm" are among the supported formats. To obtain the full list of
-supported image formats, call gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name() on each
-of the #GdkPixbufFormat structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_type">
-<parameter_description> name of the image format to be loaded with the image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_screen_height">
<description>
-Return value: the height of the default screen in pixels.
+Returns the height of the default screen in pixels.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -673,7 +642,7 @@ display, @parent must be specified.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkWindow, or %NULL to create the window as a child of
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL to create the window as a child of
the default root window for the default display.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -686,10 +655,26 @@ the default root window for the default display.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the new #GdkWindow
+<return> the new #GdkWindow
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_gc_unref">
+<description>
+Decrement the reference count of @gc.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_get_update_area">
<description>
Transfers ownership of the update area from @window to the caller
@@ -715,6 +700,7 @@ calling gdk_region_destroy() on the returned region if it's non-%NULL.
<description>
Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -725,7 +711,6 @@ Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
</parameters>
<return> the colormap
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -750,6 +735,7 @@ Gets the offscreen pixmap that an offscreen window renders into.
If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to
add a reference to it.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -760,7 +746,6 @@ add a reference to it.
</parameters>
<return> The offscreen pixmap, or %NULL if not offscreen
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -774,6 +759,7 @@ was already known to GDK, a new reference to the existing
For example in the X backend, a native window handle is an Xlib
<type>XID</type>.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -790,28 +776,6 @@ For example in the X backend, a native window handle is an Xlib
%NULL if the window has been destroyed. The wrapper will be
newly created, if one doesn't exist already.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_x11_display_screen_for_xrootwin">
-<description>
-Given the root window ID of one of the screen's of a #GdkDisplay,
-finds the screen.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xrootwin">
-<parameter_description> window ID for one of of the screen's of the display.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkScreen corresponding to @xrootwin, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -819,6 +783,7 @@ finds the screen.
<description>
Creates a new attribute specifying the color to emboss text with.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -829,13 +794,13 @@ Creates a new attribute specifying the color to emboss text with.
</parameters>
<return> new #PangoAttribute
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_drawable_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the display of a #GdkDrawable.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -850,7 +815,7 @@ Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
<function name="gdk_utf8_to_string_target">
<description>
-Converts an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
+Convert an UTF-8 string into the best possible representation
as a STRING. The representation of characters not in STRING
is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
\x{ABCD}, or it may be in some other form of approximation.
@@ -863,16 +828,17 @@ is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly-allocated string, or %NULL if the
+<return> the newly allocated string, or %NULL if the
conversion failed. (It should not fail for
-any properly formed UTF-8 string unless system
-limits like memory or file descriptors are exceeded.)
+any properly formed UTF-8 string.)
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_get_default_cursor_size">
<description>
-Returns: the default cursor size.
+Returns the default size to use for cursors on @display.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -883,25 +849,6 @@ Returns: the default cursor size.
</parameters>
<return> the default cursor size.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_formats">
-<description>
-Obtains the available information about the image formats supported
-by GdkPixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A list of #GdkPixbufFormat<!-- -->s describing the supported
-image formats. The list should be freed when it is no longer needed,
-but the structures themselves are owned by #GdkPixbuf and should not be
-freed.
-
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -937,35 +884,12 @@ implement the eyedropper feature in #GtkColorSelection.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_set_double_click_distance">
-<description>
-Sets the double click distance (two clicks within this distance
-count as a double click and result in a #GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event).
-See also gdk_display_set_double_click_time().
-Applications should <emphasis>not</emphasis> set this, it is a global
-user-configured setting.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="distance">
-<parameter_description> distance in pixels
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_get_number">
<description>
Gets the index of @screen among the screens in the display
to which it belongs. (See gdk_screen_get_display())
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -976,27 +900,6 @@ to which it belongs. (See gdk_screen_get_display())
</parameters>
<return> the index
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_event_queue_prepend">
-<description>
-Prepends an event before the head of the event queue.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> Event to prepend.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly prepended list node.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1022,83 +925,18 @@ Frees previously allocated colors.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". This is a convenience function that uses
-gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback() to do the real work. Note that the buffer
-is not nul-terminated and may contain embedded nuls.
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned and @buffer will be set to
-%NULL. Possible errors include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-domain.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer_size">
-<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GdkPixbufLoader">
-<description>
-This signal is emitted when gdk_pixbuf_loader_close() is called.
-It can be used by different parts of an application to receive
-notification when an image loader is closed by the code that
-drives it.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_test_simulate_key">
<description>
-This function is intended to be used in GTK+ test programs.
+This function is intended to be used in Gtk+ test programs.
If (@x,@y) are > (-1,-1), it will warp the mouse pointer to
the given (@x,@y) corrdinates within @window and simulate a
key press or release event.
-
When the mouse pointer is warped to the target location, use
of this function outside of test programs that run in their
own virtual windowing system (e.g. Xvfb) is not recommended.
If (@x,@y) are passed as (-1,-1), the mouse pointer will not
be warped and @window origin will be used as mouse pointer
location for the event.
-
Also, gtk_test_simulate_key() is a fairly low level function,
for most testing purposes, gtk_test_widget_send_key() is the
right function to call which will generate a key press event
@@ -1108,7 +946,7 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow to simulate a key event for.
+<parameter_description> Gdk window to simulate a key event for.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -1120,7 +958,7 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> A GDK keyboard value.
+<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="modifiers">
@@ -1132,10 +970,7 @@ followed by its accompanying key release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether all actions neccessary for a key event simulation
-were carried out successfully.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for a key event simulation were carried out successfully.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1195,7 +1030,9 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gdk_screen_get_n_monitors">
<description>
-Returns: number of monitors which @screen consists of
+Returns the number of monitors which @screen consists of.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1206,7 +1043,6 @@ Returns: number of monitors which @screen consists of
</parameters>
<return> number of monitors which @screen consists of
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -1218,6 +1054,7 @@ for the #GdkScreen @screen.
FIXME needs a list of valid settings here, or a link to
more information.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1237,24 +1074,26 @@ more information.
<return> %TRUE if the setting existed and a value was stored
in @value, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_keymap_get_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
<description>
+Returns %TRUE if multicolored cursors are supported
+on @display. Otherwise, cursors have only a forground
+and a background color.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
-the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -1332,18 +1171,25 @@ explanations of the arguments.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_gc_get_xgc">
+<function name="gdk_char_width">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>GC</type>.
+Determines the width of a given character.
+
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="character">
+<parameter_description> the character to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>GC</type>.
+<return> the width of the character in pixels.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -1407,24 +1253,6 @@ other window managers.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_get_loop">
-<description>
-Gets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the animation loops forever, %FALSE otherwise
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_depth">
<description>
Get the best available depth for the default GDK screen. "Best"
@@ -1439,72 +1267,6 @@ per pixel.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
-then renders the rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width,
- dest_height) of the resulting image onto the destination image
-replacing the previous contents.
-
-Try to use gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() first, this function is
-the industrial-strength power tool you can fall back to if
-gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() isn't powerful enough.
-
-If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
-same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the scaling which
-results in rendering artifacts.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_colors_store">
<description>
Changes the value of the first @ncolors colors in
@@ -1529,31 +1291,33 @@ should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_font_from_description_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_cairo_reset_clip">
<description>
-Loads a #GdkFont based on a Pango font description for use on @display.
-This font will only be an approximation of the Pango font, and
-internationalization will not be handled correctly. This function
-should only be used for legacy code that cannot be easily converted
-to use Pango. Using Pango directly will produce better results.
+Resets the clip region for a Cairo context created by gdk_cairo_create().
+This resets the clip region to the "empty" state for the given drawable.
+This is required for non-native windows since a direct call to
+cairo_reset_clip() would unset the clip region inherited from the
+drawable (i.e. the window clip region), and thus let you e.g.
+draw outside your window.
+
+This is rarely needed though, since most code just create a new cairo_t
+using gdk_cairo_create() each time they want to draw something.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="font_desc">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoFontDescription.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly loaded font, or %NULL if the font
-cannot be loaded.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_set_double_click_time">
@@ -1593,39 +1357,6 @@ You should make no assumptions about the initial reference count.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_unref">
-<description>
-Removes a reference from an animation.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license">
-<description>
-Returns: a string describing the license of @format.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a string describing the license of @format.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_region_spans_intersect_foreach">
<description>
Calls a function on each span in the intersection of @region and @spans.
@@ -1660,52 +1391,12 @@ Calls a function on each span in the intersection of @region and @spans.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_apply_embedded_orientation">
-<description>
-Takes an existing pixbuf and checks for the presence of an
-associated "orientation" option, which may be provided by the
-jpeg loader (which reads the exif orientation tag) or the
-tiff loader (which reads the tiff orientation tag, and
-compensates it for the partial transforms performed by
-libtiff). If an orientation option/tag is present, the
-appropriate transform will be performed so that the pixbuf
-is oriented correctly.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or a reference to the
-input pixbuf (with an increased reference count).
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_colorspace">
-<description>
-Queries the color space of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Color space.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_display_get_name">
+<function name="gdk_display_supports_shapes">
<description>
-Gets the name of the display.
+Returns %TRUE if gdk_window_shape_combine_mask() can
+be used to create shaped windows on @display.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1714,10 +1405,8 @@ Gets the name of the display.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representing the display name. This string is owned
-by GDK and should not be modified or freed.
+<return> %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -1788,7 +1477,7 @@ for the new pixmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>Pointer to a place to store a bitmap representing
+<parameter_description> Pointer to a place to store a bitmap representing
the transparency mask of the XPM file. Can be %NULL,
in which case transparency will be ignored.
</parameter_description>
@@ -1804,26 +1493,7 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkPixmap.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_color_white">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the location to store the color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+<return> the #GdkPixmap.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1958,49 +1628,6 @@ This function is called by the drag source.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_size">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file.
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and
-#G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, preserving
-the image's aspect ratio. Note that the returned pixbuf may be smaller
-than @width x @height, if the aspect ratio requires it. To load
-and image at the requested size, regardless of aspect ratio, use
-gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
-%NULL if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not
-be opened, there was no loader for the file's format, there was not
-enough memory to allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained
-invalid data.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_draw_layout_with_colors">
<description>
Render a #PangoLayout onto a #GdkDrawable, overriding the
@@ -2037,11 +1664,11 @@ is gtk_widget_create_pango_layout().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="foreground">
-<parameter_description>foreground override color, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> foreground override color, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="background">
-<parameter_description>background override color, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> background override color, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2056,12 +1683,58 @@ image data from a server-side drawable to a client-side RGB(A) buffer.
This allows you to efficiently read individual pixels on the client side.
If the drawable @src has no colormap (gdk_drawable_get_colormap()
-Return value: The same pixbuf as @dest if it was non-%NULL, or a newly-created
+returns %NULL), then a suitable colormap must be specified.
+Typically a #GdkWindow or a pixmap created by passing a #GdkWindow
+to gdk_pixmap_new() will already have a colormap associated with
+it. If the drawable has a colormap, the @cmap argument will be
+ignored. If the drawable is a bitmap (1 bit per pixel pixmap),
+then a colormap is not required; pixels with a value of 1 are
+assumed to be white, and pixels with a value of 0 are assumed to be
+black. For taking screenshots, gdk_colormap_get_system() returns
+the correct colormap to use.
+
+If the specified destination pixbuf @dest is %NULL, then this
+function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel and no
+alpha, with the same size specified by the @width and @height
+arguments. In this case, the @dest_x and @dest_y arguments must be
+specified as 0. If the specified destination pixbuf is not %NULL
+and it contains alpha information, then the filled pixels will be
+set to full opacity (alpha = 255).
+
+If the specified drawable is a pixmap, then the requested source
+rectangle must be completely contained within the pixmap, otherwise
+the function will return %NULL. For pixmaps only (not for windows)
+passing -1 for width or height is allowed to mean the full width
+or height of the pixmap.
+
+If the specified drawable is a window, and the window is off the
+screen, then there is no image data in the obscured/offscreen
+regions to be placed in the pixbuf. The contents of portions of the
+pixbuf corresponding to the offscreen region are undefined.
+
+If the window you're obtaining data from is partially obscured by
+other windows, then the contents of the pixbuf areas corresponding
+to the obscured regions are undefined.
+
+If the target drawable is not mapped (typically because it's
+iconified/minimized or not on the current workspace), then %NULL
+will be returned.
+
+If memory can't be allocated for the return value, %NULL will be returned
+instead.
+
+(In short, there are several ways this function can fail, and if it fails
+it returns %NULL; so check the return value.)
+
+This function calls gdk_drawable_get_image() internally and
+converts the resulting image to a #GdkPixbuf, so the
+documentation for gdk_drawable_get_image() may also be relevant.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description>Destination pixbuf, or %NULL if a new pixbuf should be created.
+<parameter_description> Destination pixbuf, or %NULL if a new pixbuf should be created.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="src">
@@ -2102,49 +1775,11 @@ pixbuf with a reference count of 1 if no destination pixbuf was specified, or %N
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_image_get_scratch">
-<description>
-Allocates an image of size width/height, up to a maximum
-of GDK_SCRATCH_IMAGE_WIDTHxGDK_SCRATCH_IMAGE_HEIGHT that is
-suitable to use on @screen.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> desired width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> desired height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="depth">
-<parameter_description> depth of image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X location within returned image of scratch image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y location within returned image of scratch image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a scratch image. This must be used by a
-call to gdk_image_put() before any other calls to
-_gdk_image_get_scratch()
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_width_mm">
<description>
-Return value: the width of the default screen in millimeters,
+Returns the width of the default screen in millimeters.
+Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2161,6 +1796,7 @@ in a property into an array of strings in the encoding of
the current locale. (The elements of the array represent the
nul-separated elements of the original text string.)
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2196,7 +1832,6 @@ freed using gdk_free_text_list().
<return> the number of strings stored in list, or 0,
if the conversion failed.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -2209,6 +1844,7 @@ gdk_get_default_root_window()).
The returned list should be freed with g_list_free(), but
its elements need not be freed.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2219,49 +1855,61 @@ its elements need not be freed.
</parameters>
<return> list of toplevel windows, free with g_list_free()
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_is_composited">
+<function name="gdk_display_set_double_click_distance">
<description>
-Return value: Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
+Sets the double click distance (two clicks within this distance
+count as a double click and result in a #GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event).
+See also gdk_display_set_double_click_time().
+Applications should <emphasis>not</emphasis> set this, it is a global
+user-configured setting.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="distance">
+<parameter_description> distance in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
-expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_lookup_xdisplay">
+<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol">
<description>
-Find the #GdkDisplay corresponding to @display, if any exists.
+Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="xdisplay">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to an X Display
+<parameter name="xid">
+<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="protocol">
+<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkDisplay, if found, otherwise %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> the windowing system specific id for the window where
+the drop should happen. This may be @xid or the id of a proxy
+window, or zero if @xid doesn't support Drag and Drop.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_get_user_time">
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_ungrab">
<description>
-Returns: the timestamp of the last user interaction
+Ungrab @display after it has been grabbed with
+gdk_x11_display_grab().
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2270,41 +1918,44 @@ Returns: the timestamp of the last user interaction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the timestamp of the last user interaction
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_image_get_xdisplay">
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_get_user_time">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the timestamp of the last user interaction on
+ display The timestamp is taken from events caused
+by user interaction such as key presses or pointer
+movements. See gdk_x11_window_set_user_time().
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+<return> the timestamp of the last user interaction
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_unref">
+<function name="gdk_x11_image_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Removes a reference from a pixbuf.
+Returns the display of a #GdkImage.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_pixmap">
@@ -2358,132 +2009,38 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
-Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
-any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_region_rectangle">
-<description>
-Creates a new region containing the area @rectangle.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="rectangle">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new region
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name">
-<description>
-Return value: the name of the format.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the name of the format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_get_root_coords">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_colormap">
<description>
-Obtains the position of a window position in root
-window coordinates. This is similar to
-gdk_window_get_origin() but allows you go pass
-in any position in the window, not just the origin.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the colormap for the GC to the given colormap. The depth
+of the colormap's visual must match the depth of the drawable
+for which the GC was created.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate in window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate in window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GdkWindow">
+<function name="gdk_screen_height_mm">
<description>
-The ::from-embedder signal is emitted to translate coordinates
-in the embedder of an offscreen window to the offscreen window.
+Returns the height of the default screen in millimeters.
+Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
-See also #GtkWindow::to-embedder.
-
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the offscreen window on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="embedder-x">
-<parameter_description> x coordinate in the embedder window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="embedder-y">
-<parameter_description> y coordinate in the embedder window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offscreen-x">
-<parameter_description> return location for the x coordinate in the offscreen window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offscreen-y">
-<parameter_description> return location for the y coordinate in the offscreen window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the height of the default screen in millimeters,
+though it is not always correct.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_font">
@@ -2511,6 +2068,7 @@ argument is %NULL.)
<description>
Gets the default colormap for @screen.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2519,9 +2077,8 @@ Gets the default colormap for @screen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the default #GdkColormap.
+<return> the default #GdkColormap.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -2529,6 +2086,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<description>
Gets the window that @window is embedded in.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2540,7 +2098,6 @@ Gets the window that @window is embedded in.
<return> the embedding #GdkWindow, or %NULL if @window is not an
embedded offscreen window
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -2600,45 +2157,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line_with_colors">
+<function name="gdk_pango_context_set_colormap">
<description>
-Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto a #GdkDrawable, overriding the
-layout's normal colors with @foreground and/or @background.
- foreground and @background need not be allocated.
-
-If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
- x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
-(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
-device coordinates.
+This function used to set the colormap to be used for drawing with
+ context The colormap is now always derived from the graphics
+context used for drawing, so calling this function is no longer
+necessary.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> base graphics to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreground">
-<parameter_description>foreground override color, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="background">
-<parameter_description>background override color, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2667,7 +2200,49 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Sets a function to be called at regular intervals holding the GDK lock,
with the given priority. The function is called repeatedly until it
-Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+returns %FALSE, at which point the timeout is automatically destroyed
+and the function will not be called again. The @notify function is
+called when the timeout is destroyed. The first call to the
+function will be at the end of the first @interval.
+
+Note that timeout functions may be delayed, due to the processing of other
+event sources. Thus they should not be relied on for precise timing.
+After each call to the timeout function, the time of the next
+timeout is recalculated based on the current time and the given interval
+(it does not try to 'catch up' time lost in delays).
+
+This variant of g_timeout_add_full() can be thought of a MT-safe version
+for GTK+ widgets for the following use case:
+
+|[
+static gboolean timeout_callback (gpointer data)
+{
+SomeWidget *self = data;
+
+/* do stuff with self */
+
+self->timeout_id = 0;
+
+return FALSE;
+}
+
+static void some_widget_do_stuff_later (SomeWidget *self)
+{
+self->timeout_id = g_timeout_add (timeout_callback, self)
+}
+
+static void some_widget_finalize (GObject *object)
+{
+SomeWidget *self = SOME_WIDGET (object);
+
+if (self->timeout_id)
+g_source_remove (self->timeout_id);
+
+G_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->finalize (object);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2690,13 +2265,12 @@ range between #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE and #G_PRIORITY_HIGH_IDLE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call when the timeout is removed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> function to call when the timeout is removed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -2741,7 +2315,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkGC, used for clipping, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC, used for clipping, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
@@ -2794,6 +2368,7 @@ Converts from a #GdkAtom to the X atom for a #GdkDisplay
with the same string value. The special value %GDK_NONE
is converted to %None.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2808,7 +2383,6 @@ is converted to %None.
</parameters>
<return> the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -2832,18 +2406,18 @@ likely to change in future releases of GDK.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="real_drawable">
-<parameter_description>location to store the drawable to which drawing should be
+<parameter_description> location to store the drawable to which drawing should be
done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to store the X offset between coordinates in @window,
+<parameter_description> location to store the X offset between coordinates in @window,
and the underlying window system primitive coordinates for
* real_drawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to store the Y offset between coordinates in @window,
+<parameter_description> location to store the Y offset between coordinates in @window,
and the underlying window system primitive coordinates for
* real_drawable
</parameter_description>
@@ -2873,26 +2447,11 @@ color as red, green, blue components.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_fill">
-<description>
-Gets the current file style for the GC
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the file style for the GC
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_event_get_time">
<description>
+Returns the time stamp from @event, if there is one; otherwise
returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
-Return value: time stamp field from @event
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2944,35 +2503,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_stipple">
-<description>
-Sets the stipple for one render part (foreground, background, underline,
-etc.) Note that this is overwritten when iterating through the individual
-styled runs of a #PangoLayout or #PangoLayoutLine. This function is thus
-only useful when you call low level functions like pango_renderer_draw_glyphs()
-directly, or in the 'prepare_run' virtual function of a subclass of
-#GdkPangoRenderer.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="part">
-<parameter_description> the part to render with the stipple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stipple">
-<parameter_description> the new stipple value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_event_get_axis">
<description>
Extract the axis value for a particular axis use from
@@ -3026,26 +2556,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_event_queue_append">
-<description>
-Appends an event onto the tail of the event queue.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> Event to append.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly appended list node.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_context_get">
<description>
Creates a #PangoContext for the default GDK screen.
@@ -3072,7 +2582,9 @@ changes to the screen's font rendering settings.
<function name="gdk_color_black">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+Returns the black color for a given colormap. The resulting
+value has already been allocated.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3089,6 +2601,26 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_get_toplevel">
+<description>
+Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
+
+Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
+toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
+has a root window as parent.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the toplevel window containing @window
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_clear_area_e">
<description>
Like gdk_window_clear_area(), but also generates an expose event for
@@ -3124,33 +2656,6 @@ time, pre-GDK-1.0.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Queries the #GdkPixbuf that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
-In general it only makes sense to call this function after the
-"area-prepared" signal has been emitted by the loader; this means
-that enough data has been read to know the size of the image that
-will be allocated. If the loader has not received enough data via
-gdk_pixbuf_loader_write(), then this function returns %NULL. The
-returned pixbuf will be the same in all future calls to the loader,
-so simply calling g_object_ref() should be sufficient to continue
-using it. Additionally, if the loader is an animation, it will
-return the "static image" of the animation
-(see gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image()).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GdkPixbuf that the loader is creating, or %NULL if not
-enough data has been read to determine how to create the image buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_warp_pointer">
<description>
Warps the pointer of @display to the point @x,@y on
@@ -3249,49 +2754,10 @@ choice.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple">
-<description>
-Create a new #GdkPixbuf containing a copy of @src scaled to
- dest_width x @dest_height. Leaves @src unaffected. @interp_type
-should be #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST if you want maximum speed (but when
-scaling down #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST is usually unusably ugly). The
-default @interp_type should be #GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR which offers
-reasonable quality and speed.
-
-You can scale a sub-portion of @src by creating a sub-pixbuf
-pointing into @src; see gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf().
-
-For more complicated scaling/compositing see gdk_pixbuf_scale()
-and gdk_pixbuf_composite().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_font_id">
<description>
-Return value: the numeric X Font ID
+Returns the X Font ID for the given font.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3304,33 +2770,6 @@ Return value: the numeric X Font ID
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_event_queue_insert_after">
-<description>
-Appends an event before the specified event, or if it isn't in
-the queue, onto the tail of the event queue.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> Append after this event.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> Event to append.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly appended list node.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_lookup">
<description>
Looks up the #GdkWindow that wraps the given native window handle.
@@ -3351,26 +2790,6 @@ or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame">
-<description>
-Used to determine how to respond to the area_updated signal on
-#GdkPixbufLoader when loading an animation. area_updated is emitted
-for an area of the frame currently streaming in to the loader. So if
-you're on the currently loading frame, you need to redraw the screen for
-the updated area.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the frame we're on is partially loaded, or the last frame
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_region_intersect">
<description>
Sets the area of @source1 to the intersection of the areas of @source1
@@ -3396,6 +2815,7 @@ both @source1 and @source2.
Converts a text property in the given encoding to
a list of UTF-8 strings.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3428,7 +2848,6 @@ list should be freed with g_strfreev().
<return> the number of strings in the resulting
list.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -3514,24 +2933,6 @@ updates sometime after application startup time.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_clip_mask">
-<description>
-Gets the current clip mask for @gc, if any.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the clip mask for the GC, or %NULL.
-(if a clip region is set, the return will be %NULL)
-This value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_drag_context_ref">
<description>
Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
@@ -3548,41 +2949,16 @@ Deprecated: 2.2: Use g_object_ref() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_change">
-<description>
-Changes the value of the first @ncolors in a private colormap
-to match the values in the <structfield>colors</structfield>
-array in the colormap. This function is obsolete and
-should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ncolors">
-<parameter_description> the number of colors to change.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_stipple">
+<function name="gdk_get_default_root_window">
<description>
-Gets the stipple pixmap for @gc, if any
+Obtains the root window (parent all other windows are inside)
+for the default display and screen.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the stipple set on the GC, or %NULL. The
-value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
+<return> the default root window
</return>
</function>
@@ -3632,31 +3008,11 @@ The array returned by this function should not be freed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_xgrab_check_unmap">
-<description>
-Checks to see if an unmap request or event causes the current
-grab window to become not viewable, and if so, clear the
-the pointer we keep to it.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="serial">
-<parameter_description> serial from Unmap event (or from NextRequest(display)
-if the unmap is being done by this client.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_height_mm">
<description>
Gets the height in millimeters of the specified monitor.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3671,7 +3027,6 @@ Gets the height in millimeters of the specified monitor.
</parameters>
<return> the height of the monitor, or -1 if not available
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -3705,11 +3060,11 @@ The array returned by this function should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="depths">
-<parameter_description>return location for available depths
+<parameter_description> return location for available depths
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description>return location for number of available depths
+<parameter_description> return location for number of available depths
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3748,6 +3103,7 @@ returned a #GdkDisplay with @screen as the default screen.
This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
on a specific screen.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3791,7 +3147,6 @@ inherit parent's
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if error is set
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -3804,6 +3159,7 @@ Mod3,...) and set the corresponding bits in @state.
This function is useful when matching key events against
accelerators.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3821,13 +3177,17 @@ same non-virtual modifier. Note that %FALSE is also returned
if a virtual modifier is mapped to a non-virtual modifier that
was already set in @state.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_color_to_string">
<description>
-Return value: a newly-allocated text string
+Returns a textual specification of @color in the hexadecimal form
+<literal>#rrrrggggbbbb</literal>, where <literal>r</literal>,
+<literal>g</literal> and <literal>b</literal> are hex digits
+representing the red, green and blue components respectively.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3838,7 +3198,6 @@ Return value: a newly-allocated text string
</parameters>
<return> a newly-allocated text string
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -3854,6 +3213,7 @@ This function is an alternative to gdk_pixmap_foreign_new_for_display()
for cases where the dimensions of the pixmap are known. For the X
backend, this avoids a roundtrip to the server.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3881,27 +3241,6 @@ backend, this avoids a roundtrip to the server.
<return> the newly-created #GdkPixmap wrapper for the
native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_format">
-<description>
-Obtains the available information about the format of the
-currently loading image file.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat or %NULL. The return value is owned
-by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
-
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -3990,52 +3329,10 @@ The return value should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>system visual
+<return> system visual
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_glyphs">
-<description>
-This is a low-level function; 99% of text rendering should be done
-using gdk_draw_layout() instead.
-
-A glyph is a single image in a font. This function draws a sequence of
-glyphs. To obtain a sequence of glyphs you have to understand a
-lot about internationalized text handling, which you don't want to
-understand; thus, use gdk_draw_layout() instead of this function,
-gdk_draw_layout() handles the details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> font to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of baseline origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of baseline origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="glyphs">
-<parameter_description> the glyph string to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom">
<description>
Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
@@ -4053,10 +3350,11 @@ Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_window_destroy_hierarchy">
+<function name="gdk_window_invalidate_rect">
<description>
-Internal function to destroy a window. Like gdk_window_destroy(),
-but does not drop the reference count created by gdk_window_new().
+A convenience wrapper around gdk_window_invalidate_region() which
+invalidates a rectangular region. See
+gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4064,44 +3362,13 @@ but does not drop the reference count created by gdk_window_new().
<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="recursing">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, then this is being called because a parent
-was destroyed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="recursing_native">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, then this is being called because a native parent
-was destroyed. This generally means that the call to the
-windowing system to destroy the window can be omitted, since
-it will be destroyed as a result of the parent being destroyed.
-Unless @foreign_destroy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreign_destroy">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, the window or a parent was destroyed by some
-external agency. The window has already been destroyed and no
-windowing system calls should be made. (This may never happen
-for some windowing systems.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_mask">
-<description>
-Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a bitmap.
-The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip
-origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to invalidate or %NULL to invalidate the whole
+window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a bitmap.
+<parameter name="invalidate_children">
+<parameter_description> whether to also invalidate child windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4112,6 +3379,7 @@ origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
<description>
Gets the #GdkScreen associated with a #GdkDrawable.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4122,7 +3390,6 @@ Gets the #GdkScreen associated with a #GdkDrawable.
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkScreen associated with @drawable
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -4171,7 +3438,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gdk_draw_layout() instead.
Adds virtual modifiers (i.e. Super, Hyper and Meta) which correspond
to the real modifiers (i.e Mod2, Mod3, ...) in @modifiers.
are set in @state to their non-virtual counterparts (i.e. Mod2,
-Mod3,...) and set the corresponding bits in @modifiers.
+Mod3,...) and set the corresponding bits in @state.
GDK already does this before delivering key events, but for
compatibility reasons, it only sets the first virtual modifier
@@ -4188,7 +3455,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter name="state">
<parameter_description> pointer to the modifier mask to change
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -4247,6 +3514,7 @@ to another, the colormaps should match.
Create a pixmap from data in XPM format using a particular
colormap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
@@ -4276,81 +3544,30 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkPixmap.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_begin_paint_region">
+<function name="gdk_region_offset">
<description>
-Indicates that you are beginning the process of redrawing @region.
-A backing store (offscreen buffer) large enough to contain @region
-will be created. The backing store will be initialized with the
-background color or background pixmap for @window. Then, all
-drawing operations performed on @window will be diverted to the
-backing store. When you call gdk_window_end_paint(), the backing
-store will be copied to @window, making it visible onscreen. Only
-the part of @window contained in @region will be modified; that is,
-drawing operations are clipped to @region.
-
-The net result of all this is to remove flicker, because the user
-sees the finished product appear all at once when you call
-gdk_window_end_paint(). If you draw to @window directly without
-calling gdk_window_begin_paint_region(), the user may see flicker
-as individual drawing operations are performed in sequence. The
-clipping and background-initializing features of
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() are conveniences for the
-programmer, so you can avoid doing that work yourself.
-
-When using GTK+, the widget system automatically places calls to
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() around
-emissions of the expose_event signal. That is, if you're writing an
-expose event handler, you can assume that the exposed area in
-#GdkEventExpose has already been cleared to the window background,
-is already set as the clip region, and already has a backing store.
-Therefore in most cases, application code need not call
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region(). (You can disable the automatic
-calls around expose events on a widget-by-widget basis by calling
-gtk_widget_set_double_buffered().)
-
-If you call this function multiple times before calling the
-matching gdk_window_end_paint(), the backing stores are pushed onto
-a stack. gdk_window_end_paint() copies the topmost backing store
-onscreen, subtracts the topmost region from all other regions in
-the stack, and pops the stack. All drawing operations affect only
-the topmost backing store in the stack. One matching call to
-gdk_window_end_paint() is required for each call to
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region().
-
+Moves a region the specified distance.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> region you intend to draw to
+<parameter name="dx">
+<parameter_description> the distance to move the region horizontally
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_ref">
-<description>
-Adds a reference to a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+<parameter name="dy">
+<parameter_description> the distance to move the region vertically
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The same as the @pixbuf argument.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_clear_area">
@@ -4410,6 +3627,7 @@ to reparent them.
Request #GdkEventOwnerChange events for ownership changes
of the selection named by the given atom.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4426,7 +3644,31 @@ ownership change notification is requested
<return> whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
be sent.
-Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
+<description>
+This function allows for hooking into the operation
+of getting the current location of the pointer. This
+is only useful for such low-level tools as an
+event recorder. Applications should never have any
+reason to use this facility.
+
+This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
+see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="new_hooks">
+<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
+quantities related to the current pointer position,
+or %NULL to restore the default table.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the previous pointer hook table
</return>
</function>
@@ -4509,24 +3751,6 @@ coordinates of X11.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_pixels">
-<description>
-Queries a pointer to the pixel data of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A pointer to the pixbuf's pixel data. Please see <xref linkend="image-data"/>
-for information about how the pixel data is stored in
-memory.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_attr_stipple_new">
<description>
Creates a new attribute containing a stipple bitmap to be used when
@@ -4619,6 +3843,7 @@ assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
For details, see gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4637,7 +3862,6 @@ For details, see gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
</parameters>
<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -4666,12 +3890,12 @@ function before gdk_window_show(). (Try gdk_window_show_unraised().)
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_default">
<description>
+Returns the #GdkKeymap attached to the default display.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkKeymap attached to the default display.
-the #GdkKeymap attached to the default display.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4734,6 +3958,7 @@ icon by a small amount or not at all.
<description>
Gets the #GdkScreen for which @gc was created
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4744,68 +3969,6 @@ Gets the #GdkScreen for which @gc was created
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkScreen for @gc.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline">
-<description>
-Create a #GdkPixbuf from a flat representation that is suitable for
-storing as inline data in a program. This is useful if you want to
-ship a program with images, but don't want to depend on any
-external files.
-
-GTK+ ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
-which allows for conversion of #GdkPixbufs into such a inline representation.
-In almost all cases, you should pass the <option>--raw</option> flag to
-<command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>. A sample invocation would be:
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gdk-pixbuf-csource --raw --name=myimage_inline myimage.png
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-For the typical case where the inline pixbuf is read-only static data,
-you don't need to copy the pixel data unless you intend to write to
-it, so you can pass %FALSE for @copy_pixels. (If you pass
-<option>--rle</option> to <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>, a copy
-will be made even if @copy_pixels is %FALSE, so using this option is
-generally a bad idea.)
-
-If you create a pixbuf from const inline data compiled into your
-program, it's probably safe to ignore errors and disable length checks,
-since things will always succeed:
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-pixbuf = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline (-1, myimage_inline, FALSE, NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-For non-const inline data, you could get out of memory. For untrusted
-inline data located at runtime, you could have corrupt inline data in
-addition.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data_length">
-<parameter_description> Length in bytes of the @data argument or -1 to
-disable length checks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Byte data containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copy_pixels">
-<parameter_description> Whether to copy the pixel data, or use direct pointers
- data for the resulting pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> #GError return location, may be %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference,
-count of 1, or %NULL if an error occurred.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4825,6 +3988,7 @@ cursor sizes.
On the X backend, support for RGBA cursors requires a
sufficently new version of the X Render extension.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4847,39 +4011,20 @@ sufficently new version of the X Render extension.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GdkCursor.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_unref">
-<description>
-Decrement the reference count of @gc.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_test_render_sync">
<description>
-This function retrieves a pixel from @window to force the windowing
+This function retrives a pixel from @window to force the windowing
system to carry out any pending rendering commands.
This function is intended to be used to syncronize with rendering
pipelines, to benchmark windowing system rendering operations.
-Since: 2.14
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a mapped #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a mapped GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4913,7 +4058,7 @@ user data is a #GtkWidget, and forward the event to that widget.
<function name="gdk_window_get_decorations">
<description>
-Returns: TRUE if the window has decorations set, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns the decorations set on the GdkWindow with #gdk_window_set_decorations
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4935,6 +4080,7 @@ Returns: TRUE if the window has decorations set, FALSE otherwise.
Determines if keyboard layouts for both right-to-left and left-to-right
languages are in use.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4945,7 +4091,6 @@ languages are in use.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if there are layouts in both directions, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -5011,22 +4156,6 @@ the #GdkGC.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height">
-<description>
-Queries the height of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Height of the bounding box of the animation.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_drag_drop">
<description>
Drops on the current destination.
@@ -5047,43 +4176,28 @@ This function is called by the drag source.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_set_data">
<description>
-Like gdk_window_shape_combine_mask(), but the shape applies
-only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
-the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
-mask will be passed on the window below @window.
-
-An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
-The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
-invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
-and the input shape controls where the window is
-"clickable".
-
-On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
-shape extension.
-
-On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
-function does nothing.
+This function is equivalent to g_object_set_data(),
+the #GObject variant should be used instead.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>shape mask, or %NULL
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> name to store the data under
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X position of shape mask with respect to @window
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> arbitrary data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Y position of shape mask with respect to @window
+<parameter name="destroy_func">
+<parameter_description> function to free @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5092,7 +4206,15 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gdk_event_get_screen">
<description>
-Return value: the screen for the event
+Returns the screen for the event. The screen is
+typically the screen for <literal>event->any.window</literal>, but
+for events such as mouse events, it is the screen
+where the pointer was when the event occurs -
+that is, the screen which has the root window
+to which <literal>event->motion.x_root</literal> and
+<literal>event->motion.y_root</literal> are relative.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5103,32 +4225,54 @@ Return value: the screen for the event
</parameters>
<return> the screen for the event
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_get_depth">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask">
<description>
-Obtains the bit depth of the drawable, that is, the number of bits
-that make up a pixel in the drawable's visual. Examples are 8 bits
-per pixel, 24 bits per pixel, etc.
+Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
+and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
+corresponding thresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
+function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
+given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf() and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
+
+The pixmap that is created is created for the colormap returned
+by gdk_rgb_get_colormap(). You normally will want to instead use
+the actual colormap for a widget, and use
+gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap().
+If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
+to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
+or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
+or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
+<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of bits per pixel
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_manager_list_displays">
<description>
List all currently open displays.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5140,13 +4284,14 @@ List all currently open displays.
<return> a newly allocated #GSList of #GdkDisplay objects.
Free this list with g_slist_free() when you are done with it.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_xid_table_lookup">
<description>
-Return value: the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
+Returns the Gdk object associated with the given X id for the default
+display.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5161,24 +4306,18 @@ with the X id.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_window_invalidate_for_expose">
+<function name="gdk_window_merge_child_input_shapes">
<description>
-Adds @region to the update area for @window. The update area is the
-region that needs to be redrawn, or "dirty region." The call
-gdk_window_process_updates() sends one or more expose events to the
-window, which together cover the entire update area. An
-application would normally redraw the contents of @window in
-response to those expose events.
+Merges the input shape masks for any child windows into the
+input shape mask for @window. i.e. the union of all input masks
+for @window and its children will become the new input mask
+for @window. See gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask().
-GDK will call gdk_window_process_all_updates() on your behalf
-whenever your program returns to the main loop and becomes idle, so
-normally there's no need to do that manually, you just need to
-invalidate regions that you know should be redrawn.
+This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes()
+because it includes @window's input shape mask in the set of
+shapes to be merged.
-This version of invalidation is used when you recieve expose events
-from the native window system. It exposes the native window, plus
-any non-native child windows (but not native child windows, as those would
-have gotten their own expose events).
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5186,46 +4325,10 @@ have gotten their own expose events).
<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message_for_display">
-<description>
-On X11, sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window. On
-Windows, sends a message registered with the name
-GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE.
-
-This could be used for communicating between different
-applications, though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes on
-X11, and to just four bytes on Windows.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for the window where the message is to be sent.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent to send, which should be a #GdkEventClient.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="winid">
-<parameter_description> the window to send the client message to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> non-zero on success.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_begin_resize_drag">
<description>
Begins a window resize operation (for a toplevel window).
@@ -5289,25 +4392,81 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_begin">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap">
<description>
-Starts a drag and creates a new drag context for it.
+Creates a new cursor from a given pixmap and mask. Both the pixmap and mask
+must have a depth of 1 (i.e. each pixel has only 2 values - on or off).
+The standard cursor size is 16 by 16 pixels. You can create a bitmap
+from inline data as in the below example.
+
+<example><title>Creating a custom cursor</title>
+<programlisting>
+/<!-- -->* This data is in X bitmap format, and can be created with the 'bitmap'
+utility. *<!-- -->/
+#define cursor1_width 16
+#define cursor1_height 16
+static unsigned char cursor1_bits[] = {
+0x80, 0x01, 0x40, 0x02, 0x20, 0x04, 0x10, 0x08, 0x08, 0x10, 0x04, 0x20,
+0x82, 0x41, 0x41, 0x82, 0x41, 0x82, 0x82, 0x41, 0x04, 0x20, 0x08, 0x10,
+0x10, 0x08, 0x20, 0x04, 0x40, 0x02, 0x80, 0x01};
+
+static unsigned char cursor1mask_bits[] = {
+0x80, 0x01, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x60, 0x06, 0x30, 0x0c, 0x18, 0x18, 0x8c, 0x31,
+0xc6, 0x63, 0x63, 0xc6, 0x63, 0xc6, 0xc6, 0x63, 0x8c, 0x31, 0x18, 0x18,
+0x30, 0x0c, 0x60, 0x06, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x80, 0x01};
+
+
+GdkCursor *cursor;
+GdkPixmap *source, *mask;
+GdkColor fg = { 0, 65535, 0, 0 }; /<!-- -->* Red. *<!-- -->/
+GdkColor bg = { 0, 0, 0, 65535 }; /<!-- -->* Blue. *<!-- -->/
+
+
+source = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1_bits,
+cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
+mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1mask_bits,
+cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
+cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap (source, mask, &fg, &bg, 8, 8);
+g_object_unref (source);
+g_object_unref (mask);
-This function is called by the drag source.
+
+gdk_window_set_cursor (widget->window, cursor);
+</programlisting>
+</example>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the source window for this drag.
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the cursor.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the offered targets, as list of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the mask, which must be the same size as
+ source
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fg">
+<parameter_description> the foreground color, used for the bits in the source which are 1.
+The color does not have to be allocated first.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bg">
+<parameter_description> the background color, used for the bits in the source which are 0.
+The color does not have to be allocated first.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the vertical offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GdkDragContext.
+<return> a new #GdkCursor.
</return>
</function>
@@ -5360,139 +4519,93 @@ extend to the bottom edge of @image.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_fg_pixel">
-<description>
-Gets the foreground pixel value for @gc. If the
-foreground pixel has never been set, returns the
-default value 0.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the foreground pixel value of the GC
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pointer_is_grabbed">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.*
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.*
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
+Returns %TRUE if the pointer on the default display is currently
+grabbed by this application.
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
-from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
-%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
-the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The stream is not closed.
+Note that this does not take the inmplicit pointer grab on button
+presses into account.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
-conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
-not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
-the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.*
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_attr_embossed_new">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_composited">
<description>
-Creates a new attribute flagging a region as embossed or not.
-
+Sets a #GdkWindow as composited, or unsets it. Composited
+windows do not automatically have their contents drawn to
+the screen. Drawing is redirected to an offscreen buffer
+and an expose event is emitted on the parent of the composited
+window. It is the responsibility of the parent's expose handler
+to manually merge the off-screen content onto the screen in
+whatever way it sees fit. See <xref linkend="composited-window-example"/>
+for an example.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="embossed">
-<parameter_description> if the region should be embossed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> new #PangoAttribute
-</return>
-</function>
+It only makes sense for child windows to be composited; see
+gdk_window_set_opacity() if you need translucent toplevel
+windows.
-<function name="gdk_window_set_icon_name">
-<description>
-Windows may have a name used while minimized, distinct from the
-name they display in their titlebar. Most of the time this is a bad
-idea from a user interface standpoint. But you can set such a name
-with this function, if you like.
+An additional effect of this call is that the area of this
+window is no longer clipped from regions marked for
+invalidation on its parent. Draws done on the parent
+window are also no longer clipped by the child.
-After calling this with a non-%NULL @name, calls to gdk_window_set_title()
-will not update the icon title.
+This call is only supported on some systems (currently,
+only X11 with new enough Xcomposite and Xdamage extensions).
+You must call gdk_display_supports_composite() to check if
+setting a window as composited is supported before
+attempting to do so.
-Using %NULL for @name unsets the icon title; further calls to
-gdk_window_set_title() will again update the icon title as well.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of window while iconified (minimized)
+<parameter name="composited">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to set the window as composited
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_from_pixdata">
+<function name="gdk_spawn_command_line_on_screen">
<description>
-Converts a #GdkPixdata to a #GdkPixbuf. If @copy_pixels is %TRUE or
-if the pixel data is run-length-encoded, the pixel data is copied into
-newly-allocated memory; otherwise it is reused.
+Like g_spawn_command_line_async(), except the child process is
+spawned in such an environment that on calling gdk_display_open()
+it would be returned a #GdkDisplay with @screen as the default
+screen.
+This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
+on a specific screen.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert into a #GdkPixbuf.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="copy_pixels">
-<parameter_description> whether to copy raw pixel data; run-length encoded
-pixel data is always copied.
+<parameter name="command_line">
+<parameter_description> a command line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store possible errors.
+<parameter_description> return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkPixbuf.
+<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if error is set.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -5515,7 +4628,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the color to use, or %NULL to unset a previously
+<parameter_description> the color to use, or %NULL to unset a previously
set override color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -5528,6 +4641,7 @@ set override color.
Convert a string from the encoding of the current
locale into a form suitable for storing in a window property.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5559,7 +4673,6 @@ locale into a form suitable for storing in a window property.
</parameters>
<return> 0 upon success, non-zero upon failure.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -5598,7 +4711,10 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
<function name="gdk_display_supports_input_shapes">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if windows with modified input shape are supported
+Returns %TRUE if gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask() can
+be used to modify the input shape of windows on @display.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5609,7 +4725,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if windows with modified input shape are supported
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if windows with modified input shape are supported
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -5663,32 +4778,10 @@ in which case a default color will be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkPixmap.
+<return> the #GdkPixmap.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_add_frame">
-<description>
-Adds a new frame to @animation. The @pixbuf must
-have the dimensions specified when the animation
-was constructed.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to add
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_transient_for">
<description>
Indicates to the window manager that @window is a transient dialog
@@ -5768,7 +4861,9 @@ drawable. (See gdk_draw_drawable()).
<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_at_point">
<description>
-Returns: the monitor number in which the point (@x,@y) lies, or
+Returns the monitor number in which the point (@x,@y) is located.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5788,7 +4883,6 @@ Returns: the monitor number in which the point (@x,@y) lies, or
<return> the monitor number in which the point (@x,@y) lies, or
a monitor close to (@x,@y) if the point is not in any monitor.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -5906,54 +5000,62 @@ or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_lines">
+<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line">
<description>
-Draws a series of lines connecting the given points.
-The way in which joins between lines are draw is determined by the
-#GdkCapStyle value in the #GdkGC. This can be set with
-gdk_gc_set_line_attributes().
+Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto an GDK drawable
+
+If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
+ x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
+(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
+device coordinates.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
+<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter_description> base graphics to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint structures specifying the endpoints of the
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description> the size of the @points array.
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
+<function name="gdk_display_peek_event">
<description>
-Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
-deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
-store at all as the active paint region. See
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
-call this function without a matching
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
+Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display's event queue, without
+removing the event from the queue. (Note that this function will
+not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events
+that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL
+if no events are in the queue. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
+gdk_event_free().
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color">
@@ -6029,75 +5131,11 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_bg_pixel">
-<description>
-Gets the background pixel value for @gc.If the
-foreground pixel has never been set, returns the
-default value 1.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the foreground pixel value of the GC
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy_area">
-<description>
-Copies a rectangular area from @src_pixbuf to @dest_pixbuf. Conversion of
-pixbuf formats is done automatically.
-
-If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
-same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the copy operation.
-Therefore, you can not use this function to scroll a pixbuf.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> Source pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the area to copy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of the area to copy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> Destination pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_manager_get_default_display">
<description>
Gets the default #GdkDisplay.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6106,29 +5144,32 @@ Gets the default #GdkDisplay.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL if there is no default
+<return> a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL if there is no default
display.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_ref">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_cursor">
<description>
-Adds a reference to an animation.
-
+Sets the mouse pointer for a #GdkWindow. Use gdk_cursor_new_for_display()
+or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap() to create the cursor. To make the cursor
+invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR. Passing %NULL for the @cursor argument
+to gdk_window_set_cursor() means that @window will use the cursor of its
+parent window. Most windows should use this default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor">
+<parameter_description> a cursor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The same as the @animation argument.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_drop_finish">
@@ -6267,6 +5308,7 @@ Since: 2.2
Gets the display name specified in the command line arguments passed
to gdk_init() or gdk_parse_args(), if any.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6274,7 +5316,6 @@ to gdk_init() or gdk_parse_args(), if any.
<return> the display name, if specified explicitely, otherwise %NULL
this string is owned by GTK+ and must not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -6290,7 +5331,7 @@ The array returned in @rectangles must be freed with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="rectangles">
-<parameter_description>return location for an array of rectangles
+<parameter_description> return location for an array of rectangles
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_rectangles">
@@ -6303,7 +5344,10 @@ The array returned in @rectangles must be freed with g_free().
<function name="gdk_colormap_get_system_size">
<description>
-Return value: the size of the system's default colormap.
+Returns the size of the system's default colormap.
+(See the description of struct #GdkColormap for an
+explanation of the size of a colormap.)
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6312,24 +5356,37 @@ Return value: the size of the system's default colormap.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_stipple">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_alloc_color">
<description>
-Set the stipple bitmap for a graphics context. The
-stipple will only be used if the fill mode is
-%GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.
+Allocates a single color from a colormap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stipple">
-<parameter_description> the new stipple bitmap.
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to allocate. On return the
+<structfield>pixel</structfield> field will be
+filled in if allocation succeeds.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="writeable">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, the color is allocated writeable
+(their values can later be changed using gdk_color_change()).
+Writeable colors cannot be shared between applications.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="best_match">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, GDK will attempt to do matching against
+existing colors if the color cannot be allocated as requested.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_beep">
@@ -6350,36 +5407,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_xgrab_check_destroy">
-<description>
-Checks to see if window is the current grab window, and if
-so, clear the current grab window.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_x11_drawable_finish">
-<description>
-Performs necessary cleanup prior to freeing a pixmap or
-destroying a window.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawableImplX11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgb_visual">
<description>
Gets a "preferred visual" chosen by GdkRGB for rendering image data
@@ -6389,6 +5416,7 @@ current versions, it's simply the visual GdkRGB would have chosen as
the optimal one in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to
drawables with any visual.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6399,32 +5427,9 @@ drawables with any visual.
</parameters>
<return> The #GdkVisual chosen by GdkRGB.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_fill">
-<description>
-Clears a pixbuf to the given RGBA value, converting the RGBA value into
-the pixbuf's pixel format. The alpha will be ignored if the pixbuf
-doesn't have an alpha channel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixel">
-<parameter_description> RGBA pixel to clear to
-(0xffffffff is opaque white, 0x00000000 transparent black)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_context_get_for_screen">
<description>
Creates a #PangoContext for @screen.
@@ -6441,6 +5446,7 @@ change it will not be updated. Using gtk_widget_get_pango_context()
is more convenient if you want to keep a context around and track
changes to the screen's font rendering settings.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6451,13 +5457,14 @@ changes to the screen's font rendering settings.
</parameters>
<return> a new #PangoContext for @screen
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_xid_table_lookup_for_display">
<description>
-Return value: the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
+Returns the GDK object associated with the given X id.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6474,7 +5481,6 @@ Return value: the associated Gdk object, which may be a #GdkPixmap,
a #GdkWindow or a #GdkFont or %NULL if no object is associated
with the X id.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -6522,6 +5528,26 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_system_visual">
+<description>
+Get the system's default visual for @screen.
+This is the visual for the root window of the display.
+The return value should not be freed.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the system visual
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_remove_filter">
<description>
Remove a filter previously added with gdk_window_add_filter().
@@ -6641,7 +5667,8 @@ of a degree.
<function name="gdk_x11_cursor_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the display of a #GdkCursor.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6713,204 +5740,26 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a file in format @type. By default, "jpeg", "png", "ico"
-and "bmp" are possible file formats to save in, but more formats may be
-installed. The list of all writable formats can be determined in the
-following way:
-
-|[
-void add_if_writable (GdkPixbufFormat *data, GSList **list)
-{
-if (gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable (data))
-*list = g_slist_prepend (*list, data);
-}
-
-GSList *formats = gdk_pixbuf_get_formats ();
-GSList *writable_formats = NULL;
-g_slist_foreach (formats, add_if_writable, &writable_formats);
-g_slist_free (formats);
-]|
-
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors include
-those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and those in the #G_FILE_ERROR domain.
-
-The variable argument list should be %NULL-terminated; if not empty,
-it should contain pairs of strings that modify the save
-parameters. For example:
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "jpeg", &error,
-"quality", "100", NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-Currently only few parameters exist. JPEG images can be saved with a
-"quality" parameter; its value should be in the range [0,100].
-
-Text chunks can be attached to PNG images by specifying parameters of
-the form "tEXt::key", where key is an ASCII string of length 1-79.
-The values are UTF-8 encoded strings. The PNG compression level can
-be specified using the "compression" parameter; it's value is in an
-integer in the range of [0,9].
-
-ICC color profiles can also be embedded into PNG and TIFF images.
-The "icc-profile" value should be the complete ICC profile encoded
-into base64.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *contents;
-gchar *contents_encode;
-gsize length;
-g_file_get_contents ("/home/hughsie/.color/icc/L225W.icm", &contents, &length, NULL);
-contents_encode = g_base64_encode ((const guchar *) contents, length);
-gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "png", &error,
-"icc-profile", contents_encode,
-NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-TIFF images recognize a "compression" option which acceps an integer value.
-Among the codecs are 1 None, 2 Huffman, 5 LZW, 7 JPEG and 8 Deflate, see
-the libtiff documentation and tiff.h for all supported codec values.
-
-ICO images can be saved in depth 16, 24, or 32, by using the "depth"
-parameter. When the ICO saver is given "x_hot" and "y_hot" parameters,
-it produces a CUR instead of an ICO.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> name of file to save.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_from_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Converts a #GdkPixbuf to a #GdkPixdata. If @use_rle is %TRUE, the
-pixel data is run-length encoded into newly-allocated memory and a
-pointer to that memory is returned.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to fill.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the data to fill @pixdata with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_rle">
-<parameter_description> whether to use run-length encoding for the pixel data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> If @ure_rle is %TRUE, a pointer to the newly-allocated memory
-for the run-length encoded pixel data, otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_close">
-<description>
-Informs a pixbuf loader that no further writes with
-gdk_pixbuf_loader_write() will occur, so that it can free its
-internal loading structures. Also, tries to parse any data that
-hasn't yet been parsed; if the remaining data is partial or
-corrupt, an error will be returned. If %FALSE is returned, @error
-will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
-domains. If you're just cancelling a load rather than expecting it
-to be finished, passing %NULL for @error to ignore it is
-reasonable.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for a #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if all image data written so far was successfully
- passed out via the update_area signal
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_invalidate_rect">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_clip_mask">
<description>
-A convenience wrapper around gdk_window_invalidate_region() which
-invalidates a rectangular region. See
-gdk_window_invalidate_region() for details.
+Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a bitmap.
+The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip
+origin. (See gdk_gc_set_clip_origin()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description>rectangle to invalidate or %NULL to invalidate the whole
-window
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="invalidate_children">
-<parameter_description> whether to also invalidate child windows
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a bitmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new, empty animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rate">
-<parameter_description> the speed of the animation, in frames per second
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_rectangle_intersect">
<description>
Calculates the intersection of two rectangles. It is allowed for
@@ -6932,7 +5781,7 @@ pass %NULL for @dest.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description>return location for the intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for the intersection of @src1 and @src2, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6940,26 +5789,6 @@ pass %NULL for @dest.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GdkScreen">
-<description>
-The ::monitors-changed signal is emitted when the number, size
-or position of the monitors attached to the screen change.
-
-Only for X11 and OS X for now. A future implementation for Win32
-may be a possibility.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_device_get_state">
<description>
Gets the current state of a device.
@@ -6991,6 +5820,7 @@ or %NULL.
<description>
Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with a #GdkDrawable.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7001,7 +5831,6 @@ Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with a #GdkDrawable.
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkDisplay associated with @drawable
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -7009,6 +5838,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<description>
Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7019,7 +5849,6 @@ Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
</parameters>
<return> the gc.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -7097,6 +5926,35 @@ if your application pretends to be multiple applications.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_resize">
+<description>
+Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
+the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
+use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
+
+Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
+
+If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
+to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> new width of the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> new height of the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_grab_server">
<description>
Call gdk_x11_display_grab() on the default display.
@@ -7123,11 +5981,11 @@ Examples of keyvals are #GDK_a, #GDK_Enter, #GDK_F1, etc.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description>return location for lowercase version of @symbol
+<parameter_description> return location for lowercase version of @symbol
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description>return location for uppercase version of @symbol
+<parameter_description> return location for uppercase version of @symbol
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7200,7 +6058,8 @@ if all available targets should be saved.
<function name="gdk_x11_font_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the display of a #GdkFont.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7213,47 +6072,6 @@ Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_set_loop">
-<description>
-Sets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="loop">
-<parameter_description> whether to loop the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_drawable_get_scratch_gc">
-<description>
-Return value: A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="graphics_exposures">
-<parameter_description> Whether the returned #GdkGC should generate graphics exposures
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_draw_trapezoids">
<description>
Draws a set of anti-aliased trapezoids. The trapezoids are
@@ -7286,23 +6104,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_description">
-<description>
-Return value: a description of the format.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a description of the format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_drawable_get_size">
<description>
Fills * width and * height with the size of @drawable.
@@ -7320,11 +6121,11 @@ event, rather than the current size on the X server.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to store drawable's width, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store drawable's width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to store drawable's height, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store drawable's height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7335,6 +6136,7 @@ event, rather than the current size on the X server.
<description>
Looks up the #GdkVisual for a particular screen and X Visual ID.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7350,7 +6152,6 @@ Looks up the #GdkVisual for a particular screen and X Visual ID.
<return> the #GdkVisual (owned by the screen object), or %NULL
if the visual ID wasn't found.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -7365,6 +6166,7 @@ such as panels should place themselves on the primary monitor.
If no primary monitor is configured by the user, the return value
will be 0, defaulting to the first monitor.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7375,7 +6177,6 @@ will be 0, defaulting to the first monitor.
</parameters>
<return> An integer index for the primary monitor, or 0 if none is configured.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -7405,7 +6206,10 @@ the same parameters.
<function name="gdk_display_supports_selection_notification">
<description>
-Return value: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
+Returns whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will be
+sent when the owner of a selection changes.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7417,7 +6221,6 @@ Return value: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
<return> whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
be sent.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -7425,6 +6228,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets the display to which the @screen belongs.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7435,83 +6239,41 @@ Gets the display to which the @screen belongs.
</parameters>
<return> the display to which @screen belongs
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_set_option">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_state">
<description>
-Attaches a key/value pair as an option to a #GdkPixbuf. If %key already
-exists in the list of options attached to @pixbuf, the new value is
-ignored and %FALSE is returned.
+Gets the bitwise OR of the currently active window state flags,
+from the #GdkWindowState enumeration.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> window state bitfield
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_rgb_find_color">
-<description>
- colormap should be the colormap for the graphics context and
-drawable you're using to draw. If you're drawing to a #GtkWidget,
-call gtk_widget_get_colormap().
-
- color should have its %red, %green, and %blue fields initialized;
-gdk_rgb_find_color() will fill in the %pixel field with the best
-matching pixel from a color cube. The color is then ready to be
-used for drawing, e.g. you can call gdk_gc_set_foreground() which
-expects %pixel to be initialized.
-
-In many cases, you can avoid this whole issue by calling
-gdk_gc_set_rgb_fg_color() or gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color(), which
-do not expect %pixel to be initialized in advance. If you use those
-functions, there's no need for gdk_rgb_find_color().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_get_window_type">
+<function name="gdk_x11_screen_get_screen_number">
<description>
-Gets the type of the window. See #GdkWindowType.
+Returns the index of a #GdkScreen.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> type of window
+<return> the position of @screen among the screens of
+its display.
</return>
</function>
@@ -7559,6 +6321,7 @@ G_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->finalize (object);
}
]|
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7576,13 +6339,12 @@ range btweeen #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE and #G_PRIORITY_HIGH_IDLE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call when the idle is removed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> function to call when the idle is removed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -7610,7 +6372,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="matrix">
-<parameter_description>a #PangoMatrix, or %NULL to use an identity transformation
+<parameter_description> a #PangoMatrix, or %NULL to use an identity transformation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="font">
@@ -7655,34 +6417,27 @@ that @window belongs to. See gdk_window_set_user_data().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_fontset_load_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_x11_font_get_xfont">
<description>
-Loads a fontset for use on @display.
+Returns the X font belonging to a #GdkFont.
-The fontset may be newly loaded or looked up in a cache.
-You should make no assumptions about the initial reference count.
-
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fontset_name">
-<parameter_description> a comma-separated list of XLFDs describing
-the component fonts of the fontset to load.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkFont, or %NULL if the fontset could not be loaded.
+<return> an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_get_core_pointer">
<description>
-Return value: the core pointer device; this is owned by the
+Returns the core pointer device for the given display
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7694,28 +6449,6 @@ Return value: the core pointer device; this is owned by the
<return> the core pointer device; this is owned by the
display and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image">
-<description>
-If an animation is really just a plain image (has only one frame),
-this function returns that image. If the animation is an animation,
-this function returns a reasonable thing to display as a static
-unanimated image, which might be the first frame, or something more
-sophisticated. If an animation hasn't loaded any frames yet, this
-function will return %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> unanimated image representing the animation
</return>
</function>
@@ -7725,6 +6458,7 @@ Gets the XID of the specified output/monitor.
If the X server does not support version 1.2 of the RANDR
extension, 0 is returned.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7739,7 +6473,6 @@ extension, 0 is returned.
</parameters>
<return> the XID of the monitor
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -7820,23 +6553,20 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_grab">
+<function name="gdk_pango_attr_embossed_new">
<description>
-Call XGrabServer() on @display.
-To ungrab the display again, use gdk_x11_display_ungrab().
+Creates a new attribute flagging a region as embossed or not.
-gdk_x11_display_grab()/gdk_x11_display_ungrab() calls can be nested.
-
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="embossed">
+<parameter_description> if the region should be embossed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> new #PangoAttribute
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_keyboard_ungrab">
@@ -7905,6 +6635,7 @@ there's nothing you can do to force it to happen.
<description>
Gets the system's default colormap for @screen
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7913,9 +6644,8 @@ Gets the system's default colormap for @screen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the default colormap for @screen.
+<return> the default colormap for @screen.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -7924,6 +6654,7 @@ Since: 2.2
Convert from an X atom for a #GdkDisplay to the corresponding
#GdkAtom.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7938,7 +6669,6 @@ Convert from an X atom for a #GdkDisplay to the corresponding
</parameters>
<return> the corresponding #GdkAtom.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -8037,7 +6767,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="options">
-<parameter_description>a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any
previously set default font options.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -8045,19 +6775,6 @@ previously set default font options.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_get_sm_client_id">
-<description>
-Gets the client ID set with gdk_set_sm_client_id(), if any.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> Session ID, or %NULL if gdk_set_sm_client_id()
-has never been called.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_draw_segments">
<description>
Draws a number of unconnected lines.
@@ -8086,22 +6803,56 @@ end points of the lines to be drawn.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_region_offset">
+<function name="gdk_window_begin_paint_region">
<description>
-Moves a region the specified distance.
+Indicates that you are beginning the process of redrawing @region.
+A backing store (offscreen buffer) large enough to contain @region
+will be created. The backing store will be initialized with the
+background color or background pixmap for @window. Then, all
+drawing operations performed on @window will be diverted to the
+backing store. When you call gdk_window_end_paint(), the backing
+store will be copied to @window, making it visible onscreen. Only
+the part of @window contained in @region will be modified; that is,
+drawing operations are clipped to @region.
+
+The net result of all this is to remove flicker, because the user
+sees the finished product appear all at once when you call
+gdk_window_end_paint(). If you draw to @window directly without
+calling gdk_window_begin_paint_region(), the user may see flicker
+as individual drawing operations are performed in sequence. The
+clipping and background-initializing features of
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() are conveniences for the
+programmer, so you can avoid doing that work yourself.
+
+When using GTK+, the widget system automatically places calls to
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() around
+emissions of the expose_event signal. That is, if you're writing an
+expose event handler, you can assume that the exposed area in
+#GdkEventExpose has already been cleared to the window background,
+is already set as the clip region, and already has a backing store.
+Therefore in most cases, application code need not call
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region(). (You can disable the automatic
+calls around expose events on a widget-by-widget basis by calling
+gtk_widget_set_double_buffered().)
+
+If you call this function multiple times before calling the
+matching gdk_window_end_paint(), the backing stores are pushed onto
+a stack. gdk_window_end_paint() copies the topmost backing store
+onscreen, subtracts the topmost region from all other regions in
+the stack, and pops the stack. All drawing operations affect only
+the topmost backing store in the stack. One matching call to
+gdk_window_end_paint() is required for each call to
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dx">
-<parameter_description> the distance to move the region horizontally
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dy">
-<parameter_description> the distance to move the region vertically
+<parameter name="region">
+<parameter_description> region you intend to draw to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8128,7 +6879,12 @@ Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
<function name="gdk_drag_drop_succeeded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
+Returns whether the dropped data has been successfully
+transferred. This function is intended to be used while
+handling a %GDK_DROP_FINISHED event, its return value is
+meaningless at other times.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8139,33 +6895,50 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the drop was successful.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_set_pointer_hooks">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap">
<description>
-This function allows for hooking into the operation
-of getting the current location of the pointer. This
-is only useful for such low-level tools as an
-event recorder. Applications should never have any
-reason to use this facility.
+Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
+and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
+corresponding tresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
+function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
+given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf(), and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
-This function is not multihead safe. For multihead operation,
-see gdk_display_set_pointer_hooks().
+The pixmap that is created uses the #GdkColormap specified by @colormap.
+This colormap must match the colormap of the window where the pixmap
+will eventually be used or an error will result.
+If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
+to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="new_hooks">
-<parameter_description> a table of pointers to functions for getting
-quantities related to the current pointer position,
-or %NULL to restore the default table.
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkColormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
+or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask_return">
+<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
+or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
+<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the previous pointer hook table
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_directfb_visual_by_format">
@@ -8195,7 +6968,7 @@ pixel_format is unsupported.
<function name="gdk_text_property_to_utf8_list">
<description>
Convert a text property in the giving encoding to
-a list of UTF-8 strings.
+a list of UTF-8 strings.
</description>
@@ -8217,7 +6990,7 @@ a list of UTF-8 strings.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> location to store the list of strings or %NULL. The
+<parameter_description> location to store the list of strings or %NULL. The
list should be freed with g_strfreev().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -8344,7 +7117,7 @@ Since: 2.18
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkWindow that is a sibling of @window, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow that is a sibling of @window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="above">
@@ -8357,7 +7130,12 @@ Since: 2.18
<function name="gdk_x11_get_xatom_name">
<description>
-Return value: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GTK+,
+Returns the name of an X atom for GDK's default display. This
+function is meant mainly for debugging, so for convenience, unlike
+<function>XAtomName()</function> and gdk_atom_name(), the result
+doesn't need to be freed. Also, this function will never return %NULL,
+even if @xatom is invalid.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8371,24 +7149,6 @@ so it shouldn't be modifed or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_extensions">
-<description>
-Return value: a %NULL-terminated array of filename extensions which must be
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a %NULL-terminated array of filename extensions which must be
-freed with g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_beep">
<description>
Emits a short beep on @display
@@ -8407,12 +7167,18 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_entries_for_keycode">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if there were any entries
+Returns the keyvals bound to @hardware_keycode.
+The Nth #GdkKeymapKey in @keys is bound to the Nth
+keyval in @keyvals. Free the returned arrays with g_free().
+When a keycode is pressed by the user, the keyval from
+this list of entries is selected by considering the effective
+keyboard group and level. See gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="keymap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkKeymap or %NULL to use the default keymap
+<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap or %NULL to use the default keymap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hardware_keycode">
@@ -8420,11 +7186,11 @@ Returns: %TRUE if there were any entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keys">
-<parameter_description>return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of #GdkKeymapKey, or NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyvals">
-<parameter_description>return location for array of keyvals, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for array of keyvals, or NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_entries">
@@ -8463,47 +7229,19 @@ relative to its parent window.)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_window_type">
<description>
-Creates a new animation by loading it from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If the file's format does not support multi-frame
-images, then an animation with a single frame will be created. Possible errors
-are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created animation with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
-if any of several error conditions ocurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-</return>
-</function>
+Gets the type of the window. See #GdkWindowType.
-<function name="gdk_x11_screen_get_screen_number">
-<description>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the position of @screen among the screens of
-its display.
-the index of a #GdkScreen.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> type of window
</return>
</function>
@@ -8646,6 +7384,7 @@ gdk_colormap_get_system_for_screen ())
<description>
Check to see if a window is destroyed..
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8656,7 +7395,6 @@ Check to see if a window is destroyed..
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the window is destroyed
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -8664,6 +7402,7 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Gets the screen to which this visual belongs
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8672,32 +7411,8 @@ Gets the screen to which this visual belongs
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the screen to which this visual belongs.
+<return> the screen to which this visual belongs.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GdkPixbufSimpleAnim">
-<description>
-Whether the animation should loop when it reaches the end.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_devices_list">
-<description>
-Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a list of #GdkDevice
</return>
</function>
@@ -8705,6 +7420,7 @@ Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
<description>
Finds out if a regions is the same as a rectangle.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8719,7 +7435,6 @@ Finds out if a regions is the same as a rectangle.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @region and @rectangle are equal.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -8728,6 +7443,7 @@ Since: 2.18
Deprecated equivalent of calling g_object_ref() on @drawable.
(Drawables were not objects in previous versions of GDK.)
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8738,7 +7454,6 @@ Deprecated equivalent of calling g_object_ref() on @drawable.
</parameters>
<return> the same @drawable passed in
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -8816,42 +7531,107 @@ move, then resize, if you don't use gdk_window_move_resize().)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
+<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
<description>
-Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
-A visual describes a hardware image data format.
-For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
-and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
-
-Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
+Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
+Some useful ones are:
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
+</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_type">
+<parameter_description> cursor to create
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
-contents
+<return> a new #GdkCursor
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_font_get_xfont">
+<function name="gdk_fontset_load_for_display">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
+Loads a fontset for use on @display.
+
+The fontset may be newly loaded or looked up in a cache.
+You should make no assumptions about the initial reference count.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fontset_name">
+<parameter_description> a comma-separated list of XLFDs describing
+the component fonts of the fontset to load.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an Xlib <type>XFontStruct*</type> or an <type>XFontSet</type>.
+<return> a #GdkFont, or %NULL if the fontset could not be loaded.
</return>
</function>
@@ -8871,25 +7651,6 @@ timestamp is available.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time">
-<description>
-Gets the number of milliseconds the current pixbuf should be displayed,
-or -1 if the current pixbuf should be displayed forever. g_timeout_add()
-conveniently takes a timeout in milliseconds, so you can use a timeout
-to schedule the next update.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an animation iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> delay time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second)
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_type_hint">
<description>
The application can use this call to provide a hint to the window
@@ -8915,7 +7676,11 @@ The hint must be set before the window is mapped.
<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_alpha">
<description>
-Returns: whether cursors can have alpha channels.
+Returns %TRUE if cursors can use an 8bit alpha channel
+on @display. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel
+alpha (i.e. a mask).
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8926,13 +7691,13 @@ Returns: whether cursors can have alpha channels.
</parameters>
<return> whether cursors can have alpha channels.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the display of a #GdkColormap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9027,86 +7792,6 @@ See also gdk_window_set_back_pixmap().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GdkPixbuf">
-<description>
-The number of bytes between the start of a row and
-the start of the next row. This number must (obviously)
-be at least as large as the width of the pixbuf.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_set_disabled">
-<description>
-Disables or enables an image format. If a format is disabled,
-gdk-pixbuf won't use the image loader for this format to load
-images. Applications can use this to avoid using image loaders
-with an inappropriate license, see gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="disabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to disable the format @format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callbackv">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a callback in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. See
-gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback () for more details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="save_func">
-<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
-the save routine generates.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_keyboard_ungrab">
<description>
Ungrabs the keyboard on the default display, if it is grabbed by this
@@ -9207,6 +7892,7 @@ Looks up the #GdkPixmap that wraps the given native pixmap handle.
For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
<type>XID</type>.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9222,7 +7908,6 @@ For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
<return> the #GdkPixmap wrapper for the native pixmap,
or %NULL if there is none.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -9254,7 +7939,7 @@ gdk_window_clear().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixmap, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent_relative">
@@ -9266,55 +7951,59 @@ gdk_window_clear().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
+<function name="gdk_string_measure">
<description>
-This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
-whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
-Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
-specification on
-<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
-
-When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
-can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
-a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
-is that your application can start up before the window manager
-does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
-gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
-You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
-a window manager change.
+Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
+portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
+correct value for determining the origin of the next
+portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
+See gdk_string_width().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property">
-<parameter_description> a property atom.
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
+<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
+<description>
+Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
+gdk_display_get_default ()).
Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_cursor_color">
+<function name="gdk_keymap_get_for_display">
<description>
-Returns: whether cursors can have multiple colors.
+Returns the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether cursors can have multiple colors.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9368,21 +8057,45 @@ other values will be painted as one.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_context_set_colormap">
+<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line_with_colors">
<description>
-This function used to set the colormap to be used for drawing with
- context The colormap is now always derived from the graphics
-context used for drawing, so calling this function is no longer
-necessary.
+Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto a #GdkDrawable, overriding the
+layout's normal colors with @foreground and/or @background.
+ foreground and @background need not be allocated.
+
+If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
+ x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
+(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
+device coordinates.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoContext
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> base graphics to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="foreground">
+<parameter_description> foreground override color, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="background">
+<parameter_description> background override color, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9405,20 +8118,31 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_withdraw">
+<function name="gdk_pixmap_foreign_new_for_display">
<description>
-Withdraws a window (unmaps it and asks the window manager to forget about it).
-This function is not really useful as gdk_window_hide() automatically
-withdraws toplevel windows before hiding them.
+Wraps a native pixmap in a #GdkPixmap.
+This may fail if the pixmap has been destroyed.
+
+For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
+<type>XID</type>.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> The #GdkDisplay where @anid is located.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anid">
+<parameter_description> a native pixmap handle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the newly-created #GdkPixmap wrapper for the
+native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_image_set_colormap">
@@ -9466,7 +8190,9 @@ gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for details.
<function name="gdk_cursor_get_display">
<description>
-Returns: the #GdkDisplay associated to @cursor
+Returns the display on which the #GdkCursor is defined.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9477,52 +8203,9 @@ Returns: the #GdkDisplay associated to @cursor
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkDisplay associated to @cursor
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_update_context">
-<description>
-Set the attributes of a cairo context to match those of a #GdkGC
-as far as possible. Some aspects of a #GdkGC, such as clip masks
-and functions other than %GDK_COPY are not currently handled.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_foreground">
-<parameter_description> a foreground color to use to override the
-foreground color of the GC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_stipple">
-<parameter_description> a stipple pattern to use to override the
-stipple from the GC. If this is present and the fill mode
-of the GC isn't %GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED
-the fill mode will be forced to %GDK_STIPPLED
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gc_changed">
-<parameter_description> pass %FALSE if the @gc has not changed since the
-last call to this function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_drawable">
-<parameter_description> The drawable you're drawing in. If passed in
-this is used for client side window clip emulation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth">
<description>
Get the best visual with depth @depth for the default GDK screen.
@@ -9538,51 +8221,35 @@ be freed. %NULL may be returned if no visual supports @depth.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>best visual for the given depth
+<return> best visual for the given depth
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GdkDisplayManager">
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_grab">
<description>
-The ::display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
+Call XGrabServer() on @display.
+To ungrab the display again, use gdk_x11_display_ungrab().
+
+gdk_x11_display_grab()/gdk_x11_display_ungrab() calls can be nested.
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display_manager">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the opened display
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width">
-<description>
-Queries the width of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Width of the bounding box of the animation.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_make_display_name">
<description>
Determines the name to pass to gdk_display_open() to get
a #GdkDisplay with this screen as the default screen.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9593,13 +8260,12 @@ a #GdkDisplay with this screen as the default screen.
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated string, free with g_free()
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_utf8_to_compound_text">
<description>
-Convert from UTF-8 to compound text.
+Convert from UTF-8 to compound text.
</description>
@@ -9633,7 +8299,9 @@ false.
<function name="gdk_font_get_display">
<description>
-Returns: the corresponding #GdkDisplay.
+Returns the #GdkDisplay for @font.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9644,50 +8312,23 @@ Returns: the corresponding #GdkDisplay.
</parameters>
<return> the corresponding #GdkDisplay.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_char_width">
+<function name="gdk_x11_gc_get_xgc">
<description>
-Determines the width of a given character.
+Returns the X GC of a #GdkGC.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="character">
-<parameter_description> the character to measure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the width of the character in pixels.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_text_extents() instead.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_gc_set_colormap">
-<description>
-Sets the colormap for the GC to the given colormap. The depth
-of the colormap's visual must match the depth of the drawable
-for which the GC was created.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an Xlib <type>GC</type>.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_event_free">
@@ -9707,73 +8348,6 @@ gdk_event_get_graphics_expose() and gdk_event_copy().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_disabled">
-<description>
-Return value: whether this image format is disabled.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether this image format is disabled.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_data">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf out of in-memory image data. Currently only RGB
-images with 8 bits per sample are supported.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Image data in 8-bit/sample packed format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colorspace">
-<parameter_description> Colorspace for the image data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> Whether the data has an opacity channel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
-<parameter_description> Number of bits per sample
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of the image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rowstride">
-<parameter_description> Distance in bytes between row starts
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_fn">
-<parameter_description> Function used to free the data when the pixbuf's reference count
-drops to zero, or %NULL if the data should not be freed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_fn_data">
-<parameter_description> Closure data to pass to the destroy notification function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference count of 1.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_focus_on_map">
<description>
Setting @focus_on_map to %FALSE hints the desktop environment that the
@@ -9801,36 +8375,11 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Gets the current pixbuf which should be displayed; the pixbuf will
-be the same size as the animation itself
-(gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width(), gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height()).
-This pixbuf should be displayed for
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. The caller
-of this function does not own a reference to the returned pixbuf;
-the returned pixbuf will become invalid when the iterator advances
-to the next frame, which may happen anytime you call
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it
-(don't just add a reference), as it may get recycled as you advance
-the iterator.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an animation iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the pixbuf to be displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_pointer_is_grabbed">
<description>
Test if the pointer is grabbed.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9841,7 +8390,6 @@ Test if the pointer is grabbed.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if an active X pointer grab is in effect
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -9849,6 +8397,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<description>
Gets the root window of @screen.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9857,9 +8406,8 @@ Gets the root window of @screen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the root window
+<return> the root window
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -9867,6 +8415,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<description>
Creates a new event of the given type. All fields are set to 0.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9878,7 +8427,6 @@ Creates a new event of the given type. All fields are set to 0.
<return> a newly-allocated #GdkEvent. The returned #GdkEvent
should be freed with gdk_event_free().
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -9902,6 +8450,7 @@ Finds out if the #GdkRegion is empty.
<description>
Gets the width in millimeters of the specified monitor, if available.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9916,23 +8465,6 @@ Gets the width in millimeters of the specified monitor, if available.
</parameters>
<return> the width of the monitor, or -1 if not available
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_height">
-<description>
-Queries the height of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Height in pixels.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9951,7 +8483,7 @@ should not be freed. %NULL may be returned if no visual has type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>best visual of the given type
+<return> best visual of the given type
</return>
</function>
@@ -9976,21 +8508,6 @@ cannot be loaded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_window_clear_update_area">
-<description>
-Internal function to clear the update area for a window. This
-is called when the window is hidden or destroyed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_entries_for_keyval">
<description>
Obtains a list of keycode/group/level combinations that will
@@ -10009,7 +8526,7 @@ with g_free().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="keymap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkKeymap, or %NULL to use the default keymap
+<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap, or %NULL to use the default keymap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -10017,11 +8534,11 @@ with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keys">
-<parameter_description>return location for an array of #GdkKeymapKey
+<parameter_description> return location for an array of #GdkKeymapKey
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_keys">
-<parameter_description>return location for number of elements in returned array
+<parameter_description> return location for number of elements in returned array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10032,7 +8549,10 @@ with g_free().
<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_foreign_new">
<description>
If xcolormap refers to a colormap previously known to GTK+,
-Return value: the #GdkColormap object for @xcolormap.
+returns a new reference to the existing #GdkColormap object,
+otherwise creates a new GdkColormap object and returns that
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10051,7 +8571,6 @@ with gdk_x11_colormap_foreign_new(), unref'ing the last
reference to the object will only free the #GdkColoramp
object and not call XFreeColormap()
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -10075,29 +8594,21 @@ Compares two colors.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_resize">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
-Resizes @window; for toplevel windows, asks the window manager to resize
-the window. The window manager may not allow the resize. When using GTK+,
-use gtk_window_resize() instead of this low-level GDK function.
-
-Windows may not be resized below 1x1.
+Toggles whether a window needs the user's
+urgent attention.
-If you're also planning to move the window, use gdk_window_move_resize()
-to both move and resize simultaneously, for a nicer visual effect.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> new width of the window
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> new height of the window
+<parameter name="urgent">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the window is urgent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10143,90 +8654,51 @@ To make the cursor invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter">
+<function name="gdk_rgb_find_color">
<description>
-Get an iterator for displaying an animation. The iterator provides
-the frames that should be displayed at a given time.
-It should be freed after use with g_object_unref().
-
- start_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
-marks the beginning of animation playback. After creating an
-iterator, you should immediately display the pixbuf returned by
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf(). Then, you should install a
-timeout (with g_timeout_add()) or by some other mechanism ensure
-that you'll update the image after
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. Each time
-the image is updated, you should reinstall the timeout with the new,
-possibly-changed delay time.
-
-As a shortcut, if @start_time is %NULL, the result of
-g_get_current_time() will be used automatically.
-
-To update the image (i.e. possibly change the result of
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() to a new frame of the animation),
-call gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance().
+ colormap should be the colormap for the graphics context and
+drawable you're using to draw. If you're drawing to a #GtkWidget,
+call gtk_widget_get_colormap().
-If you're using #GdkPixbufLoader, in addition to updating the image
-after the delay time, you should also update it whenever you
-receive the area_updated signal and
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame() returns
-%TRUE. In this case, the frame currently being fed into the loader
-has received new data, so needs to be refreshed. The delay time for
-a frame may also be modified after an area_updated signal, for
-example if the delay time for a frame is encoded in the data after
-the frame itself. So your timeout should be reinstalled after any
-area_updated signal.
+ color should have its %red, %green, and %blue fields initialized;
+gdk_rgb_find_color() will fill in the %pixel field with the best
+matching pixel from a color cube. The color is then ready to be
+used for drawing, e.g. you can call gdk_gc_set_foreground() which
+expects %pixel to be initialized.
-A delay time of -1 is possible, indicating "infinite."
+In many cases, you can avoid this whole issue by calling
+gdk_gc_set_rgb_fg_color() or gdk_gc_set_rgb_bg_color(), which
+do not expect %pixel to be initialized in advance. If you use those
+functions, there's no need for gdk_rgb_find_color().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_time">
-<parameter_description> time when the animation starts playing
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an iterator to move over the animation
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_get_state">
-<description>
-Gets the bitwise OR of the currently active window state flags,
-from the #GdkWindowState enumeration.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> window state bitfield
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_event_unqueue">
+<function name="gdkx_visual_get">
<description>
-Removes and returns the first event from the event
-queue that is not still being filled in.
+Returns a #GdkVisual corresponding to a X visual.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="xvisualid">
+<parameter_description> a X visual id.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the event, or %NULL. Ownership is transferred
-to the caller.
+<return> the #GdkVisual.
</return>
</function>
@@ -10265,41 +8737,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_send_xevent">
-<description>
-Send an event, like XSendEvent(), but trap errors and check
-the result.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> #GdkDisplay which @window is on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> window ID to which to send the event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="propagate">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the event should be propagated if the target window
-doesn't handle it.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event_mask">
-<parameter_description> event mask to match against, or 0 to send it to @window
-without regard to event masks.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event_send">
-<parameter_description> #XEvent to send
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if sending the event succeeded.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_cairo_set_source_color">
<description>
Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
@@ -10340,45 +8777,16 @@ either @source1 or @source2.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_device_get_history">
+<function name="gdk_devices_list">
<description>
-Obtains the motion history for a device; given a starting and
-ending timestamp, return all events in the motion history for
-the device in the given range of time. Some windowing systems
-do not support motion history, in which case, %FALSE will
-be returned. (This is not distinguishable from the case where
-motion history is supported and no events were found.)
+Returns the list of available input devices for the default display.
+The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="device">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the window with respect to which which the event coordinates will be reported
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> starting timestamp for range of events to return
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stop">
-<parameter_description> ending timestamp for the range of events to return
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="events">
-<parameter_description>location to store a newly-allocated array of #GdkTimeCoord, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_events">
-<parameter_description> location to store the length of @events, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
-at least one event was found.
+<return> a list of #GdkDevice
</return>
</function>
@@ -10411,7 +8819,8 @@ attributes of the #GdkGC.
<function name="gdk_x11_drawable_get_xid">
<description>
-Return value: the ID of @drawable's X resource.
+Returns the X resource (window or pixmap) belonging to a #GdkDrawable.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10433,7 +8842,7 @@ an image.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description>Destination pixbuf, or %NULL if a new pixbuf should be created.
+<parameter_description> Destination pixbuf, or %NULL if a new pixbuf should be created.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="src">
@@ -10441,7 +8850,7 @@ an image.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description>A colormap, or %NULL to use the one for @src
+<parameter_description> A colormap, or %NULL to use the one for @src
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="src_x">
@@ -10506,7 +8915,10 @@ image is freed.</para></warning>
<function name="gdk_display_list_devices">
<description>
-Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
+Returns the list of available input devices attached to @display.
+The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10517,7 +8929,6 @@ Return value: a list of #GdkDevice
</parameters>
<return> a list of #GdkDevice
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -10607,68 +9018,31 @@ this is useful to produce nicer scrolling behavior, for example.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_tile">
+<function name="gdk_font_from_description_for_display">
<description>
-Gets the tile pixmap for @gc, if any
+Loads a #GdkFont based on a Pango font description for use on @display.
+This font will only be an approximation of the Pango font, and
+internationalization will not be handled correctly. This function
+should only be used for legacy code that cannot be easily converted
+to use Pango. Using Pango directly will produce better results.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the tile set on the GC, or %NULL. The
-value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_gc_get_clip_region">
-<description>
-Gets the current clip region for @gc, if any.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoFontDescription.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the clip region for the GC, or %NULL.
-(if a clip mask is set, the return will be %NULL)
-This value is owned by the GC and must not be freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_cairo_reset_clip">
-<description>
-Resets the clip region for a Cairo context created by gdk_cairo_create().
-
-This resets the clip region to the "empty" state for the given drawable.
-This is required for non-native windows since a direct call to
-cairo_reset_clip() would unset the clip region inherited from the
-drawable (i.e. the window clip region), and thus let you e.g.
-draw outside your window.
-
-This is rarely needed though, since most code just create a new cairo_t
-using gdk_cairo_create() each time they want to draw something.
-
-Since: 2.18
+<return> the newly loaded font, or %NULL if the font
+cannot be loaded.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_draw_polygon">
@@ -10721,89 +9095,6 @@ children, so the list does not need to be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_pixops_composite_real">
-<description>
-Scale source buffer by scale_x / scale_y, then composite a given rectangle
-of the result into the destination buffer.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dest_buf">
-<parameter_description> pointer to location to store result
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="render_x0">
-<parameter_description> x0 of region of scaled source to store into @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="render_y0">
-<parameter_description> y0 of region of scaled source to store into @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="render_x1">
-<parameter_description> x1 of region of scaled source to store into @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="render_y1">
-<parameter_description> y1 of region of scaled source to store into @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_rowstride">
-<parameter_description> rowstride of @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_channels">
-<parameter_description> number of channels in @dest_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> whether @dest_buf has alpha
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_buf">
-<parameter_description> pointer to source pixels
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_width">
-<parameter_description> width of source (used for clipping)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_height">
-<parameter_description> height of source (used for clipping)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_rowstride">
-<parameter_description> rowstride of source
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_channels">
-<parameter_description> number of channels in @src_buf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> whether @src_buf has alpha
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> amount to scale source by in X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> amount to scale source by in Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> type of enumeration
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha factor to multiply source by
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_icon">
<description>
Sets the icon of @window as a pixmap or window. If using GTK+, investigate
@@ -10911,23 +9202,6 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by parsing XPM data in memory. This data is commonly
-the result of including an XPM file into a program's C source.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Pointer to inline XPM data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_freeze_updates">
<description>
Temporarily freezes a window such that it won't receive expose
@@ -10948,7 +9222,22 @@ an equal number of times to begin processing exposes.
<function name="gdk_screen_get_active_window">
<description>
-Return value: the currently active window, or %NULL.
+Returns the screen's currently active window.
+
+On X11, this is done by inspecting the _NET_ACTIVE_WINDOW property
+on the root window, as described in the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink>. If there is no currently currently active
+window, or the window manager does not support the
+_NET_ACTIVE_WINDOW hint, this function returns %NULL.
+
+On other platforms, this function may return %NULL, depending on whether
+it is implementable on that platform.
+
+The returned window should be unrefed using g_object_unref() when
+no longer needed.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10959,7 +9248,6 @@ Return value: the currently active window, or %NULL.
</parameters>
<return> the currently active window, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -10967,6 +9255,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Allocates a single color from a colormap.
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_colormap_alloc_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10982,7 +9271,6 @@ Allocates a single color from a colormap.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_colormap_alloc_color() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -10990,6 +9278,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.2: Use gdk_colormap_alloc_color() instead.
<description>
Converts from UTF-8 to compound text.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11022,7 +9311,6 @@ stored in @ctext
<return> %TRUE if the conversion succeeded, otherwise
%FALSE.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -11031,6 +9319,7 @@ Since: 2.2
Establish a callback when a condition becomes true on
a file descriptor.
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_io_add_watch() on a #GIOChannel
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11054,40 +9343,26 @@ a file descriptor.
<return> a tag that can later be used as an argument to
gdk_input_remove().
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_io_add_watch() on a #GIOChannel
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_move_region">
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_font_options">
<description>
-Move the part of @window indicated by @region by @dy pixels in the Y
-direction and @dx pixels in the X direction. The portions of @region
-that not covered by the new position of @region are invalidated.
-
-Child windows are not moved.
+Gets any options previously set with gdk_screen_set_font_options().
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> The #GdkRegion to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dx">
-<parameter_description> Amount to move in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dy">
-<parameter_description> Amount to move in the Y direction
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current font options, or %NULL if no default
+font options have been set.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_screen_get_rgb_colormap">
@@ -11098,6 +9373,7 @@ image data to one colormap and visual, but in the current version
it can render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to
call this function.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11108,7 +9384,6 @@ call this function.
</parameters>
<return> the preferred colormap
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -11155,7 +9430,7 @@ GDK screen. The return value should not be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>best visual
+<return> best visual
</return>
</function>
@@ -11241,20 +9516,20 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description>location to store the screen that the
+<parameter_description> location to store the screen that the
cursor is on, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>location to store root window X coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store root window X coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description>location to store root window Y coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store root window Y coordinate of pointer, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>location to store current modifier mask, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store current modifier mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11284,39 +9559,45 @@ though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
+<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
<description>
-Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
-should be taken.
-
-If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
-with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
-gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
-change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
-or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
-by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
-cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
-for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
+Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
+is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
+For full documentation of the fields, see
+the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="theme">
-<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
-a previously set value
+<parameter name="contiguous">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
+in contiguous color cells.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
+<parameter name="planes">
+<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="nplanes">
+<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
+to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixels">
+<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="npixels">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_hide">
@@ -11336,24 +9617,6 @@ part of gtk_widget_hide().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf with a copy of the information in the specified
- pixbuf
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
-not enough memory could be allocated.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_drag_motion">
<description>
Updates the drag context when the pointer moves or the
@@ -11404,14 +9667,13 @@ gdk_drag_find_window().
<function name="gdk_test_simulate_button">
<description>
-This function is intended to be used in GTK+ test programs.
+This function is intended to be used in Gtk+ test programs.
It will warp the mouse pointer to the given (@x,@y) corrdinates
within @window and simulate a button press or release event.
Because the mouse pointer needs to be warped to the target
location, use of this function outside of test programs that
run in their own virtual windowing system (e.g. Xvfb) is not
recommended.
-
Also, gtk_test_simulate_button() is a fairly low level function,
for most testing purposes, gtk_test_widget_click() is the right
function to call which will generate a button press event followed
@@ -11421,7 +9683,7 @@ by its accompanying button release event.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow to simulate a button event for.
+<parameter_description> Gdk window to simulate a button event for.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -11445,13 +9707,26 @@ by its accompanying button release event.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether all actions neccessary for a button event simulation
-were carried out successfully.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for a button event simulation were carried out successfully.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_window_withdraw">
+<description>
+Withdraws a window (unmaps it and asks the window manager to forget about it).
+This function is not really useful as gdk_window_hide() automatically
+withdraws toplevel windows before hiding them.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_deiconify">
<description>
Attempt to deiconify (unminimize) @window. On X11 the window manager may
@@ -11484,11 +9759,11 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>the return location for the maximal cursor width
+<parameter_description> the return location for the maximal cursor width
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>the return location for the maximal cursor height
+<parameter_description> the return location for the maximal cursor height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11529,7 +9804,13 @@ of the XClientMessage event struct.
<function name="gdkx_colormap_get">
<description>
-Return value: the existing #GdkColormap object if it was
+Returns a #GdkColormap corresponding to a X colormap;
+this function only works if the colormap is already
+known to GTK+ (a colormap created by GTK+ or the default
+colormap for the screen), since GTK+
+
+Always use gdk_x11_colormap_foreign_new() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11544,57 +9825,39 @@ already known to GTK+, otherwise warns and return
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region">
+<function name="gdk_drag_find_window">
<description>
-Like gdk_window_shape_combine_region(), but the shape applies
-only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
-the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
-mask will be passed on the window below @window.
-
-An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
-The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
-invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
-and the input shape controls where the window is
-"clickable".
-
-On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
-shape extension.
-
-On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
-function does nothing.
+Finds the destination window and DND protocol to use at the
+given pointer position.
-Since: 2.10
+This function is called by the drag source to obtain the
+ dest_window and @protocol parameters for gdk_drag_motion().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="shape_region">
-<parameter_description> region of window to be non-transparent
+<parameter name="drag_window">
+<parameter_description> a window which may be at the pointer position, but
+should be ignored, since it is put up by the drag source as an icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> X position of @shape_region in @window coordinates
+<parameter name="x_root">
+<parameter_description> the x position of the pointer in root coordinates.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> Y position of @shape_region in @window coordinates
+<parameter name="y_root">
+<parameter_description> the y position of the pointer in root coordinates.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest_window">
+<parameter_description> location to store the destination window in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="protocol">
+<parameter_description> location to store the DND protocol in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11610,6 +9873,7 @@ Offscreen window and children of them can never have native windows.
Some backends may not support native child windows.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11620,7 +9884,6 @@ Some backends may not support native child windows.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the window has a native window, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -11646,72 +9909,24 @@ user-readable strings in GDK/GTK+). @title may not be %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_get_screen">
<description>
-Saves pixbuf in format @type by feeding the produced data to a
-callback. Can be used when you want to store the image to something
-other than a file, such as an in-memory buffer or a socket.
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors
-include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and whatever the save
-function generates.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
+Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="save_func">
-<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
-the save routine generates.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
+<return> the screen for which this colormap was created.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_drawable">
-<description>
-Sets the drawable the renderer draws to.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description>the new target drawable, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_flush">
<description>
Flush all outstanding cached operations on a window, leaving the
@@ -11747,6 +9962,7 @@ Since: 2.18
Gets the next #GdkEvent to be processed for @display, fetching events from the
windowing system if necessary.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11758,7 +9974,6 @@ windowing system if necessary.
<return> the next #GdkEvent to be processed, or %NULL if no events
are pending. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with gdk_event_free().
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -11773,7 +9988,7 @@ the frame) in root window coordinates, use gdk_window_get_origin().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="rect">
@@ -11802,9 +10017,11 @@ Set the fill mode for a graphics context.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_supports_shapes">
+<function name="gdk_display_get_name">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
+Gets the name of the display.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11813,9 +10030,9 @@ Returns: %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if shaped windows are supported
+<return> a string representing the display name. This string is owned
+by GDK and should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -11836,49 +10053,6 @@ any visual.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap">
-<description>
-Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
-and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
-corresponding tresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
-function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
-given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf(), and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
-
-The pixmap that is created uses the #GdkColormap specified by @colormap.
-This colormap must match the colormap of the window where the pixmap
-will eventually be used or an error will result.
-
-If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
-to %NULL.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkColormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
-or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
-or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
-<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_set_startup_id">
<description>
When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_startup_id()
@@ -11901,15 +10075,17 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_win32_drawable_release_dc">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
<description>
-Releases the reference count for the DC
-from _gdk_win32_drawable_acquire_dc()
+Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
+for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
+itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
+the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a Win32 #GdkDrawable implementation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11918,7 +10094,11 @@ from _gdk_win32_drawable_acquire_dc()
<function name="gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name_for_display">
<description>
-Return value: a X atom for a #GdkDisplay
+Returns the X atom for a #GdkDisplay corresponding to @atom_name.
+This function caches the result, so if called repeatedly it is much
+faster than XInternAtom(), which is a round trip to the server each time.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11933,60 +10113,44 @@ Return value: a X atom for a #GdkDisplay
</parameters>
<return> a X atom for a #GdkDisplay
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_system_visual">
-<description>
-Get the system's default visual for @screen.
-This is the visual for the root window of the display.
-The return value should not be freed.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>the system visual
-
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixmap_foreign_new_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_keep_below">
<description>
-Wraps a native pixmap in a #GdkPixmap.
-This may fail if the pixmap has been destroyed.
+Set if @window must be kept below other windows. If the
+window was already below, then this function does nothing.
-For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
-<type>XID</type>.
+On X11, asks the window manager to keep @window below, if the window
+manager supports this operation. Not all window managers support
+this, and some deliberately ignore it or don't have a concept of
+"keep below"; so you can't rely on the window being kept below.
+But it will happen with most standard window managers,
+and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> The #GdkDisplay where @anid is located.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anid">
-<parameter_description> a native pixmap handle.
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly-created #GdkPixmap wrapper for the
-native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_plug_name">
<description>
-Returns: a newly-allocated string containing the name of the monitor,
+Returns the output name of the specified monitor.
+Usually something like VGA, DVI, or TV, not the actual
+product name of the display device.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12002,32 +10166,81 @@ Returns: a newly-allocated string containing the name of the monitor,
<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the monitor,
or %NULL if the name cannot be determined
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drawable_set_data">
+<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask">
<description>
-This function is equivalent to g_object_set_data(),
-the #GObject variant should be used instead.
+Like gdk_window_shape_combine_mask(), but the shape applies
+only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
+the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
+mask will be passed on the window below @window.
+
+An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
+The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
+invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
+and the input shape controls where the window is
+"clickable".
+
+On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
+shape extension.
+
+On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
+function does nothing.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> name to store the data under
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> shape mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> arbitrary data
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X position of shape mask with respect to @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_func">
-<parameter_description>function to free @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y position of shape mask with respect to @window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_x11_display_set_cursor_theme">
+<description>
+Sets the cursor theme from which the images for cursor
+should be taken.
+
+If the windowing system supports it, existing cursors created
+with gdk_cursor_new(), gdk_cursor_new_for_display() and
+gdk_cursor_new_for_name() are updated to reflect the theme
+change. Custom cursors constructed with gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap()
+or gdk_cursor_new_from_pixbuf() will have to be handled
+by the application (GTK+ applications can learn about
+cursor theme changes by listening for change notification
+for the corresponding #GtkSetting).
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="theme">
+<parameter_description> the name of the cursor theme to use, or %NULL to unset
+a previously set value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the cursor size to use, or 0 to keep the previous size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12036,7 +10249,8 @@ the #GObject variant should be used instead.
<function name="gdk_x11_colormap_get_xcolormap">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
+Returns the X colormap belonging to a #GdkColormap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12049,44 +10263,22 @@ Return value: an Xlib <type>Colormap</type>.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask">
+<function name="gdk_drawable_get_depth">
<description>
-Creates a pixmap and a mask bitmap which are returned in the @pixmap_return
-and @mask_return arguments, respectively, and renders a pixbuf and its
-corresponding thresholded alpha mask to them. This is merely a convenience
-function; applications that need to render pixbufs with dither offsets or to
-given drawables should use gdk_draw_pixbuf() and gdk_pixbuf_render_threshold_alpha().
-
-The pixmap that is created is created for the colormap returned
-by gdk_rgb_get_colormap(). You normally will want to instead use
-the actual colormap for a widget, and use
-gdk_pixbuf_render_pixmap_and_mask_for_colormap().
+Obtains the bit depth of the drawable, that is, the number of bits
+that make up a pixel in the drawable's visual. Examples are 8 bits
+per pixel, 24 bits per pixel, etc.
-If the pixbuf does not have an alpha channel, then * mask_return will be set
-to %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created pixmap,
-or %NULL if the pixmap is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_return">
-<parameter_description> Location to store a pointer to the created mask,
-or %NULL if the mask is not needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha_threshold">
-<parameter_description> Threshold value for opacity values.
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of bits per pixel
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_offscreen_window_set_embedder">
@@ -12114,26 +10306,14 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_win32_drawable_finish">
-<description>
-Releases any resources allocated internally for the drawable.
-This is called when the drawable becomes unusable
-(gdk_window_destroy() for a window, or the refcount going to
-zero for a pixmap.)
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a Win32 #GdkDrawable implementation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_supports_clipboard_persistence">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the display supports clipboard persistance.
+Returns whether the speicifed display supports clipboard
+persistance; i.e. if it's possible to store the clipboard data after an
+application has quit. On X11 this checks if a clipboard daemon is
+running.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12144,7 +10324,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the display supports clipboard persistance.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the display supports clipboard persistance.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -12165,168 +10344,27 @@ gdk_window_show_unraised()).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_font_options">
-<description>
-Gets any options previously set with gdk_screen_set_font_options().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current font options, or %NULL if no default
-font options have been set.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_at_scale">
+<function name="gdk_color_white">
<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
-
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
-from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
-%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
-the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally
-preserving the image's aspect ratio. When preserving the aspect ratio,
-a @width of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the exact given
-height, and a @height of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the
-exact given width. When not preserving aspect ratio, a @width or
- height of -1 means to not scale the image at all in that dimension.
-
-The stream is not closed.
+Returns the white color for a given colormap. The resulting
+value has already allocated been allocated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the location to store the color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
-conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
-not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
-the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
-then composites the rectangle (@dest_x ,@dest_y, @dest_width,
- dest_height) of the resulting image with a checkboard of the
-colors @color1 and @color2 and renders it onto the destination
-image.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple() for a simpler variant of this
-function suitable for many tasks.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_x">
-<parameter_description> the X offset for the checkboard (origin of checkboard is at - check_x, - check_y)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_y">
-<parameter_description> the Y offset for the checkboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_size">
-<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color1">
-<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color2">
-<parameter_description> the color of the other check
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_wcstombs">
<description>
Converts a wide character string to a multi-byte string.
@@ -12352,6 +10390,7 @@ longer needed.
Establish a callback when a condition becomes true on
a file descriptor.
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_io_add_watch_full() on a #GIOChannel
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12380,7 +10419,6 @@ handler is removed.
<return> a tag that can later be used as an argument to
gdk_input_remove().
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_io_add_watch_full() on a #GIOChannel
</return>
</function>
@@ -12390,14 +10428,14 @@ Gets the default #GdkDisplay. This is a convenience
function for
<literal>gdk_display_manager_get_default_display (gdk_display_manager_get ())</literal>.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL if there is no default
+<return> a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL if there is no default
display.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -12408,6 +10446,7 @@ specified #GdkWindow, or %NULL. If the return value is %NULL then
there is no custom cursor set on the specified window, and it is
using the cursor for its parent window.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12420,7 +10459,6 @@ using the cursor for its parent window.
by the #GdkWindow and should not be unreferenced directly. Use
gdk_window_set_cursor() to unset the cursor of the window
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -12472,7 +10510,8 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_direction">
<description>
-Returns: %PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR or %PANGO_DIRECTION_RTL
+Returns the direction of effective layout of the keymap.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12510,123 +10549,38 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_mime_type">
+<function name="gdk_event_send_client_message_for_display">
<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
-image data as if it were an image of mime type @mime_type, instead of
-identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
-the image isn't the expected mime type, for loading image formats
-that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
-the user manually forces a specific mime type.
-
-The list of supported mime types depends on what image loaders
-are installed, but typically "image/png", "image/jpeg", "image/gif",
-"image/tiff" and "image/x-xpixmap" are among the supported mime types.
-To obtain the full list of supported mime types, call
-gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types() on each of the #GdkPixbufFormat
-structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the mime type to be loaded
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+On X11, sends an X ClientMessage event to a given window. On
+Windows, sends a message registered with the name
+GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE.
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_flip">
-<description>
-Flips a pixbuf horizontally or vertically and returns the
-result in a new pixbuf.
+This could be used for communicating between different
+applications, though the amount of data is limited to 20 bytes on
+X11, and to just four bytes on Windows.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for the window where the message is to be sent.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="horizontal">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to flip horizontally, %FALSE to flip vertically
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent to send, which should be a #GdkEventClient.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_event_get_graphics_expose">
-<description>
-Waits for a GraphicsExpose or NoExpose event from the X server.
-This is used in the #GtkText and #GtkCList widgets in GTK+ to make sure any
-GraphicsExpose events are handled before the widget is scrolled.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkWindow to wait for the events for.
+<parameter name="winid">
+<parameter_description> the window to send the client message to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkEventExpose if a GraphicsExpose was received, or %NULL if a
-NoExpose event was received.
-
-Deprecated: 2.18:
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_has_alpha">
-<description>
-Queries whether a pixbuf has an alpha channel (opacity information).
-
+<return> non-zero on success.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if it has an alpha channel, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_merge_child_input_shapes">
-<description>
-Merges the input shape masks for any child windows into the
-input shape mask for @window. i.e. the union of all input masks
-for @window and its children will become the new input mask
-for @window. See gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask().
-
-This function is distinct from gdk_window_set_child_input_shapes()
-because it includes @window's input shape mask in the set of
-shapes to be merged.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_region_destroy">
<description>
Destroys a #GdkRegion.
@@ -12641,25 +10595,6 @@ Destroys a #GdkRegion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_drawable_ref_cairo_surface">
-<description>
-Obtains a #cairo_surface_t for the given drawable. If a
-#cairo_surface_t for the drawable already exists, it will be
-referenced, otherwise a new surface will be created.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly referenced #cairo_surface_t that points
-to @drawable. Unref with cairo_surface_destroy()
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_event_copy">
<description>
Copies a #GdkEvent, copying or incrementing the reference count of the
@@ -12706,40 +10641,6 @@ See gdk_text_width().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_saturate_and_pixelate">
-<description>
-Modifies saturation and optionally pixelates @src, placing the result in
- dest @src and @dest may be the same pixbuf with no ill effects. If
- saturation is 1.0 then saturation is not changed. If it's less than 1.0,
-saturation is reduced (the image turns toward grayscale); if greater than
-1.0, saturation is increased (the image gets more vivid colors). If @pixelate
-is %TRUE, then pixels are faded in a checkerboard pattern to create a
-pixelated image. @src and @dest must have the same image format, size, and
-rowstride.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> source image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> place to write modified version of @src
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="saturation">
-<parameter_description> saturation factor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixelate">
-<parameter_description> whether to pixelate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_show_unraised">
<description>
Shows a #GdkWindow onscreen, but does not modify its stacking
@@ -12784,6 +10685,10 @@ when you are done.
<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_at_window">
<description>
+Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the
+bounding rectangle of @window resides.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12799,16 +10704,14 @@ when you are done.
<return> the monitor number in which most of @window is located,
or if @window does not intersect any monitors, a monitor,
close to @window.
-the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the
-bounding rectangle of @window resides.
-
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_caps_lock_state">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if Caps Lock is on
+Returns whether the Caps Lock modifer is locked.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12819,85 +10722,28 @@ Returns: %TRUE if Caps Lock is on
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if Caps Lock is on
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap">
+<function name="gdk_drag_begin">
<description>
-Creates a new cursor from a given pixmap and mask. Both the pixmap and mask
-must have a depth of 1 (i.e. each pixel has only 2 values - on or off).
-The standard cursor size is 16 by 16 pixels. You can create a bitmap
-from inline data as in the below example.
-
-<example><title>Creating a custom cursor</title>
-<programlisting>
-/<!-- -->* This data is in X bitmap format, and can be created with the 'bitmap'
-utility. *<!-- -->/
-#define cursor1_width 16
-#define cursor1_height 16
-static unsigned char cursor1_bits[] = {
-0x80, 0x01, 0x40, 0x02, 0x20, 0x04, 0x10, 0x08, 0x08, 0x10, 0x04, 0x20,
-0x82, 0x41, 0x41, 0x82, 0x41, 0x82, 0x82, 0x41, 0x04, 0x20, 0x08, 0x10,
-0x10, 0x08, 0x20, 0x04, 0x40, 0x02, 0x80, 0x01};
-
-static unsigned char cursor1mask_bits[] = {
-0x80, 0x01, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x60, 0x06, 0x30, 0x0c, 0x18, 0x18, 0x8c, 0x31,
-0xc6, 0x63, 0x63, 0xc6, 0x63, 0xc6, 0xc6, 0x63, 0x8c, 0x31, 0x18, 0x18,
-0x30, 0x0c, 0x60, 0x06, 0xc0, 0x03, 0x80, 0x01};
-
-
-GdkCursor *cursor;
-GdkPixmap *source, *mask;
-GdkColor fg = { 0, 65535, 0, 0 }; /<!-- -->* Red. *<!-- -->/
-GdkColor bg = { 0, 0, 0, 65535 }; /<!-- -->* Blue. *<!-- -->/
-
-
-source = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1_bits,
-cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
-mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data (NULL, cursor1mask_bits,
-cursor1_width, cursor1_height);
-cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap (source, mask, &fg, &bg, 8, 8);
-g_object_unref (source);
-g_object_unref (mask);
-
+Starts a drag and creates a new drag context for it.
-gdk_window_set_cursor (widget->window, cursor);
-</programlisting>
-</example>
+This function is called by the drag source.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the cursor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> the pixmap specifying the mask, which must be the same size as
- source
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fg">
-<parameter_description> the foreground color, used for the bits in the source which are 1.
-The color does not have to be allocated first.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bg">
-<parameter_description> the background color, used for the bits in the source which are 0.
-The color does not have to be allocated first.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the source window for this drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the vertical offset of the 'hotspot' of the cursor.
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the offered targets, as list of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkCursor.
+<return> a newly created #GdkDragContext.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12905,14 +10751,14 @@ The color does not have to be allocated first.
<description>
Gets the singleton #GdkDisplayManager object.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>The global #GdkDisplayManager singleton; gdk_parse_pargs(),
+<return> The global #GdkDisplayManager singleton; gdk_parse_pargs(),
gdk_init(), or gdk_init_check() must have been called first.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -12990,28 +10836,12 @@ to a drop initiated by the drag source.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_scalable">
-<description>
-Return value: whether this image format is scalable.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether this image format is scalable.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_get_width_mm">
<description>
Gets the width of @screen in millimeters.
Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13022,52 +10852,16 @@ Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct.
</parameters>
<return> the width of @screen in millimeters.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_add_alpha">
-<description>
-Takes an existing pixbuf and adds an alpha channel to it.
-If the existing pixbuf already had an alpha channel, the channel
-values are copied from the original; otherwise, the alpha channel
-is initialized to 255 (full opacity).
-
-If @substitute_color is %TRUE, then the color specified by (@r, @g, @b) will be
-assigned zero opacity. That is, if you pass (255, 255, 255) for the
-substitute color, all white pixels will become fully transparent.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="substitute_color">
-<parameter_description> Whether to set a color to zero opacity. If this
-is %FALSE, then the (@r, @g, @b) arguments will be ignored.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="r">
-<parameter_description> Red value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="g">
-<parameter_description> Green value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Blue value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_screen_set_resolution">
<description>
+Sets the resolution for font handling on the screen. This is a
+scale factor between points specified in a #PangoFontDescription
+and cairo units. The default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point
+font will be 13 units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3).
+
Since: 2.10
</description>
@@ -13079,11 +10873,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<parameter name="dpi">
<parameter_description> the resolution in "dots per inch". (Physical inches aren't actually
involved; the terminology is conventional.)
-
-Sets the resolution for font handling on the screen. This is a
-scale factor between points specified in a #PangoFontDescription
-and cairo units. The default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point
-font will be 13 units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13214,6 +11003,7 @@ Looks up the #GdkWindow that wraps the given native window handle.
For example in the X backend, a native window handle is an Xlib
<type>XID</type>.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13229,111 +11019,16 @@ For example in the X backend, a native window handle is an Xlib
<return> the #GdkWindow wrapper for the native window,
or %NULL if there is none.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf structure and allocates a buffer for it. The
-buffer has an optimal rowstride. Note that the buffer is not cleared;
-you will have to fill it completely yourself.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorspace">
-<parameter_description> Color space for image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> Whether the image should have transparency information
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
-<parameter_description> Number of bits per color sample
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
-%NULL if not enough memory could be allocated for the image buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance">
-<description>
-Possibly advances an animation to a new frame. Chooses the frame based
-on the start time passed to gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter().
-
- current_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
-must be greater than or equal to the time passed to
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter(), and must increase or remain
-unchanged each time gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() is
-called. That is, you can't go backward in time; animations only
-play forward.
-
-As a shortcut, pass %NULL for the current time and g_get_current_time()
-will be invoked on your behalf. So you only need to explicitly pass
- current_time if you're doing something odd like playing the animation
-at double speed.
-
-If this function returns %FALSE, there's no need to update the animation
-display, assuming the display had been rendered prior to advancing;
-if %TRUE, you need to call gdk_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() and update the
-display with the new pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_time">
-<parameter_description> current time
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the image may need updating
-
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
-<description>
-Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
-using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_new">
<description>
Creates a new #PangoRenderer for @screen. Normally you can use the
results of gdk_pango_renderer_get_default() rather than creating a new
renderer.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13344,7 +11039,6 @@ renderer.
</parameters>
<return> a newly created #PangoRenderer. Free with g_object_unref().
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -13352,6 +11046,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets the startup notification ID for a display.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13362,37 +11057,48 @@ Gets the startup notification ID for a display.
</parameters>
<return> the startup notification ID for @display
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_string_measure">
+<function name="gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint">
<description>
-Determines the distance from the origin to the rightmost
-portion of a nul-terminated string when drawn. This is not the
-correct value for determining the origin of the next
-portion when drawing text in multiple pieces.
-See gdk_string_width().
+This function is specific to the X11 backend of GDK, and indicates
+whether the window manager supports a certain hint from the
+Extended Window Manager Hints Specification. You can find this
+specification on
+<ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org">http://www.freedesktop.org</ulink>.
+When using this function, keep in mind that the window manager
+can change over time; so you shouldn't use this function in
+a way that impacts persistent application state. A common bug
+is that your application can start up before the window manager
+does when the user logs in, and before the window manager starts
+gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint() will return %FALSE for every property.
+You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
+a window manager change.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkFont
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the nul-terminated string to measure.
+<parameter name="property">
+<parameter_description> a property atom.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the right bearing of the string in pixels.
+<return> %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_device_get_core_pointer">
<description>
-Return value: the core pointer device; this is owned by the
+Returns the core pointer device for the default display.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13415,6 +11121,7 @@ allocated memory in dynamically loaded modules, if you expect to
ever unload the module again (e.g. do not use this function in
GTK+ theme engines).
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13425,7 +11132,6 @@ GTK+ theme engines).
</parameters>
<return> the atom corresponding to @atom_name
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -13437,6 +11143,7 @@ Note that the return value may be owned by a different
process if a foreign window was previously created for that
window, but a new foreign window will never be created by this call.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13453,117 +11160,51 @@ window, but a new foreign window will never be created by this call.
window known to the current process, the #GdkWindow that owns the
selection, otherwise %NULL.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_n_channels">
-<description>
-Queries the number of channels of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Number of channels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream">
+<function name="gdk_device_get_history">
<description>
-Saves @pixbuf to an output stream.
-
-Supported file formats are currently "jpeg", "tiff", "png", "ico" or
-"bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer() for more details.
-
-The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation from another
-thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error %GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED
-will be returned. Other possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The stream is not closed.
+Obtains the motion history for a device; given a starting and
+ending timestamp, return all events in the motion history for
+the device in the given range of time. Some windowing systems
+do not support motion history, in which case, %FALSE will
+be returned. (This is not distinguishable from the case where
+motion history is supported and no events were found.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GOutputStream to save the pixbuf to
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window with respect to which which the event coordinates will be reported
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> starting timestamp for range of events to return
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
+<parameter name="stop">
+<parameter_description> ending timestamp for the range of events to return
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="events">
+<parameter_description> location to store a newly-allocated array of #GdkTimeCoord, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
+<parameter name="n_events">
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of @events, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the pixbuf was saved successfully, %FALSE if an
-error was set.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
+at least one event was found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_composited">
-<description>
-Sets a #GdkWindow as composited, or unsets it. Composited
-windows do not automatically have their contents drawn to
-the screen. Drawing is redirected to an offscreen buffer
-and an expose event is emitted on the parent of the composited
-window. It is the responsibility of the parent's expose handler
-to manually merge the off-screen content onto the screen in
-whatever way it sees fit. See <xref linkend="composited-window-example"/>
-for an example.
-
-It only makes sense for child windows to be composited; see
-gdk_window_set_opacity() if you need translucent toplevel
-windows.
-
-An additional effect of this call is that the area of this
-window is no longer clipped from regions marked for
-invalidation on its parent. Draws done on the parent
-window are also no longer clipped by the child.
-
-This call is only supported on some systems (currently,
-only X11 with new enough Xcomposite and Xdamage extensions).
-You must call gdk_display_supports_composite() to check if
-setting a window as composited is supported before
-attempting to do so.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="composited">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to set the window as composited
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_gc_set_ts_origin">
<description>
Set the origin when using tiles or stipples with
@@ -13683,6 +11324,7 @@ assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE.
See gdk_threads_add_idle_full().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13697,7 +11339,6 @@ See gdk_threads_add_idle_full().
</parameters>
<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -13727,43 +11368,6 @@ window in its implementation, for example.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_rowstride">
-<description>
-Queries the rowstride of a pixbuf, which is the number of bytes between the start of a row
-and the start of the next row.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Distance between row starts.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_win32_drawable_acquire_dc">
-<description>
-Gets a DC with the given drawable selected into
-it.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a Win32 #GdkDrawable implementation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The DC, on success. Otherwise
-%NULL. If this function succeeded
-_gdk_win32_drawable_release_dc() must be called
-release the DC when you are done using it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_display_manager_set_default_display">
<description>
Sets @display as the default display.
@@ -13799,68 +11403,6 @@ not public API and must not be used by applications.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colors_alloc">
-<description>
-Allocates colors from a colormap. This function
-is obsolete. See gdk_colormap_alloc_colors().
-For full documentation of the fields, see
-the Xlib documentation for <function>XAllocColorCells()</function>.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="contiguous">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the colors should be allocated
-in contiguous color cells.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="planes">
-<parameter_description> an array in which to store the plane masks.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="nplanes">
-<parameter_description> the number of planes to allocate. (Or zero,
-to indicate that the color allocation should not be planar.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels">
-<parameter_description> an array into which to store allocated pixel values.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="npixels">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels in each plane to allocate.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation was successful
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GdkDisplay">
-<description>
-The ::closed signal is emitted when the connection to the windowing
-system for @display is closed.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_error">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the display was closed due to an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_foreign_new">
<description>
Wraps a native window for the default display in a #GdkWindow.
@@ -13948,7 +11490,10 @@ you should undo those modifications before calling
<function name="gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name">
<description>
-Return value: a X atom for GDK's default display.
+Returns the X atom for GDK's default display corresponding to @atom_name.
+This function caches the result, so if called repeatedly it is much
+faster than XInternAtom(), which is a round trip to the server each time.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13975,40 +11520,6 @@ Clears an entire @window to the background color or background pixmap.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_write">
-<description>
-This will cause a pixbuf loader to parse the next @count bytes of
-an image. It will return %TRUE if the data was loaded successfully,
-and %FALSE if an error occurred. In the latter case, the loader
-will be closed, and will not accept further writes. If %FALSE is
-returned, @error will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-or #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buf">
-<parameter_description> Pointer to image data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> Length of the @buf buffer in bytes.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the write was successful, or %FALSE if the loader
-cannot parse the buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_freeze_toplevel_updates_libgtk_only">
<description>
Temporarily freezes a window and all its descendants such that it won't
@@ -14042,6 +11553,7 @@ in a GTK+ expose event handler cannot be cached and reused
between different expose events.
</para></note>
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14053,40 +11565,34 @@ between different expose events.
<return> A newly created Cairo context. Free with
cairo_destroy() when you are done drawing.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_spawn_command_line_on_screen">
+<function name="gdk_window_set_icon_name">
<description>
-Like g_spawn_command_line_async(), except the child process is
-spawned in such an environment that on calling gdk_display_open()
-it would be returned a #GdkDisplay with @screen as the default
-screen.
+Windows may have a name used while minimized, distinct from the
+name they display in their titlebar. Most of the time this is a bad
+idea from a user interface standpoint. But you can set such a name
+with this function, if you like.
-This is useful for applications which wish to launch an application
-on a specific screen.
+After calling this with a non-%NULL @name, calls to gdk_window_set_title()
+will not update the icon title.
+Using %NULL for @name unsets the icon title; further calls to
+gdk_window_set_title() will again update the icon title as well.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="command_line">
-<parameter_description> a command line
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of window while iconified (minimized)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE if error is set.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_event_peek">
@@ -14104,76 +11610,6 @@ gdk_event_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_display_peek_event">
-<description>
-Gets a copy of the first #GdkEvent in the @display's event queue, without
-removing the event from the queue. (Note that this function will
-not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events
-that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL
-if no events are in the queue. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
-gdk_event_free().
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf by scaling @src to @dest_width x
- dest_height and compositing the result with a checkboard of colors
- color1 and @color2.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_size">
-<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color1">
-<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color2">
-<parameter_description> the color of the other check
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_gc_copy">
<description>
Copy the set of values from one graphics context
@@ -14211,7 +11647,8 @@ function.
<function name="gdk_colormap_get_visual">
<description>
-Return value: the visual of the colormap.
+Returns the visual for which a given colormap was created.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14245,7 +11682,10 @@ window.)
<function name="gdk_screen_get_height_mm">
<description>
-Returns: the heigth of @screen in millimeters.
+Returns the height of @screen in millimeters.
+Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14256,13 +11696,13 @@ Returns: the heigth of @screen in millimeters.
</parameters>
<return> the heigth of @screen in millimeters.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_gc_get_xdisplay">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
+Returns the display of a #GdkGC.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14275,78 +11715,6 @@ Return value: an Xlib <type>Display*</type>.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y.
-This gives an image in the coordinates of the destination pixbuf.
-The rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width, @dest_height)
-is then composited onto the corresponding rectangle of the
-original destination image.
-
-When the destination rectangle contains parts not in the source
-image, the data at the edges of the source image is replicated
-to infinity.
-
-<figure id="pixbuf-composite-diagram">
-<title>Compositing of pixbufs</title>
-<graphic fileref="composite.png" format="PNG"/>
-</figure>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_gc_new">
<description>
Create a new graphics context with default values.
@@ -14498,36 +11866,6 @@ should be drawn)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_option">
-<description>
-Looks up @key in the list of options that may have been attached to the
- pixbuf when it was loaded, or that may have been attached by another
-function using gdk_pixbuf_set_option().
-
-For instance, the ANI loader provides "Title" and "Artist" options.
-The ICO, XBM, and XPM loaders provide "x_hot" and "y_hot" hot-spot
-options for cursor definitions. The PNG loader provides the tEXt ancillary
-chunk key/value pairs as options. Since 2.12, the TIFF and JPEG loaders
-return an "orientation" option string that corresponds to the embedded
-TIFF/Exif orientation tag (if present).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the value associated with @key. This is a nul-terminated
-string that should not be freed or %NULL if @key was not found.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_region_union_with_rect">
<description>
Sets the area of @region to the union of the areas of @region and
@@ -14548,45 +11886,27 @@ either @region or @rect.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_rotate_simple">
+<function name="gdk_screen_is_composited">
<description>
-Rotates a pixbuf by a multiple of 90 degrees, and returns the
-result in a new pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle to rotate by
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
+Returns whether windows with an RGBA visual can reasonably
+be expected to have their alpha channel drawn correctly on
+the screen.
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_display_get_n_screens">
-<description>
-Gets the number of screen managed by the @display.
+On X11 this function returns whether a compositing manager is
+compositing @screen.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of screens.
+<return> Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
+expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -14611,14 +11931,14 @@ symbol is shifted, so when comparing a key press to a
be masked out.
</para>
<informalexample><programlisting>
-/* We want to ignore irrelevant modifiers like ScrollLock */
-#define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
+/* We want to ignore irrelevant modifiers like ScrollLock */
+#define ALL_ACCELS_MASK (GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)
gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state (keymap, event->hardware_keycode,
event->state, event->group,
&keyval, NULL, NULL, &consumed);
if (keyval == GDK_PLUS &&
(event->state & ~consumed & ALL_ACCELS_MASK) == GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
-/* Control was pressed */
+/* Control was pressed */
</programlisting></informalexample>
<para>
An older interpretation @consumed_modifiers was that it contained
@@ -14626,10 +11946,10 @@ all modifiers that might affect the translation of the key;
this allowed accelerators to be stored with irrelevant consumed
modifiers, by doing:</para>
<informalexample><programlisting>
-/* XXX Don't do this XXX */
+/* XXX Don't do this XXX */
if (keyval == accel_keyval &&
(event->state & ~consumed & ALL_ACCELS_MASK) == (accel_mods & ~consumed))
-/* Accelerator was pressed */
+/* Accelerator was pressed */
</programlisting></informalexample>
<para>
However, this did not work if multi-modifier combinations were
@@ -14649,7 +11969,7 @@ not <literal><Control><Shift>plus</literal>,
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="keymap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkKeymap, or %NULL to use the default
+<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap, or %NULL to use the default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hardware_keycode">
@@ -14665,19 +11985,19 @@ not <literal><Control><Shift>plus</literal>,
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description>return location for keyval, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for keyval, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="effective_group">
-<parameter_description>return location for effective group, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for effective group, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="level">
-<parameter_description> return location for level, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for level, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="consumed_modifiers">
-<parameter_description> return location for modifiers that were used to
+<parameter_description> return location for modifiers that were used to
determine the group or level, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -14760,7 +12080,7 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14827,42 +12147,52 @@ then draw the rectangle.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_width">
+<function name="gdk_window_end_paint">
<description>
-Queries the width of a pixbuf.
+Indicates that the backing store created by the most recent call to
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() should be copied onscreen and
+deleted, leaving the next-most-recent backing store or no backing
+store at all as the active paint region. See
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() for full details. It is an error to
+call this function without a matching
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() first.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Width in pixels.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_x11_display_ungrab">
+<function name="gdk_event_get_graphics_expose">
<description>
-Ungrab @display after it has been grabbed with
-gdk_x11_display_grab().
+Waits for a GraphicsExpose or NoExpose event from the X server.
+This is used in the #GtkText and #GtkCList widgets in GTK+ to make sure any
+GraphicsExpose events are handled before the widget is scrolled.
-Since: 2.2
+Deprecated: 2.18:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkWindow to wait for the events for.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkEventExpose if a GraphicsExpose was received, or %NULL if a
+NoExpose event was received.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_visual_get_xvisual">
<description>
-Return value: an Xlib <type>Visual*</type>.
+Returns the X visual belonging to a #GdkVisual.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14883,6 +12213,7 @@ display. This is only useful for such low-level tools as an
event recorder. Applications should never have any
reason to use this facility.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14899,7 +12230,6 @@ or %NULL to restore the default table.
</parameters>
<return> the previous pointer hook table
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -14922,7 +12252,7 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description>a #GIcon, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GIcon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15039,23 +12369,6 @@ and the new value in the remaining fields.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_drawable_get_subwindow_scratch_gc">
-<description>
-Return value: A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkGC suitable for drawing on @drawable
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_get_children">
<description>
Gets the list of children of @window known to GDK.
@@ -15078,63 +12391,21 @@ list need not be.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_get_protocol">
+<function name="gdk_display_get_n_screens">
<description>
-Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
+Gets the number of screen managed by the @display.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="xid">
-<parameter_description> the windowing system id of the destination window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="protocol">
-<parameter_description> location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the windowing system specific id for the window where
-the drop should happen. This may be @xid or the id of a proxy
-window, or zero if @xid doesn't support Drag and Drop.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_savev">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a file in @type, which is currently "jpeg", "png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp".
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned.
-See gdk_pixbuf_save () for more details.
-
+<return> number of screens.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> name of file to save.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
</return>
</function>
@@ -15142,6 +12413,7 @@ See gdk_pixbuf_save () for more details.
<description>
Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15152,7 +12424,6 @@ Deprecated function; use g_object_ref() instead.
</parameters>
<return> the image
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15160,6 +12431,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref() instead.
<description>
Sets the #GdkWindow @owner as the current owner of the selection @selection.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15191,7 +12463,6 @@ owner, the current owner will be sent a SelectionClear event.
<return> %TRUE if the selection owner was successfully changed to owner,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -15216,33 +12487,10 @@ native pixmap or %NULL if the pixmap has been destroyed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_serialize">
-<description>
-Serializes a #GdkPixdata structure into a byte stream.
-The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
-#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
-bytes the structure points to.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GdkPixdata structure to serialize.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream_length_p">
-<parameter_description> location to store the resulting stream length in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-allocated string containing the serialized
-#GdkPixdata structure.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_x11_image_get_ximage">
<description>
-Return value: an <type>XImage*</type>.
+Returns the X image belonging to a #GdkImage.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15259,6 +12507,7 @@ Return value: an <type>XImage*</type>.
<description>
Gets the height of @screen in pixels
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15269,7 +12518,6 @@ Gets the height of @screen in pixels
</parameters>
<return> the height of @screen in pixels.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -15287,22 +12535,22 @@ corner of @window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>return location for X coordinate of pointer or %NULL to not
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of pointer or %NULL to not
return the X coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of pointer or %NULL to not
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of pointer or %NULL to not
return the Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>return location for modifier mask or %NULL to not return the
+<parameter_description> return location for modifier mask or %NULL to not return the
modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the window containing the pointer (as with
+<return> the window containing the pointer (as with
gdk_window_at_pointer()), or %NULL if the window containing the
pointer isn't known to GDK
</return>
@@ -15449,17 +12697,25 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: This function is obsolete. Use gdk_draw_pixbuf() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_get_default_root_window">
+<function name="gdk_colormap_change">
<description>
-Obtains the root window (parent all other windows are inside)
-for the default display and screen.
-
+Changes the value of the first @ncolors in a private colormap
+to match the values in the <structfield>colors</structfield>
+array in the colormap. This function is obsolete and
+should not be used. See gdk_color_change().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ncolors">
+<parameter_description> the number of colors to change.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default root window
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_cairo_region">
@@ -15482,57 +12738,85 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_drag_find_window">
+<function name="gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region">
<description>
-Finds the destination window and DND protocol to use at the
-given pointer position.
+Like gdk_window_shape_combine_region(), but the shape applies
+only to event handling. Mouse events which happen while
+the pointer position corresponds to an unset bit in the
+mask will be passed on the window below @window.
-This function is called by the drag source to obtain the
- dest_window and @protocol parameters for gdk_drag_motion().
+An input shape is typically used with RGBA windows.
+The alpha channel of the window defines which pixels are
+invisible and allows for nicely antialiased borders,
+and the input shape controls where the window is
+"clickable".
+
+On the X11 platform, this requires version 1.1 of the
+shape extension.
+
+On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
+function does nothing.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDragContext.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_window">
-<parameter_description> a window which may be at the pointer position, but
-should be ignored, since it is put up by the drag source as an icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x_root">
-<parameter_description> the x position of the pointer in root coordinates.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y_root">
-<parameter_description> the y position of the pointer in root coordinates.
+<parameter name="shape_region">
+<parameter_description> region of window to be non-transparent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_window">
-<parameter_description>location to store the destination window in.
+<parameter name="offset_x">
+<parameter_description> X position of @shape_region in @window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="protocol">
-<parameter_description>location to store the DND protocol in.
+<parameter name="offset_y">
+<parameter_description> Y position of @shape_region in @window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_event_queue_remove_link">
+<function name="gdk_draw_glyphs">
<description>
-Removes a specified list node from the event queue.
+This is a low-level function; 99% of text rendering should be done
+using gdk_draw_layout() instead.
+
+A glyph is a single image in a font. This function draws a sequence of
+glyphs. To obtain a sequence of glyphs you have to understand a
+lot about internationalized text handling, which you don't want to
+understand; thus, use gdk_draw_layout() instead of this function,
+gdk_draw_layout() handles the details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="font">
+<parameter_description> font to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of baseline origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of baseline origin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="node">
-<parameter_description> node to remove
+<parameter name="glyphs">
+<parameter_description> the glyph string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15563,56 +12847,18 @@ Determines the width of a given string.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_get_toplevel">
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_new">
<description>
-Gets the toplevel window that's an ancestor of @window.
-
-Any window type but %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD is considered a
-toplevel window, as is a %GDK_WINDOW_CHILD window that
-has a root window as parent.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the toplevel window containing @window
-</return>
-</function>
+Creates a new #GdkAppLaunchContext.
-<function name="_gdk_x11_drawable_update_size">
-<description>
-Updates the state of the drawable (in particular the drawable's
-cairo surface) when its size has changed.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawableImplX11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_init">
-<description>
+<return> a new #GdkAppLaunchContext
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_get_window_at_pointer">
@@ -15622,6 +12868,7 @@ of the pointer in that window in @win_x, @win_y for @screen. Returns %NULL
if the window under the mouse pointer is not known to GDK (for example,
belongs to another application).
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15630,25 +12877,30 @@ belongs to another application).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="win_x">
-<parameter_description>return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative
+<parameter_description> return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative
to the window origin, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="win_y">
-<parameter_description>return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative
+<parameter_description> return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative
& to the window origin, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the window under the mouse pointer, or %NULL
+<return> the window under the mouse pointer, or %NULL
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_cursor_get_image">
<description>
-Returns: a #GdkPixbuf representing @cursor, or %NULL
+Returns a #GdkPixbuf with the image used to display the cursor.
+
+Note that depending on the capabilities of the windowing system and
+on the cursor, GDK may not be able to obtain the image data. In this
+case, %NULL is returned.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15659,7 +12911,6 @@ Returns: a #GdkPixbuf representing @cursor, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a #GdkPixbuf representing @cursor, or %NULL
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -15819,55 +13070,24 @@ windowing system. Don't worry about it unless you have to.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types">
-<description>
-Return value: a %NULL-terminated array of mime types which must be freed with
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a %NULL-terminated array of mime types which must be freed with
-g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_colormap_alloc_color">
+<function name="gdk_gc_set_stipple">
<description>
-Allocates a single color from a colormap.
-
+Set the stipple bitmap for a graphics context. The
+stipple will only be used if the fill mode is
+%GDK_STIPPLED or %GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the color to allocate. On return the
-<structfield>pixel</structfield> field will be
-filled in if allocation succeeds.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="writeable">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, the color is allocated writeable
-(their values can later be changed using gdk_color_change()).
-Writeable colors cannot be shared between applications.
+<parameter name="gc">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="best_match">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, GDK will attempt to do matching against
-existing colors if the color cannot be allocated as requested.
+<parameter name="stipple">
+<parameter_description> the new stipple bitmap.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the allocation succeeded.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_timestamp">
@@ -15918,7 +13138,12 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_x11_get_xatom_name_for_display">
<description>
-Return value: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GDK,
+Returns the name of an X atom for its display. This
+function is meant mainly for debugging, so for convenience, unlike
+XAtomName() and gdk_atom_name(), the result doesn't need to
+be freed.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15934,7 +13159,6 @@ Return value: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GDK,
<return> name of the X atom; this string is owned by GDK,
so it shouldn't be modifed or freed.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -15982,48 +13206,41 @@ of the text in characters.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size">
+<function name="gdk_window_get_root_coords">
<description>
-Causes the image to be scaled while it is loaded. The desired
-image size can be determined relative to the original size of
-the image by calling gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size() from a
-signal handler for the ::size-prepared signal.
-
-Attempts to set the desired image size are ignored after the
-emission of the ::size-prepared signal.
+Obtains the position of a window position in root
+window coordinates. This is similar to
+gdk_window_get_origin() but allows you go pass
+in any position in the window, not just the origin.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The desired width of the image being loaded.
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate in window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The desired height of the image being loaded.
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate in window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_screen_height_mm">
-<description>
-Return value: the height of the default screen in millimeters,
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the height of the default screen in millimeters,
-though it is not always correct.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_add_filter">
<description>
Adds an event filter to @window, allowing you to intercept events
@@ -16144,6 +13361,7 @@ This functionality is not implemented in the Windows backend.
For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
gdk_window_set_opacity().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16152,10 +13370,9 @@ gdk_window_set_opacity().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a colormap to use for windows with
+<return> a colormap to use for windows with
an alpha channel or %NULL if the capability is not available.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -16249,27 +13466,6 @@ gdk_image_set_colormap().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_animation">
-<description>
-Queries the #GdkPixbufAnimation that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
-In general it only makes sense to call this function after the "area-prepared"
-signal has been emitted by the loader. If the loader doesn't have enough
-bytes yet (hasn't emitted the "area-prepared" signal) this function will
-return %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GdkPixbufAnimation that the loader is loading, or %NULL if
- not enough data has been read to determine the information.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_font_load_for_display">
<description>
Loads a font for use on @display.
@@ -16294,82 +13490,27 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_cursor_new_for_display">
+<function name="gdk_screen_list_visuals">
<description>
-Creates a new cursor from the set of builtin cursors.
-Some useful ones are:
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_ptr.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_PTR (right-facing arrow)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="crosshair.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_CROSSHAIR (crosshair)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="xterm.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_XTERM (I-beam)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="watch.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_WATCH (busy)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="fleur.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_FLEUR (for moving objects)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand1.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND1 (a right-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="hand2.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_HAND2 (a left-pointing hand)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="left_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_LEFT_SIDE (resize left side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="right_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_RIGHT_SIDE (resize right side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER (resize northwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER (resize northeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_left_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER (resize southwest corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_right_corner.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER (resize southeast corner)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="top_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_TOP_SIDE (resize top side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="bottom_side.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE (resize bottom side)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_h_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW (move vertical splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-<inlinegraphic format="PNG" fileref="sb_v_double_arrow.png"></inlinegraphic> #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-#GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
-</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
+Lists the available visuals for the specified @screen.
+A visual describes a hardware image data format.
+For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
+and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
+Call g_list_free() on the return value when you're finished with it.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay for which the cursor will be created
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_type">
-<parameter_description> cursor to create
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the relevant #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkCursor
+<return> a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its
+contents
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -16394,7 +13535,9 @@ area is the set of pixels contained in @source1 but not in @source2.
<function name="gdk_x11_screen_get_window_manager_name">
<description>
-Return value: the name of the window manager screen @screen, or
+Returns the name of the window manager for @screen.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16407,13 +13550,18 @@ Return value: the name of the window manager screen @screen, or
"unknown" if the window manager is unknown. The string is owned by GDK
and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_supports_composite">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if windows may be composited.
+Returns %TRUE if gdk_window_set_composited() can be used
+to redirect drawing on the window using compositing.
+
+Currently this only works on X11 with XComposite and
+XDamage extensions available.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16424,13 +13572,13 @@ Returns: %TRUE if windows may be composited.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if windows may be composited.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_drag_get_selection">
<description>
-Return value: the selection atom.
+Returns the selection atom for the current source window.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16516,22 +13664,6 @@ Gets the #GdkVisual describing the pixel format of @drawable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_bits_per_sample">
-<description>
-Queries the number of bits per color sample in a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Number of bits per color sample.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_setting_get">
<description>
Obtains a desktop-wide setting, such as the double-click time,
@@ -16559,6 +13691,7 @@ in @value, %FALSE otherwise.
Creates a new cursor by looking up @name in the current cursor
theme.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16574,7 +13707,6 @@ theme.
<return> a new #GdkCursor, or %NULL if there is no cursor with
the given name
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -16608,48 +13740,19 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf which represents a sub-region of
- src_pixbuf The new pixbuf shares its pixels with the
-original pixbuf, so writing to one affects both.
-The new pixbuf holds a reference to @src_pixbuf, so
- src_pixbuf will not be finalized until the new pixbuf
-is finalized.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> X coord in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coord in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of region in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_scroll">
<description>
-Scroll the contents of its window, both pixels and children, by
-the given amount. Portions of the window that the scroll operation
-brings in from offscreen areas are invalidated.
+Scroll the contents of @window, both pixels and children, by the
+given amount. @window itself does not move. Portions of the window
+that the scroll operation brings in from offscreen areas are
+invalidated. The invalidated region may be bigger than what would
+strictly be necessary.
+
+For X11, a minimum area will be invalidated if the window has no
+subwindows, or if the edges of the window's parent do not extend
+beyond the edges of the window. In other cases, a multi-step process
+is used to scroll the window which may produce temporary visual
+artifacts and unnecessary invalidations.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16669,19 +13772,25 @@ brings in from offscreen areas are invalidated.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdkx_visual_get">
+<function name="gdk_app_launch_context_set_display">
<description>
-Return value: the #GdkVisual.
+Sets the display on which applications will be launched when
+using this context. See also gdk_app_launch_context_set_screen().
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="xvisualid">
-<parameter_description> a X visual id.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAppLaunchContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkVisual.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_display_pointer_ungrab">
@@ -16706,7 +13815,23 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gdk_screen_get_window_stack">
<description>
-Return value: a list of #GdkWindow<!-- -->s for the current window stack,
+Returns a #GList of #GdkWindow<!-- -->s representing the current
+window stack.
+
+On X11, this is done by inspecting the _NET_CLIENT_LIST_STACKING
+property on the root window, as described in the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink>. If the window manager does not support the
+_NET_CLIENT_LIST_STACKING hint, this function returns %NULL.
+
+On other platforms, this function may return %NULL, depending on whether
+it is implementable on that platform.
+
+The returned list is newly allocated and owns references to the
+windows it contains, so it should be freed using g_list_free() and
+its windows unrefed using g_object_unref() when no longer needed.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16718,7 +13843,6 @@ Return value: a list of #GdkWindow<!-- -->s for the current window stack,
<return> a list of #GdkWindow<!-- -->s for the current window stack,
or %NULL.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -16728,6 +13852,7 @@ Gets a visual to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an
alpha channel. See the docs for gdk_screen_get_rgba_colormap()
for caveats.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16736,10 +13861,9 @@ for caveats.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a visual to use for windows with an
+<return> a visual to use for windows with an
alpha channel or %NULL if the capability is not available.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -16785,43 +13909,40 @@ Gets the metrics of a string of wide characters.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_colormap_get_screen">
+<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_drawable">
<description>
-Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
+Sets the drawable the renderer draws to.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> the new target drawable, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen for which this colormap was created.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_urgency_hint">
+<function name="gdk_region_rectangle">
<description>
-Toggles whether a window needs the user's
-urgent attention.
+Creates a new region containing the area @rectangle.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="urgent">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the window is urgent
+<parameter name="rectangle">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new region
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_window_set_role">
@@ -16854,84 +13975,6 @@ non-interchangeable kind of window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
-<description>
-A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
-assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
-
-See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="interval">
-<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
-(1/1000ths of a second)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> function to call
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_to_csource">
-<description>
-Generates C source code suitable for compiling images directly
-into programs.
-
-GTK+ ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
-which offers a command line interface to this function.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert to C source.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> used for naming generated data structures or macros.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dump_type">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdataDumpType determining the kind of C
-source to be generated.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the C source form
-of @pixdata.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GdkKeymap">
-<description>
-The ::state-changed signal is emitted when the state of the
-keyboard changes, e.g when Caps Lock is turned on or off.
-See gdk_keymap_get_caps_lock_state().
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="keymap">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_get_show_events">
<description>
Gets whether event debugging output is enabled.
@@ -16965,54 +14008,6 @@ be merged.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
-Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally preserving
-the image's aspect ratio.
-
-When preserving the aspect ratio, a @width of -1 will cause the image
-to be scaled to the exact given height, and a @height of -1 will cause
-the image to be scaled to the exact given width. When not preserving
-aspect ratio, a @width or @height of -1 means to not scale the image
-at all in that dimension. Negative values for @width and @height are
-allowed since 2.8.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
-if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_window_at_pointer">
<description>
Obtains the window underneath the mouse pointer, returning the
@@ -17028,15 +14023,15 @@ gdk_display_get_window_at_pointer() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="win_x">
-<parameter_description>return location for origin of the window under the pointer
+<parameter_description> return location for origin of the window under the pointer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="win_y">
-<parameter_description>return location for origin of the window under the pointer
+<parameter_description> return location for origin of the window under the pointer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>window under the mouse pointer
+<return> window under the mouse pointer
</return>
</function>
@@ -17044,6 +14039,7 @@ gdk_display_get_window_at_pointer() instead.
<description>
This function returns the type hint set for a window.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17054,7 +14050,6 @@ This function returns the type hint set for a window.
</parameters>
<return> The type hint set for @window
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -17085,6 +14080,7 @@ allocated for the applications use.
Gets the resolution for font handling on the screen; see
gdk_screen_set_resolution() for full details.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17096,73 +14092,72 @@ gdk_screen_set_resolution() for full details.
<return> the current resolution, or -1 if no resolution
has been set.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_draw_layout_line">
+<function name="gdk_draw_lines">
<description>
-Render a #PangoLayoutLine onto an GDK drawable
-
-If the layout's #PangoContext has a transformation matrix set, then
- x and @y specify the position of the left edge of the baseline
-(left is in before-tranform user coordinates) in after-transform
-device coordinates.
+Draws a series of lines connecting the given points.
+The way in which joins between lines are draw is determined by the
+#GdkCapStyle value in the #GdkGC. This can be set with
+gdk_gc_set_line_attributes().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> the drawable on which to draw the line
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable (a #GdkWindow or a #GdkPixmap).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> base graphics to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position of start of string (in pixels)
+<parameter_description> a #GdkGC.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position of baseline (in pixels)
+<parameter name="points">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint structures specifying the endpoints of the
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayoutLine
+<parameter name="n_points">
+<parameter_description> the size of the @points array.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_windowing_substitute_screen_number">
+<function name="gdk_pango_renderer_set_stipple">
<description>
-Modifies a @display_name to make @screen_number the default
-screen when the display is opened.
+Sets the stipple for one render part (foreground, background, underline,
+etc.) Note that this is overwritten when iterating through the individual
+styled runs of a #PangoLayout or #PangoLayoutLine. This function is thus
+only useful when you call low level functions like pango_renderer_draw_glyphs()
+directly, or in the 'prepare_run' virtual function of a subclass of
+#GdkPangoRenderer.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> The name of a display, in the form used by
-gdk_display_open (). If %NULL a default value
-will be used. On X11, this is derived from the DISPLAY
-environment variable.
+<parameter name="gdk_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPangoRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="part">
+<parameter_description> the part to render with the stipple
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen_number">
-<parameter_description> The number of a screen within the display
-referred to by @display_name.
+<parameter name="stipple">
+<parameter_description> the new stipple value.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated string holding the resulting
-display name. Free with g_free().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_x11_display_get_xdisplay">
<description>
+Returns the X display of a #GdkDisplay.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17172,9 +14167,6 @@ display name. Free with g_free().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> an X display.
-the X display of a #GdkDisplay.
-
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -17199,6 +14191,7 @@ Copies a portion of @drawable into the client side image structure
@image. If @image is %NULL, creates a new image of size @width x @height
and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17207,7 +14200,7 @@ and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable, or %NULL if a new @image should be created.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="src_x">
@@ -17238,7 +14231,6 @@ and copies into that. See gdk_drawable_get_image() for further details.
<return> @image, or a new a #GdkImage containing the contents
of @drawable
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -17277,54 +14269,6 @@ should actually begin.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_is_static_image">
-<description>
-If you load a file with gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file() and it turns
-out to be a plain, unanimated image, then this function will return
-%TRUE. Use gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image() to retrieve
-the image.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the "animation" was really just an image
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gdk_event_queue_find_first">
-<description>
-Find the first event on the queue that is not still
-being filled in.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Pointer to the list node for that event, or NULL.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_region_new">
<description>
Creates a new empty #GdkRegion.
@@ -17347,13 +14291,13 @@ gdk_get_default_root_window()).
The returned list should be freed with g_list_free(), but
its elements need not be freed.
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gdk_screen_get_toplevel_windows() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> list of toplevel windows, free with g_list_free()
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gdk_screen_get_toplevel_windows() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -17363,6 +14307,7 @@ A variant of gdk_threads_add_timout_full() with second-granularity.
See g_timeout_add_seconds_full() for a discussion of why it is
a good idea to use this function if you don't need finer granularity.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17384,13 +14329,12 @@ range between #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE and #G_PRIORITY_HIGH_IDLE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call when the timeout is removed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> function to call when the timeout is removed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -17449,11 +14393,11 @@ should be ignored, since it is put up by the drag source as an icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="dest_window">
-<parameter_description>location to store the destination window in.
+<parameter_description> location to store the destination window in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="protocol">
-<parameter_description>location to store the DND protocol in.
+<parameter_description> location to store the DND protocol in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17469,11 +14413,11 @@ structure. The color is <emphasis>not</emphasis> allocated, you
must call gdk_colormap_alloc_color() yourself. The string can
either one of a large set of standard names. (Taken from the X11
<filename>rgb.txt</filename> file), or it can be a hex value in the
-form '#rgb' '#rrggbb' '#rrrgggbbb' or
-'#rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
+form '#rgb' '#rrggbb' '#rrrgggbbb' or
+'#rrrrggggbbbb' where 'r', 'g' and 'b' are hex digits of the
red, green, and blue components of the color, respectively. (White
-in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
-'#ffffffffffff')
+in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
+'#ffffffffffff')
</description>
@@ -17483,7 +14427,7 @@ in the four forms is '#fff' '#ffffff' '#fffffffff' and
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the #GdkColor to fill in
+<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17507,7 +14451,7 @@ Combines gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth() and gdk_visual_get_best_with_type().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>best visual with both @depth and
+<return> best visual with both @depth and
@visual_type, or %NULL if none
</return>
</function>
@@ -17526,41 +14470,11 @@ or the <envar>DISPLAY</envar> environment variable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_gc_init">
-<description>
-Does initialization of the generic portions of a #GdkGC
-created with the specified values and values_mask. This
-should be called out of the implementation of
-GdkDrawable.create_gc() immediately after creating the
-#GdkGC object.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="gc">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkGC
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="values">
-<parameter_description> a structure containing initial values for the GC.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="values_mask">
-<parameter_description> a bit mask indicating which fields in @values
-are set.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_screen_get_width">
<description>
Gets the width of @screen in pixels
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17571,7 +14485,6 @@ Gets the width of @screen in pixels
</parameters>
<return> the width of @screen in pixels.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -17582,7 +14495,7 @@ Frees an array of #GdkTimeCoord that was returned by gdk_device_get_history().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="events">
-<parameter_description>an array of #GdkTimeCoord.
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkTimeCoord.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_events">
@@ -17620,65 +14533,39 @@ convenient.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_window_set_child_shapes">
+<function name="gdk_x11_lookup_xdisplay">
<description>
-Sets the shape mask of @window to the union of shape masks
-for all children of @window, ignoring the shape mask of @window
-itself. Contrast with gdk_window_merge_child_shapes() which includes
-the shape mask of @window in the masks to be merged.
+Find the #GdkDisplay corresponding to @display, if any exists.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="xdisplay">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to an X Display
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkDisplay, if found, otherwise %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_bufferv">
+<function name="gdk_init">
<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"tiff", "png", "ico" or "bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer()
-for more details.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer_size">
-<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gdk_region_get_clipbox">
@@ -17702,7 +14589,9 @@ Obtains the smallest rectangle which includes the entire #GdkRegion.
<function name="gdk_window_get_group">
<description>
-Return value: the group leader window for @window
+Returns the group leader window for @window. See gdk_window_set_group().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17713,7 +14602,6 @@ Return value: the group leader window for @window
</parameters>
<return> the group leader window for @window
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -17728,6 +14616,7 @@ Before using the renderer, you need to call gdk_pango_renderer_set_drawable()
and gdk_pango_renderer_set_gc() to set the drawable and graphics context
to use for drawing.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17740,7 +14629,6 @@ to use for drawing.
renderer is owned by GTK+ and will be kept around until the
screen is closed.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -17782,40 +14670,33 @@ When implementing a #GtkWidget, you should call this function on the widget's
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gdk_window_destroy">
+<function name="gdk_threads_add_timeout">
<description>
-Internal function to destroy a window. Like gdk_window_destroy(),
-but does not drop the reference count created by gdk_window_new().
+A wrapper for the common usage of gdk_threads_add_timeout_full()
+assigning the default priority, #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT.
+
+See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="interval">
+<parameter_description> the time between calls to the function, in milliseconds
+(1/1000ths of a second)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreign_destroy">
-<parameter_description> If TRUE, the window or a parent was destroyed by some
-external agency. The window has already been destroyed and no
-windowing system calls should be made. (This may never happen
-for some windowing systems.)
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @function
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_screen_get_default">
-<description>
-Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
-gdk_display_get_default ()).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return>a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if there is no default display.
+<return> the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -17833,41 +14714,6 @@ Thaws a window frozen with gdk_window_freeze_updates().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_deserialize">
-<description>
-Deserializes (reconstruct) a #GdkPixdata structure from a byte stream.
-The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
-#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
-bytes the structure points to.
-The @pixdata contents are reconstructed byte by byte and are checked
-for validity. This function may fail with %GDK_PIXBUF_CORRUPT_IMAGE
-or %GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNKNOWN_TYPE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata structure to be filled in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream_length">
-<parameter_description> length of the stream used for deserialization.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> stream of bytes containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> #GError location to indicate failures (maybe %NULL to ignore errors).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Upon successful deserialization %TRUE is returned,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gdk_x11_get_default_root_xwindow">
<description>
Gets the root window of the default screen
@@ -17940,60 +14786,4 @@ skipped in the output.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_file_info">
-<description>
-Parses an image file far enough to determine its format and size.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> The name of the file to identify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the width of the image, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the height of the image, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat describing the image format of the file
-or %NULL if the image format wasn't recognized. The return value
-is owned by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_window_set_keep_below">
-<description>
-Set if @window must be kept below other windows. If the
-window was already below, then this function does nothing.
-
-On X11, asks the window manager to keep @window below, if the window
-manager supports this operation. Not all window managers support
-this, and some deliberately ignore it or don't have a concept of
-"keep below"; so you can't rely on the window being kept below.
-But it will happen with most standard window managers,
-and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
</root>
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index 6772b7e..c5b0cc8 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
<root>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_enable_search">
<description>
-Return value: whether or not to let the user search interactively
+Returns whether or not the tree allows to start interactive searching
+by typing in text.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16,7 +18,13 @@ Return value: whether or not to let the user search interactively
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
<description>
-Return value: the paper height.
+Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation, but
+not margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31,24 +39,33 @@ Return value: the paper height.
</parameters>
<return> the paper height.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
+See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_has_icon">
@@ -56,6 +73,7 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
Checks whether an icon theme includes an icon
for a particular name.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71,7 +89,6 @@ for a particular name.
<return> %TRUE if @icon_theme includes an
icon for @icon_name.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -164,22 +181,20 @@ will be ignored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
<description>
-Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
+Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
+construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
+text column using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end">
@@ -202,49 +217,102 @@ boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position">
<description>
-This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
-the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
+Sets the position of the group as an index of the tool palette.
+If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is
+-1 it will become the last child.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> a new index for group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.14
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
-See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
+can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
+combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
+
+If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
+tries them all in the given order before falling back to
+inherited icon themes.
Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+<parameter name="icon_names">
+<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
+about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
+gtk_icon_info_free()
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<description>
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -268,18 +336,6 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioMenuItem">
-<description>
-The radio menu item whose group this widget belongs to.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_get_text">
<description>
Fetches the text from a label widget, as displayed on the
@@ -299,43 +355,6 @@ string used by the label, and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
-<description>
-Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
-by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
-list. If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
-name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-
-If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
-of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
-to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
-gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
-
-Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
-directory change.
-If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
-you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
-user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
-a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_slider">
<description>
Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
@@ -383,7 +402,10 @@ given style and orientation.
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item">
<description>
Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
-Return value: a #GtkRecentInfo structure containing information
+returns a structure containing informations about the resource
+like its MIME type, or its display name.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -396,7 +418,7 @@ Return value: a #GtkRecentInfo structure containing information
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -405,7 +427,6 @@ about the resource pointed by @uri, or %NULL if the URI was
not registered in the recently used resources list. Free with
gtk_recent_info_unref().
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -416,6 +437,7 @@ If @x, @y doesn't lie inside an icon, -1 is returned.
This function is intended for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
signal handler.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -434,7 +456,6 @@ signal handler.
</parameters>
<return> the index of the icon at the given position, or -1
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -484,55 +505,37 @@ Sets a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
<description>
-Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
-into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
+be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the colormap used by @widget
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
<description>
-This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
-application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
-cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
-with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
-just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
-question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
-alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
-prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
-should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
-hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
-useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
-generally).
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -570,6 +573,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Gets the current preview widget; see
gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -580,34 +584,20 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
</parameters>
<return> the current preview widget, or %NULL
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
+<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
-%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
+(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
+managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
+end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
-<description>
-This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
-the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
-increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
-character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
</description>
@@ -616,36 +606,49 @@ character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geom_mask">
-<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
<description>
-Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
-track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
-features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
-underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
-automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
-like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
-function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
-function generating a window map event.
+This function returns the position you need to pass to
+gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
+means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
+gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
+#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
+gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
+frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
+same top-left corner.
+
+gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
+does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
+decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
+Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
+window managers.
+
+Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
+respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
+its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
+to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
+slowly getting better over time.
+
+If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
+frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
+always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
+gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
+because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
+
+If you are saving and restoring your application's window
+positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
+do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
+not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
+Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
+"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
+the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -653,8 +656,12 @@ Since: 2.12
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="startup_id">
-<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -686,24 +693,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTextBuffer">
-<description>
-The paste-done signal is emitted after paste operation has been completed.
-This is useful to properly scroll the view to the end of the pasted text.
-See gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="textbuffer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
<description>
Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
@@ -753,40 +742,40 @@ passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererCombo">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
-This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
-the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary
-to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
-changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument @new_iter
-corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
-to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
-
-Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
-the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This
-means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
-until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
+Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
+given parameters.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the paper name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_string">
-<parameter_description> a string of the path identifying the edited cell
-(relative to the tree view model)
+<parameter name="display_name">
+<parameter_description> the human-readable name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_iter">
-<parameter_description> the new iter selected in the combo box
-(relative to the combo box model)
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+to free it
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
@@ -939,6 +928,7 @@ Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
"limit" properties of @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -947,12 +937,11 @@ The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated
+<return> A newly allocated
list of #GtkRecentInfo objects. You should
use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
the list itself using g_list_free().
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -984,25 +973,6 @@ Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_set_has_toplevel_focus">
-<description>
-Internal function that sets whether the keyboard focus for the
-toplevel window (taking into account inter-process embedding.)
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_toplevel_focus">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive">
<description>
Deletes all <emphasis>editable</emphasis> text in the given range.
@@ -1037,7 +1007,9 @@ no text was deleted.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_columns">
<description>
-Return value: A list of #GtkTreeViewColumn s
+Returns a #GList of all the #GtkTreeViewColumn s currently in @tree_view.
+The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1100,36 +1072,11 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
-<description>
-Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
-use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
-lead to a menu item
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_uri">
<description>
Gets the URI of the resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1141,18 +1088,6 @@ Gets the URI of the resource.
<return> the URI of the resource. The returned string is
owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1226,7 +1161,11 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_tree_view">
<description>
-Return value: The tree view wherein @column has been inserted if any,
+Returns the #GtkTreeView wherein @tree_column has been inserted. If
+ column is currently not inserted in any tree view, %NULL is
+returned.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1238,13 +1177,14 @@ Return value: The tree view wherein @column has been inserted if any,
<return> The tree view wherein @column has been inserted if any,
%NULL otherwise.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
<description>
-Return value: The label used for the website link. The string is
+Returns the label used for the website link.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1256,7 +1196,6 @@ Return value: The label used for the website link. The string is
<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -1304,55 +1243,57 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="sensitive">
+<parameter_description> the sensitivity of the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
<description>
-WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.
-
-Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
-
+Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a location to return the value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path">
<description>
-Return value: A current path, or %NULL.
+Returns a path that the row reference currently points to, or %NULL if the
+path pointed to is no longer valid.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1397,22 +1338,25 @@ inserted text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
+Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
+See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_tooltip">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixbuf">
@@ -1422,6 +1366,7 @@ a #GdkPixbuf. This is a new pixbuf with a reference count of 1,
and the application should unreference it once it is no longer
needed.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1432,7 +1377,6 @@ needed.
</parameters>
<return> A #GdkPixbuf pointer, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -1452,68 +1396,6 @@ Gets the line wrapping for the view.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
-<description>
-Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
-indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
-is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
-response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
-
-Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
-function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
-(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
-Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
-Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
-label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
-instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
-as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
-argument.
-|[
-GtkWidget *dialog;
-dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-NULL);
-gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
-markup);
-]|
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent, or %NULL for none
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of message
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buttons">
-<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description>printf()-style format string, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
@@ -1558,7 +1440,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="index_">
@@ -1608,7 +1490,9 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_vline() instead.
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_size">
<description>
-Returns: whether the selected size is used in the label.
+Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1619,13 +1503,14 @@ Returns: whether the selected size is used in the label.
</parameters>
<return> whether the selected size is used in the label.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_position_func">
<description>
-Return value: the currently used function for positioning the search dialog.
+Returns the positioning function currently in use.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1636,54 +1521,34 @@ Return value: the currently used function for positioning the search dialog.
</parameters>
<return> the currently used function for positioning the search dialog.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_install_properties">
-<description>
-Installs the necessary properties for a class implementing
-#GtkFileChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
-for each property, using the values from the #GtkFileChooserProp
-enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
-values don't collide with some other property values they
-are using.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> the class structure for a type deriving from #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
+<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
<description>
-Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
-with @self.
+Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
+a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
+resizes then you should add a reference to it.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
+<parameter name="offscreen">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
<description>
Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1694,7 +1559,6 @@ Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
</parameters>
<return> the width of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -1713,54 +1577,67 @@ a widget to be mapped if it isn't already.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
+GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
+extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
+you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
+The returned image must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and
@label as label.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description>a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>a string that will be used as label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a string that will be used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkMenuToolButton
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
<description>
-Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
-#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
-style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
-See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="primary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="secondary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+<parameter name="show_hidden">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -1796,6 +1673,7 @@ Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
application. For example, you can use this to add a
"/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1808,14 +1686,13 @@ application. For example, you can use this to add a
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
otherwise. In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -1825,6 +1702,7 @@ Sets the contents of the selection from a list of URIs.
The string is converted to the form determined by
@selection_data->target.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1840,24 +1718,6 @@ The string is converted to the form determined by
<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
-<description>
-Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -1870,18 +1730,18 @@ paper name.
If @name is %NULL, the default paper size is returned,
see gtk_paper_size_get_default().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>a paper size name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a paper size name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
to free it
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -1927,10 +1787,29 @@ the spin button.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_width">
+<description>
+Returns the value of the ::item-width property.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the width of a single item, or -1
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_dialog_get_color_selection">
<description>
Retrieves the #GtkColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1941,10 +1820,31 @@ Retrieves the #GtkColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
</parameters>
<return> the embedded #GtkColorSelection
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_child">
+<description>
+Sets, or unsets if @child is %NULL, the focused child of @container.
+
+This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
+ container Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
+default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_expander_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the spacing field of @expander, which is the number of pixels to
@@ -2027,12 +1927,12 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>place to store an
+<parameter_description> place to store an
icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>place to store an icon size,
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size,
or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -2079,27 +1979,11 @@ Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
-<description>
-Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
-The indentation may be negative.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of pixels of indentation
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_is_visible">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
+Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2111,7 +1995,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
are both visible.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -2124,6 +2007,7 @@ This function will not typically be used by applications; it
is intended principally for use in the implementation of
#GtkFileChooser.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2135,7 +2019,6 @@ is intended principally for use in the implementation of
<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -2149,6 +2032,7 @@ moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2163,10 +2047,30 @@ moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
</parameters>
<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
+<description>
+Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
+of the group.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this new
@@ -2194,42 +2098,46 @@ gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_get_file_system">
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkFileSystem of @chooser; this is an internal
-implementation detail, used for conversion between paths
-and filenames and URIs.
+Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
+is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
+the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
+to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
+returned, but usually you don't need it.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button_text">
+<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the file system for @chooser.
+<return> the button widget that was added
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
<description>
-Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
+direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_numbers">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to show numbers, %FALSE otherwise
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
+%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2240,6 +2148,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the number of tool items in @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2250,59 +2159,49 @@ Gets the number of tool items in @group.
</parameters>
<return> the number of tool items in @group
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_new">
<description>
-This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
-of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
-to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
-the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
-However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
-gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
-such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
+Create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_pattern">
-<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+<parameter name="initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> initial buffer text, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
+<parameter name="n_initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters in @initial_chars, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
+<return> A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
+Retrieves the target of the selection.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the target of the selection.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unmap">
@@ -2382,16 +2281,16 @@ parameters. @arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="arrow_type">
@@ -2422,40 +2321,23 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valuesv">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
<description>
-A variant of gtk_list_store_set_valist() which
-takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
-varargs. This function is mainly intended for
-language-bindings and in case the number of columns to
-change is not known until run-time.
+Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
+the display of the recently used resources.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="columns">
-<parameter_description>an array of column numbers
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="values">
-<parameter_description>an array of GValues
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_values">
-<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted">
@@ -2477,41 +2359,25 @@ know that the model emitted the "row_deleted" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
<description>
-Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
- binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
-emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
-arguments.
+Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
+to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
+marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
+markup language</link>.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_name">
-<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_args">
-<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_search">
@@ -2536,21 +2402,31 @@ using the "start-interactive-search" key binding.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window">
<description>
-Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
+Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying
+tooltips with @custom_window. GTK+ will take care of showing and
+hiding @custom_window at the right moment, to behave likewise as
+the default tooltip window. If @custom_window is %NULL, the default
+tooltip window will be used.
+
+If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to
+have the name "gtk-tooltip", see gtk_widget_set_name().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="custom_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all_for_settings">
@@ -2619,11 +2495,51 @@ the model will sort using this function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description>User data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> User data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
+<description>
+Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
+force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
+strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
+from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
+gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
+windows than this function; setting the default size will still
+allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
+to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
+with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
+function as well.
+
+Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
+translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
+can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
+basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
+correct.
+
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2667,54 +2583,74 @@ This widget creates its own #GtkRecentManager object. See the
gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
<description>
-Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
-be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
+Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the colormap used by @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
<description>
-Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
+All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
+ completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
+ completion is set to %NULL.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
+<description>
+Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -2736,6 +2672,30 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
+<description>
+Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
+for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
+as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
+determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
+"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_get_valist">
<description>
Non-vararg variant of gtk_style_get().
@@ -2809,28 +2769,40 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_item">
<description>
-Returns: The child widget which has the focus
+Creates an item for @entry.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkItemFactoryEntry to create an item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback function of @entry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_type">
+<parameter_description> 1 if the callback function of @entry is of type
+#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if it is of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The child widget which has the focus
-inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_accel_path">
<description>
Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2841,7 +2813,6 @@ Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
</parameters>
<return> the accelerator path set on the menu.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -2870,53 +2841,126 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
<description>
-Return value: The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
+Obtains information about the location of the status icon
+on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
+popups like notification bubbles.
+
+See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
+alternative for positioning menus.
+
+Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
+this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
+the information is not reliable unless the status icon
+is embedded in a notification area, see
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
+information is not needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> return location for the area occupied by the status
+icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> return location for the orientation of the panel
+in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
+at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
+at the left or right is vertical.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
+<return> %TRUE if the location information has
+been filled in
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
+Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
+the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
+is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sort_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
+<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
+valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
+Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
+<description>
+This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
+application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
+cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
+with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
+just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
+alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
+prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
+should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
+hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
+useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
+generally).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
@@ -2956,7 +3000,9 @@ language</link>. See gtk_label_set_markup().
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_enable_tree_lines">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if tree lines are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
+Returns whether or not tree lines are drawn in @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2968,7 +3014,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if tree lines are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
<return> %TRUE if tree lines are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -3045,31 +3090,6 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
-<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
-format with the passed @buffer. See
-gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagset_name">
-<parameter_description>an optional tagset name, on %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sizing">
<description>
Sets the growth behavior of @tree_column to @type.
@@ -3088,30 +3108,6 @@ Sets the growth behavior of @tree_column to @type.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_update_buttons_state">
-<description>
-Forces @assistant to recompute the buttons state.
-
-GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations,
-e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the
-visibility or completeness of a page changes.
-
-One situation where it can be necessary to call this
-function is when changing a value on the current page
-affects the future page flow of the assistant.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_widget">
<description>
Changes the icon for a widget to a given widget. GTK+
@@ -3150,6 +3146,7 @@ to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3163,38 +3160,38 @@ if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
be used instead. The return value is owned by
GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
-
-The default handler for this signal activates the @widget if
- group_cycling is %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling
-is %TRUE.
+Adds a binding entry.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> #a GtkBindingSet to clear an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_cycling">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
<description>
Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3221,7 +3218,6 @@ Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -3262,11 +3258,11 @@ Deprecated: 2.12:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description>a string containing the tip itself.
+<parameter_description> a string containing the tip itself.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description>a string of any further information that may be useful if the user gets stuck.
+<parameter_description> a string of any further information that may be useful if the user gets stuck.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3277,6 +3273,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.12:
<description>
Sets @text on the @menu_item label
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3288,7 +3285,6 @@ Sets @text on the @menu_item label
<return> The text in the @menu_item label. This is the internal
string used by the label, and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -3345,33 +3341,32 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description>path used to look up the accelerator
+<parameter_description> path used to look up the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAccelGroup.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
<description>
-Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
-to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
-which might be different for different screens.
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3383,6 +3378,7 @@ Since: 2.4
This function is intended for use by action implementations to
create icons displayed in the proxy widgets.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3391,13 +3387,12 @@ create icons displayed in the proxy widgets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_size">
-<parameter_description>the size of the icon that should be created.
+<parameter_description> the size of the icon that should be created.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a widget that displays the icon for this action.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -3464,55 +3459,27 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_submenu().
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print">
<description>
-Returns: the number of pages that will be printed
+Returns the number of pages that will be printed.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of pages that will be printed
+Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
+(%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING), so this function should never be
+called before the data generation phase (%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA).
+You can connect to the #GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal
+and call gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print() when
+print status is %GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA.
+This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_hidden">
-<description>
-Sets whether hidden files should be included in the #GtkTreeModel
-for display.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_hidden">
-<parameter_description> whether hidden files should be displayed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
+<return> the number of pages that will be printed
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -3542,7 +3509,9 @@ in addition to calling this function.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_start">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is the first in the buffer
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is the first iterator in the buffer, that is
+if @iter has a character offset of 0.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3575,50 +3544,29 @@ Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
-See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
+by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
+entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout_index">
+<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> byte index into the entry contents
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkSizeGroup">
-<description>
-If %TRUE, unmapped widgets are ignored when determining
-the size of the group.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkButton">
-<description>
-Spacing in pixels between the image and label.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_selection_new">
<description>
Creates a new GtkColorSelection.
@@ -3635,6 +3583,7 @@ Creates a new GtkColorSelection.
<description>
Gets the dialog's image.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3645,31 +3594,27 @@ Gets the dialog's image.
</parameters>
<return> the dialog's image
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
<description>
-Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
-window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
-(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
-manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
-managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
-end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
+gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,
+%FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_iter">
@@ -3690,19 +3635,32 @@ Selects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
<description>
-Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_end_iter">
@@ -3733,6 +3691,7 @@ character position 0) to the end iterator.
Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area
of a dialog.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3747,30 +3706,35 @@ of a dialog.
</parameters>
<return> the @widget button that uses the given @response_id, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
<description>
-Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
+Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_invisible_new_for_screen">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkInvisible object for a specified screen
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3782,7 +3746,6 @@ the new #GtkInvisible will be created.
</parameters>
<return> a newly created #GtkInvisible object
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -3812,6 +3775,7 @@ Since: 2.14
Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3822,42 +3786,25 @@ gtk_widget_set_has_window().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
<description>
-Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
-If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
-needs reorganization.
-
-This function is only useful for container implementations and
-never should be called by an application.
+Retrieves the format of the selection.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkEntryCompletion">
-<description>
-Determines whether the possible completions on the popup
-will appear in the entry as you navigate through them.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> the format of the selection.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent">
@@ -3960,20 +3907,38 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_item">
@@ -3981,6 +3946,7 @@ Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
Gets the item at position (x, y).
See gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_group().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3999,7 +3965,6 @@ See gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_group().
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkToolItem at position or %NULL if there is no such item
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -4007,6 +3972,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Gets the MIME type of the resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4018,7 +3984,6 @@ Gets the MIME type of the resource.
<return> the MIME type of the resource. The returned string
is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -4033,6 +3998,7 @@ Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the button click
location, see gdk_test_simulate_button() for details.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4051,13 +4017,14 @@ location, see gdk_test_simulate_button() for details.
</parameters>
<return> wether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the button label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_button_set_use_underline ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4093,7 +4060,10 @@ and should not be modified or freed.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset">
<description>
-Return value: offset from start of line
+Returns the character offset of the iterator,
+counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.
+The first character on the line has offset 0.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4131,38 +4101,34 @@ or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_remove_action">
<description>
-Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
-signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
-on @widget.
+Removes an action object from the action group.
-This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> an action
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_remove_action">
+<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
<description>
-Removes an action object from the action group.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> an action
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4190,21 +4156,6 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAdjustment">
-<description>
-The page size of the adjustment.
-Note that the page-size is irrelevant and should be set to zero
-if the adjustment is used for a simple scalar value, e.g. in a
-#GtkSpinButton.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode">
<description>
Sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the #GtkEntry.
@@ -4225,24 +4176,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
-<description>
-Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the length of the data of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_type_hint">
<description>
Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
@@ -4259,45 +4192,29 @@ Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
-given parameters.
+Returns the #GtkWidget in the button on the column header. If a custom
+widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the paper name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> the human-readable name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
-to free it
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
+Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
+area.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4309,7 +4226,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
<return> %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
a notification area.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -4320,6 +4236,7 @@ names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
gtk_icon_factory_add().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4330,7 +4247,6 @@ gtk_icon_factory_add().
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -4380,7 +4296,7 @@ passes the correct target list to this function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description>list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use
+<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use
gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -4407,26 +4323,6 @@ Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
-<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter">
<description>
Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
@@ -4448,6 +4344,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4458,13 +4355,22 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
</parameters>
<return> the resolution in dpi
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
<description>
-Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
+Returns the text in the range [ start,@end). Excludes undisplayed
+text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if
+ include_hidden_chars is %FALSE. The returned string includes a
+0xFFFC character whenever the buffer contains
+embedded images, so byte and character indexes into
+the returned string <emphasis>do</emphasis> correspond to byte
+and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with
+gtk_text_buffer_get_text(). Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal
+text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
+widget is in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4513,117 +4419,6 @@ in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkIMContextClass">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="preedit_start">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-start signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_end">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-end signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_changed">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-changed
-signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="commit">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::commit signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="retrieve_surrounding">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the
-#GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="delete_surrounding">
-<parameter_description> Default handler of the
-#GtkIMContext::delete-surrounding signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="set_client_window">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_client_window() when the
-input window where the entered text will appear changes. Override this to
-keep track of the current input window, for instance for the purpose of
-positioning a status display of your input method.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="get_preedit_string">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string() to
-retrieve the text currently being preedited for display at the cursor
-position. Any input method which composes complex characters or any
-other compositions from multiple sequential key presses should override
-this method to provide feedback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_keypress">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_filter_keypress() on every
-key press or release event. Every non-trivial input method needs to
-override this in order to implement the mapping from key events to text.
-A return value of %TRUE indicates to the caller that the event was
-consumed by the input method. In that case, the #GtkIMContext::commit
-signal should be emitted upon completion of a key sequence to pass the
-resulting text back to the input widget. Alternatively, %FALSE may be
-returned to indicate that the event wasn't handled by the input method.
-If a builtin mapping exists for the key, it is used to produce a
-character.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_in">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_focus_in() when the input widget
-has gained focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_out">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_focus_in() when the input widget
-has lost focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reset">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_reset() to signal a change such as a
-change in cursor position. An input method that implements preediting
-should override this method to clear the preedit state on reset.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="set_cursor_location">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location()
-to inform the input method of the current cursor location relative to
-the client window. May be overridden to implement the display of popup
-windows at the cursor position.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="set_use_preedit">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_use_preedit() to control
-the use of the preedit string. Override this to display feedback by some
-other means if turned off.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="set_surrounding">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() in response
-to signal #GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding to update the input
-method's idea of the context around the cursor. It is not necessary to
-override this method even with input methods which implement
-context-dependent behavior. The base implementation is sufficient for
-gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to work.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="get_surrounding">
-<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to update
-the context around the cursor location. It is not necessary to override
-this method even with input methods which implement context-dependent
-behavior. The base implementation emits
-#GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding and records the context received
-by the subsequent invocation of @get_surrounding.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the model column which @entry_box should use to get strings from
@@ -4645,29 +4440,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
<description>
-Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
+Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
+<return> the default top margin
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -4714,7 +4505,8 @@ Changes the type of shadow drawn around the contents of
<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_has_child">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @iter has children.
+Returns %TRUE if @iter has children, %FALSE otherwise.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4755,19 +4547,20 @@ copy the array.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_palette">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4782,6 +4575,8 @@ non-local files. This is a file chooser widget that can be embedded in
custom windows and it is the same widget that is used by
#GtkFileChooserDialog.
+Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_widget_new() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4796,8 +4591,6 @@ custom windows and it is the same widget that is used by
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
-Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_widget_new() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -4805,6 +4598,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_widget_new() instead.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4815,128 +4609,171 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN.
</parameters>
<return> the output bin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
+Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
+Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+<return> a #GtkSettings object.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_new_with_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkProgressBar with an associated #GtkAdjustment.
+Sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from
+#GtkPrintContext in such a way that distances are measured in
+units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GtkProgressBar.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
<description>
-Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
-label text.
+Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window.
-<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
-and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
-of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
-While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
-attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
-to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
+The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
+in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
+Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
+%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
+<parameter name="window_placement">
+<parameter_description> position of the child window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
+<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
<description>
-If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
-Return value: the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a shadow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_default_files">
@@ -4958,6 +4795,7 @@ If you want to store this information, you should make a copy.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkHBox.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4976,31 +4814,9 @@ Creates a new #GtkHBox.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkHBox.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_add_editable">
-<description>
-Adds an "empty" row at the beginning of the model. This does not refer to
-any file, but is a temporary placeholder for a file name that the user will
-type when a corresponding cell is made editable. When your code is done
-using this temporary row, call _gtk_file_system_model_remove_editable().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> Location to return the iter corresponding to the editable row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
<description>
Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
@@ -5126,46 +4942,26 @@ See gtk_text_buffer_move_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
-to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
-Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
-or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
-a new icon theme object for scratch.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkMessageDialog">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
-The image for this dialog.
+Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
+(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
+equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
+moves to the start of the next line. See
+gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
+a character offset.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="char_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -5230,68 +5026,40 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
<description>
-Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
+Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
+since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.8:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> with of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
+Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -5311,7 +5079,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description>a markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>) or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>) or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5351,7 +5119,7 @@ Non vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description>an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
+<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5409,7 +5177,10 @@ or freed.
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_track_motion">
<description>
-Return Value: %TRUE if the widget always emits ::drag-motion events
+Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
+emit ::drag-motion signals.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5420,37 +5191,29 @@ Return Value: %TRUE if the widget always emits ::drag-motion events
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget always emits ::drag-motion events
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
-Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
-
+Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
+label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
-the merged UI.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkAboutDialog">
-<description>
-Whether to wrap the text in the license dialog.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -5466,6 +5229,7 @@ This is equivalent to:
gtk_entry_buffer_get_length (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry));
</programlisting></informalexample>
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5477,7 +5241,6 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_get_length (gtk_entry_get_buffer (entry));
<return> the current number of characters
in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there are none.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -5485,6 +5248,7 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Retrieves the raw data of the selection.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5495,7 +5259,6 @@ Retrieves the raw data of the selection.
</parameters>
<return> the raw data of the selection.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -5546,25 +5309,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_propagate_screen_changed">
-<description>
-Propagates changes in the screen for a widget to all
-children, emitting #GtkWidget::screen-changed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="previous_screen">
-<parameter_description> Previous screen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
<description>
Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
@@ -5600,11 +5344,11 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -5646,45 +5390,6 @@ and position to their child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv">
-<description>
-A variant of gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() which
-takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
-varargs. This function is mainly intended for
-language-bindings.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> position to insert the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="columns">
-<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="values">
-<parameter_description> an array of GValues
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_values">
-<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_draw_as_radio">
<description>
Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
@@ -5775,6 +5480,7 @@ Initializes @iter with the current position of @mark.
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5785,7 +5491,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode().
</parameters>
<return> whether the text is overwritten when typing.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -5819,6 +5524,7 @@ moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
<description>
Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5829,7 +5535,6 @@ Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
</parameters>
<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -5838,6 +5543,7 @@ Since: 2.20
Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
@key_file.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5850,18 +5556,17 @@ Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -5918,27 +5623,11 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_print_settings">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
<description>
-Gets the current print settings from the dialog.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current print settings
+Returns which grid lines are enabled in @tree_view.
Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
-<description>
-Return value: a #GtkTreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5950,7 +5639,6 @@ Return value: a #GtkTreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines
<return> a #GtkTreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines
are enabled.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -5979,6 +5667,7 @@ Since: 2.16
Convenience function to obtain the value of
%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5989,7 +5678,6 @@ Convenience function to obtain the value of
</parameters>
<return> the printer name
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -6034,11 +5722,11 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6053,6 +5741,7 @@ are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
algorithms).
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6063,7 +5752,6 @@ algorithms).
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -6118,6 +5806,7 @@ text and response ID.
<description>
Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6128,7 +5817,6 @@ Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
</parameters>
<return> second child, or %NULL if it is not set.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -6136,6 +5824,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6146,7 +5835,6 @@ Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
</parameters>
<return> first child, or %NULL if it is not set.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -6186,23 +5874,36 @@ GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three col
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
<description>
-If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
-gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
-gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
-by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-
+Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
+See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
+the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_begin_move_drag">
@@ -6287,19 +5988,19 @@ gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to a #GtkTreePath pointer to be filled in, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #GtkTreePath pointer to be filled in, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to a #GtkTreeViewColumn pointer to be filled in, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A pointer to a #GtkTreeViewColumn pointer to be filled in, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_x">
-<parameter_description>A pointer where the X coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A pointer where the X coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_y">
-<parameter_description>A pointer where the Y coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A pointer where the Y coordinate relative to the cell can be placed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6324,7 +6025,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description>the entry the interactive search code of @tree_view should use or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the entry the interactive search code of @tree_view should use or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6337,6 +6038,7 @@ Sets the current folder for @chooser from an URI.
The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6352,13 +6054,15 @@ plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
otherwise.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_relief_style">
<description>
-Return value: The relief style of buttons on @shell.
+Returns the relief style of buttons on @shell. Tool items must not call this
+function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style() instead.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6369,7 +6073,6 @@ Return value: The relief style of buttons on @shell.
</parameters>
<return> The relief style of buttons on @shell.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -6398,6 +6101,7 @@ Since: 2.8
<description>
Gets the (short) description of the resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6409,7 +6113,6 @@ Gets the (short) description of the resource.
<return> the description of the resource. The returned string
is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -6417,6 +6120,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
This returns the #GtkTreeeView used to list font sizes.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6427,43 +6131,33 @@ This returns the #GtkTreeeView used to list font sizes.
</parameters>
<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path">
<description>
-Gets the label widget of @group.
-See gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget().
+Looks up a file in pixmap path for the specified #GtkSettings.
+If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
+g_warning() and returns %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the label widget of @group
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
-<description>
-Return value: the space between cells
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> Scanner used to get line number information for the
+warning message, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_file">
+<parameter_description> name of the pixmap file to locate.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space between cells
-
-Since: 2.6
+<return> the filename.
</return>
</function>
@@ -6488,6 +6182,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Checks whether @action is important or not
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6498,55 +6193,14 @@ Checks whether @action is important or not
</parameters>
<return> whether @action is important
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
-<description>
-Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
-to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
-the @chooser is in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
-will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-
-If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
-folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
-is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
-gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
-
-Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
-for the directory change.
-
-If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
-you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
-user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
-a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> the #GFile to set as current
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_screen">
<description>
-Return value: a #GdkScreen.
+Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @status_icon.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6557,7 +6211,6 @@ Return value: a #GdkScreen.
</parameters>
<return> a #GdkScreen.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -6567,6 +6220,7 @@ Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
@key_file. Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6575,58 +6229,65 @@ page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
-with.
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag destination. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
-Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
-if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
-call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
-in addition to calling this function.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>icon size this source applies to
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
<description>
-Return value: the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
+completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
+to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
+and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
+
+This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
+column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
+renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_file">
@@ -6636,6 +6297,7 @@ Creates a status icon displaying the file @filename.
The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
space in the notification area, if necessary.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6646,10 +6308,24 @@ space in the notification area, if necessary.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
+<description>
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
+user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_model">
<description>
Sets the model for a #GtkIconView.
@@ -6666,7 +6342,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>The model.
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6675,7 +6351,9 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_current_page">
<description>
-Return value: The index (starting from 0) of the current page in
+Returns the page number of the current page
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6687,7 +6365,6 @@ Return value: The index (starting from 0) of the current page in
<return> The index (starting from 0) of the current page in
the @assistant, if the @assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -6717,6 +6394,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the list of recently used resources.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6725,44 +6403,40 @@ Gets the list of recently used resources.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of
+<return> a list of
newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
free the list itself using g_list_free().
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_attach">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
<description>
-Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
-it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
-involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
-been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
+(with printf()-style).
-Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
-in the following way:
-<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
-If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
-a reference count belonging to the caller.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
@@ -6770,6 +6444,7 @@ a reference count belonging to the caller.
Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
and @root as the virtual root.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6778,13 +6453,12 @@ and @root as the virtual root.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="root">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -6809,26 +6483,28 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-Return value: whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
+the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
+like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
+the main area of the application.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter name="focus_on_click">
+<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
+with the mouse
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_style_get_property">
@@ -6853,22 +6529,23 @@ Gets the value of a style property of @widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
<description>
-Return value: The program name. The string is owned by the about
+Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
+know that the model emitted the "row_inserted" signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The row position that was inserted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The program name. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_cancel">
@@ -6915,24 +6592,6 @@ clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
-<description>
-Sets overwrite mode
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overwrite">
-<parameter_description> overwrite mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
<description>
Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
@@ -7000,16 +6659,16 @@ Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -7059,21 +6718,26 @@ gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() on @binding_set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
+<function name="gtk_window_stick">
<description>
-Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
+Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
+desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
+stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
+again, and some window managers do not support sticking
+windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
+write code that crashes if not.
-Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
-are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
+
+You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
-This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
-menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
-map dump.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter_pattern">
-<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7095,34 +6759,33 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_file">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
<description>
-Gets the file for a particular row in @model.
-
+Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row of @model
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the file. This object is owned by @model and
-or freed. If you want to save the path for later use,
-you must take a ref, since the object may be freed
-on later changes to the file system.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset">
@@ -7145,6 +6808,7 @@ tags from being pasted. It is probably the common case to pass an
identifier != %NULL here, since the %NULL tagset requires the
receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7153,38 +6817,16 @@ receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tagset_name">
-<parameter_description>an optional tagset name, on %NULL
+<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
format's mime-type.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
-<description>
-This function frees a target table as returned by
-gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
@@ -7229,21 +6871,21 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -7285,33 +6927,62 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GParamSpec of the style property or %NULL if @class has no
+<return> the #GParamSpec of the style property or %NULL if @class has no
style property with that name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
<description>
-Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
+Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
+the given iter.
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+ height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.4
+<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
+<description>
+Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
+of clicked links.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_deleted">
<description>
-Return value: whether the mark is deleted
+Returns %TRUE if the mark has been removed from its buffer
+with gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark(). See gtk_text_buffer_add_mark()
+for a way to add it to a buffer again.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7348,7 +7019,9 @@ Deprecated: 2.6: Use gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing() instead
<function name="gtk_label_get_line_wrap">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
+Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped.
+See gtk_label_set_line_wrap().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7361,48 +7034,48 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="SECTION">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
<description>
-The #GtkVScrollbar widget is a widget arranged vertically creating a
-scrollbar. See #GtkScrollbar for details on
-scrollbars. #GtkAdjustment pointers may be added to handle the
-adjustment of the scrollbar or it may be left %NULL in which case one
-will be created for you. See #GtkScrollbar for a description of what the
-fields in an adjustment represent for a scrollbar.
+Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="Short_description">
-<parameter_description> A vertical scrollbar
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Title">
-<parameter_description> GtkVScrollbar
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="See_also">
-<parameter_description>#GtkScrollbar, #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_rc_find_module_in_path">
-<description>
-Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
-is not useful for applications and should not be used.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="module_file">
-<parameter_description> name of a theme engine
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The filename, if found (must be freed with g_free()),
-otherwise %NULL.
+<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -7445,16 +7118,16 @@ expanded position.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -7513,46 +7186,6 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
-<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is the default
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is the default
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title of the #GtkWindow. The title of a window will be
@@ -7622,16 +7255,16 @@ gap in one side.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -7671,6 +7304,7 @@ output should not be clipped
Gets the position of the image relative to the text
inside the button.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7681,7 +7315,6 @@ inside the button.
</parameters>
<return> the position
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -7690,6 +7323,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
See gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7700,7 +7334,6 @@ See gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the New Folder button should be displayed.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -7709,6 +7342,7 @@ Since: 2.18
Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7719,18 +7353,19 @@ See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkInfoBar">
+<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
<description>
-Width of the border around the action area of the info bar.
-
-Since: 2.18
+This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -7754,6 +7389,34 @@ iters will be invalid.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_border_width">
+<description>
+Sets the border width of the container.
+
+The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
+around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
+#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
+they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
+the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
+create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
+to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as
+a spacer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="border_width">
+<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave <emphasis>outside</emphasis>
+the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_website">
<description>
Sets the URL to use for the website link.
@@ -7770,7 +7433,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="website">
-<parameter_description>a URL string starting with "http://"
+<parameter_description> a URL string starting with "http://"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7792,7 +7455,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>the human-readable-name for the filter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the human-readable-name for the filter, or %NULL
to remove any existing name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -7865,60 +7528,40 @@ and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_clear_cache">
-<description>
-Clears the cached values in the model for the given @column. Use
-this function whenever your get_value function would return different
-values for a column.
-The file chooser uses this for example when the icon theme changes to
-invalidate the cached pixbufs.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> the column to clear or -1 for all columns
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
-Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
+homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have
+the same width as the widest of the items.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitive">
-<parameter_description> the sensitivity of the cell
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7946,6 +7589,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_set_style().
<description>
Gets the 'OK' button.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7956,7 +7600,6 @@ Gets the 'OK' button.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'OK' button.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -7981,29 +7624,48 @@ by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
-You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
- draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
-and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
-not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_indicator">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
-and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new link button widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_modify_base">
@@ -8033,7 +7695,7 @@ the base color on that.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
of gtk_widget_modify_base().
</parameter_description>
@@ -8047,6 +7709,7 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_base().
Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8059,7 +7722,6 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
folders. Free the returned list with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with
g_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -8076,7 +7738,7 @@ gtk_window_set_transient_for().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the transient parent for this window, or %NULL
+<return> the transient parent for this window, or %NULL
if no transient parent has been set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -8181,34 +7843,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_update_file">
-<description>
-Tells the file system model that the file changed and that the
-new @info should be used for it now. If the file is not part of
- model, it will get added automatically.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> the file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> the new file info
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="requires_resort">
-<parameter_description> FIXME: get rid of this argument
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
@@ -8293,7 +7927,7 @@ interface is called.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description>An array length n of #GTypes
+<parameter_description> An array length n of #GTypes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8324,110 +7958,7 @@ and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the target #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
-<description>
-Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
-See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
-
-Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
-as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
-currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
-usual way to get the selection.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
-function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
-last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
-gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_menu_is_empty">
-<description>
-Determines whether @menu is empty. A menu is considered empty if it
-the only visible children are tearoff menu items or "filler" menu
-items which were inserted to mark the menu as empty.
-
-This function is used by #GtkAction.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkMenu or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @menu is empty.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
-<description>
-Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_rich_text">
-<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. When the rich
-text is later received, @callback will be called.
-
-The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
-text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
-parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
-various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
-contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
-or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
-one way or the other.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+<parameter_description> the target #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8440,6 +7971,7 @@ Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @button.
This may have been explicitly set by gtk_button_set_image()
or constructed by gtk_button_new_from_stock().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8450,7 +7982,6 @@ or constructed by gtk_button_new_from_stock().
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkWidget or %NULL in case there is no image
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -8475,35 +8006,23 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkIMContextInfo">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_x">
<description>
-Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
+Obtains the horizontal resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> The unique identification string of the input method.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_name">
-<parameter_description> The human-readable name of the input method.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> Translation domain to be used with dgettext()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="domain_dirname">
-<parameter_description> Name of locale directory for use with bindtextdomain()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_locales">
-<parameter_description> A colon-separated list of locales where this input method
-should be the default. The asterisk "*" sets the default for all locales.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal resolution of @context
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_set_group">
@@ -8526,47 +8045,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioButton">
-<description>
-Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
-to changes. This is emitted when a radio button switches from
-being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more buttons, or
-vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
-more buttons to a different one, but not when the composition
-of the group that a button belongs to changes.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start">
-<description>
-Moves backward to the previous word start. (If @iter is currently on a
-word start, moves backward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_markup">
<description>
Parses @str which is marked up with the <link
@@ -8596,26 +8074,50 @@ g_free (markup);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
<description>
-Returns: the default page setup
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
+final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
+gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
+with a 1-element list.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default page setup
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
<description>
-Return value: the paper width.
+Returns the paper width in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation, but
+not margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_page_width().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8630,13 +8132,15 @@ Return value: the paper width.
</parameters>
<return> the paper width.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_private">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
+Returns whether @chooser should display recently used resources
+registered as private.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8648,7 +8152,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
<return> %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -8661,6 +8164,7 @@ insensitive or not.
If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use
gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8675,7 +8179,6 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the target is available, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -8741,6 +8244,7 @@ Since: 2.12
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8751,7 +8255,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
</parameters>
<return> the default source
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -8761,6 +8264,7 @@ Sets the contents of the selection from a #GdkPixbuf
The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
@selection_data->target.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8776,94 +8280,67 @@ The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_mapped">
<description>
-Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
-GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
+Marks the widget as being realized.
+This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
+"map" or "unmap" implementation.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
-extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
-you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
-The returned image must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_popdown">
-<description>
-Hides the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="mapped">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_tree_selection_new">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeSelection object. This function should not be invoked,
-as each #GtkTreeView will create its own #GtkTreeSelection.
+Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
+<return> the model
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popdown">
<description>
-Sets the icon for @window.
-Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+Hides the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
-with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
+applications should have little use for it.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_cursor_visible">
@@ -8905,7 +8382,7 @@ or a method on the #GtkTreeModel interface is called.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description>An array of #GType types, one for each column
+<parameter_description> An array of #GType types, one for each column
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8917,6 +8394,7 @@ or a method on the #GtkTreeModel interface is called.
Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
should not be modified or freed.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8927,79 +8405,64 @@ should not be modified or freed.
</parameters>
<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
<description>
-Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
-information such as the filename of the icon.
-The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
-gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
+a "selection-received" signal will be generated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> the #GIcon to look up
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> Which selection to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> desired icon size
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
+ In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
-information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
-wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
+request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
+this widget).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
-these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
-model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
-row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
-the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
-drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of @size
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
<description>
This function saves the information from @setup to @file_name.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9012,13 +8475,12 @@ This function saves the information from @setup to @file_name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -9044,10 +8506,32 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
+<description>
+Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
+to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
+the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> image representation being used
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_scroll_adjustments">
<description>
For widgets that support scrolling, sets the scroll adjustments and
-Return value: %TRUE if the widget supports scrolling
+returns %TRUE. For widgets that don't support scrolling, does
+nothing and returns %FALSE. Widgets that don't support scrolling
+can be scrolled by placing them in a #GtkViewport, which does
+support scrolling.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9056,11 +8540,11 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the widget supports scrolling
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description>an adjustment for horizontal scrolling, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an adjustment for horizontal scrolling, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description>an adjustment for vertical scrolling, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an adjustment for vertical scrolling, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9068,6 +8552,25 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the widget supports scrolling
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
+<description>
+Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
+gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an unused merge id.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_unregister_serialize_format">
<description>
This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
@@ -9094,6 +8597,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_flippable().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9104,7 +8608,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_flippable().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the range is flippable
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -9133,23 +8636,30 @@ position is in characters, not in bytes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
-of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
-environment variable for more details.
+Returns the widget used as label on @button. See
+gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
-listing the IM modules available for loading
+<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_window">
<description>
-Return value: @widget's window.
+Returns the widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9160,7 +8670,6 @@ Return value: @widget's window.
</parameters>
<return> @widget's window.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -9184,11 +8693,11 @@ Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
+<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9196,6 +8705,9 @@ Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
<description>
Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
+Since: 2.14
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9206,34 +8718,9 @@ Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkScaleButton's orientation.
-Since: 2.14
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_set_is_toplevel">
-<description>
-Internal function used by #GtkPlug when it gets parented/unparented by a
-#GtkSocket. This keeps the @window's #GTK_TOPLEVEL flag in sync with the
-global list of toplevel windows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_toplevel">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the window is still a real toplevel (nominally a
-parent of the root window); %FALSE if it is not (for example, for an
-in-process, parented GtkPlug)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_hsv_to_rgb">
<description>
Converts a color from HSV space to RGB.
@@ -9272,27 +8759,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
-<description>
-Return value: the page width.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_serialize">
<description>
This function serializes the portion of text between @start
@@ -9302,6 +8768,7 @@ and @end in the rich text format represented by @format.
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() beforehand.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9332,96 +8799,34 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() beforehand.
</parameters>
<return> the serialized data, encoded as @format
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
-<description>
-Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
-
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkStatusIcon">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Emitted when the #GtkSettings:gtk-tooltip-timeout has expired with the
-cursor hovering above @status_icon; or emitted when @status_icon got
-focus in keyboard mode.
-
-Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
-whether a tooltip should be shown for @status_icon. If this is
-the case %TRUE should be returned, %FALSE otherwise. Note that if
- keyboard_mode is %TRUE, the values of @x and @y are undefined and
-should not be used.
-
-The signal handler is free to manipulate @tooltip with the therefore
-destined function calls.
-
-Whether this signal is emitted is platform-dependent.
-For plain text tooltips, use #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-text in preference.
+Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
+ end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
+are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
-emitted, relative to @status_icon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
-emitted, relative to @status_icon
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyboard_mode">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tooltip was trigged using the keyboard
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> start position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tooltip should be shown right now, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear">
@@ -9445,6 +8850,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9455,62 +8861,26 @@ Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
</parameters>
<return> a #GdkWindow
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_new_for_directory">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileSystemModel object. The #GtkFileSystemModel
-object wraps the given @directory as a #GtkTreeModel.
-The model will query the given directory with the given @attributes
-and add all files inside the directory automatically. If supported,
-it will also monitor the drectory and update the model's
-contents to reflect changes, if the @directory supports monitoring.
+Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
+the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="directory">
-<parameter_description> the directory to show.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="attributes">
-<parameter_description>attributes to immediately load or %NULL for all
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="get_func">
-<parameter_description> function that the model should call to query data about a file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="get_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to the @get_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> @n_columns #GType types for the columns
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkMenuBar">
-<description>
-The child pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
-the widgets contained in child menuitems are arranged.
-
-Since: 2.8
+<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
@@ -9518,6 +8888,7 @@ Since: 2.8
Get the dragged item from the selection.
This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9532,7 +8903,6 @@ This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
</parameters>
<return> the dragged item in selection
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -9665,6 +9035,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
The selected font size.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9676,7 +9047,6 @@ The selected font size.
<return> A n integer representing the selected font size,
or -1 if no font size is selected.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -9713,20 +9083,20 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_value ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
+Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> the scale in percent
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9757,7 +9127,29 @@ Gets @widget's parent window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the parent window of @widget.
+<return> the parent window of @widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
+<description>
+Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
+the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
+this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drag_source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
</return>
</function>
@@ -9841,6 +9233,7 @@ this value is ignored.
This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9849,9 +9242,8 @@ gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
+<return> the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -9900,41 +9292,30 @@ action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
<description>
-Return value: the status of the print operation
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the status of the print operation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
+Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
+#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_get_pixmap">
-<description>
-Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
-a #GdkPixmap. If you need to keep this around over window
-resizes then you should add a reference to it.
+This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
+in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
+#GtkCellEditable.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="offscreen">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkOffscreenWindow contained widget.
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="canceled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -9964,6 +9345,7 @@ mnemonic character
<description>
Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9974,7 +9356,6 @@ Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
</parameters>
<return> the group identificator, or %NULL if none is set.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -9991,13 +9372,13 @@ GtkRecentFilter *filter = gtk_recent_filter_new ();
gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
]|
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentFilter
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -10027,6 +9408,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10041,22 +9423,23 @@ Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
</parameters>
<return> a new button widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_focus_first_last">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
<description>
- plug: a #GtkPlug
- direction: a direction
+Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-Called from the GtkPlug backend when the corresponding socket has
-told the plug that it has received the focus.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of tags in @table
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_button_new">
@@ -10067,13 +9450,13 @@ color. When the button is clicked, a color-selection dialog will open,
allowing the user to select a color. The swatch will be updated to reflect
the new color when the user finishes.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new color button.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -10122,41 +9505,26 @@ with gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
-gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
+Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
+with the action will have this accel path, so that their
+accelerators are consistent.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
-</return>
-</function>
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
-<description>
-Installs a style property on a widget class.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10196,6 +9564,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRadioAction object. To add the action to
a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10204,11 +9573,11 @@ call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>A tooltip for this action, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A tooltip for this action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -10224,7 +9593,6 @@ return if this action is selected.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRadioAction
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -10302,7 +9670,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="translator_credits">
-<parameter_description>the translator credits
+<parameter_description> the translator credits
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10352,7 +9720,9 @@ the iterator one past the last valid character in the buffer.
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_ignore_hidden">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if invisible widgets are ignored.
+Returns if invisible widgets are ignored when calculating the size.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10363,7 +9733,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if invisible widgets are ignored.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if invisible widgets are ignored.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -10375,6 +9744,7 @@ This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing purposes.
Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeModelSort.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10389,7 +9759,6 @@ Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeModelSort.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -10410,57 +9779,11 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_geometry">
-<description>
-Obtains information about the location of the status icon
-on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
-popups like notification bubbles.
-
-See gtk_status_icon_position_menu() for a more convenient
-alternative for positioning menus.
-
-Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
-this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
-the information is not reliable unless the status icon
-is embedded in a notification area, see
-gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description>return location for the screen, or %NULL if the
-information is not needed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>return location for the area occupied by the status
-icon, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description>return location for the orientation of the panel
-in which the status icon is embedded, or %NULL. A panel
-at the top or bottom of the screen is horizontal, a panel
-at the left or right is vertical.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the location information has
-been filled in
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixel_size">
<description>
Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10471,7 +9794,6 @@ Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
</parameters>
<return> the pixel size used for named icons.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -10516,7 +9838,9 @@ Activates or deactivates a cell renderer.
<function name="gtk_window_get_decorated">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window has been set to have decorations
+Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations
+such as a title bar via gtk_window_set_decorated().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10549,26 +9873,6 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
-<description>
-Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
-untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="font_desc">
-<parameter_description>the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
-the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_statusbar_remove">
<description>
Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar's stack.
@@ -10619,6 +9923,7 @@ Since: 2.12
Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this
function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size() instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10627,9 +9932,8 @@ function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the current size for icons of @shell
+<return> the current size for icons of @shell
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -10711,26 +10015,40 @@ Creates a new #GtkTargetList from an array of #GtkTargetEntry.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
<description>
-Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
-%TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see
-gtk_widget_get_visible().
+Adds a mark at @value.
-This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
-but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
-some condition.
+A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
+and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
+marks value.
-Since: 2.18
+If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+
+To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> whether the widget should be shown or not
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
+the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
+is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
+#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
+right.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10771,7 +10089,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="print_settings">
-<parameter_description>#GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter_description> #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10870,7 +10188,7 @@ node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n">
@@ -10894,6 +10212,7 @@ coerced to sane values.
Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10916,22 +10235,31 @@ Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
</parameters>
<return> The number of characters actually inserted.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
-#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
-to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-Since: 2.14
+This <emphasis>does not</emphasis> actually sort the model. Use
+gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
+support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
+be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
+that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
+
+The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
+Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
+calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="order">
+<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10953,19 +10281,6 @@ entire area of a widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_handle_modality_off">
-<description>
- plug: a #GtkPlug
-
-Called from the GtkPlug backend when the corresponding socket has
-told the plug that it modality has toggled off.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
Sets the mnemonic modifier for this window.
@@ -11027,28 +10342,6 @@ Most programs should not need to call this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
-<description>
-Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
-Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
-"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> string containing visible text in the range
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_deleted_text">
<description>
Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
@@ -11077,6 +10370,7 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11087,7 +10381,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in taskbar
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -11122,54 +10415,66 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as a #GdkPixbuf.
-
+Sets the #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use for the column. This
+function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
+setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
+cell renderer as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove an
+older one.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func_data">
+<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> The destroy notification for @func_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
-image type and it could be converted to a #GdkPixbuf, a
-newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise %NULL.
-If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
<description>
-Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
-is closest to the two widgets.
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget_a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_b">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="artists">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
- widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
-share a common ancestor.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_set">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11180,29 +10485,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
</parameters>
<return> the set of pages to print
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_find_module">
-<description>
-Looks for a dynamically module named @name of type @type in the standard GTK+
-module search path.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the module
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the pathname to the found module, or %NULL if it wasn't found.
-Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
@@ -11279,21 +10561,6 @@ column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_path_bar_up">
-<description>
-If the selected button in the pathbar is not the furthest button "up" (in the
-root direction), act as if the user clicked on the next button up.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPathBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_size">
<description>
Obtains the width and height needed to render the cell. Used by view
@@ -11315,23 +10582,23 @@ in @x_offset and @y_offset are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_area">
-<parameter_description>The area a cell will be allocated, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The area a cell will be allocated, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to return x offset of cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return x offset of cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to return y offset of cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return y offset of cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to return width needed to render a cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return width needed to render a cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to return height needed to render a cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return height needed to render a cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11457,19 +10724,81 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
+ height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
+and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
+actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
+this function.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
+<description>
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<description>
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -11484,7 +10813,7 @@ Sets the row that is highlighted for feedback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>The path of the row to highlight, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The path of the row to highlight, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
@@ -11590,33 +10919,21 @@ returned, but usually you don't need it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_resize">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry
-constraints. The default geometry constraint is that windows may
-not be smaller than their size request; to override this
-constraint, call gtk_widget_set_size_request() to set the window's
-request to a smaller value.
-
-If gtk_window_resize() is called before showing a window for the
-first time, it overrides any default size set with
-gtk_window_set_default_size().
-
-Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels.
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width in pixels to resize the window to
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height in pixels to resize the window to
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11647,26 +10964,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
-<description>
-Unselects the row at @path.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
<description>
Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
@@ -11702,7 +10999,9 @@ is otherwise valid
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
<description>
-Return value: the space between rows
+Returns the value of the ::row-spacing property.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11713,7 +11012,6 @@ Return value: the space between rows
</parameters>
<return> the space between rows
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -11744,7 +11042,11 @@ whether insertions are allowed at a given position.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size">
<description>
-Return value:a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
+Returns the icon size used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons
+they should use.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11753,10 +11055,9 @@ Return value:a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
+<return> a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
used for @tool_item
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -11764,6 +11065,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11772,13 +11074,12 @@ Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment.
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkScrollbar.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -11830,27 +11131,6 @@ pango_break() function.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type">
-<description>
-Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
- chooser
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sort_type">
-<parameter_description> sort order that the chooser should use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_tag_new">
<description>
Creates a #GtkTextTag. Configure the tag using object arguments,
@@ -11860,7 +11140,7 @@ i.e. using g_object_set().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>tag name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> tag name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11880,6 +11160,7 @@ This function is a little faster than calling
gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual URI data.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11890,7 +11171,6 @@ the actual URI data.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE is there is an URI list available, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -11934,27 +11214,43 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_new">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_widget">
<description>
-Creates a toplevel container widget that is used to retrieve
-snapshots of widgets without showing them on the screen. For
-widgets that are on the screen and part of a normal widget
-hierarchy, gtk_widget_get_snapshot() can be used instead.
+Inserts a widget in the toolbar at the given position.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this widget after.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A pointer to a #GtkWidget
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filter">
<description>
Gets the current filter; see gtk_file_chooser_set_filter().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11965,7 +11261,6 @@ Gets the current filter; see gtk_file_chooser_set_filter().
</parameters>
<return> the current filter, or %NULL
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -11998,56 +11293,45 @@ array of targets, otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
+Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+This function is meant to be used in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-get
+callback.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
+<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_print_settings">
<description>
-Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
-a stock item.
+Gets the current print settings from the dialog.
-If no function is registered for a translation domain,
-g_dgettext() is used.
+Since: 2.10
-The function is used for all stock items whose
- translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
-to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
-of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
-the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
-when dealing with message contexts.</description>
+</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> the translation domain for which @func shall be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTranslateFunc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
-no longer needed
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current print settings
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valist">
@@ -12074,18 +11358,28 @@ bindings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_size_group_queue_resize">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_equal">
<description>
-Queue a resize on a widget, and on all other widgets grouped with this widget.
+Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible
+mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform
+better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and
+comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than
+gtk_text_iter_compare().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_selectable">
@@ -12104,6 +11398,27 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_label_set_selectable().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
+<description>
+Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned animation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if
+the image is empty
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_activate_default">
<description>
Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current
@@ -12123,26 +11438,30 @@ focused widget is activated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
<description>
-Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
+Sets the number of pages in the document.
-If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
+before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
+#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
-Since: 2.16
+Note that the page numbers passed to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
+and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
+the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
+will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+<parameter name="n_pages">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12171,6 +11490,34 @@ bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified-changed" signal.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
+<description>
+Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
+string showing text that is currently being edited and not
+yet committed into the buffer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_string">
+<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_pos">
+<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_copy_values">
<description>
Copies the values from @src to @dest so that @dest has the same values
@@ -12190,6 +11537,31 @@ as @src. Frees existing values in @dest.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
+<description>
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_ppd">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by using
@@ -12199,6 +11571,7 @@ If @ppd_name is not a recognized PPD paper name,
@ppd_display_name, @width and @height are used to
construct a custom #GtkPaperSize object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12222,33 +11595,37 @@ construct a custom #GtkPaperSize object.
<return> a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
to free it
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default right margin
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_orientation">
<description>
-Return value: the relative position of texts and icons
+Returns the value of the ::orientation property which determines
+whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12259,7 +11636,6 @@ Return value: the relative position of texts and icons
</parameters>
<return> the relative position of texts and icons
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -12289,28 +11665,25 @@ popped up initially.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
<description>
-Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
-Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
-if the size of the notification area changes. For other
-storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
-react to size changes.
-
-Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
-status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+Returns %TRUE, if a value is associated with @key.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the size that is available for the image
+<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -12339,7 +11712,9 @@ called by models after the child state of a node changes.
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Return value: a #GList of
+Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12348,17 +11723,18 @@ Return value: a #GList of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of
+<return> a #GList of
action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
and should not be modified.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
<description>
-Return value: number of bytes in the line
+Returns the number of bytes in the line containing @iter,
+including the paragraph delimiters.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12383,7 +11759,10 @@ Return value: number of bytes in the line
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
<description>
-Return value: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
+gtk_button_set_relief().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12394,7 +11773,6 @@ Return value: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
</parameters>
<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -12402,6 +11780,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12412,13 +11791,32 @@ Gets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup.
</parameters>
<return> the paper size
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
+<description>
+Fills @color in with the original color value.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is sensitive
+Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12429,7 +11827,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is sensitive
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is sensitive
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -12454,9 +11851,38 @@ on the bottom or left.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
<description>
-Return value: The number of pages in the @assistant.
+Returns the number of pages in the @assistant
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12467,7 +11893,6 @@ Return value: The number of pages in the @assistant.
</parameters>
<return> The number of pages in the @assistant.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -12482,7 +11907,7 @@ Causes the given @text to appear superimposed on the progress bar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description>a UTF-8 string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12541,27 +11966,24 @@ Zero-terminates the stored data.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
-child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
-show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
-the horizontal adjustment.
+Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
+user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
+an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
-The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
-system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
-is moved among the descendents of @container
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12687,24 +12109,43 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkBuilder">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
<description>
-The translation domain used when translating property values that
-have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
-If the translation domain is %NULL, #GtkBuilder uses gettext(),
-otherwise g_dgettext().
+Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
+or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
+See gtk_file_chooser_button_set_focus_on_click().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12716,13 +12157,14 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
<return> %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
the mouse.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_get_resize_mode">
<description>
-Return value: the current resize mode
+Returns the resize mode for the container. See
+gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12784,11 +12226,11 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -12803,25 +12245,23 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
-This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copyright">
-<parameter_description>the copyright string
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the width of the label in characters.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_in">
@@ -12894,6 +12334,7 @@ In general, you should only create screen specific
resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12902,9 +12343,8 @@ free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
+<return> the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -12930,6 +12370,7 @@ URI; a short description of the item; whether the item should be
considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the
applications that have registered it.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12949,7 +12390,6 @@ applications that have registered it.
<return> %TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the
recently used resources list, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -12978,45 +12418,37 @@ will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
<description>
-Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
-specified by @style for the given state.
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
+<function name="gtk_pixmap_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
-label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
-has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_select_path">
@@ -13037,21 +12469,41 @@ Select the row at @path.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
+ binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
+emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
+arguments.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to install
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_name">
+<parameter_description> signal to execute upon activation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_args">
+<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
@@ -13072,36 +12524,67 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
+Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
<description>
-Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
+Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+The indentation may be negative.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the columns are clickable.
+</parameters>
+<return> number of pixels of indentation
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_container_add">
+<description>
+Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
+such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
+layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
+pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
+consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
+gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
+those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
+you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13120,7 +12603,7 @@ the current label is removed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the text to use as the label of the frame
+<parameter_description> the text to use as the label of the frame
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13156,80 +12639,54 @@ be set to 0 (zero).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
-by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
-entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
-with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout_index">
-<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> byte index into the entry contents
+<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
<description>
-Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
-The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
-column.
+Returns a string representation of the status of the
+print operation. The string is translated and suitable
+for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
+Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
+value that is suitable for programmatic use.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> column number to modify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> new value for the cell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
-<description>
-Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
-with the #GtkPrintContext.
-
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango layout for @context
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
<description>
-Return value: The license information. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the license information.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13241,92 +12698,120 @@ Return value: The license information. The string is owned by the about
<return> The license information. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
+Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
+with.
+Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
+if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
+call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
+in addition to calling this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text for the label
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> icon size this source applies to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_forall">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
<description>
-Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
-that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
-of the container, but were added by the container implementation
-itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
-rather than gtk_container_forall().
+Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a callback
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> callback user data
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new title for @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_focus">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
<description>
-Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style.
+Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
+ binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet set to activate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of the binding
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_button_text">
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> response ID for the first button, then additional (button, id) pairs, ending with %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_draw">
@@ -13360,6 +12845,7 @@ Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
#GKeyFileError.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13372,33 +12858,40 @@ file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
"Print Settings"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererPixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-The GIcon representing the icon to display.
-If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
-automatically.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_stock_list_ids">
@@ -13417,7 +12910,18 @@ and each string in the list must be freed with g_free().
<function name="gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels">
<description>
-Return value: the list of
+Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
+which this widget is a the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
+gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
+
+The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
+want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
+callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
+<emphasis>must</emphasis> call <literal>g_list_foreach (result,
+(GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and then unref all the
+widgets afterwards.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13430,10 +12934,28 @@ Return value: the list of
mnemonic labels; free this list
with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
+<description>
+Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
+inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
+something like #GtkFrame won't work.
+
+More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_always_show_image">
<description>
If %TRUE, the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
@@ -13505,6 +13027,7 @@ a class used in gtk_binding_set_by_class().
<description>
Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13515,7 +13038,6 @@ Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
</parameters>
<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -13569,16 +13091,16 @@ leaving a gap in one side.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -13613,6 +13135,25 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
+<description>
+Sets whether the tab label area will have arrows for scrolling if
+there are too many tabs to fit in the area.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scrollable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if scroll arrows should be added
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_expander_set_label">
<description>
Sets the text of the label of the expander to @label.
@@ -13628,30 +13169,27 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>a string
+<parameter_description> a string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show the recently used resources that
-were not found.
+Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
+See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
-%FALSE otheriwse.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
</return>
</function>
@@ -13662,6 +13200,7 @@ is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
See also gtk_grab_add().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13672,7 +13211,6 @@ See also gtk_grab_add().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -13680,44 +13218,13 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
-
Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
-<description>
-Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
-if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -13754,7 +13261,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description>the name of the action to be proxied, or %NULL to add a separator
+<parameter_description> the name of the action to be proxied, or %NULL to add a separator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="type">
@@ -13770,6 +13277,26 @@ is added after its siblings.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text for the label
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_set_focus_on_click">
<description>
Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -13797,6 +13324,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the tooltip text of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13807,7 +13335,6 @@ Gets the tooltip text of @action.
</parameters>
<return> the tooltip text
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -13816,6 +13343,7 @@ Since: 2.16
Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
of the resource is obtained.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13827,23 +13355,36 @@ of the resource is obtained.
<return> the display name of the resource. The returned string
is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_get_module_path">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
<description>
-Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
+Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
+Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
+as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
+currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
+usual way to get the selection.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
+<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
+function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
+last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -13851,6 +13392,7 @@ Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
<description>
Copies a #GtkPrintSettings object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13861,7 +13403,6 @@ Copies a #GtkPrintSettings object.
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated copy of @other
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -13929,6 +13470,38 @@ Unselects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
+<description>
+This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
+of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
+to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
+the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
+However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
+gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
+such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -14016,42 +13589,26 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
<description>
-Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
-the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
+Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
+which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
+of the icon view.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
-<description>
-Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
-#GtkPrintContext.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango context for @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
@@ -14073,7 +13630,11 @@ a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_expander_set_use_markup ().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14084,27 +13645,64 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
+<description>
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_completion">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
+Returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14115,33 +13713,9 @@ Return value: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
-quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_add_with_properties">
<description>
Adds @widget to @container, setting child properties at the same time.
@@ -14170,6 +13744,32 @@ with @first_prop_name
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
+<description>
+Returns the page height in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the page height.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_change_entry">
<description>
Changes the @accel_key and @accel_mods currently associated with @accel_path.
@@ -14206,26 +13806,23 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -14316,6 +13913,75 @@ Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
+<description>
+Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
+'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitivity">
+<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_draw_extension">
+<description>
+Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the extension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> the side on to which the extension is attached
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_get_style">
<description>
Finds all matching RC styles for a given widget,
@@ -14341,7 +14007,8 @@ style around, you should add a reference yourself.
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_name">
<description>
-Return value: mark name
+Returns the mark name; returns NULL for anonymous marks.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14375,6 +14042,7 @@ Copies @icon_set by value.
Gets whether @chooser should display tooltips containing the full path
of a recently user resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14386,7 +14054,6 @@ of a recently user resource.
<return> %TRUE if the recent chooser should show tooltips,
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -14396,6 +14063,7 @@ Lists all the paper sizes @printer supports.
This will return and empty list unless the printer's details are
available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14406,7 +14074,6 @@ available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated list of newly allocated #GtkPageSetup s.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -14460,7 +14127,9 @@ be optimized.
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_show_size">
<description>
-Return value: whether the font size will be shown in the label.
+Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14471,7 +14140,6 @@ Return value: whether the font size will be shown in the label.
</parameters>
<return> whether the font size will be shown in the label.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -14481,6 +14149,7 @@ This function will generate a @button click in the upwards or downwards
spin button arrow areas, usually leading to an increase or decrease of
spin button's value.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14499,7 +14168,6 @@ spin button's value.
</parameters>
<return> wether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -14507,6 +14175,8 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Gets the current group identificator for @notebook.
+Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14517,36 +14187,59 @@ Gets the current group identificator for @notebook.
</parameters>
<return> the group identificator, or -1 if none is set.
-Since: 2.10
-Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkScrolledWindow">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view">
<description>
-Whether to place scrollbars within the scrolled window's bevel.
+Returns the tree view associated with @selection.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeView
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valuesv">
<description>
-Return value: A #GtkTreeView
+A variant of gtk_list_store_set_valist() which
+takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
+varargs. This function is mainly intended for
+language-bindings and in case the number of columns to
+change is not known until run-time.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="values">
+<parameter_description> an array of GValues
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_values">
+<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeView
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
@@ -14565,20 +14258,22 @@ Since: 2.20
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="slider_start">
-<parameter_description>return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="slider_end">
-<parameter_description>return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
<description>
-Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14586,18 +14281,9 @@ Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+<return> whether to use color
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -14644,77 +14330,13 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>an icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
-<description>
-Sets whether the tab label area will have arrows for scrolling if
-there are too many tabs to fit in the area.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scrollable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if scroll arrows should be added
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer's padding.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
-to it, and makes its show @markup. The text can text can be
-marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
-markup language</link>.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
@@ -14733,7 +14355,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_logo">
<description>
-Return value: the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
+Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14746,7 +14370,6 @@ Return value: the pixbuf displayed as logo. The pixbuf is
owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a reference
to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -14755,6 +14378,7 @@ Since: 2.6
Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14767,13 +14391,12 @@ See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -14796,10 +14419,12 @@ and gdk_input_set_extension_events().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
+Returns the value associated with @key, interpreted
+as a length. The returned value is converted to @units.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14807,10 +14432,17 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to use color
+<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -14818,6 +14450,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14828,26 +14461,28 @@ Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action.
</parameters>
<return> a toolbar item connected to the action.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
-determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
-(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
-algorithms).
+Looks up the string value associated with @key.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
+<return> the string value for @key
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -14915,6 +14550,7 @@ Note that locales other than "C" tend to alter (translate" label
so this function is genrally only useful in test programs with
predetermined locales, see gtk_test_init() for more details.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14929,28 +14565,71 @@ predetermined locales, see gtk_test_init() for more details.
</parameters>
<return> a GtkLabel widget if any is found.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
<description>
-Returns: index of the icon which is the source of the current
+Installs a style property on a widget class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
+<description>
+Returns whether the printer is virtual (i.e. does not
+represent actual printer hardware, but something like
+a CUPS class).
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
+<description>
+Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
+to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
+by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
+<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_filename">
<description>
Sets the name of an image file to use as a base image when creating
@@ -15063,37 +14742,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_value">
-<description>
-Gets the value associated with the given row @iter and @column.
-If no value is available yet and the default value should be used,
-%NULL is returned.
-This is a performance optimization for the calls
-gtk_tree_model_get() or gtk_tree_model_get_value(), which copy
-the value and spend a considerable amount of time in iterator
-lookups. Both of which are slow.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row of @model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> the column to get the value for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to the actual value as stored in @model or %NULL
-if no value available yet.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paint_vline">
<description>
Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
@@ -15114,16 +14762,16 @@ using the given style and state.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y1_">
@@ -15148,6 +14796,7 @@ Retrieves the icon name used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
pixbuf, stock or gicon).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15163,43 +14812,100 @@ pixbuf, stock or gicon).
<return> An icon name, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
wasn't set from an icon name
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_accel_path">
<description>
-If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
-grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is %TRUE and
-sizing mode of the column is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing
-mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
+Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
+for its immediate children, its menu items, can be constructed.
+The main purpose of this function is to spare the programmer the
+inconvenience of having to call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() on
+each menu item that should support runtime user changable accelerators.
+Instead, by just calling gtk_menu_set_accel_path() on their parent,
+each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its purpose,
+automatically gets an accel path assigned. For example, a menu containing
+menu items "New" and "Exit", will, after
+<literal>gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");</literal>
+has been called, assign its items the accel paths:
+<literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"</literal> and <literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"</literal>.
+Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
+their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
+and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="resizable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the column can be resized
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
-Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
-bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
-causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
-per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
+Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
+function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
+about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
+this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
+it isn't needed by the filter.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="needed">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
+filter function needs.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
+the file will be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_range">
+<description>
+Gets the range allowed for @spin_button. See
+gtk_spin_button_set_range().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> location to store minimum allowed value, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> location to store maximum allowed value, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15226,20 +14932,41 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
<description>
-Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
+Look up a named tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a tag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the current icon size for the icons on
-the toolbar.
+<return> The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
+<description>
+Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -15287,54 +15014,45 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
<description>
-Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
+Gets the page type of @page.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size1">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size2">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
-represent the same paper size
+<return> the page type of @page.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_can_activate_accel">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_path">
<description>
-Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
-identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
-This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
-signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
-handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
-that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
-its ancestors mapped.
+Finds an item factory which has been constructed using the
+<literal>"<name>"</literal> prefix of @path as the @path argument
+for gtk_item_factory_new().
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_id">
-<parameter_description> the ID of a signal installed on @widget
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a string starting with a factory path of the form
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the #GtkItemFactory created for the given factory path, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -15359,30 +15077,10 @@ realized.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
+<return> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
-<description>
-Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_orientation">
<description>
Sets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
@@ -15407,7 +15105,8 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
<function name="gtk_button_get_use_stock">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the button label is used to
+Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15422,23 +15121,21 @@ used directly as the label text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Returns: the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
+Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
+primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
+go back to the default state, or not.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
-%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
+<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
</return>
</function>
@@ -15508,23 +15205,6 @@ if it exists.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_tree_selection_new_with_tree_view">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeSelection object. This function should not be invoked,
-as each #GtkTreeView will create its own #GtkTreeSelection.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_uri_targets">
<description>
Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -15545,72 +15225,33 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_element">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
-Inserts a new element in the toolbar at the given position.
-
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET, @widget is used as the new element.
-If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, @widget is used to determine
-the radio group for the new element. In all other cases, @widget must
-be %NULL.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a value of type #GtkToolbarChildType that determines what @widget
-will be.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> any data you wish to pass to the callback.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this element after.
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> the integer value of @key
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the tabs are shown
+Returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown. See
+gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15641,36 +15282,20 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
-<description>
-Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15698,19 +15323,20 @@ Fetches the precision of @spin_button. See gtk_spin_button_set_digits().
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog. This function is analogous to
gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL,
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL,
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -15721,7 +15347,6 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -15774,6 +15399,7 @@ the line and the function returns %TRUE. (Note that this implies that
in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on
every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15784,13 +15410,15 @@ every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
</parameters>
<return> whether @iter moved
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
+Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
+selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15805,7 +15433,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -15844,7 +15471,7 @@ not be %TRUE for the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the currently focused widget, or %NULL if there is none.
+<return> the currently focused widget, or %NULL if there is none.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15879,24 +15506,6 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
-<description>
-This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
-the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
-demand by this function.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="object_class">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_lines">
<description>
Moves @count lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -15923,22 +15532,15 @@ moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_add_all_grabbed_keys">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
<description>
- plug: a #GtkPlug
-
-Calls _gtk_plug_windowing_add_grabbed_key() on all the grabbed keys
-in the @plug.
+Returns the floating point number represented by
+the value that is associated with @key, or @default_val
+if the value does not represent a floating point number.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Floating point numbers are parsed with g_ascii_strtod().
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
-<description>
-Return value: the floating point number associated with @key
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15957,13 +15559,14 @@ Return value: the floating point number associated with @key
</parameters>
<return> the floating point number associated with @key
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_box_get_child_secondary">
<description>
-Return value: whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+Returns whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -15978,7 +15581,6 @@ Return value: whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
</parameters>
<return> whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -16017,7 +15619,7 @@ the icon list).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>icon for window
+<return> icon for window
</return>
</function>
@@ -16041,46 +15643,63 @@ tags in @text_view's buffer.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkSettings">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_selected_printer">
<description>
-Where the contents of scrolled windows are located with respect to the
-scrollbars, if not overridden by the scrolled window's own placement.
+Gets the currently selected printer.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the currently selected printer
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_item">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
<description>
-Creates an item for @entry.
+Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
+up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkItemFactoryEntry to create an item for
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback function of @entry
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback function of @entry is of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if it is of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
+<description>
+Returns the current focus child widget inside @container.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The child widget which has the focus
+inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_new_with_range">
@@ -16095,6 +15714,7 @@ Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16117,7 +15737,6 @@ needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkScale
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -16125,6 +15744,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Retrieves the display of the selection.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16135,7 +15755,6 @@ Retrieves the display of the selection.
</parameters>
<return> the display of the selection.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -16168,99 +15787,165 @@ Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the visual for @widget
+<return> the visual for @widget
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
-
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_add_and_query_file">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
<description>
-This is a conenience function that calls g_file_query_info_async() on
-the given file, and when successful, adds it to the model.
-Upon failure, the @file is discarded.
+Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> the file to add
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
+if the selection has stopped.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="attributes">
-<parameter_description> attributes to query before adding the file
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkVBox.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
<description>
-Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
-the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
-is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sort_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="num_copies">
+<parameter_description> the number of copies
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
-valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items_ac">
+<description>
+Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the length of @entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_type">
+<parameter_description> 1 if the callback functions in @entries are of type
+#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if they are of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_unref">
<description>
Inverse of gtk_widget_ref(). Equivalent to g_object_unref().
@@ -16294,57 +15979,69 @@ of the same dialog.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget_pointer">
-<parameter_description>address of a variable that contains @widget
+<parameter_description> address of a variable that contains @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_space">
<description>
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-
-In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
-<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
-same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
-might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
-when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
-the toolbox back in the same place.
-
-If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
-role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
-restoring the session.
+Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the number of widgets after which a space should be inserted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Return value:The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+Returns whether the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
-Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
+<description>
+Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+establishes a grab when shown
</return>
</function>
@@ -16370,7 +16067,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description>The icon to set, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The icon to set, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16381,6 +16078,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::has-selection property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16391,107 +16089,119 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::has-selection property.
</parameters>
<return> whether there is a selection
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
<description>
-Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
-for its immediate children, its menu items, can be constructed.
-The main purpose of this function is to spare the programmer the
-inconvenience of having to call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() on
-each menu item that should support runtime user changable accelerators.
-Instead, by just calling gtk_menu_set_accel_path() on their parent,
-each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its purpose,
-automatically gets an accel path assigned. For example, a menu containing
-menu items "New" and "Exit", will, after
-<literal>gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");</literal>
-has been called, assign its items the accel paths:
-<literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"</literal> and <literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"</literal>.
-Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
-their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
-and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
-
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
+grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is %TRUE and
+sizing mode of the column is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing
+mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description>a valid accelerator path
+<parameter name="resizable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the column can be resized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
<description>
-Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
-to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
-to be activated.
+Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
+is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
+<description>
+Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
+only needs to be used when the application is
+starting drags itself, and is not needed when
+gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the source widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
+source can provide the data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the context for this drag.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
<description>
-Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
+bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
+causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
+per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="support_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
<description>
-Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
+Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags
+from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
+will receive.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current maximum value of the adjustment.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> event mask for @widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -16505,6 +16215,7 @@ The general purpose of this function is to find the most likely "action&quo
widget, relative to another labeling widget. Such as finding a
button or text entry widget, given it's corresponding label widget.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16519,7 +16230,6 @@ button or text entry widget, given it's corresponding label widget.
</parameters>
<return> a widget of type @widget_type if any is found.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -16547,6 +16257,7 @@ pointed by @info.
If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the
storage specification, they will be expanded.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16559,15 +16270,15 @@ storage specification, they will be expanded.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="app_exec">
-<parameter_description>return location for the string containing the command line
+<parameter_description> return location for the string containing the command line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description>return location for the number of times this item was registered
+<parameter_description> return location for the number of times this item was registered
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description>return location for the timestamp this item was last registered
+<parameter_description> return location for the timestamp this item was last registered
for this application
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -16577,7 +16288,6 @@ resource inside the recently used list, or %FALSE otherwise. The
@app_exec string is owned by the #GtkRecentInfo and should not be
modified or freed
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -16585,6 +16295,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16595,7 +16306,6 @@ Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
</parameters>
<return> The current page size of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -16604,6 +16314,7 @@ Since: 2.14
Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
gtk_file_chooser_add_filter(), gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16617,26 +16328,6 @@ user selectable filters. The contents of the list are
owned by GTK+, but you must free the list itself with
g_slist_free() when you are done with it.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
-selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -16662,7 +16353,10 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
+Returns whether the printer accepts input in
+PDF format.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16673,7 +16367,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -16698,36 +16391,21 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_string">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
+Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
+<parameter name="column_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the column spacing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16738,6 +16416,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
<description>
Gets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16748,46 +16427,72 @@ Gets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
+Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the current icon size for the icons on
+the toolbar.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
<description>
-Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
+Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
+<description>
+Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
+search in for the current model.
+
+If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
+key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
+whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
+
+Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
+column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
@@ -16802,7 +16507,13 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
<function name="gtk_window_list_toplevels">
<description>
-Return value: list of toplevel widgets
+Returns a list of all existing toplevel windows. The widgets
+in the list are not individually referenced. If you want
+to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
+callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you <emphasis>must</emphasis> call
+<literal>g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)</literal> first, and
+then unref all the widgets afterwards.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16823,6 +16534,7 @@ This function is a little faster than calling
gtk_clipboard_wait_for_image() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual image data.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16833,7 +16545,6 @@ the actual image data.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE is there is an image available, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -16911,6 +16622,26 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
+<description>
+Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
+Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filesel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
+files in the file list.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon">
<description>
Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -16919,6 +16650,7 @@ can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16943,44 +16675,9 @@ combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
gtk_icon_info_free()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTreeModel">
-<description>
-This signal is emitted when the children of a node in the #GtkTreeModel
-have been reordered.
-
-Note that this signal is <emphasis>not</emphasis> emitted
-when rows are reordered by DND, since this is implemented
-by removing and then reinserting the row.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the tree node whose children
-have been reordered
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the node whose
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the current position of
-each child to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title of this tray icon.
@@ -17004,24 +16701,23 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear_attributes">
<description>
-Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
-
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
-is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_end">
@@ -17063,18 +16759,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkEntryBuffer">
-<description>
-The maximum length (in characters) of the text in the buffer.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_polygon">
<description>
Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
@@ -17117,7 +16801,10 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_polygon() instead.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group">
<description>
-Return value: a #GtkSizeGroup
+Returns the size group used for labels in @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function and use the size group for labels.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17128,27 +16815,6 @@ Return value: a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkSizeGroup
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_path">
-<description>
-Finds an item factory which has been constructed using the
-<literal>"<name>"</literal> prefix of @path as the @path argument
-for gtk_item_factory_new().
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a string starting with a factory path of the form
-<literal>"<name>"</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>the #GtkItemFactory created for the given factory path, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -17158,6 +16824,7 @@ Generates a string representation of the iter. This string is a ':'
separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an
acceptable return value for this string.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17172,22 +16839,6 @@ acceptable return value for this string.
</parameters>
<return> A newly-allocated string. Must be freed with g_free().
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
-<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is at the end of a line
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
</return>
</function>
@@ -17195,6 +16846,7 @@ Return value: whether @iter is at the end of a line
<description>
Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17207,7 +16859,7 @@ Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17216,10 +16868,31 @@ In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
+<description>
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_path_at_pos">
<description>
Finds the path at the point (@x, @y), relative to bin_window coordinates.
@@ -17228,6 +16901,7 @@ the cell at the specified position.
See gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting
widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17247,24 +16921,6 @@ widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
<return> The #GtkTreePath corresponding to the icon or %NULL
if no icon exists at that position.
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_im_module_get_default_context_id">
-<description>
-Return the context_id of the best IM context type
-for the given window.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="client_window">
-<parameter_description> a window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the context ID (will never be %NULL)
</return>
</function>
@@ -17290,13 +16946,14 @@ on the layout in response to the #GtkWidget::style-set and
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #PangoContext for the widget.
+<return> the #PangoContext for the widget.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_title">
<description>
-Return value: the title of the menu, or %NULL if the menu has no
+Returns the title of the menu. See gtk_menu_set_title().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17407,6 +17064,29 @@ aligned with the menu popup position (only useful for GtkOptionMenu).
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
+the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
+text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
+Reversed for RTL layouts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
<description>
Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
@@ -17475,25 +17155,17 @@ padding on the sides)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_current_folder">
+<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
<description>
-Gets the current folder for the #GtkFileChooserEntry. If the
-user has only entered a filename, this will be in the base folder
-(see _gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder()), but if the
-user has entered a relative or absolute path, then it will
-be different. If the user has entered unparsable text, or text which
-the entry cannot handle, this will return %NULL.
+Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the file for the current folder - this value is owned by the
-chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -17532,7 +17204,11 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="gtk_event_box_get_above_child">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is above the window
+Returns whether the event box window is above or below the
+windows of its child. See gtk_event_box_set_above_child() for
+details.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17544,7 +17220,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is above the window
<return> %TRUE if the event box window is above the window
of its child.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -17585,6 +17260,7 @@ one of the filenames will be returned at random.
If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
folder.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17596,10 +17272,33 @@ folder.
<return> The currently selected URI, or %NULL
if no file is selected. Free with g_free()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_update_buttons_state">
+<description>
+Forces @assistant to recompute the buttons state.
+
+GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations,
+e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the
+visibility or completeness of a page changes.
+
+One situation where it can be necessary to call this
+function is when changing a value on the current page
+affects the future page flow of the assistant.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_action_set_current_value">
<description>
Sets the currently active group member to the member with value
@@ -17621,21 +17320,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
<description>
-Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
+Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
+details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the id of the currently active slave
+<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font
+group details. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and
+must not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -17643,6 +17345,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the page setup that is used by the #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17653,7 +17356,6 @@ Gets the page setup that is used by the #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
</parameters>
<return> whether a page setup was set by user.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -17673,28 +17375,6 @@ See gtk_image_menu_item_set_image().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
-<description>
-Gets whether @page is complete.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_set_take_focus">
<description>
If @take_focus is %TRUE (the default) the menu shell will take the keyboard
@@ -17765,98 +17445,56 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
<description>
-Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
-filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
-is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
-in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
-filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
-set of files without letting the user change it.
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-This function should only be called after the layout has been
-placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
-scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
-between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
-</return>
-</function>
+Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
+a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
+is %FALSE by default.
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths">
-<description>
-Creates up a #GtkStyle from styles defined in a RC file by providing
-the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
-when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
-don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
-would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
+Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
-The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
-|[
-gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
-gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
-gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
-path, class_path,
-G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
-]|
+If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
+You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
+for the details.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_path">
-<parameter_description>the widget path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
-if no matching against the widget path should be done
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="class_path">
-<parameter_description>the class path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
-if no matching against the class path should be done.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a type that will be used along with parent types of this type
-when matching against class styles, or #G_TYPE_NONE
+<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A style created by matching with the supplied paths,
-or %NULL if nothing matching was specified and the default style should
-be used. The returned value is owned by GTK+ as part of an internal cache,
-so you must call g_object_ref() on the returned value if you want to
-keep a reference to it.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
@@ -17882,6 +17520,7 @@ Retrieves the contents of the buffer.
The memory pointer returned by this call will not change
unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17895,25 +17534,28 @@ string. This string points to internally allocated
storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or
stored.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
<description>
-Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
+Gets whether @page is complete.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow
+<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -17941,7 +17583,11 @@ Sets the minimum and maximum allowable values for @spin_button
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_offset">
<description>
-Return value: offset in visible characters from the start of the line
+Returns the offset in characters from the start of the
+line to the given @iter, not counting characters that
+are invisible due to tags with the "invisible" flag
+toggled on.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17954,28 +17600,28 @@ Return value: offset in visible characters from the start of the line
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add">
+<function name="gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate">
<description>
-Adds a binding entry.
+Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
+
+The default handler for this signal activates the @widget if
+ group_cycling is %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling
+is %TRUE.
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> #a GtkBindingSet to clear an entry of
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
+<parameter name="group_cycling">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_search_path">
@@ -17991,7 +17637,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>location to store a list of icon theme path directories or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store a list of icon theme path directories or %NULL
The stored value should be freed with g_strfreev().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -18004,18 +17650,66 @@ in @path, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
+Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
+indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
+is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
+response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
+
+Special XML characters in the printf() arguments passed to this
+function will automatically be escaped as necessary.
+(See g_markup_printf_escaped() for how this is implemented.)
+Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
+Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
+label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
+instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
+as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
+argument.
+|[
+GtkWidget *dialog;
+dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+NULL);
+gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
+markup);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of message
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buttons">
+<parameter_description> set of buttons to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column">
@@ -18052,7 +17746,7 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the current vertical aspect.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18087,6 +17781,7 @@ this function is anything between the lower and upper bounds
of the adjustment belonging to @widget, and is not a percentage
as passed in to gtk_test_slider_set_perc().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18097,7 +17792,6 @@ as passed in to gtk_test_slider_set_perc().
</parameters>
<return> adjustment->value for an adjustment belonging to @widget.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -18174,36 +17868,6 @@ is not filtered out
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_get_lc_ctype">
-<description>
-Return the Unix-style locale string for the language currently in
-effect. On Unix systems, this is the return value from
-<literal>setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL)</literal>, and the user can
-affect this through the environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE or
-LANG (checked in that order). The locale strings typically is in
-the form lang_COUNTRY, where lang is an ISO-639 language code, and
-COUNTRY is an ISO-3166 country code. For instance, sv_FI for
-Swedish as written in Finland or pt_BR for Portuguese as written in
-Brazil.
-
-On Windows, the C library doesn't use any such environment
-variables, and setting them won't affect the behaviour of functions
-like ctime(). The user sets the locale through the Regional Options
-in the Control Panel. The C library (in the setlocale() function)
-does not use country and language codes, but country and language
-names spelled out in English.
-However, this function does check the above environment
-variables, and does return a Unix-style locale string based on
-either said environment variables or the thread's current locale.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a dynamically allocated string, free with g_free().
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_set_render_icon">
<description>
Renders an icon using gtk_style_render_icon(). In most cases,
@@ -18221,7 +17885,7 @@ image" icon will be returned instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkStyle associated with @widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle associated with @widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="direction">
@@ -18233,18 +17897,18 @@ image" icon will be returned instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>icon size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1
+<parameter_description> icon size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1
means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>widget that will display the icon, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> widget that will display the icon, or %NULL.
The only use that is typically made of this
is to determine the appropriate #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>detail to pass to the theme engine, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> detail to pass to the theme engine, or %NULL.
Note that passing a detail of anything but %NULL
will disable caching.
</parameter_description>
@@ -18254,26 +17918,14 @@ will disable caching.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
<description>
-Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter.
+Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18304,29 +17956,6 @@ font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
-<description>
-Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
-this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
-gtk_action_is_visible()
-for that.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_background_color">
<description>
Sets the background color of @view.
@@ -18347,24 +17976,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_title">
-<description>
-Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> An internal string, do not free the return value
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_class_find_child_property">
<description>
Finds a child property of a container class by name.
@@ -18380,7 +17991,7 @@ Finds a child property of a container class by name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GParamSpec of the child property or %NULL if @class has no
+<return> the #GParamSpec of the child property or %NULL if @class has no
child property with that name.
</return>
</function>
@@ -18425,45 +18036,12 @@ count is cached, so this function is very fast.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkEditable">
-<description>
-The ::changed signal is emitted at the end of a single
-user-visible operation on the contents of the #GtkEditable.
-
-E.g., a paste operation that replaces the contents of the
-selection will cause only one signal emission (even though it
-is implemented by first deleting the selection, then inserting
-the new content, and may cause multiple ::notify::text signals
-to be emitted).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkTreeViewColumn">
-<description>
-Logical sort column ID this column sorts on when selected for sorting. Setting the sort column ID makes the column header
-clickable. Set to %-1 to make the column unsortable.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_list_shortcut_folder_uris">
<description>
Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18476,7 +18054,6 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri().
folders. Free the returned list with g_slist_free(), and the URIs with
g_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -18493,11 +18070,11 @@ gtk_layout_set_size ().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18508,6 +18085,7 @@ gtk_layout_set_size ().
<description>
Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18518,7 +18096,6 @@ Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE, if the column expands
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -18532,13 +18109,13 @@ in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you can bind the "text" property
on the cell renderer to a string value in the model, thus rendering
a different string in each row of the #GtkTreeView.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the new cell renderer
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -18643,47 +18220,11 @@ Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
-<description>
-Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
-for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
-information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
-A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
-text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
-is not set.
-
-The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
-#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
-properties.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
<description>
Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18698,7 +18239,6 @@ Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the right margin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -18706,6 +18246,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Obtains the height of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18716,7 +18257,6 @@ Obtains the height of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
</parameters>
<return> the height of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -18775,7 +18315,9 @@ with the new @icon_set.
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_pixbuf_column">
<description>
-Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns the column with pixbufs for @icon_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18786,23 +18328,26 @@ Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
</parameters>
<return> the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
+Sets the context id for @context.
+
+This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
+replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the id to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18847,11 +18392,11 @@ use @selection is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
+<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeIter, or NULL.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18862,7 +18407,9 @@ use @selection is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
<description>
Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
-Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+Returns %TRUE if the toggle button is pressed in and %FALSE if it is raised.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18873,50 +18420,31 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
<description>
-This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
+Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
+to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
+which might be different for different screens.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
-or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkDialog">
-<description>
-The default spacing used between elements of the
-content area of the dialog, as returned by
-gtk_dialog_get_content_area(), unless gtk_box_set_spacing()
-was called on that widget directly.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
<description>
This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
@@ -18955,42 +18483,64 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_end">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the end of @box.
+The @child is packed after (away from end of) any other child
+packed with reference to the end of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="quality">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated
+to @box. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children
+of @box that use this option
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_text_get">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_show_arrow">
<description>
-Retrive the text string of @widget if it is a GtkLabel,
-GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
+Returns whether the toolbar has an overflow menu.
+See gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new 0-terminated C string, needs to be released with g_free().
+<return> %TRUE if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -18999,6 +18549,7 @@ Since: 2.14
Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry.
See gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19007,16 +18558,17 @@ See gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the horizontal cursor adjustment, or %NULL
+<return> the horizontal cursor adjustment, or %NULL
if none has been set.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_path">
<description>
-Return value: a newly-created #GtkTreePath.
+Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath referenced by @iter. This path should
+be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19033,36 +18585,23 @@ Return value: a newly-created #GtkTreePath.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
+Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
+displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkEntry
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_offset">
-<description>
-Return value: a character offset
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a character offset
</return>
</function>
@@ -19071,6 +18610,7 @@ Return value: a character offset
Gets whether group should be given extra space.
See gtk_tool_palette_set_expand().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19085,7 +18625,6 @@ See gtk_tool_palette_set_expand().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if group should be given extra space, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -19174,21 +18713,24 @@ e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_window">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
<description>
-Return value: the entry's text window.
+Sets whether a selection exists.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entry's text window.
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_new">
@@ -19197,6 +18739,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkActionGroup object. The name of the action group
is used when associating <link linkend="Action-Accel">keybindings</link>
with the actions.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19207,13 +18750,23 @@ with the actions.
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkActionGroup
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bound">
<description>
-Return value:selection bound mark
+Returns the mark that represents the selection bound. Equivalent
+to calling gtk_text_buffer_get_mark() to get the mark named
+"selection_bound", but very slightly more efficient, and involves
+less typing.
+
+The currently-selected text in @buffer is the region between the
+"selection_bound" and "insert" marks. If "selection_bound" and
+"insert" are in the same place, then there is no current selection.
+gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds() is another convenient function
+for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there's a
+selection and what its bounds are.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19222,7 +18775,7 @@ Return value:selection bound mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>selection bound mark
+<return> selection bound mark
</return>
</function>
@@ -19266,40 +18819,36 @@ function is used by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_insert">
<description>
-A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
-or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a single
-enumeration value.
-
-The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
-its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
-may be surrounded by parentheses.
+Inserts @item at @position in the list of children of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> a #GParamSpec
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gstring">
-<parameter_description> the #GString to be parsed
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to insert into @group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_value">
-<parameter_description> a #GValue which must hold enum values.
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
+The position -1 means end of list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
-has been set to the resulting #GEnumValue.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double">
<description>
-Return value: the double value of @key
+Returns the double value associated with @key, or 0.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19314,72 +18863,37 @@ Return value: the double value of @key
</parameters>
<return> the double value of @key
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_add_window">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- xid: the native identifier for a window
- need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
-reparented to the socket
-
-Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the page number @page_num.
-
-Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
-to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
-Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
-adding them to a notebook.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
-will be done.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
+If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
+to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
+path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
+#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of the window, or %NULL if none has
-been set explicitely. The returned string is owned by the widget
-and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
+factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
+modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_stock_id">
<description>
-Return value: the name of the stock item for @button.
+Returns the name of the stock item. See gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id().
+The returned string is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed or modifed.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19390,7 +18904,6 @@ Return value: the name of the stock item for @button.
</parameters>
<return> the name of the stock item for @button.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -19413,24 +18926,6 @@ by default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_skip_pager_hint">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in pager
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
<description>
set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
@@ -19461,71 +18956,66 @@ set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
<description>
-This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
-signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
-which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
-function without modification.
+Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
+size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
+manager will actually select). The size obtained by
+gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
+#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
+rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
+call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
+notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
+the size of the window gets updated.
-The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
-coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
-tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
- model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
-that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
+because the size of the window may change between the time that you
+get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
+that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
+"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
+state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
+Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
+size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
+border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
+method of determining their size.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
-<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
+the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
+e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
+dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+much preferred to let the window manager handle these
+things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
+behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
+manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
+of the window decorations/border into account, while your
+application cannot.
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
+In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
+positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
+doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
+handle the details for you.
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
-<description>
-Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_margin">
-<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19554,7 +19044,12 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_visible">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the group is visible.
+Returns %TRUE if the group is visible. The constituent actions
+can only be logically visible (see gtk_action_is_visible()) if
+they are visible (see gtk_action_get_visible()) and their group
+is visible.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19565,7 +19060,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the group is visible.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the group is visible.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -19585,11 +19079,30 @@ method to clear the preedit state.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
+<description>
+Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the selected font is used in the label.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_position">
<description>
Moves @iter forward to the previous visible cursor position. See
gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19600,7 +19113,6 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -19624,6 +19136,7 @@ Get the value @spin_button represented as an integer.
<description>
Gets the #GtkPrinter of the print job.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19634,7 +19147,6 @@ Gets the #GtkPrinter of the print job.
</parameters>
<return> the printer of @job
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -19643,6 +19155,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
to it, and makes its show @text.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19653,7 +19166,6 @@ to it, and makes its show @text.
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -19667,11 +19179,11 @@ you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description>horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description>vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19679,83 +19191,81 @@ you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_extension">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
<description>
-Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
+Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
+be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the extension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the extension
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> the side on to which the extension is attached
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
<description>
-Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
-The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
-this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
-padding on the left.
+Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
+If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
+retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
+gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
+will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
+right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
+right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
+mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
+side of the text you're typing).
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alignment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> mark name or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_top">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
+<parameter name="left_gravity">
+<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_bottom">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
+</parameters>
+<return> new #GtkTextMark
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
+<description>
+This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_left">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_right">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
+or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19766,6 +19276,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Make a copy of a #GtkIconInfo.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19776,55 +19287,31 @@ Make a copy of a #GtkIconInfo.
</parameters>
<return> the new GtkIconInfo
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserEntry object. #GtkFileChooserEntry
-is an internal implementation widget for the GTK+ file chooser
-which is an entry with completion with respect to a
-#GtkFileSystem object.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="eat_tabs">
-<parameter_description> If %FALSE, allow focus navigation with the tab key.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkFileChooserEntry
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from @file_name. If the file could not be loaded
-then error is set to either a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
-See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
-
+Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
+If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
+gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_row">
@@ -19869,6 +19356,25 @@ Tests whether an iterator is at the start of a display line.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start">
<description>
Packs the @cell into the beginning of the column. If @expand is %FALSE, then
@@ -19914,53 +19420,73 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTextView">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
<description>
-If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately
-be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text,
-connect to this signal.
-
-This signal is only emitted if the text at the given position
-is actually editable.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
+specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
+treated as distinct for this operation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit">
-<parameter_description> the current preedit string
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_fixed_width">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
<description>
-Sets the size of the column in pixels. This is meaningful only if the sizing
-type is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to
-the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the
-column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
-the actual size when displayed.
+Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
+from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
+setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
+wrapped, or ellipsized.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fixed_width">
-<parameter_description> The size to set @tree_column to. Must be greater than 0.
+<parameter name="angle">
+<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
+the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_activatable">
+<description>
+Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_minimum_key_length">
<description>
Requires the length of the search key for @completion to be at least
@@ -19984,28 +19510,24 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_file">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
<description>
-Gets the #GFile for the currently selected file in
-the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
-one of the files will be returned at random.
-
-If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
-folder.
+Changes the visible of @action_group.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> new visiblity
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a selected #GFile. You own the returned file; use
-g_object_unref() to release it.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws">
@@ -20033,6 +19555,7 @@ redrawn if any of their children changed allocation.
<description>
Determines whether @widget is realized.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20043,23 +19566,6 @@ Determines whether @widget is realized.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_default">
-<description>
-Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
-in your application without caring about memory management. The
-returned instance will be freed when you application terminates.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return>A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -20079,7 +19585,9 @@ Recursively collapses all visible, expanded nodes in @tree_view.
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_show_border">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the bevel is drawn
+Returns whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages. See
+gtk_notebook_set_show_border().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20106,7 +19614,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description>the translation domain or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the translation domain or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20143,7 +19651,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="comments">
-<parameter_description>a comments string
+<parameter_description> a comments string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20159,7 +19667,7 @@ or, if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="selection">
@@ -20280,23 +19788,6 @@ e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
-<description>
-Return value: the space at the borders
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the space at the borders
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paint_handle">
<description>
Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
@@ -20320,16 +19811,16 @@ Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -20396,7 +19887,7 @@ If @parent is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20406,7 +19897,9 @@ If @parent is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_selection">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover selection mode
+Returns whether hover selection mode is turned on for @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20417,76 +19910,30 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover selection mode
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover selection mode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
-<description>
-This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
-and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="range_rect">
-<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
<description>
-Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
-
-Note that values will be restricted by
-<literal>upper - page-size</literal> if the page-size
-property is nonzero.
-
-See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
-emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
-properties.
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description> the new maximum value
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
-<description>
-Return value: a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
-and must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -20529,34 +19976,115 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
<description>
-Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
-model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
+This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
+its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
-Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
-call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
-cell renderers for the new model.
+Since: 2.10
-Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
+<description>
+Switches to the page number @page_num.
+
+Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
+to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
+Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
+adding them to a notebook.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
+<description>
+Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon.
+The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to look up
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
+information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
+wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
<description>
-Return value: the printer's capabilities
+Returns the printer's capabilities.
+
+This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
+setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
+you must handle yourself.
+
+This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
+gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20567,13 +20095,14 @@ Return value: the printer's capabilities
</parameters>
<return> the printer's capabilities
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20584,7 +20113,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -20593,6 +20121,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @chooser
as #GFile. An internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20605,13 +20134,13 @@ as #GFile. An internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
file and subfolder in the current folder. Free the returned list
with g_slist_free(), and the files with g_object_unref().
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
<description>
-Return value: whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
+Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20674,13 +20203,13 @@ sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
<description>
Registers an error quark for #GtkFileChooser if necessary.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> The error quark used for #GtkFileChooser errors.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -20702,37 +20231,29 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
<description>
-Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
-then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
-is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
-
-Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_mark">
<description>
-Return value:a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
+Returns the mark named @name in buffer @buffer, or %NULL if no such
+mark exists in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20745,78 +20266,64 @@ Return value:a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
+<return> a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction">
<description>
-Changes the dimensions of a @size to @width x @height.
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a custom #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the new width in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the new height in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
<description>
-This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
-is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
-to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
-is in 'unsorted' state.
+Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper width
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
<description>
-Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
-unsorted stores.
+Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
+gdk_input_set_extension_events().
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> extension events for @widget
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -20832,7 +20339,7 @@ for more information.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shape_mask">
-<parameter_description>shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
+<parameter_description> shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="offset_x">
@@ -20869,6 +20376,7 @@ Gets all objects that have been constructed by @builder. Note that
this function does not increment the reference counts of the returned
objects.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20881,7 +20389,6 @@ objects.
constructed by the #GtkBuilder instance. It should be freed by
g_slist_free()
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -20892,6 +20399,7 @@ if the child widget is revealed.
See gtk_expander_set_expanded().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20902,7 +20410,6 @@ See gtk_expander_set_expanded().
</parameters>
<return> the current state of the expander.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -20910,19 +20417,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Creates a new tool palette.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkToolPalette
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_headers_visible">
<description>
-Return value: Whether the headers are visible or not.
+Returns %TRUE if the headers on the @tree_view are visible.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20947,7 +20455,7 @@ signal is emitted with response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="flags">
@@ -20963,7 +20471,7 @@ signal is emitted with response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description>printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> printf()-style format string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -20971,45 +20479,81 @@ signal is emitted with response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a new #GtkMessageDialog
+<return> a new #GtkMessageDialog
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
-of a dialog.
+Returns the fallback icon name for windows that has been set
+with gtk_window_set_default_icon_name(). The returned
+string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. It
+is only valid until the next call to
+gtk_window_set_default_icon_name().
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameters>
+<return> the fallback icon name for windows
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<description>
+Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
+points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
+is returned.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
+<parameter name="child_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
-if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
<description>
-Returns: the fallback icon name for windows
+Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
+controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
+and also the direction in which the children of a container are
+packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
+so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
+reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
+let the default reading direction present, except for containers
+where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
+visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
+
+If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
+set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the fallback icon name for windows
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_pack_direction">
@@ -21017,6 +20561,7 @@ Since: 2.16
Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar.
See gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21027,28 +20572,23 @@ See gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction().
</parameters>
<return> the pack direction
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
<description>
-Notify the input method that a change in cursor
-position has been made. The location is relative to the client
-window.
+Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> new location
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hadjustment">
@@ -21062,7 +20602,7 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the current horizontal aspect.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21076,6 +20616,7 @@ the result to a #GdkPixbuf. This function waits for
the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21091,23 +20632,25 @@ could happen for various reasons, in particular
if the clipboard was empty or if the contents of
the clipboard could not be converted into an image.)
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
<description>
-Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
-a container).
+Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the space between cells
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_invisible_char">
@@ -21164,7 +20707,9 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_active">
<description>
-Returns: the checked state of the toggle action
+Returns the checked state of the toggle action.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21175,7 +20720,6 @@ Returns: the checked state of the toggle action
</parameters>
<return> the checked state of the toggle action
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -21200,6 +20744,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead.
Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
provide text.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21215,81 +20760,16 @@ provide text.
<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for text,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkSpinButton">
-<description>
-The wrapped signal is emitted right after the spinbutton wraps
-from its maximum to minimum value or vice-versa.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spinbutton">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_widget_to_tree_coords">
-<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
-incorrect. For converting coordinates relative to the widget to
-bin_window coordinates, please see
-gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_socket_advance_toplevel_focus">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- direction: a direction
-
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the corresponding plug
-has told the socket to move the focus.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_displayed_row">
<description>
-Returns: the currently displayed row or %NULL
+Returns a #GtkTreePath referring to the currently
+displayed row. If no row is currently displayed,
+%NULL is returned.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21300,7 +20780,6 @@ Returns: the currently displayed row or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> the currently displayed row or %NULL
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -21316,24 +20795,41 @@ submenu is passed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="submenu">
-<parameter_description>the submenu, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the submenu, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkFileChooser">
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
<description>
-Whether a file chooser not in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN mode
-will offer the user to create new folders.
+Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
+returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
+it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
+switch occurs.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips">
@@ -21362,6 +20858,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Parses a file containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
merges it with the current contents of @self.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21382,13 +20879,14 @@ merges it with the current contents of @self.
to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
the return value is 0.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
<description>
-Return value: the column containing the strings
+Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21399,7 +20897,6 @@ Return value: the column containing the strings
</parameters>
<return> the column containing the strings
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -21432,7 +20929,10 @@ views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_wrap">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the spin button wraps around
+Returns whether the spin button's value wraps around to the
+opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is
+exceeded. See gtk_spin_button_set_wrap().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21532,15 +21032,33 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
<description>
-Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
+Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the job title
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>default widget colormap
+<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21620,30 +21138,11 @@ clipboard may be owned by someone else.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_range_get_wheel_delta">
-<description>
-Return value: A good step value for the mouse wheel.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkScrollDirection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A good step value for the mouse wheel.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_invisible_get_screen">
<description>
-Return value: the associated #GdkScreen.
+Returns the #GdkScreen object associated with @invisible
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21654,49 +21153,28 @@ Return value: the associated #GdkScreen.
</parameters>
<return> the associated #GdkScreen.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_ctree_insert_node">
<description>
-Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
-
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="pixmap_closed">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="mask_closed">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
-<description>
-Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="pixmap_opened">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitivity">
-<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<parameter name="mask_opened">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21715,71 +21193,35 @@ See gtk_misc_set_padding().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description>location to store padding in the X direction, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store padding in the X direction, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description>location to store padding in the Y direction, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store padding in the Y direction, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
-<description>
-Retrieves the format of the selection.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the format of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
<description>
-Sets the ::spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the cells (i.e. the icon and
-the text) of an item.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> the spacing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
+If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
+needs reorganization.
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
-<description>
-Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
+This function is only useful for container implementations and
+never should be called by an application.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
-if the selection has stopped.
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
</return>
</function>
@@ -21857,7 +21299,9 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_depth">
<description>
-Return value: The depth of @iter
+Returns the depth of @iter. This will be 0 for anything on the root level, 1
+for anything down a level, etc.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21889,11 +21333,13 @@ Removes all rows from the list store.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
<description>
-Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_direction().
+Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
+which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
+gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21902,25 +21348,8 @@ gtk_widget_set_direction().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the reading direction for the widget.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
-<description>
-Gets the gicon of @action.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -21928,6 +21357,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21939,61 +21369,9 @@ Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
<return> the number of the monitor on which the menu should
be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_polygon">
-<description>
-Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description> length of @points
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_above">
<description>
Asks to keep @window above, so that it stays on top. Note that
@@ -22063,6 +21441,7 @@ be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
See gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting
widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22079,7 +21458,7 @@ widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the path, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
@@ -22090,35 +21469,37 @@ at (@x, @y), or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if an item exists at the specified position
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
<description>
-Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
-row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
+style and size information as well. If you want to render something
+with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
+If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
+style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
+#PangoFontDescription object.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_action">
<description>
Looks up an action in the action group by name.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22131,9 +21512,8 @@ Looks up an action in the action group by name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the action, or %NULL if no action by that name exists
+<return> the action, or %NULL if no action by that name exists
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -22161,6 +21541,7 @@ Sets whether the dialog has a separator above the buttons.
Gets the current preview widget; see
gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22171,25 +21552,6 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget().
</parameters>
<return> the current extra widget, or %NULL
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
-<description>
-Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
-is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
</return>
</function>
@@ -22197,6 +21559,7 @@ is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
<description>
Retrieves the icon of size @size associated to the resource MIME type.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22212,7 +21575,6 @@ Retrieves the icon of size @size associated to the resource MIME type.
<return> a #GdkPixbuf containing the icon, or %NULL. Use
g_object_unref() when finished using the icon.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -22236,52 +21598,26 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
-<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
-pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting
-a tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
+Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
-Since: 2.6
+If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text()
-instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips object to be used
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description>text to be used as tooltip text for tool_item
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description>text to be used as private tooltip text
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22308,6 +21644,7 @@ Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
<description>
Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22323,7 +21660,6 @@ Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog.
<return> Return value of gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name() if the
font selection dialog exists, otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -22355,27 +21691,45 @@ g_object_ref (scrolled_window->hscrollbar);
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
<description>
-Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
-style and size information as well. If you want to render something
-with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
-If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
-style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
-#PangoFontDescription object.
+Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
+<description>
+This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
+except that the widget is not invalidated.
Since: 2.4
-</return>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_remove">
@@ -22400,33 +21754,52 @@ last one.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
+ position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
+works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
+moved to the end of the level.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
+Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
+"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+<return> string containing visible text in the range
</return>
</function>
@@ -22541,24 +21914,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
-<description>
-Return value: a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
-used for @tool_item
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filename">
<description>
Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
@@ -22568,6 +21923,7 @@ one of the filenames will be returned at random.
If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
folder.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22580,13 +21936,14 @@ folder.
if no file is selected, or the selected file can't
be represented with a local filename. Free with g_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_comments">
<description>
-Return value: The comments. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the comments string.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22598,10 +21955,32 @@ Return value: The comments. The string is owned by the about
<return> The comments. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
+<description>
+Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
+specified by @style for the given state.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_on_delete">
<description>
Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
@@ -22651,48 +22030,36 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreeViewColumn or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkCellRenderer or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
<description>
-Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
-tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
+the input focus. This function sets this hint.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22701,7 +22068,10 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment">
<description>
-Returns: the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
+vertical scrollbar to the child widget's vertical scroll
+functionality.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22732,55 +22102,16 @@ Sets the visibility of @tree_column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
-<description>
-This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
-the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
-For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
-input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
-Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
-particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
-location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkLabel">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool_with_default">
<description>
-Set this property to %TRUE to make the label track which links
-have been clicked. It will then apply the ::visited-link-color
-color, instead of ::link-color.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Returns the boolean represented by the value
+that is associated with @key, or @default_val
+if the value does not represent a boolean.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+The string "true" represents %TRUE, the string
+"false" represents %FALSE.
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool_with_default">
-<description>
-Return value: the boolean value associated with @key
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22799,7 +22130,6 @@ Return value: the boolean value associated with @key
</parameters>
<return> the boolean value associated with @key
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -22855,6 +22185,7 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<description>
Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22865,7 +22196,6 @@ Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -22874,6 +22204,7 @@ Since: 2.14
Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22884,7 +22215,6 @@ the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
</parameters>
<return> the prefix for the current completion
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -22946,21 +22276,22 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
<description>
-Return value: the current row separator function.
+Sets the visibility state of the headers.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="headers_visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current row separator function.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_range">
@@ -23018,6 +22349,7 @@ email link in an about dialog.
Since 2.18 there exists a default function which uses gtk_show_uri(). To
deactivate it, you can pass %NULL for @func.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23036,7 +22368,6 @@ deactivate it, you can pass %NULL for @func.
</parameters>
<return> the previous email hook.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -23064,16 +22395,16 @@ the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -23105,6 +22436,7 @@ properties of @chooser.
Since the returned array is %NULL terminated, @length may be %NULL.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23113,54 +22445,71 @@ Since the returned array is %NULL terminated, @length may be %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description>return location for a the length of the URI list, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for a the length of the URI list, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A newly allocated, %NULL terminated array of strings. Use
g_strfreev() to free it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
<description>
-Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
-for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
-as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
-determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
-"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
+must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="accel_label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget used as label, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_closure">
+<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
<description>
-Get the tag priority.
+Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The tag's priority.
+<return> the child pack direction
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
+<description>
+Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
+ buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
+in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -23170,6 +22519,7 @@ Checks to see if the icon theme has changed; if it has, any
currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded
next time @icon_theme is accessed.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23181,13 +22531,14 @@ next time @icon_theme is accessed.
<return> %TRUE if the icon theme has changed and needed
to be reloaded.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_logo_icon_name">
<description>
-Return value: the icon name displayed as logo. The string is
+Returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23200,13 +22551,15 @@ Return value: the icon name displayed as logo. The string is
owned by the dialog. If you want to keep a reference
to it, you have to call g_strdup() on it.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_buffer">
<description>
-Return value:a #GtkTextBuffer
+Returns the #GtkTextBuffer being displayed by this text view.
+The reference count on the buffer is not incremented; the caller
+of this function won't own a new reference.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23215,7 +22568,7 @@ Return value:a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GtkTextBuffer
+<return> a #GtkTextBuffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -23235,24 +22588,22 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
-The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
-for center, 1.0 for right.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_current_value">
@@ -23260,6 +22611,7 @@ for center, 1.0 for right.
Obtains the value property of the currently active member of
the group to which @action belongs.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23270,7 +22622,6 @@ the group to which @action belongs.
</parameters>
<return> The value of the currently active group member
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -23279,6 +22630,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Gets the name of the last application that have registered the
recently used resource represented by @info.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23289,7 +22641,6 @@ recently used resource represented by @info.
</parameters>
<return> an application name. Use g_free() to free it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -23301,7 +22652,7 @@ Creates a new horizontal scrollbar.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23342,28 +22693,6 @@ within the preedit string.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
-<description>
-Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
-widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="can_focus">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
<description>
Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
@@ -23426,7 +22755,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -23469,22 +22798,11 @@ ending with %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRecentChooser">
-<description>
-The #GtkRecentFilter object to be used when displaying
-the recently used resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_get_text_column">
<description>
-Return value: A column in the data source model of @entry_box.
+Returns the column which @entry_box is using to get the strings from.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23495,105 +22813,85 @@ Return value: A column in the data source model of @entry_box.
</parameters>
<return> A column in the data source model of @entry_box.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
+Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
+menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
+persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
+To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
+See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
+and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
+This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
+gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
+the menu item.
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
-<description>
-Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
-the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
-in a table.
+Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
+gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
-Since: 2.4
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
+functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_get_widgets">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Return value: a #GSList of
+Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGrup
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of
-widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
-<description>
-Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
-directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="start_button_mask">
+<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="allocation">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
+widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
<description>
-Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
-calculating the size.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Frees @path.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
-<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
-when calculating the size
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23644,9 +22942,41 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
+<description>
+Frees a #GtkRequisition.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_space">
+<description>
+Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get">
<description>
-Return value:the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
+See gtk_clipboard_get_for_display() for complete details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23655,142 +22985,152 @@ Return value:the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard
object has been created, it is persistent and, since it is
owned by GTK+, must not be freed or unreffed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
<description>
-Return value: The current width of @tree_column.
+Returns whether the input focus is within this GtkWindow.
+For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
+but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current width of @tree_column.
+<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget. The
+signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
+on @widget.
+This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVBox.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
<description>
-Return value:the tab label
+Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
+
+This group appears after the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
+%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
+is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
+of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
+gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
+or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
+the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
+other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
+<parameter_description> a child of @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_secondary">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
+button box.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the tab label
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entries">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label">
<description>
-Deletes the menu items which were created from the @entries by the given
-item factory.
+Returns the tab label widget for the page @child. %NULL is returned
+if @child is not in @notebook or if no tab label has specifically
+been set for @child.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the tab label
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_im_module_list">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_min_slider_size">
<description>
-List all available types of input method context
+Sets the minimum size of the range's slider.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="contexts">
-<parameter_description> location to store an array of pointers to #GtkIMContextInfo
-this array should be freed with g_free() when you are finished.
-The structures it points are statically allocated and should
-not be modified or freed.
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_contexts">
-<parameter_description> the length of the array stored in @contexts
+<parameter name="min_size">
+<parameter_description> The slider's minimum size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_new_with_range">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_widget">
<description>
-This is a convenience constructor that allows creation of a numeric
-#GtkSpinButton without manually creating an adjustment. The value is
-initially set to the minimum value and a page increment of 10 * @step
-is the default. The precision of the spin button is equivalent to the
-precision of @step.
+Obtains the widget which corresponds to @path.
-Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
-is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
-needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
+If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
+submenu, then the submenu is returned. If you are interested in the menu
+item, use gtk_item_factory_get_item() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="min">
-<parameter_description> Minimum allowable value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description> Maximum allowable value
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> Increment added or subtracted by spinning the widget
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path to the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The new spin button as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> the widget for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't lead
+to a widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -23810,28 +23150,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_set_delegate">
-<description>
-Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkRecentChooser
-methods should be delegated to @delegate, and that
-#GtkRecentChooser signals emitted on @delegate should be
-forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
-_gtk_recent_chooser_delegate_iface_init().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="receiver">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject implementing #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="delegate">
-<parameter_description> another #GObject implementing #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string">
<description>
This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
@@ -23843,6 +23161,10 @@ ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, #GdkColor and
#GtkAdjustment type values. Support for #GtkWidget type values is
still to come.
+Upon errors %FALSE will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR domain.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23863,13 +23185,12 @@ still to come.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -23878,6 +23199,7 @@ Since: 2.12
Moves @iter forward to the next visible cursor position. See
gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23888,7 +23210,6 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -23909,87 +23230,68 @@ that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="search_user_data">
-<parameter_description>user data to pass to @search_equal_func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @search_equal_func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="search_destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier for @search_user_data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @search_user_data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
<description>
-The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
-signal.
+Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
-your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
-from any other context is illegal.
+<return> a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_accel_new">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererAccel.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
-
+<return> the new cell renderer
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIMMulticontext.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_accel_new">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererAccel.
+Gets the icon theme object associated with @screen; if this
+function has not previously been called for the given
+screen, a new icon theme object will be created and
+associated with the screen. Icon theme objects are
+fairly expensive to create, so using this function
+is usually a better choice than calling than gtk_icon_theme_new()
+and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
+a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -23998,6 +23300,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Sets the current folder for @chooser from a #GFile.
Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24010,20 +23313,21 @@ Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
otherwise.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
+Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See gtk_label_set_ellipsize().
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24034,7 +23338,6 @@ Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
</parameters>
<return> #PangoEllipsizeMode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -24054,24 +23357,6 @@ is searched in the current directory.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
-<description>
-Return value: a string representation of the status
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
<description>
Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
@@ -24106,6 +23391,7 @@ Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become
invalid after calling this function; however, the @iter will be
re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24128,30 +23414,9 @@ re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the buffer was modified
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
-<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_action">
<description>
Adds an action object to the action group. Note that this function
@@ -24182,11 +23447,12 @@ Since: 2.4
Creates a #GtkScaleButton, with a range between @min and @max, with
a stepping of @step.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="min">
@@ -24203,14 +23469,13 @@ or up/down arrow event occurs (usually 2)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icons">
-<parameter_description>a %NULL-terminated array of icon names, or %NULL if
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of icon names, or %NULL if
you want to set the list later with gtk_scale_button_set_icons()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkScaleButton
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -24240,7 +23505,8 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_reorderable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
+Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24253,40 +23519,18 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
-
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description>the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_path">
@@ -24330,45 +23574,45 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
+WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.
+
+Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a location to return the value
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_new">
<description>
-This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
-or activated with the keyboard.
+Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbutton">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> the mode for the new size group.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
@@ -24418,6 +23662,7 @@ or %NULL to indicate that all forms should be stored.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24428,7 +23673,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPaned.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -24443,15 +23687,16 @@ Note that this function may use a recursive mainloop to show the page
setup dialog. See gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async() if this is
a problem.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent
+<parameter_description> transient parent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description>an existing #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter_description> an existing #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="settings">
@@ -24461,7 +23706,6 @@ a problem.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPageSetup
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -24531,89 +23775,49 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
-establishes a grab when shown
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkColorButton">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
<description>
-The ::color-set signal is emitted when the user selects a color.
-When handling this signal, use gtk_color_button_get_color() and
-gtk_color_button_get_alpha() to find out which color was just selected.
+Returns the #GtkWindow of the current tooltip. This can be the
+GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
+using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
-Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
-changes the color. If you need to react to programmatic color changes
-as well, use the notify::color signal.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide rich text.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
-<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
-describing the options of your program
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for rich text is included,
+otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -24642,7 +23846,10 @@ Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
<function name="gtk_widget_is_sensitive">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
+Returns the widget's effective sensitivity, which means
+it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensntive
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24653,13 +23860,16 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_groups">
<description>
-Return value: a newly allocated
+Returns all groups registered for the recently used item @info. The
+array of returned group names will be %NULL terminated, so length might
+optionally be %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24668,20 +23878,21 @@ Return value: a newly allocated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description>return location for the number of groups returned
+<parameter_description> return location for the number of groups returned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated
%NULL terminated array of strings. Use g_strfreev() to free it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_n_items">
<description>
-Return value: the number of items on the toolbar
+Returns the number of items on the toolbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24692,7 +23903,6 @@ Return value: the number of items on the toolbar
</parameters>
<return> the number of items on the toolbar
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -24777,7 +23987,30 @@ the model uptodate.
Note that @func is called whenever a row is inserted, when it may still be
empty. The visible function should therefore take special care of empty
-rows.</description>
+rows, like in the example below.
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+static gboolean
+visible_func (GtkTreeModel *model,
+GtkTreeIter *iter,
+gpointer data)
+{
+/* Visible if row is non-empty and first column is "HI" */
+gchar *str;
+gboolean visible = FALSE;
+
+gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &str, -1);
+if (str && strcmp (str, "HI") == 0)
+visible = TRUE;
+g_free (str);
+
+return visible;
+}
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="filter">
<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
@@ -24788,11 +24021,11 @@ rows.</description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>User data to pass to the visible function, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> User data to pass to the visible function, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier of @data, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier of @data, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24830,7 +24063,10 @@ characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
+Returns whether the @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
+docked horizontally.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24842,7 +24078,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
docked horizontally.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -24866,45 +24101,30 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkEntry">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
<description>
-This signal is emitted after text is deleted from the buffer.
-
-Since: 2.18
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position the text was deleted at.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_chars">
-<parameter_description> The number of characters that were deleted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
+<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
+same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
+might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
+the toolbox back in the same place.
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
-<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
+role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
+restoring the session.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24932,7 +24152,7 @@ etc. Returns the integer value for the size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>integer value representing the size
+<return> integer value representing the size
</return>
</function>
@@ -24940,13 +24160,13 @@ etc. Returns the integer value for the size.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkToolItem
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkToolItem
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -24974,30 +24194,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
<description>
-Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
-search in for the current model.
-
-If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
-key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
-whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
+Gets the currently-selected font.
-Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
-column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
+currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_old_editable_changed">
@@ -25033,7 +24246,11 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_insert">
<description>
-Return value:insertion point mark
+Returns the mark that represents the cursor (insertion point).
+Equivalent to calling gtk_text_buffer_get_mark() to get the mark
+named "insert", but very slightly more efficient, and involves less
+typing.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25042,46 +24259,30 @@ Return value:insertion point mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>insertion point mark
+<return> insertion point mark
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
-The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
+Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
+to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
+to be activated.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
- box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
- box that use this option
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25138,7 +24339,8 @@ be destroyed as well.
<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_ancestor">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @descendant is contained inside @path
+Returns %TRUE if @descendant is a descendant of @path.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25155,6 +24357,24 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @descendant is contained inside @path
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
+<description>
+Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get">
<description>
Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource to fill in @selection_data with a
@@ -25182,34 +24402,73 @@ longer found in the model!
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
<description>
-Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
+Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
+gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of positions to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
+<description>
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
-or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
+<description>
+Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
+located at @iter, only toggles after @iter. Sets @iter to
+the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer
+if no toggle is found.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
</return>
</function>
@@ -25288,68 +24547,42 @@ gtk_widget_size_request().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
-Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
-widget or not.
+Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
+bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_editable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
-in the widget
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
+<function name="gtk_rc_find_module_in_path">
<description>
-Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
+is not useful for applications and should not be used.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+<parameter name="module_file">
+<parameter_description> name of a theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+<return> The filename, if found (must be freed with g_free()),
+otherwise %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -25379,6 +24612,7 @@ Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on @menu_item.
See gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() for details.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25390,48 +24624,71 @@ See gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() for details.
<return> the accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's
functionality, or %NULL if not set
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_add_to_socket">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Adds a plug to a socket within the same application.
+Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
+and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> group the radio menu item is inside
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new_for_manager">
@@ -25441,15 +24698,16 @@ Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog with a specified recent manager.
This is useful if you have implemented your own recent manager, or if you
have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL,
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL,
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="manager">
@@ -25457,7 +24715,7 @@ have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -25468,7 +24726,6 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25487,12 +24744,12 @@ returned image and mask.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gdk_image">
-<parameter_description>return location for
+<parameter_description> return location for
a #GtkImage, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>return location for a
+<parameter_description> return location for a
#GdkBitmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -25500,25 +24757,6 @@ a #GtkImage, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_cancellable">
-<description>
-Gets the cancellable used by the @model. This is the cancellable used
-internally by the @model that will be cancelled when @model is
-disposed. So you can use it for operations that should be cancelled
-when the model goes away.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The cancellable used by @model
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_group_add_window">
<description>
Adds a window to a #GtkWindowGroup.
@@ -25557,20 +24795,17 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
-Return value: The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
+of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
+environment variable for more details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
+listing the IM modules available for loading
</return>
</function>
@@ -25588,7 +24823,7 @@ If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the pixbuf at @iter
+<return> the pixbuf at @iter
</return>
</function>
@@ -25610,27 +24845,6 @@ Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
-<description>
-Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
-#GtkMountOperation.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent of the window, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
<description>
Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
@@ -25708,7 +24922,8 @@ and attached points should be returned in their original
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sizing">
<description>
-Return value: The type of @tree_column.
+Returns the current type of @tree_column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25749,7 +24964,12 @@ int, string and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_line">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter begins a line
+Returns %TRUE if @iter begins a paragraph,
+i.e. if gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset () would return 0.
+However this function is potentially more efficient than
+gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset () because it doesn't have to compute
+the offset, it just has to see whether it's 0.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25768,6 +24988,7 @@ If @action provides a #GtkMenu widget as a submenu for the menu
item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an
instance of that menu.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25778,29 +24999,6 @@ instance of that menu.
</parameters>
<return> the menu item provided by the action, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin">
-<description>
-Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the default top margin
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25816,56 +25014,24 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_path_bar_down">
-<description>
-If the selected button in the pathbar is not the furthest button "down" (in the
-leaf direction), act as if the user clicked on the next button down.
+<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator key.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPathBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_requisition">
@@ -25901,6 +25067,7 @@ has been set to the resulting #GtkRequisition.
Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
pointed by @info.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25912,7 +25079,6 @@ pointed by @info.
<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
since the time this resource was last modified.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25944,6 +25110,7 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::manual-capabilities property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25954,40 +25121,6 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::manual-capabilities property.
</parameters>
<return> the printing capabilities
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkToolItem">
-<description>
-This signal is emitted when the toolitem's tooltip changes.
-Application developers can use gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() to
-set the item's tooltip.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> the object the signal was emitted on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltips">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description> the tooltip text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description> the tooltip private text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: With the new tooltip API, there is no
-need to use this signal anymore.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26003,7 +25136,7 @@ see gtk_accel_group_connect().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26066,36 +25199,21 @@ derived from #GtkRcStyle.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_widget">
+<function name="gtk_offscreen_window_new">
<description>
-Inserts a widget in the toolbar at the given position.
+Creates a toplevel container widget that is used to retrieve
+snapshots of widgets without showing them on the screen. For
+widgets that are on the screen and part of a normal widget
+hierarchy, gtk_widget_get_snapshot() can be used instead.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description>the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description>used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this widget after.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A pointer to a #GtkWidget
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_parent">
@@ -26127,7 +25245,27 @@ called.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style">
<description>
-Return value: A #GtkToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used
+Returns the toolbar style used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function in the handler of the
+GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured signal to find out in what style
+the toolbar is displayed and change themselves accordingly
+
+Possibilities are:
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem> GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH, meaning the tool item should show
+both an icon and a label, stacked vertically </listitem>
+<listitem> GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS, meaning the toolbar shows
+only icons </listitem>
+<listitem> GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT, meaning the tool item should only
+show text</listitem>
+<listitem> GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ, meaning the tool item should show
+both an icon and a label, arranged horizontally (however, note the
+#GtkToolButton::has_text_horizontally that makes tool buttons not
+show labels when the toolbar style is GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ.
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26139,7 +25277,6 @@ Return value: A #GtkToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used
<return> A #GtkToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used
for @tool_item.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -26161,49 +25298,56 @@ inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and check if the %TOPLEVEL flags
-is set on the result.</description>
+is set on the result.
+|[
+GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
+if (gtk_widget_is_toplevel (toplevel))
+{
+/* Perform action on toplevel. */
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
+<return> the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
if there's no ancestor.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
<description>
-Return value:the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
+this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
+gtk_action_is_visible()
+for that.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
-to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
-default clipboard. Another common value
-is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
-the primary X selection.
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the appropriate clipboard object. If no
-clipboard already exists, a new one will
-be created. Once a clipboard object has
-been created, it is persistent for all time.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_get_backend">
<description>
-Return value: the backend of @printer
+Returns the backend of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26214,7 +25358,6 @@ Return value: the backend of @printer
</parameters>
<return> the backend of @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26222,6 +25365,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_accept_focus().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26232,55 +25376,9 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_accept_focus().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
-<description>
-Sets an alternative button order. If the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
-the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
-response ids in @new_order.
-
-See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
-
-This function is for use by language bindings.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_params">
-<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkMenuShell">
-<description>
-A boolean that determines whether the menu and its submenus grab the
-keyboard focus. See gtk_menu_shell_set_take_focus() and
-gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_width_chars">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_width_chars().
@@ -26304,6 +25402,7 @@ new #GtkPrintSettings object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an
error occurred. If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either
a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26312,25 +25411,47 @@ a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use
the default "Print Settings"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
+<description>
+See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_message_area">
<description>
Retrieves the box containing the label widget.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26341,7 +25462,6 @@ Retrieves the box containing the label widget.
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkBox
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -26360,7 +25480,10 @@ timestamp, otherwise return %GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_get_draw">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
+Returns whether @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
+See gtk_separator_tool_item_set_draw().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26371,13 +25494,15 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Returns: the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+Returns the horizontal scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
+horizontal scrollbar to the child widget's horizontal scroll
+functionality.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26390,37 +25515,67 @@ Returns: the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
+whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
+function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.6
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<description>
+Get the value in the @spin_button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the value of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
-gtk_entry_set_visibility().
+Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
+<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -26460,6 +25615,7 @@ simply be allocated on the stack.
<description>
Gets the page setup that is used by the #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26470,7 +25626,6 @@ Gets the page setup that is used by the #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
</parameters>
<return> the page setup of @dialog.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26490,7 +25645,7 @@ clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description>the table of targets that the drag will support,
+<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support,
may be %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -26516,21 +25671,23 @@ Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
+see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="other">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @other
+<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+no themed icon
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26572,26 +25729,30 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
<description>
-Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
-embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
-gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
-of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
-end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
-the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
-convenience when writing loops.
-
+Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
+the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
+to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
+will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
+call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
@@ -26606,56 +25767,52 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_increments().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description>location to store step increment, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store step increment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description>location to store page increment, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store page increment, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
+<parameter name="has_palette">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
<description>
-Looks up the string value associated with @key.
+Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
+determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
+(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
+algorithms).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the string value for @key
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26677,7 +25834,7 @@ size of icons.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_size">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkIconSize that stock icons in the
+<parameter_description> The #GtkIconSize that stock icons in the
toolbar shall have.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -26731,6 +25888,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26741,7 +25899,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
</parameters>
<return> the scale in percent
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26750,64 +25907,21 @@ Since: 2.10
Creates a new %GtkToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and @label as
label.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>a string that will be used as label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a string that will be used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description>a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
-<description>
-Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
-language</link>.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
-<description>
-Return value: the integer value of @key
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the integer value of @key
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26840,29 +25954,28 @@ policy involved.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_expander_column">
<description>
-Gets the label of @group.
+Returns the column that is the current expander column. This
+column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the label of @group. The label is an internal string of @group
-and must not be modified. Note that %NULL is returned if a custom
-label has been set with gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()
-
-Since: 2.20
+<return> The expander column.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_content_area">
<description>
-Returns: the content area.
+Returns the content area of @info_bar.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26873,13 +25986,14 @@ Returns: the content area.
</parameters>
<return> the content area.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_message_type">
<description>
-Returns: the message type of the message area.
+Returns the message type of the message area.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26890,27 +26004,29 @@ Returns: the message type of the message area.
</parameters>
<return> the message type of the message area.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
+attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
+You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
+gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
+attributes in effect at a given text position.
+
+The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
+and should be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
</return>
</function>
@@ -26970,7 +26086,9 @@ Gets a list of all accel groups which are attached to @object.
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_get_draw_as_radio">
<description>
-Return value: Whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
+Returns whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -26981,7 +26099,6 @@ Return value: Whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
</parameters>
<return> Whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -26992,6 +26109,7 @@ called by the default ::key_press_event handler for toplevel windows,
however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27006,13 +26124,38 @@ overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if a mnemonic or accelerator was found and activated.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_for_display">
<description>
-Return value:the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
+Cut/copy/paste menu items and keyboard shortcuts should use
+the default clipboard, returned by passing %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD for @selection.
+(%GDK_NONE is supported as a synonym for GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD
+for backwards compatibility reasons.)
+The currently-selected object or text should be provided on the clipboard
+identified by #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY. Cut/copy/paste menu items
+conceptually copy the contents of the #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY clipboard
+to the default clipboard, i.e. they copy the selection to what the
+user sees as the clipboard.
+
+(Passing #GDK_NONE is the same as using <literal>gdk_atom_intern
+("CLIPBOARD", FALSE)</literal>. See <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/clipboards-spec">
+http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/clipboards-spec</ulink>
+for a detailed discussion of the "CLIPBOARD" vs. "PRIMARY"
+selections under the X window system. On Win32 the
+#GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY clipboard is essentially ignored.)
+
+It's possible to have arbitrary named clipboards; if you do invent
+new clipboards, you should prefix the selection name with an
+underscore (because the ICCCM requires that nonstandard atoms are
+underscore-prefixed), and namespace it as well. For example,
+if your application called "Foo" has a special-purpose
+clipboard, you might call it "_FOO_SPECIAL_CLIPBOARD".
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27026,105 +26169,85 @@ to use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
clipboard already exists, a new one will
be created. Once a clipboard object has
been created, it is persistent and, since
it is owned by GTK+, must not be freed or
unrefd.
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
-<description>
-Return value: number of tags in @table
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> number of tags in @table
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_action_sync_menu_visible">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_drop_item">
<description>
-Updates the visibility of @proxy from the visibility of @action
-according to the following rules:
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem><para>if @action is invisible, @proxy is too
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>if @empty is %TRUE, hide @proxy unless the "hide-if-empty"
-property of @action indicates otherwise
-</para></listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
+Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
-This function is used in the implementation of #GtkUIManager.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAction, or %NULL to determine the action from @proxy
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> a proxy menu item
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="empty">
-<parameter_description> whether the submenu attached to @proxy is empty
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GtkToolItem at position (x, y)
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
<description>
-Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_pack_dir">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> location to store a
+#GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> location to store a stock
+icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
<description>
-Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
-the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
-text is shorter than the width of the entry.
+Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
-Reversed for RTL layouts
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc
+mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell">
@@ -27151,7 +26274,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkCellRenderer or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27171,7 +26294,7 @@ is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is <emphasis>not</emphasis&g
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>icon size this source matches.
+<return> icon size this source matches.
</return>
</function>
@@ -27257,27 +26380,28 @@ for @icon_name.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
+<function name="gtk_window_reshow_with_initial_size">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
-
+Hides @window, then reshows it, resetting the
+default size and position of the window. Used
+by GUI builders only.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkSettings object.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_is_active">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is active
+Returns whether the printer is currently active (i.e.
+accepts new jobs).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27288,7 +26412,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer is active
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer is active
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -27306,14 +26429,22 @@ Removes a focus chain explicitly set with gtk_container_set_focus_chain().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
<description>
-Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
+gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27332,24 +26463,7 @@ Simply an accessor function that returns @widget->style.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the widget's #GtkStyle
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
-<description>
-Return value:A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the widget's #GtkStyle
</return>
</function>
@@ -27371,7 +26485,7 @@ the usual size.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>an icon size
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
@@ -27391,6 +26505,7 @@ the usual size.
<description>
Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27399,171 +26514,166 @@ Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description>return location for the length of the returned list
+<parameter_description> return location for the length of the returned list
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a newly allocated
+<return> a newly allocated
%NULL-terminated array of strings. Use g_strfreev() to free it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_end">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the end of @box.
-The @child is packed after (away from end of) any other child
-packed with reference to the end of @box.
+Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
+widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated
-to @box. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children
-of @box that use this option
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
+selected. Free with g_free().
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
<description>
-Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window.
-
-The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
-in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
-Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
-%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
+Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
+label text.
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
+and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
+of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
+While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
+attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
+to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window_placement">
-<parameter_description> position of the child window
+<parameter name="attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_draw_string">
<description>
-Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column_spacing">
-<parameter_description> the column spacing
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
-<description>
-Sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from
-#GtkPrintContext in such a way that distances are measured in
-units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit to use
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
<description>
-Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left_margin">
+<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
+Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
+The string is converted to the form determined by
+ selection_data->target.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.18
+<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkProgressBar">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_file">
<description>
-The minimum vertical height of the progress bar.
+Gets the #GFile for the currently selected file in
+the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
+one of the files will be returned at random.
+
+If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
+folder.
Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a selected #GFile. You own the returned file; use
+g_object_unref() to release it.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_finished">
@@ -27584,7 +26694,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description>child object or %NULL for non-child tags
+<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tagname">
@@ -27636,7 +26746,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description>a string value, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a string value, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27648,6 +26758,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string
which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27662,13 +26773,14 @@ which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user.
</parameters>
<return> a newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_path_is_selected">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
+Returns %TRUE if the row pointed to by @path is currently selected. If @path
+does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27685,33 +26797,48 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRecentChooserMenu">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
<description>
-Whether the first ten items in the menu should be prepended by
-a number acting as a unique mnemonic.
+Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
+of a dialog.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
+if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
-
+Notify the input method that a change in cursor
+position has been made. The location is relative to the client
+window.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> new location
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
@@ -27748,6 +26875,7 @@ Selects the file to by @uri. If the URI doesn't refer to a
file in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder of
@chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27763,13 +26891,15 @@ file in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder of
<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if underscores in the label property are used as
+Returns whether underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics
+on menu items on the overflow menu. See gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27781,7 +26911,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if underscores in the label property are used as
<return> %TRUE if underscores in the label property are used as
mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -27789,21 +26918,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Creates a new page setup dialog.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>the title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -27870,27 +26999,48 @@ See gtk_entry_buffer_set_text().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
<description>
-This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
-except that the widget is not invalidated.
+Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
+gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the orientation
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the dithering that is used
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_application">
<description>
Checks whether an application registered this resource using @app_name.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27906,7 +27056,6 @@ Checks whether an application registered this resource using @app_name.
<return> %TRUE if an application with name @app_name was found,
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -27955,48 +27104,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_add">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
<description>
-Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
-such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
-layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
-pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
-consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
-gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
-those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
-you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
+Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
+the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget to be placed inside @container
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
-<description>
-Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_item_factory_set_translate_func">
<description>
Sets a function to be used for translating the path elements before they
@@ -28029,7 +27158,11 @@ destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_tags">
<description>
-Return value: list of #GtkTextTag
+Returns a list of tags that apply to @iter, in ascending order of
+priority (highest-priority tags are last). The #GtkTextTag in the
+list don't have a reference added, but you have to free the list
+itself.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28049,6 +27182,7 @@ was a next line to move to, and %FALSE if @iter was simply moved to
the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @iter was
already at the end of the buffer.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28059,7 +27193,6 @@ already at the end of the buffer.
</parameters>
<return> whether @iter can be dereferenced
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -28067,6 +27200,7 @@ Since: 2.8
<description>
Selects @uri inside @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28079,66 +27213,34 @@ Selects @uri inside @chooser.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @uri was found.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entries">
<description>
-Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
-A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
+Deletes the menu items which were created from the @entries by the given
+item factory.
-This group appears after the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START, %GTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
-%GTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
-is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
-of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
-gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is %GTK_BUTTONBOX_START
-or %GTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
-the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
-other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButtonBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_secondary">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the @child appears in a secondary group of the
-button box.
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_set_min_slider_size">
-<description>
-Sets the minimum size of the range's slider.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the length of @entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="min_size">
-<parameter_description> The slider's minimum size
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28147,7 +27249,9 @@ Since: 2.20
<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28163,7 +27267,10 @@ the mnemonic accelerator keys.
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the page has been selected for printing
+Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
+have been selected for printing.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28178,35 +27285,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the page has been selected for printing
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the page has been selected for printing
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen">
-<description>
-Gets the icon theme object associated with @screen; if this
-function has not previously been called for the given
-screen, a new icon theme object will be created and
-associated with the screen. Icon theme objects are
-fairly expensive to create, so using this function
-is usually a better choice than calling than gtk_icon_theme_new()
-and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
-a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -28229,22 +27307,44 @@ is allowed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
<description>
-Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
-in the table.
+Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
+coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
+the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
+If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
+those to buffer coordinates with
+gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
- tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
-the same name as an already-added tag.
+Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
+characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="trailing">
+<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
+in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
+zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
+0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28253,32 +27353,15 @@ the same name as an already-added tag.
<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new">
<description>
-Return value: a newly created #GtkToggleToolButton
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly created #GtkToggleToolButton
+Returns a new #GtkToggleToolButton
Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_option_menu_get_history">
-<description>
-Retrieves the index of the currently selected menu item. The menu
-items are numbered from top to bottom, starting with 0.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="option_menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOptionMenu
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> index of the selected menu item, or -1 if there are no menu items
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkComboBox instead.
+<return> a newly created #GtkToggleToolButton
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -28298,18 +27381,24 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
<description>
-Return value: a #GType.
+Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
+current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
+a list of themes to the user.)
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GType.
+<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
+Free with g_free().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -28380,6 +27469,7 @@ Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
<description>
Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28390,7 +27480,6 @@ Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
</parameters>
<return> The current fill level
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -28398,6 +27487,7 @@ Since: 2.12
<description>
Appends a page to the @assistant.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28412,30 +27502,66 @@ Appends a page to the @assistant.
</parameters>
<return> the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions">
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
<description>
-Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
-gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
-
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
+The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
+to the start of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of positions to move
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
+ box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
+ box that use this option
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.4
+<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
+<description>
+Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
+label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
+has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28459,7 +27585,9 @@ buffer, it it isn't there already.
<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_keyval">
<description>
If the label has been set so that it has an mnemonic key this function
-Returns: GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or #GDK_VoidSymbol
+returns the keyval used for the mnemonic accelerator. If there is no
+mnemonic set up it returns #GDK_VoidSymbol.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28474,7 +27602,9 @@ Returns: GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or #GDK_VoidSymbol
<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
<description>
-Return value: the location of @printer
+Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28485,28 +27615,25 @@ Return value: the location of @printer
</parameters>
<return> the location of @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
<description>
-Sets the icon of @action.
+Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
+no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
+added, so you do not need to unref it.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
+<parameter name="bin">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> pointer to child of the #GtkBin
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_widget">
@@ -28514,6 +27641,7 @@ Since: 2.16
Return the widget used as icon widget on @button. See
gtk_tool_button_set_icon_widget().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28524,79 +27652,51 @@ gtk_tool_button_set_icon_widget().
</parameters>
<return> The widget used as icon on @button, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
-is the first page.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_row_separator_func">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
<description>
-Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
-whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
-function is %NULL, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
+ foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
+#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
+this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
+saving during an accelerator map dump).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="foreach_func">
+<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
<description>
-Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
-the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
-to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
-will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
-call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
+embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
+gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
+of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
+end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
+the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
+convenience when writing loops.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_set_alignment">
@@ -28626,26 +27726,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
<description>
-Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
+then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
+of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
+function is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description>location to store a
-#GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>location to store a stock
-icon size, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28654,7 +27749,13 @@ icon size, or %NULL
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
<description>
-Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
+Returns %TRUE if some text is selected; places the bounds
+of the selection in @start and @end (if the selection has length 0,
+then @start and @end are filled in with the same value).
+ start and @end will be in ascending order. If @start and @end are
+NULL, then they are not filled in, but the return value still indicates
+whether text is selected.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28708,7 +27809,13 @@ cursor moves or the modifier changes
<function name="gtk_text_iter_begins_tag">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is the start of a range tagged with @tag
+Returns %TRUE if @tag is toggled on at exactly this point. If @tag
+is %NULL, returns %TRUE if any tag is toggled on at this point. Note
+that the gtk_text_iter_begins_tag () returns %TRUE if @iter is the
+<emphasis>start</emphasis> of the tagged range;
+gtk_text_iter_has_tag () tells you whether an iterator is
+<emphasis>within</emphasis> a tagged range.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28717,7 +27824,7 @@ Return value: whether @iter is the start of a range tagged with @tag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28823,30 +27930,6 @@ the menu is unposted
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
-<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
-on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
<description>
Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
@@ -28868,23 +27951,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
-<description>
-Return value: the entry currently in use as search entry.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_selectable">
<description>
Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for
@@ -28944,66 +28010,100 @@ when the focus chain is actually traversed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
+<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
<description>
-Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
-since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
+Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
-Deprecated: 2.8:
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> with of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
+<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
<description>
+Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of style properties found
+<parameter name="orientable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an newly allocated array of #GParamSpec*. The array must
-be freed with g_free().
-all style properties of a widget class.
+<return> the orientation of the @orientable.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
<description>
-Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
+Returns all style properties of a widget class.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of style properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the orientation of the @orientable.
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> an newly allocated array of #GParamSpec*. The array must
+be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_model">
<description>
-Returns: a #GtkTreeModel used or %NULL
+Returns the model for @cell_view. If no model is used %NULL is
+returned.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29014,50 +28114,46 @@ Returns: a #GtkTreeModel used or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkTreeModel used or %NULL
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
+<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
<description>
-Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
-widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
+Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
+that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
+afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could iconify it
+again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
-selected. Free with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_quality">
<description>
-Unselects the file referred to by @uri. If the file
-is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
-is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI to unselect
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the print quality
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_support_selection">
@@ -29080,30 +28176,6 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenu">
-<description>
-Arbitrary constant to scale down the size of the scroll arrow.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_socket_handle_map_request">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
-
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the plug has been mapped.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellRendererPixbuf. Adjust rendering
@@ -29142,7 +28214,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="border">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkBorder, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29172,32 +28244,15 @@ it if necessary. See gtk_settings_get_for_screen().
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GtkSettings object. If there is no default
+<return> a #GtkSettings object. If there is no default
screen, then returns %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkSocket">
-<description>
-This signal is emitted when a client is removed from the socket.
-The default action is to destroy the #GtkSocket widget, so if you
-want to reuse it you must add a signal handler that returns %TRUE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_get_justify">
<description>
-Return value: #GtkJustification
+Returns the justification of the label. See gtk_label_set_justify().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29326,11 +28381,11 @@ return %FALSE if @tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29359,50 +28414,21 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_remove_grabbed_key">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- keyval: a key
- modifiers: modifiers for the key
-
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the corresponding plug has
-told the socket to remove a key grab.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkAssistant">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
<description>
-Setting the "complete" child property to %TRUE marks a page as complete
-(i.e.: all the required fields are filled out). GTK+ uses this information
-to control the sensitivity of the navigation buttons.
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
-<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
-Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in #GtkPrintOperation.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to embed page setup selection in the #GtkPrintDialog
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29428,38 +28454,11 @@ number of pixels to place between children of @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_set">
-<description>
-Sets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
-The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
-each column number followed by the value to be set.
-The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
-%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
-0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
-The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> row iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
<description>
This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29472,7 +28471,7 @@ This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description>child object or %NULL for non-child tags
+<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tagname">
@@ -29492,39 +28491,59 @@ to parser functions
<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
if it doesn't.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
-See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
+Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
+Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
+by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_uri">
+<parameter_description> the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
+remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
+<return> %TRUE on success.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_clear_marks">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
<description>
-Removes any marks that have been added with gtk_scale_add_mark().
+Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resolution">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in dpi
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29541,6 +28560,7 @@ Note: when you enable print status tracking the print operation
can be in a non-finished state even after done has been called, as
the operation status then tracks the print job status on the printer.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29551,7 +28571,24 @@ the operation status then tracks the print job status on the printer.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE, if the print operation is finished.
-Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
+<description>
+Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
+gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -29604,6 +28641,7 @@ Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29618,28 +28656,41 @@ does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
</parameters>
<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
<description>
-Return Value: TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
+gtk_entry_set_visibility().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
+<description>
+Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -29648,6 +28699,11 @@ Since: 2.10
Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
+domain.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29660,39 +28716,19 @@ UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
-call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()
-instead.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current orientation of @shell
-
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_has_resize_grip">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the statusbar has a resize grip.
+Returns whether the statusbar has a resize grip.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29705,19 +28741,16 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the statusbar has a resize grip.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
<description>
-Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
-spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
+Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
+factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
+can be unloaded or shut down.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="policy">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29730,6 +28763,7 @@ Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29740,7 +28774,6 @@ instead.
</parameters>
<return> the current text orientation of @shell
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -29772,6 +28805,7 @@ call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
See <xref linkend="XML-UI"/> for information on allowed action
names.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29780,11 +28814,11 @@ names.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -29795,37 +28829,6 @@ action, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkAction
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileSystemModel object. You need to add files
-to the list using _gtk_file_system_model_add_and_query_file()
-or _gtk_file_system_model_update_file().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="get_func">
-<parameter_description> function to call for getting a value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="get_data">
-<parameter_description> user data argument passed to @get_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> @n_columns #GType types for the columns
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
</return>
</function>
@@ -29853,13 +28856,13 @@ than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
<description>
Creates a new #GtkEntryCompletion object.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkEntryCompletion object.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -29883,46 +28886,44 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
<description>
-Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
-gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
+This function frees a target table as returned by
+gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
-label.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
+the merged UI.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
@@ -29972,7 +28973,8 @@ file list
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_user_data">
<description>
-Return value: The user data.
+Returns the user data for the selection function.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29985,33 +28987,12 @@ Return value: The user data.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
-<description>
-Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
-is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
-multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_size_entry">
<description>
This returns the #GtkEntry used to allow the user to edit the font
number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30022,50 +29003,6 @@ number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
</parameters>
<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init">
-<description>
-An interface-initialization function for use in cases where an object is
-simply delegating the methods, signals of the #GtkFileChooserEmbed interface
-to another object. _gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate() must be called on
-each instance of the object so that the delegate object can be found.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iface">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChoserEmbedIface structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
-<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide rich text.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for rich text is included,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -30091,37 +29028,30 @@ display lines vs. paragraphs.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
+<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
<description>
-Retrieves the widget's requisition.
-
-This function should only be used by widget implementations in
-order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
-changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
-gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
-
-Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
+Returns a list of the #GtkWindows that belong to @window_group.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly-allocated list of
+windows inside the group.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu">
<description>
Gets the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30132,13 +29062,14 @@ Gets the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vscrollbar">
<description>
-Returns: the vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
+Returns the vertical scrollbar of @scrolled_window.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30150,7 +29081,6 @@ Returns: the vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
<return> the vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
%NULL if it does not have one.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -30161,6 +29091,7 @@ this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
window at the top.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30172,10 +29103,25 @@ window at the top.
<return> %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associcated
with the widget.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
+<description>
+Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
+This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget to be
+emitted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_foreach">
<description>
Invokes @callback on each non-internal child of @container. See
@@ -30229,22 +29175,6 @@ widgets with their own window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
-<description>
-Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
-direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
-%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_window">
<description>
Specifies whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
@@ -30346,33 +29276,12 @@ label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_icon_cache_validate">
-<description>
-Validates the icon cache passed in the @cache and
- cache_size fields of the @info structure. The
-validator checks that offsets specified in the
-cache do not point outside the mapped area, that
-strings look reasonable, and that pixbufs can
-be deserialized. The amount of validation can
-be controlled with the @flags field.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a CacheInfo structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cache is valid
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_exclusive">
<description>
Gets whether @group is exclusive or not.
See gtk_tool_palette_set_exclusive().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30387,49 +29296,17 @@ See gtk_tool_palette_set_exclusive().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @group is exclusive
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_buffer">
-<description>
-Get the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
-this widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkEntryBuffer object.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
-
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
</return>
</function>
@@ -30437,6 +29314,7 @@ is less than the second character in the buffer.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkComboBox with the model initialized to @model.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30447,7 +29325,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkComboBox with the model initialized to @model.
</parameters>
<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -30515,7 +29392,55 @@ managers to honor the geometry.
Note that for gtk_window_parse_geometry() to work as expected, it has
to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
-on the window.</description>
+on the window.
+|[
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+
+static void
+fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
+{
+/* fill with content... */
+}
+
+int
+main (int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
+GdkGeometry size_hints = {
+100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
+};
+
+gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
+
+window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
+vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
+
+gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
+fill_with_content (vbox);
+gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
+
+gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
+window,
+&size_hints,
+GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
+GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
+
+if (argc > 1)
+{
+if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
+fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
+}
+
+gtk_widget_show_all (window);
+gtk_main ();
+
+return 0;
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
@@ -30564,12 +29489,12 @@ the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description>the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
@@ -30588,40 +29513,21 @@ page in the notebook
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
-<description>
-Fills @color in with the original color value.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30649,57 +29555,48 @@ located within the currently-visible text area.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_context_id">
<description>
-Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
-This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget to be
-emitted.
+Returns a new context identifier, given a description
+of the actual context. Note that the description is
+<emphasis>not</emphasis> shown in the UI.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
-<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter name="context_description">
+<parameter_description> textual description of what context
+the new message is being used in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an integer id
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_tree_selection_set_tree_view">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTreeView of @selection. This function should not be invoked, as
-it is used internally by #GtkTreeView.
+Sets whether the preview widget set by
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
+current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file
+or it may display no preview at all. See
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="active">
+<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30774,22 +29671,36 @@ increment when a spin button is activated after providing an invalid value.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_contents">
<description>
-Creates a new font picker widget.
-
+Requests the contents of clipboard as the given target.
+When the results of the result are later received the supplied callback
+will be called.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an atom representing the form into which the clipboard
+owner should convert the selection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> A function to call when the results are received
+(or the retrieval fails). If the retrieval fails
+the length field of @selection_data will be
+negative.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new font picker widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_filter_keypress">
@@ -30815,22 +29726,11 @@ should be done for this key event.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkComboBox">
-<description>
-Which kind of shadow to draw around the combo box.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_expander_new">
<description>
Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30841,7 +29741,6 @@ Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -30930,6 +29829,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets the job title.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30940,7 +29840,6 @@ Gets the job title.
</parameters>
<return> the title of @job
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -30953,7 +29852,7 @@ used to be useful before gdk_colormap_get_visual() existed.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>visual of the default colormap
+<return> visual of the default colormap
</return>
</function>
@@ -30963,6 +29862,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @group.
The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30977,33 +29877,34 @@ stock item indicated by @stock_id.
</parameters>
<return> A new #GtkRadioToolButton
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_file_part">
+<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
<description>
-Gets the non-folder portion of whatever the user has entered
-into the file selector. What is returned is a UTF-8 string,
-and if a filename path is needed, g_file_get_child_for_display_name()
-must be used
+Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
+See gtk_fixed_set_has_window().
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_get_has_window() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="fixed">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entered filename - this value is owned by the
-chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> %TRUE if @fixed has its own window.
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_set_width">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of
+Returns whether the completion popup window will be resized to the
+width of the entry.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31015,30 +29916,30 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of
<return> %TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of
the entry
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
+<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
<description>
-Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
+Compares two printers.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b,
+or a positive value if @a > @b
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_new">
@@ -31057,6 +29958,7 @@ Creates a new entry.
<description>
Gets the style (icons, text or both) of items in the tool palette.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31067,7 +29969,6 @@ Gets the style (icons, text or both) of items in the tool palette.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkToolbarStyle of items in the tool palette.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -31075,6 +29976,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Retrieves the popup of the #GtkScaleButton.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31085,29 +29987,59 @@ Retrieves the popup of the #GtkScaleButton.
</parameters>
<return> the popup of the #GtkScaleButton
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
+<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
-Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
-This image is used for a drag icon.
-
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_current_page">
@@ -31135,35 +30067,11 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
-<description>
-Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
-folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
-be changed to the folder containing @filename.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the filename to select
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_use_alpha">
<description>
Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31174,22 +30082,9 @@ Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the color sample uses alpha channel, %FALSE if not.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererSpin">
-<description>
-The number of decimal places to display.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_button_get_group">
<description>
Retrieves the group assigned to a radio button.
@@ -31251,27 +30146,6 @@ Creates a new toolbar.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
-<description>
-Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
-then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
-of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
-function is set.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name">
<description>
Sets the currently selected font.
@@ -31295,7 +30169,8 @@ Sets the currently selected font.
<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_custom">
<description>
-Return value: whether @size is a custom paper size.
+Returns %TRUE if @size is not a standard paper size.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31356,6 +30231,7 @@ the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
Gets the angle of rotation for the label. See
gtk_label_set_angle().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31366,27 +30242,25 @@ gtk_label_set_angle().
</parameters>
<return> the angle of rotation for the label
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
<description>
-Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
-unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
+Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
+overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
+overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
+the menu will be rebuilt.
- iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
+The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
+will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31395,7 +30269,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_level_indentation">
<description>
-Return value: the amount of extra indentation for child levels in
+Returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels
+in @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31407,10 +30284,48 @@ Return value: the amount of extra indentation for child levels in
<return> the amount of extra indentation for child levels in
@tree_view. A return value of 0 means that this feature is disabled.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv">
+<description>
+A variant of gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() which
+takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
+varargs. This function is mainly intended for
+language-bindings.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position to insert the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="values">
+<parameter_description> an array of GValues
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_values">
+<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_layout_move">
<description>
Moves a current child of @layout to a new position.
@@ -31440,7 +30355,11 @@ Moves a current child of @layout to a new position.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode">
<description>
-Return value: a #PangoEllipsizeMode indicating how text in @tool_item
+Returns the ellipsize mode used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be ellipsized.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31452,21 +30371,6 @@ Return value: a #PangoEllipsizeMode indicating how text in @tool_item
<return> a #PangoEllipsizeMode indicating how text in @tool_item
should be ellipsized.
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
-<description>
-Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -31512,7 +30416,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description>the related #GtkAction or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the related #GtkAction or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31603,10 +30507,29 @@ context id.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_display">
<description>
Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31617,7 +30540,6 @@ Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -31626,6 +30548,7 @@ Since: 2.2
Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31636,13 +30559,13 @@ Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
</parameters>
<return> The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_alpha">
<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
+Returns the previous alpha value.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31655,23 +30578,40 @@ Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_folders">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format">
<description>
-Sets whether folders should be included in the #GtkTreeModel for
-display.
+This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
+its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_folders">
-<parameter_description> whether folders should be displayed
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> the deserialize function to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> @function's user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_size">
@@ -31689,29 +30629,56 @@ used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to store the default width, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the default width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to store the default height, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the default height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
<description>
-Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
-current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
-view will be updated accordingly.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
+windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
+gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
+coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
+that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
+placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
+irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
+placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
+text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
+in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
+occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
+child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
+scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
+would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
+change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
+bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="which_window">
+<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31816,21 +30783,63 @@ of times.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_invisible_char">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_set">
<description>
-Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
-for entries with visibility set to false. See gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
+Sets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
+The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
+each column number followed by the value to be set.
+The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
+%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
+0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
+The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> row iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
+<description>
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
+be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
+associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
+window.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
+to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
+default clipboard. Another common value
+is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
+the primary X selection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
-show invisible text at all.
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+clipboard already exists, a new one will
+be created. Once a clipboard object has
+been created, it is persistent for all time.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -31838,13 +30847,13 @@ show invisible text at all.
<description>
Creates a new ui manager object.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new ui manager object.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -31880,6 +30889,7 @@ widget
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::support-selection property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31890,13 +30900,14 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::support-selection property.
</parameters>
<return> whether the application supports print of selection
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_scrollable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if arrows for scrolling are present
+Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling. See
+gtk_notebook_set_scrollable().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31911,7 +30922,12 @@ Return value: %TRUE if arrows for scrolling are present
<function name="gtk_paned_get_handle_window">
<description>
-Return value: the paned's handle window.
+Returns the #GdkWindow of the handle. This function is
+useful when handling button or motion events because it
+enables the callback to distinguish between the window
+of the paned, a child and the handle.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31922,25 +30938,26 @@ Return value: the paned's handle window.
</parameters>
<return> the paned's handle window.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of copies to print
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -31956,11 +30973,11 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_align().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description>location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description>location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31986,7 +31003,12 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_text">
<description>
-Return value: array of characters from the buffer
+Returns <emphasis>text</emphasis> in the given range. If the range
+contains non-text elements such as images, the character and byte
+offsets in the returned string will not correspond to character and
+byte offsets in the buffer. If you want offsets to correspond, see
+gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32005,7 +31027,9 @@ Return value: array of characters from the buffer
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_headers_clickable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise %FALSE
+Returns whether all header columns are clickable.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32016,31 +31040,32 @@ Return value: %TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise %FALSE
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise %FALSE
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the selection.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the selection.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
+Returns %TRUE if the row at @iter is currently selected.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32057,55 +31082,47 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPrintJob">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
<description>
-Gets emitted when the status of a job changes. The signal handler
-can use gtk_print_job_get_status() to obtain the new status.
+Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
+current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintJob object on which the signal was emitted
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
<description>
-Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
-is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
-unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
-scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
-gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
-
-The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
-the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
-This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
-for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
-the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
-widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
-#GtkViewport proxy.
+Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
-A widget supports scrolling natively if the
-set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
-i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_value">
@@ -32149,7 +31166,7 @@ and number of decimal places are all changed accordingly, after this function ca
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="climb_rate">
@@ -32218,6 +31235,7 @@ just get the mark onscreen)
<description>
Creates a new #GtkEntry widget with the given maximum length.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32230,30 +31248,42 @@ be clamped to the range 0-65536.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkEntry
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
<description>
-Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
-and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
-otherwise %NULL.
+Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
+to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
+gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
+automatically around expose events sent to the
+widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
+window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
+buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
+update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
+primitives being rendered.
+
+In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
+so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
+if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
+Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
+expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
+pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
+gdk_window_begin_paint()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="double_buffered">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> icon set of @stock_id
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_side_image">
@@ -32274,7 +31304,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>the new header image @page
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32299,18 +31329,6 @@ Sets the width of the vertical border of tab labels.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_unmap_notify">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
-
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the plug has been unmapped ???
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_image_targets">
<description>
Appends the image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -32337,57 +31355,34 @@ how to convert a pixbuf into the format
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_size">
<description>
-Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
- stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
-except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> The id of the stock item you want to insert
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> The text in the tooltip of the toolbar button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> The private text of the tooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> The callback called when the toolbar button is clicked.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data passed to callback
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position the button shall be inserted at.
--1 means at the end.
+<parameter name="paper_size">
+<parameter_description> a paper size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the inserted widget
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default">
<description>
-Return value: the name of the default paper size. The string
+Returns the name of the default paper size, which
+depends on the current locale.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32395,60 +31390,56 @@ Return value: the name of the default paper size. The string
<return> the name of the default paper size. The string
is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRecentManager">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
<description>
-Whether this #GtkRecentChooser should display recently used resources
-marked with the "private" flag. Such resources should be considered
-private to the applications and groups that have added them.
+Sets the label of the tool item group.
+The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
+of the usual label.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_install_properties">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_metric">
<description>
-Installs the necessary properties for a class implementing
-#GtkRecentChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
-for each property, using the values from the #GtkRecentChooserProp
-enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
-values don't collide with some other property values they
-are using.
+Gets the units used for a #GtkRuler. See gtk_ruler_set_metric().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> the class structure for a type deriving from #GObject
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the units currently used for @ruler
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_set_get_sizes">
@@ -32463,7 +31454,7 @@ array must be freed with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sizes">
-<parameter_description>return location
+<parameter_description> return location
for array of sizes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -32479,6 +31470,7 @@ for array of sizes
<description>
Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32489,29 +31481,6 @@ Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
</parameters>
<return> the page orientation
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
-<description>
-Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-Return value: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
</return>
</function>
@@ -32519,6 +31488,7 @@ Return value: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
<description>
Gets the currently-selected font.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_get_font_name() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32529,7 +31499,6 @@ Gets the currently-selected font.
</parameters>
<return> A #GdkFont.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_get_font_name() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -32559,11 +31528,11 @@ path will be modified to reflect this change.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>The path of the row to move to, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The path of the row to move to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeViewColumn to move horizontally to, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to move horizontally to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="use_align">
@@ -32660,53 +31629,76 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
<description>
-Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
+<description>
+Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_pixmap_new">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_row_span_column">
<description>
+Sets the column with row span information for @combo_box to be @row_span.
+The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
+an item should span.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_span">
+<parameter_description> A column in the model passed during construction.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
<description>
-Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
-allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
-the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
-leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
-setting off will improve performance.
-
-Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
-off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
-its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
-anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
-%NO_WINDOW widget that <emphasis>does</emphasis> draw on @widget->window,
-you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
-of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
-regions newly when the widget increases size.
+Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
+to a stock icon.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32714,16 +31706,31 @@ regions newly when the widget increases size.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
-when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
-new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
+<description>
+Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> default justification
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_end">
<description>
This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
@@ -32742,7 +31749,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description>child object or %NULL for non-child tags
+<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tagname">
@@ -32775,100 +31782,94 @@ the model.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was added to the recently used resources list.
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
<description>
-Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
- pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
-If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
- limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
+Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
+Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
+
+Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pred">
-<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description>search limit, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether a match was found
+<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
<description>
-Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
-in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation">
+<description>
+Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()
+instead.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> the current orientation of @shell
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -32885,7 +31886,7 @@ or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the mark's #GtkTextBuffer
+<return> the mark's #GtkTextBuffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -32916,7 +31917,8 @@ that was expected but not found
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
-Return value: if %FALSE, the insertion cursor will not be
+Returns whether the insertion cursor will be shown.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -32930,57 +31932,37 @@ shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned #GIcon.
-
-If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
+<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
<description>
-Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
-controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
-and also the direction in which the children of a container are
-packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
-so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
-reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
-let the default reading direction present, except for containers
-where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
-visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
+If the modification time on any previously read file for the
+default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
+and then reread all previously read RC files.
-If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
-set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action">
@@ -33052,37 +32034,64 @@ Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_new_with_adjustment">
<description>
-Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
-details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
+Creates a new #GtkProgressBar with an associated #GtkAdjustment.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font
-group details. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and
-must not be modified or freed.
+<return> a #GtkProgressBar.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
+<description>
+Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the id of the currently active slave
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<function name="gtk_style_get_style_property">
<description>
-Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
-factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
-can be unloaded or shut down.
+Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
+widget class is in the given style.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the style property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue where the value of the property being
+queried will be stored
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33103,7 +32112,7 @@ the "response" signal with the corresponding response ID.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in first button, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -33142,7 +32151,12 @@ longer found in the model!
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style">
<description>
-Return value: a #GtkReliefStyle indicating the relief style used
+Returns the relief style of @tool_item. See gtk_button_set_relief_style().
+Custom subclasses of #GtkToolItem should call this function in the handler
+of the #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured signal to find out the
+relief style of buttons.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33154,7 +32168,6 @@ Return value: a #GtkReliefStyle indicating the relief style used
<return> a #GtkReliefStyle indicating the relief style used
for @tool_item.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -33166,6 +32179,7 @@ The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
returned pixbuf.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33176,41 +32190,15 @@ returned pixbuf.
</parameters>
<return> the displayed pixbuf, or %NULL if the image is empty.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
-<description>
-Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
- height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
-and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
-actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
-this function.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>return location for width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>return location for height, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the tool button has
+Returns the name of the themed icon for the tool button,
+see gtk_tool_button_set_icon_name().
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33222,49 +32210,51 @@ Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the tool button has
<return> the icon name or %NULL if the tool button has
no themed icon
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
+<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
<description>
-Returns: whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a new #GtkStockItem
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
-displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
-will be updated appropriately.
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
+Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
+2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
+be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -33340,6 +32330,7 @@ Moves the @path to point to the next node at the current depth.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33355,7 +32346,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
<return> an array of #GtkPageRange<!-- -->s. Use g_free()
to free the array when it is no longer needed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -33379,7 +32369,10 @@ in the GLib file name encoding
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_is_important">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is considered important.
+Returns whether @tool_item is considered important. See
+gtk_tool_item_set_is_important()
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33390,47 +32383,29 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is considered important.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is considered important.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
-to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
-by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
-<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
-<description>
-Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
-gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
-gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
-There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
-application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
-can be overridden by themes.
+<return> the default bottom margin
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_label">
@@ -33477,7 +32452,8 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_nth_page">
<description>
-Return value:the child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is
+Returns the child widget contained in page number @page_num.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33491,7 +32467,7 @@ to get the last page.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is
+<return> the child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is
out of bounds.
</return>
</function>
@@ -33513,34 +32489,25 @@ in the buffer may override the default.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
-a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
-is %FALSE by default.
-
-Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+This function should only be called after the layout has been
+placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
+scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
+between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
-If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
-You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
-for the details.
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages">
@@ -33627,56 +32594,45 @@ Creates a new #GtkNotebook widget with no pages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
<description>
-Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
- focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
-it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
-%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
-This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
-in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
-can only happen when the widget is realized.
+Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
+and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
+normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
+that crashes if not.
-If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
-and the function will return without failing.
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
+initially.
+
+You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+Note that, according to the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
+for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
+drawing attention to their dialogs.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_editing">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_icon_factory_list_ids">
-<description>
-Gets all known IDs stored in an existing icon factory.
-The strings in the returned list aren't copied.
-The list itself should be freed.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> List of ids in icon factories
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_invisible_set_screen">
<description>
Sets the #GdkScreen where the #GtkInvisible object will be displayed.
@@ -33771,11 +32727,11 @@ toplevel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description>location to store X position relative to @dest_widget
+<parameter_description> location to store X position relative to @dest_widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description>location to store Y position relative to @dest_widget
+<parameter_description> location to store Y position relative to @dest_widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33822,7 +32778,25 @@ you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.</description>
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
+if (document_is_new)
+{
+/* the user just created a new document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
+}
+else
+{
+/* the user edited an existing document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="chooser">
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
@@ -33836,7 +32810,6 @@ file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.</descriptio
<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -33865,21 +32838,28 @@ is 0, the function does nothing and returns %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.
+Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
+drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
+compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
+Please note that the semantics of this call will change
+in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
+window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new link button widget.
+<return> %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
+channel being drawn correctly.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -33903,27 +32883,25 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
+<function name="gtk_socket_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-
-Since: 2.14
+<return> the new #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_always_show_image">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the menu item proxies will always show their image
+Returns whether @action<!-- -->'s menu item proxies will ignore the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images setting and always show their image,
+if available.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33934,7 +32912,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the menu item proxies will always show their image
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the menu item proxies will always show their image
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -33970,38 +32947,42 @@ user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>Function to be called when a view row is destroyed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Function to be called when a view row is destroyed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>User data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> User data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
+each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
+widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
+to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
+gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
+effect on labels containing only a single line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="jtype">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
@@ -34028,42 +33009,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
+This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
+#GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34074,6 +33040,7 @@ no action should be activated
<description>
Gets the selection mode of the @icon_view.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34084,7 +33051,6 @@ Gets the selection mode of the @icon_view.
</parameters>
<return> the current selection mode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -34097,36 +33063,31 @@ following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>A new text combo box.
+<return> A new text combo box.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
<description>
-Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
+Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to a current valid
+path.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_positions">
@@ -34134,6 +33095,7 @@ Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34148,7 +33110,6 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -34184,6 +33145,7 @@ by passing the %GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SIZE flag when obtaining
the #GtkIconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34192,7 +33154,7 @@ returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34201,7 +33163,6 @@ or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
icon.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -34235,7 +33196,7 @@ gtk_widget_modify_style().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous
gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -34243,105 +33204,41 @@ gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
<description>
-Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
-planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
-To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-
-To free the return value, use:
-|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
-]|
+Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
+#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
+widgets have no parent widget.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
- position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
-the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
-has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
-property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
-</return>
-</function>
+Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
-<function name="GtkWindow">
-<description>
-The ::keys-changed signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators
-or mnemonics that are associated with @window changes.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the window which received the signal
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_lookup">
-<description>
-Look up a named tag.
-
+<return> The current maximum value of the adjustment.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a tag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
</return>
</function>
@@ -34359,7 +33256,7 @@ Since 2.20 @closure can be %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> the closure to remove from this accelerator group, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the closure to remove from this accelerator group, or %NULL
to remove all closures
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -34373,6 +33270,7 @@ to remove all closures
Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
been created inside of the socket.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34383,54 +33281,48 @@ been created inside of the socket.
</parameters>
<return> the window of the plug if available, or %NULL
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
<description>
-Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
-string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
-visible context like a list of icons.
-
+Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
+maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
+width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
+fill any extra space.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_width">
+<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
-the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
-is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
+<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
<description>
-Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
-no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
-pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
+the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
+unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
+hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan
+to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
+will also be finalized.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
-wasn't set from a stock id
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -34447,6 +33339,7 @@ as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
usual way to get the selection.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34461,7 +33354,6 @@ function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder() on a nonexistent folder.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -34491,46 +33383,6 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkNotebook">
-<description>
-The ::create-window signal is emitted when a detachable
-tab is dropped on the root window.
-
-A handler for this signal can create a window containing
-a notebook where the tab will be attached. It is also
-responsible for moving/resizing the window and adding the
-necessary properties to the notebook (e.g. the
-#GtkNotebook:group-id ).
-
-The default handler uses the global window creation hook,
-if one has been set with gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebook emitting the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> the tab of @notebook that is being detached
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the X coordinate where the drop happens
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the Y coordinate where the drop happens
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkNotebook that @page should be added to, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_context_set_surrounding">
<description>
Sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit
@@ -34567,6 +33419,7 @@ the preedit string should not be included within
Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
list handled by a recent manager.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34579,14 +33432,13 @@ list handled by a recent manager.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -34615,11 +33467,11 @@ Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34630,6 +33482,7 @@ Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
<description>
Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end() up to @count times.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34644,24 +33497,52 @@ Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end() up to @count times.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_export_filename">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
+Sets up the #GtkPrintOperation to generate a file instead
+of showing the print dialog. The indended use of this function
+is for implementing "Export to PDF" actions. Currently, PDF
+is the only supported format.
+"Print to PDF" support is independent of this and is done
+by letting the user pick the "Print to PDF" item from the list
+of printers in the print dialog.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the filename for the exported file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
-used.
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
+<description>
+Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
+#GtkPrintContext.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new Pango context for @context
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -34670,6 +33551,7 @@ used.
Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
file selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34680,7 +33562,6 @@ file selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if only local files can be selected.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -34702,32 +33583,23 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_orientation">
<description>
-Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
-file selector. If @local_only is %TRUE (the default),
-then the selected file are files are guaranteed to be
-accessible through the operating systems native file
-file system and therefore the application only
-needs to worry about the filename functions in
-#GtkFileChooser, like gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
-rather than the URI functions like
-gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
+Get the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION,
+converted to a #GtkPageOrientation.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="local_only">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if only local files can be selected
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the orientation
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_group_activate">
@@ -34805,9 +33677,47 @@ Sets the size of the scrollable area of the layout.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
+<description>
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_get_name">
<description>
-Return value: the name of @printer
+Returns the name of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34818,7 +33728,6 @@ Return value: the name of @printer
</parameters>
<return> the name of @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -34828,6 +33737,7 @@ Determines if the widget has the global input focus. See
gtk_widget_is_focus() for the difference between having the global
input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34838,7 +33748,6 @@ input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -34857,7 +33766,7 @@ you should use gtk_image_new_from_icon_set().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34902,24 +33811,6 @@ See gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
-<description>
-Return value:The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="add_file">
<description>
Adds the given @file with its associated @info to the @model.
@@ -34943,54 +33834,40 @@ If the model is frozen, the file will only show up after it is thawn.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
-Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
-See gtk_ruler_set_range().
+If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
+gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
+gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
+by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description>location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description>location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_size">
-<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
-the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
<description>
-Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
-toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
-necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
-toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
+Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
+<return> the human-readable name of @size
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -35006,11 +33883,11 @@ See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description>location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description>location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35031,7 +33908,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_ends_tag ()), i.e. it tells you whether a range with
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35064,6 +33941,7 @@ range of columns.
<description>
Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35074,64 +33952,54 @@ Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
</parameters>
<return> The number of characters in the buffer.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_thaw_updates">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_get_name">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of a previous call to
-_gtk_file_system_model_freeze_updates()
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the name of the action group.
-<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
-<description>
-Returns: the list representing the radio group for this object
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
+<return> the name of the action group.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
<description>
-Return value: number of characters in the line
+Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
+as calling g_object_ref(), and exists mostly for historical
+reasons. It can still be convenient to avoid casting a widget
+to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of characters in the line
+<return> the widget that was referenced
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
<description>
-Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
-as calling g_object_ref(), and exists mostly for historical
-reasons. It can still be convenient to avoid casting a widget
-to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
+Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
+directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35139,11 +34007,12 @@ to a #GObject, it saves a small amount of typing.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget that was referenced
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_append">
@@ -35165,7 +34034,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35194,28 +34063,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
-<description>
-Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
-which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
-of the icon view.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_vscale_new_with_range">
<description>
Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
@@ -35275,6 +34122,7 @@ far right if added to a menu bar.
Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
position in @entry.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35290,7 +34138,6 @@ position in @entry.
<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
with g_free() when done.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -35340,6 +34187,24 @@ toplevel container is realized and mapped.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_completion">
+<description>
+Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_set_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles
@@ -35373,6 +34238,7 @@ then feeds the data to gtk_recent_manager_add_full().
See gtk_recent_manager_add_full() if you want to explicitly
define the metadata for the resource pointed by @uri.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35388,7 +34254,6 @@ define the metadata for the resource pointed by @uri.
<return> %TRUE if the new item was successfully added
to the recently used resources list
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -35396,6 +34261,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the relief mode of the header button of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35406,7 +34272,6 @@ Gets the relief mode of the header button of @group.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkReliefStyle
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -35414,6 +34279,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Gets the tool item at @index in group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35428,48 +34294,15 @@ Gets the tool item at @index in group.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkToolItem at index
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
-<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
-
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_get_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
-Returns: Whether the menu reserves toggle space
+Returns whether the menu reserves space for toggles and
+icons, regardless of their actual presence.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35480,7 +34313,6 @@ Returns: Whether the menu reserves toggle space
</parameters>
<return> Whether the menu reserves toggle space
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -35566,32 +34398,41 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAboutDialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a newly created #GtkAboutDialog
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
<description>
-Returns: A newly-allocated list of
+Retrieves the widget's requisition.
+
+This function should only be used by widget implementations in
+order to figure whether the widget's requisition has actually
+changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
+gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
+
+Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="requisition">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkRequisition to copy to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-allocated list of
-windows inside the group.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_yrange">
@@ -35627,6 +34468,7 @@ convert to window coordinates with gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords().
Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.
See gtk_entry_buffer_get_length().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35637,13 +34479,14 @@ See gtk_entry_buffer_get_length().
</parameters>
<return> The byte length of the buffer.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
+Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35654,7 +34497,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -35703,6 +34545,33 @@ on the values of the #GtkLabel:use-underline" and
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set">
+<description>
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_prop_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab">
<description>
Sets the behavior of the text widget when the Tab key is pressed.
@@ -35734,6 +34603,7 @@ Computes a valid UTF-8 string that can be used as the name of the item in a
menu or list. For example, calling this function on an item that refers to
"file:///foo/bar.txt" will yield "bar.txt".
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35745,7 +34615,6 @@ menu or list. For example, calling this function on an item that refers to
<return> A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding; free it with
g_free().
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -35773,11 +34642,11 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sort_data">
-<parameter_description>user data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data_destroy">
-<parameter_description>destroy notifier for @sort_data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @sort_data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35791,13 +34660,13 @@ is useful only for notification of changes to the accelerator
map via the ::changed signal; it isn't a parameter to the
other accelerator map functions.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the global #GtkAccelMap object
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -35813,6 +34682,7 @@ be %NULL.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35825,7 +34695,7 @@ arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
@@ -35855,7 +34725,6 @@ arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -35863,6 +34732,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::has-selection property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35873,26 +34743,9 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::has-selection property.
</parameters>
<return> whether there is a selection
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
-<description>
-Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_valist">
<description>
See gtk_tree_model_get(), this version takes a <type>va_list</type>
@@ -35960,16 +34813,49 @@ automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAction">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
-The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
+Returns the page number of the current page.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
+page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
+-1 will be returned.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
+<description>
+Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
+an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
+
+Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
+during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
+for information about runtime accelerator changes.
+
+If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
+of times.
+
+Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
+locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
+changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
+have to be unlocked.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAction
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35984,6 +34870,7 @@ URL link in an about dialog.
Since 2.18 there exists a default function which uses gtk_show_uri(). To
deactivate it, you can pass %NULL for @func.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36002,7 +34889,6 @@ deactivate it, you can pass %NULL for @func.
</parameters>
<return> the previous URL hook.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -36011,6 +34897,7 @@ Since: 2.6
Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
increment the reference count of the returned object.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36023,10 +34910,9 @@ increment the reference count of the returned object.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the object named @name or %NULL if
+<return> the object named @name or %NULL if
it could not be found in the object tree.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -36038,6 +34924,7 @@ The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
be freed or modified.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36049,78 +34936,50 @@ be freed or modified.
<return> stock id of the displayed stock icon,
or %NULL if the image is empty.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
<description>
-Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
- row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
-where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
-0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
-center.
-
-If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
-tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
-This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
-position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-
-This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
-the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
-centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+Creates a list of known paper sizes.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_align">
-<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="col_align">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
+<parameter name="include_custom">
+<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
+as defined in the page setup dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated list of newly
+allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
+should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
+example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
+the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
+menu will have an underlined 'O'.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
+only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s whose @callback members
-must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -36171,85 +35030,45 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
<description>
-Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
-and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
-as @... parameters.
-Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
-incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
-The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
-creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
-resized and positioned on screen.
-The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
-will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
+Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dialog_text">
-<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
+the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_prop_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
-optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
-<description>
-Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
-gdk_input_set_extension_events().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> extension events for @widget
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_box_reorder_child">
<description>
Moves @child to a new @position in the list of @box children.
@@ -36285,7 +35104,9 @@ the list
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_show_style">
<description>
-Return value: whether the font style will be shown in the label.
+Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36296,7 +35117,6 @@ Return value: whether the font style will be shown in the label.
</parameters>
<return> whether the font style will be shown in the label.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -36306,6 +35126,7 @@ This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36316,7 +35137,6 @@ See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
</parameters>
<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -36324,6 +35144,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Creates a new path with @first_index and @varargs as indices.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36338,7 +35159,6 @@ Creates a new path with @first_index and @varargs as indices.
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkTreePath.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -36398,7 +35218,7 @@ placement.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mark_name">
-<parameter_description>name for mark, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> name for mark, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="where">
@@ -36446,6 +35266,7 @@ will be completely above or below the frame.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36456,25 +35277,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
</parameters>
<return> layout of page in number-up mode
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
-<description>
-Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -36496,7 +35298,9 @@ Retrieves the value set by gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent().
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_snap_to_ticks">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if values are snapped to the nearest step.
+Returns whether the values are corrected to the nearest step. See
+gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36509,38 +35313,11 @@ Return value: %TRUE if values are snapped to the nearest step.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
-<description>
-Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
-again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
-iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
-up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
-onscreen.
-
-You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_reverse">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36551,32 +35328,9 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
</parameters>
<return> whether to reverse the order of the printed pages
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_size">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH and
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="paper_size">
-<parameter_description> a paper size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_buffer">
<description>
Sets @buffer as the buffer being displayed by @text_view. The previous
@@ -36592,59 +35346,29 @@ will not "adopt" it.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
-the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
-<description>
-Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
-know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
+<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> The new order of rows
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook">
@@ -36654,6 +35378,7 @@ modify the palette in a color selection. This function should save
the new palette contents, and update the GtkSettings property
"gtk-color-palette" so all GtkColorSelection widgets will be modified.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36664,7 +35389,6 @@ the new palette contents, and update the GtkSettings property
</parameters>
<return> the previous change palette hook (that was replaced).
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -36727,22 +35451,64 @@ gtk_editable_set_editable().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
+<function name="gtk_widget_can_activate_accel">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
+Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
+identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
+This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
+signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
+handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
+that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
+its ancestors mapped.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of a signal installed on @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
+<description>
+This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
+the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
+increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
+character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geom_mask">
+<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_first">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreePath. The string representation of this path is "0"
@@ -36810,7 +35576,7 @@ changing the stock pixbuf for #GTK_STOCK_DND instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>the transparency mask for an image, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the transparency mask for an image, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hot_x">
@@ -36825,26 +35591,6 @@ changing the stock pixbuf for #GTK_STOCK_DND instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkViewport">
-<description>
-Set the scroll adjustments for the viewport. Usually scrolled containers
-like #GtkScrolledWindow will emit this signal to connect two instances
-of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkViewport.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="horizontal">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="vertical">
-<parameter_description> the vertical #GtkAdjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_inserted">
<description>
Emits the "row-inserted" signal on @tree_model
@@ -36869,7 +35615,13 @@ Emits the "row-inserted" signal on @tree_model
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active">
<description>
-Return value: An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
+Returns the index of the currently active item, or -1 if there's no
+active item. If the model is a non-flat treemodel, and the active item
+is not an immediate child of the root of the tree, this function returns
+<literal>gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]</literal>, where
+<literal>path</literal> is the #GtkTreePath of the active item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36881,7 +35633,6 @@ Return value: An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
<return> An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
or -1 if there's no active item.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -36890,6 +35641,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Determines whether @widget is the current default widget within its
toplevel. See gtk_widget_set_can_default().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36901,28 +35653,25 @@ toplevel. See gtk_widget_set_can_default().
<return> %TRUE if @widget is the current default widget within
its toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_sort_type">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag destination. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
+Gets the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the sorting order of the @chooser.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_element">
@@ -36937,6 +35686,7 @@ be %NULL.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36949,7 +35699,7 @@ arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
@@ -36979,7 +35729,6 @@ arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37023,31 +35772,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
-completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
-to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
-and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
-
-This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
-column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
-renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
+Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path">
@@ -37091,6 +35829,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the default left margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37105,13 +35844,14 @@ Gets the default left margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
</parameters>
<return> the default left margin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
<description>
-Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns the column with markup text for @icon_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37122,40 +35862,16 @@ Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
</parameters>
<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
-<description>
-Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
-The string is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data->target.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
-otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_end">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is the end iterator
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last
+dereferenceable iterator in the buffer. gtk_text_iter_is_end () is
+the most efficient way to check whether an iterator is the end
+iterator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37168,26 +35884,28 @@ Return value: whether @iter is the end iterator
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
<description>
-Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
-the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
-this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
+Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
+<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
+Note that this will be called once for each time
+gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
+is called on a builder.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_stock_lookup">
@@ -37255,6 +35973,7 @@ Gets the value of the "private" flag. Resources in the recently used
list that have this flag set to %TRUE should only be displayed by the
applications that have registered them.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37265,7 +35984,6 @@ applications that have registered them.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the private flag was found, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -37275,13 +35993,13 @@ Creates a #GtkVolumeButton, with a range between 0.0 and 1.0, with
a stepping of 0.02. Volume values can be obtained and modified using
the functions from #GtkScaleButton.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkVolumeButton
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -37305,6 +36023,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRecentAction object. To add the action to
a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37313,11 +36032,11 @@ call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -37326,41 +36045,38 @@ action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkRecentManager, or %NULL for using the default
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager, or %NULL for using the default
#GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the newly created #GtkRecentAction
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
<description>
-Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_documenters">
<description>
-Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
+Returns the string which are displayed in the documenters
+tab of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37373,7 +36089,6 @@ Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
the documenters. The array is owned by the about dialog
and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -37383,6 +36098,7 @@ This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name. If the
file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
#GKeyFileError.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37395,13 +36111,12 @@ file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -37411,12 +36126,17 @@ Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
them with the current contents of @builder.
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
+domain.
+
<note><para>
If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
</para></note>
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37433,19 +36153,30 @@ its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_accessible">
<description>
-Returns:the #AtkObject associated with @widget
+Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
+assistive technology.
+
+If no accessibility library is loaded (i.e. no ATK implementation library is
+loaded via <envar>GTK_MODULES</envar> or via another application library,
+such as libgnome), then this #AtkObject instance may be a no-op. Likewise,
+if no class-specific #AtkObject implementation is available for the widget
+instance in question, it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the
+first ancestor class for which such an implementation is defined.
+
+The documentation of the <ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/atk/index.html">ATK</ulink>
+library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37454,13 +36185,21 @@ Returns:the #AtkObject associated with @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #AtkObject associated with @widget
+<return> the #AtkObject associated with @widget
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_is_active">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
+Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.
+(That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.)
+The return value is %TRUE if the window is active toplevel
+itself, but also if it is, say, a #GtkPlug embedded in the active toplevel.
+You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget
+differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
+See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37471,13 +36210,24 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_editable">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is inside an editable range
+Returns whether the character at @iter is within an editable region
+of text. Non-editable text is "locked" and can't be changed by the
+user via #GtkTextView. This function is simply a convenience
+wrapper around gtk_text_iter_get_attributes (). If no tags applied
+to this text affect editability, @default_setting will be returned.
+
+You don't want to use this function to decide whether text can be
+inserted at @iter, because for insertion you don't want to know
+whether the char at @iter is inside an editable range, you want to
+know whether a new character inserted at @iter would be inside an
+editable range. Use gtk_text_iter_can_insert() to handle this
+case.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37514,7 +36264,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description>The name of the stock item, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The name of the stock item, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37543,7 +36293,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -37554,49 +36304,31 @@ gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_send_focus_message">
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
<description>
-Sends a XEMBED message for moving the focus along the focus
-chain to a window. The flags field that these messages share
-will be correctly filled in.
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="recipient">
-<parameter_description>window to which to send the window, or %NULL
-in which case nothing will be sent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message">
-<parameter_description> type of message
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> detail field of message
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
-<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description>an existing icon size
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_icon_size">
@@ -37604,6 +36336,7 @@ will return @target.
Gets the size of icons in the tool palette.
See gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37612,9 +36345,8 @@ See gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GtkIconSize of icons in the tool palette
+<return> the #GtkIconSize of icons in the tool palette
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -37641,6 +36373,7 @@ purposes.</warning>
Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkListStore.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37655,7 +36388,25 @@ Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkListStore.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_buffer">
+<description>
+Get the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
+this widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkEntryBuffer object.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37684,7 +36435,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_property_name">
@@ -37699,20 +36450,26 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
<description>
-Returns: the wrap width.
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the wrap width.
-
-Since: 2.6
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
</return>
</function>
@@ -37737,7 +36494,7 @@ indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #PangoLayout for this entry
+<return> the #PangoLayout for this entry
</return>
</function>
@@ -37760,51 +36517,24 @@ If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
-UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
-them with the current contents of @builder.
-
-<note><para>
-If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
-its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
-#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-</para></note>
-
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object_ids">
-<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37838,54 +36568,73 @@ See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
-gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
+
+Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
+are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+
+This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
+menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
+map dump.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="filter_pattern">
+<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description>the menu label, or NULL for default
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
+with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
@@ -37941,33 +36690,11 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_set_delegate">
-<description>
-Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser
-methods should be delegated to @delegate, and that
-#GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate should be
-forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
-_gtk_file_chooser_delegate_iface_init().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="receiver">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject implementing #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="delegate">
-<parameter_description> another #GObject implementing #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37986,27 +36713,10 @@ Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon size with the given name.
-the icon size
+<return> the icon size
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_clipboard_handle_event">
-<description>
-Emits the #GtkClipboard::owner-change signal on the appropriate @clipboard.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a owner change event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
Sets the #GtkAdjustment to be used as a model
@@ -38029,38 +36739,11 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
-<description>
-Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
- binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet set to activate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of the binding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_column_span_column">
<description>
-Returns: the column span column.
+Returns the column with column span information for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38071,13 +36754,15 @@ Returns: the column span column.
</parameters>
<return> the column span column.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
+Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar.
+See gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize().
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38088,70 +36773,25 @@ Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
</parameters>
<return> #PangoEllipsizeMode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
-GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
-final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
-gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+Returns the default page setup, see
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup().
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
-with a 1-element list.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description>icon image, or %NULL
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_info">
-<description>
-Gets the #GFileInfo structure for a particular row
-of @model.
-
+<return> the default page setup
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row of @model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GFileInfo structure. This structure
-is owned by @model and must not be modified or freed.
-If you want to keep the information for later use,
-you must take a reference, since the structure may be
-freed on later changes to the file system. If you have
-called _gtk_file_system_model_add_editable() and the @iter
-corresponds to the row that this function returned, the
-return value will be NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -38193,27 +36833,13 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreePath or %NULL to unset.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath or %NULL to unset.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkImage">
-<description>
-The GIcon displayed in the GtkImage. For themed icons,
-If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
-automatically.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_group">
<description>
Sets the #GtkAccelGroup in which the accelerator for this action
@@ -38228,7 +36854,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAccelGroup or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38246,46 +36872,53 @@ Obtains the selected date from a #GtkCalendar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description>location to store the year number, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the year number, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description>location to store the month number (between 0 and 11), or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the month number (between 0 and 11), or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="day">
-<parameter_description>location to store the day number (between 1 and 31), or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the day number (between 1 and 31), or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
+<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_group">
<description>
-Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
-those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
- end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
-are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
+Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
+to the group.
-Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
+|[
+GSList *group = NULL;
+GtkRadioAction *action;
+
+while (/* more actions to add */)
+{
+action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
+
+gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
+group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> start position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> end position
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the list representing the radio group for this object
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
@@ -38296,6 +36929,7 @@ If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38304,17 +36938,16 @@ The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description>Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the cursor is set.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -38329,6 +36962,7 @@ values.
Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38347,7 +36981,6 @@ Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</parameters>
<return> The number of characters deleted.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -38369,7 +37002,12 @@ Moves the @path to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_marks">
<description>
-Return value: list of #GtkTextMark
+Returns a list of all #GtkTextMark at this location. Because marks
+are not iterable (they don't take up any "space" in the buffer,
+they are just marks in between iterable locations), multiple marks
+can exist in the same place. The returned list is not in any
+meaningful order.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38382,53 +37020,17 @@ Return value: list of #GtkTextMark
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenuItem">
-<description>
-The minimum desired width of the menu item in characters.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
-<description>
-Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAssistant.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a newly created #GtkAssistant
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -38437,6 +37039,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38457,7 +37060,6 @@ how to convert a pixbuf into the format
<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for images,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -38532,7 +37134,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="version">
-<parameter_description>the version string
+<parameter_description> the version string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38541,7 +37143,12 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_get_option_group">
<description>
-Returns: a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
+Returns a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
+by GTK+ and GDK. You should add this group to your #GOptionContext
+with g_option_context_add_group(), if you are using
+g_option_context_parse() to parse your commandline arguments.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38554,7 +37161,6 @@ when parsing the commandline arguments
<return> a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
by GTK+
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -38564,6 +37170,7 @@ Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</li
in a RC file. If @style is not %NULL, it will be consulted to resolve
references to symbolic colors.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38572,7 +37179,7 @@ references to symbolic colors.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkRcStyle, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRcStyle, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
@@ -38583,81 +37190,50 @@ references to symbolic colors.
<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
that was expected but not found
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
+Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
+delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
+newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
+newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
+iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
+the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
+considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
+paragraph delimiter chars there.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
<description>
-Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Returns all child properties of a container class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="cclass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
+The array must be freed with g_free().
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible">
@@ -38724,24 +37300,25 @@ GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned animation.
+Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the displayed animation, or %NULL if
-the image is empty
+<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -38750,6 +37327,7 @@ the image is empty
Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode. See
gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38761,7 +37339,6 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs().
<return> the menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
string which must not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -38788,30 +37365,66 @@ The function updates @position to point after the newly inserted text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>location of the position text will be inserted at
+<parameter_description> location of the position text will be inserted at
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
<description>
-Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
-know that the model emitted the "row_inserted" signal.
+Lists the actions in the action group.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A #GObject
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The row position that was inserted
+</parameters>
+<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name">
+<description>
+Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The program name. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_accel_group">
+<description>
+Returns the #GtkAccelGroup associated with @self.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window">
@@ -38837,14 +37450,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkRequisition.
+Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
+The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
+column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRequisition
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> column number to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> new value for the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38870,7 +37498,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_printer_get_default_page_size">
<description>
-Return value: a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
+Returns default page size of @printer.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38881,7 +37511,6 @@ Return value: a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the prin
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -38908,7 +37537,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accelerator">
-<parameter_description>the accelerator for the action, in
+<parameter_description> the accelerator for the action, in
the format understood by gtk_accelerator_parse(), or "" for no accelerator, or
%NULL to use the stock accelerator
</parameter_description>
@@ -38917,24 +37546,26 @@ the format understood by gtk_accelerator_parse(), or "" for no acceler
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
+<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
<description>
-Return value: the page height.
+Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
+is closest to the two widgets.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="widget_a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="widget_b">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page height.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
+ widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
+share a common ancestor.
</return>
</function>
@@ -38963,6 +37594,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
This returns the #GtkEntry used to display the font as a preview.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38973,47 +37605,9 @@ This returns the #GtkEntry used to display the font as a preview.
</parameters>
<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_end_embedding">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
-
-Called to end the embedding of a plug in the socket.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
-<description>
-Sets whether the preview widget set by
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
-current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file
-or it may display no preview at all. See
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="active">
-<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
<description>
Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
@@ -39038,24 +37632,41 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
<description>
-Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
+Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
+with the #GtkPrintContext.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description>an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
+</parameters>
+<return> a new Pango layout for @context
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
+<description>
+Sets overwrite mode
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overwrite">
+<parameter_description> overwrite mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a new #GtkListStore
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_bindings_activate">
@@ -39083,27 +37694,6 @@ binding on @object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate">
-<description>
-Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser methods should be
-delegated to @delegate, and that #GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate
-should be forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
-_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="receiver">
-<parameter_description> a GOobject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="delegate">
-<parameter_description> another GObject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_spin_button_spin">
<description>
Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified direction
@@ -39129,7 +37719,10 @@ by a specified amount.
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_item_index">
<description>
-Return value: the position of item on the toolbar.
+Returns the position of @item on the toolbar, starting from 0.
+It is an error if @item is not a child of the toolbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39144,7 +37737,6 @@ Return value: the position of item on the toolbar.
</parameters>
<return> the position of item on the toolbar.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -39172,7 +37764,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39200,43 +37792,29 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
<description>
-Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
-The #GtkFileChooserEntry will use different completion strategies for
-different actions.
+Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action which is performed by the file selector using this entry
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_socket_claim_focus">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- send_event: huh?
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-Claims focus for the socket. XXX send_event?
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
Gets the header image for @page.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39252,10 +37830,30 @@ Gets the header image for @page.
<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
if there's no side image for the page.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_prepend">
+<description>
+Prepends a new row to @list_store. @iter will be changed to point to this new
+row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepend row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_target_list">
<description>
Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
@@ -39271,7 +37869,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description>list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39298,11 +37896,11 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreePath for the row, or %NULL to get only horizontal coordinates
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath for the row, or %NULL to get only horizontal coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreeViewColumn for the column, or %NULL to get only vertical coordiantes
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn for the column, or %NULL to get only vertical coordiantes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="rect">
@@ -39313,46 +37911,38 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
-position in @entry.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
-with g_free() when done.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkClipboard">
-<description>
-The ::owner-change signal is emitted when GTK+ receives an
-event that indicates that the ownership of the selection
-associated with @clipboard has changed.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the @GdkEventOwnerChange event
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39364,6 +37954,7 @@ Since: 2.6
Obtains the cairo context that is associated with the
#GtkPrintContext.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39374,7 +37965,6 @@ Obtains the cairo context that is associated with the
</parameters>
<return> the cairo context of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -39401,6 +37991,7 @@ Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39411,7 +38002,6 @@ See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -39429,76 +38019,6 @@ Recursively expands all nodes in the @tree_view.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRange">
-<description>
-The arrow size proportion relative to the scroll button size.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
-<description>
-If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
-text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
-for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
-to gtk_frame_new().)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="frame">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
-was no label widget or the lable widget was not
-a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
-must not be modified or freed.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
-<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear_attributes">
-<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
<description>
Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
@@ -39553,6 +38073,7 @@ Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39563,27 +38084,32 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.
</parameters>
<return> which pages to print
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
+Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
+filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
+is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
+in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
+filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
+set of files without letting the user change it.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_activates_default">
@@ -39626,12 +38152,12 @@ be freed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description>place to store a
+<parameter_description> place to store a
stock icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>place to store a stock icon
+<parameter_description> place to store a stock icon
size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -39676,15 +38202,15 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="match_start">
-<parameter_description>return location for start of match, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for start of match, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="match_end">
-<parameter_description>return location for end of match, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for end of match, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description>location of last possible @match_start, or %NULL for start of buffer
+<parameter_description> location of last possible @match_start, or %NULL for start of buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39692,79 +38218,87 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
<description>
-Sets the context id for @context.
-
-This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
-replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
-
-Since: 2.16
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the id to use
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_contents">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_new_with_font">
<description>
-Requests the contents of clipboard as the given target.
-When the results of the result are later received the supplied callback
-will be called.
+Creates a new font picker widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an atom representing the form into which the clipboard
-owner should convert the selection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> A function to call when the results are received
-(or the retrieval fails). If the retrieval fails
-the length field of @selection_data will be
-negative.
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback
+</parameters>
+<return> a new font picker widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<description>
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
<description>
-Sets whether a selection exists.
+Returns the page width in units of @unit.
-Since: 2.18
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
@@ -39785,24 +38319,29 @@ The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
<description>
-Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
-from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
-setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
-wrapped, or ellipsized.
+Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
+track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
+features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
+underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
+automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
+like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
+function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
+function generating a window map event.
-Since: 2.6
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
-the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
+<parameter name="startup_id">
+<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39826,6 +38365,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
Gets a cairo surface onto which the pages of
the print job should be rendered.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39834,13 +38374,12 @@ the print job should be rendered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the cairo surface of @job
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -39900,7 +38439,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="custom_widget">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWidget, or %NULL to unset the old custom widget.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL to unset the old custom widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39916,6 +38455,7 @@ This function will not typically be used by applications; it
is intended principally for use in the implementation of
#GtkRecentChooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39927,7 +38467,6 @@ is intended principally for use in the implementation of
<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -39966,6 +38505,7 @@ If the resulting reference count is zero, frees the list.
<description>
Retrieves the selection #GdkAtom of the selection data.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39976,20 +38516,21 @@ Retrieves the selection #GdkAtom of the selection data.
</parameters>
<return> the selection #GdkAtom of the selection data.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_remove_editable">
+<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
<description>
-Removes the "empty" row at the beginning of the model that was
-created with _gtk_file_system_model_add_editable(). You should call
-this function when your code is finished editing this temporary row.
+Unsets the invisible char previously set with
+gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
+default invisible char is used again.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40020,33 +38561,28 @@ over it (you can't add/remove tags).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_new">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_size">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
+Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
+Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
+if the size of the notification area changes. For other
+storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
+react to size changes.
+Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
+status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the job title
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintJob
+<return> the size that is available for the image
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -40069,7 +38605,9 @@ gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
<function name="gtk_tree_store_is_ancestor">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is an ancestor of @descendant
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is an ancestor of @descendant. That is, @iter is the
+parent (or grandparent or great-grandparent) of @descendant.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40110,27 +38648,55 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
+<function name="gtk_paint_polygon">
<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
-changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
-adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
-the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
-
+Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="points">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_points">
+<parameter_description> length of @points
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
-since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
-the color value status to be final.
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_set_priority">
@@ -40161,16 +38727,22 @@ automatically.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkFileChooserButton">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_settings">
<description>
-The width of the entry and label inside the button, in characters.
+Gets the #GtkPrintSettings of the print job.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the settings of @job
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_show_fill_level">
@@ -40216,7 +38788,13 @@ count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings">
<description>
-Return value: the current print settings of @op.
+Returns the current print settings.
+
+Note that the return value is %NULL until either
+gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings() or
+gtk_print_operation_run() have been called.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40227,7 +38805,6 @@ Return value: the current print settings of @op.
</parameters>
<return> the current print settings of @op.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -40288,7 +38865,9 @@ a negative value means start before the cursor.
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_selection">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if inline-selection mode is on
+Returns %TRUE if inline-selection mode is turned on.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40299,10 +38878,29 @@ Returns: %TRUE if inline-selection mode is on
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if inline-selection mode is on
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="quality">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_default_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func.
@@ -40326,40 +38924,40 @@ is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description>User data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> User data to pass to @sort_func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
-Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
+Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
-files in the file list.
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GdkWindow
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_display_options">
<description>
-Return value: the display options.
+Returns the current display options of @calendar.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40370,38 +38968,9 @@ Return value: the display options.
</parameters>
<return> the display options.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRenderer">
-<description>
-This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
-The intended use of this signal is to do special setup
-on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
-up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
-
-Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
-continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
-releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
-before doing any specific setup.</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="renderer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_action_widget">
<description>
Add an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkInfoBar,
@@ -40429,6 +38998,29 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_window">
+<description>
+Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the text. This function is
+useful when drawing something to the entry in an expose-event
+callback because it enables the callback to distinguish between
+the text window and entry's icon windows.
+
+See also gtk_entry_get_icon_window().
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the entry's text window.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_row_activated">
<description>
Activates the cell determined by @path and @column.
@@ -40466,43 +39058,31 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
+be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
+instance with gtk_plug_new().
-<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
-<description>
-Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
-See gtk_fixed_set_has_window().
+The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
+before you can make this call.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fixed">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @fixed has its own window.
-
-Deprecated: 2.20: Use gtk_widget_get_has_window() instead.
+<return> the window ID for the socket
</return>
</function>
@@ -40514,6 +39094,7 @@ indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
The new #GtkRadioMenuItem is added to the same group as @group.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40529,25 +39110,30 @@ mnemonic character
</parameters>
<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
+
+The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
+<!-- FIXME link here -->
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="media_type">
+<parameter_description> the media type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_style">
@@ -40580,27 +39166,7 @@ header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
+<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40634,19 +39200,19 @@ be used instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent_menu_shell">
-<parameter_description>the menu shell containing the triggering menu item, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the menu shell containing the triggering menu item, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent_menu_item">
-<parameter_description>the menu item whose activation triggered the popup, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the menu item whose activation triggered the popup, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>a user supplied function used to position the menu, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a user supplied function used to position the menu, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>user supplied data to be passed to @func.
+<parameter_description> user supplied data to be passed to @func.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="button">
@@ -40661,21 +39227,20 @@ be used instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
+<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
<description>
-Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
-bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
-
-Since: 2.16
+Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
+widget or not.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
+<parameter name="is_editable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
+in the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40756,7 +39321,7 @@ Creates a new text buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description>a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40792,59 +39357,102 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
<description>
-Get the value in the @spin_button.
+Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
+This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
+applications should have little use for it.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the value of @spin_button
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
<description>
-Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
+Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
+be automatically inserted in the entry.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
+<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
+<function name="gtk_print_error_quark">
<description>
-Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
+Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameters>
+<return> The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
+<description>
+Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
+ child
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc
-mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.20
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The
+string is owned by the widget and must not
+be freed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction">
+<description>
+Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_pack_dir">
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window,
@@ -40902,16 +39510,16 @@ the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -40934,40 +39542,13 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_text">
-<description>
-Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state. All other
-style values are left untouched. The text color is the foreground
-color used along with the base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base())
-for widgets such as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView. See also
-gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> the state for which to set the text color
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
-or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_text().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
<description>
Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40978,7 +39559,6 @@ instead.
</parameters>
<return> the current style of @shell
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -41018,24 +39598,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
<description>
Converts coordinates on the window identified by @win to buffer
@@ -41074,24 +39636,24 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkScaleButton">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_offset">
<description>
-The ::popdown signal is a
-<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
-which gets emitted to popdown the scale widget.
-
-The default binding for this signal is Escape.
+Returns the character offset of an iterator.
+Each character in a #GtkTextBuffer has an offset,
+starting with 0 for the first character in the buffer.
+Use gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_offset () to convert an
+offset back into an iterator.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a character offset
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
@@ -41114,10 +39676,32 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
+<description>
+Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the row at @path.
+This image is used for a drag icon.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath in @tree_view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_finishings">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41128,7 +39712,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
</parameters>
<return> the finishings
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -41181,6 +39764,7 @@ Since: 2.12
<description>
Gets the #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41194,36 +39778,55 @@ family. Font families are a collection of font faces. The
returned object is owned by @fontsel and must not be modified
or freed.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
+<function name="gtk_scale_clear_marks">
<description>
-Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+Removes any marks that have been added with gtk_scale_add_mark().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="resolution">
-<parameter_description> the resolution in dpi
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
+<description>
+Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
+folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
+be changed to the folder containing @filename.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the filename to select
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41234,7 +39837,6 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
</parameters>
<return> whether there is a selection
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -41288,16 +39890,16 @@ parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -41325,6 +39927,7 @@ output should not be clipped
Creates a new GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple GtkLabel.
The new #GtkRadioMenuItem is added to the same group as @group.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41339,7 +39942,6 @@ The new #GtkRadioMenuItem is added to the same group as @group.
</parameters>
<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -41354,6 +39956,7 @@ to a larger icon. These icons will be given
the same base size as the larger icons to which
they are attached.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41365,7 +39968,6 @@ they are attached.
<return> the base size, or 0, if no base
size is known for the icon.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -41380,7 +39982,7 @@ Sets the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAdjustment.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41394,6 +39996,9 @@ modify the palette in a color selection. This function should save
the new palette contents, and update the GtkSettings property
"gtk-color-palette" so all GtkColorSelection widgets will be modified.
+Deprecated: 2.4: This function does not work in multihead environments.
+Use gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41404,9 +40009,6 @@ the new palette contents, and update the GtkSettings property
</parameters>
<return> the previous change palette hook (that was replaced).
-Deprecated: 2.4: This function does not work in multihead environments.
-Use gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook() instead.
-
</return>
</function>
@@ -41430,109 +40032,120 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description>the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_iter_is_visible">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
<description>
-Checks if the iterator is visible. A visible iterator references
-a row that is currently exposed using the #GtkTreeModel API. If
-the iterator is invisible, it references a file that is not shown
-for some reason, such as being filtered by the current filter or
-being a hidden file.
+Returns a list of targets that are present on the clipboard, or %NULL
+if there aren't any targets available. The returned list must be
+freed with g_free().
+This function waits for the data to be received using the main
+loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a valid iterator
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
+stored here must be freed with g_free().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iterator is visible
+<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
<description>
-Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-
-This <emphasis>does not</emphasis> actually sort the model. Use
-gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
-support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
-be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
-that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
-
-The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
-Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
-calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
+Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="order">
-<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
<description>
-Compares two printers.
-
+Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
+notebook or widget.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b,
-or a positive value if @a > @b
+Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
+(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
+interchange between them.
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
+If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
+(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
+destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
+will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
+widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
+|[
+static void
+on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
+guint info,
+guint time,
+gpointer user_data)
+{
+GtkWidget *notebook;
+GtkWidget **child;
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
-<description>
-Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
+child = (void*) selection_data->data;
-This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
-and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+process_widget (*child);
+gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
+}
+]|
-See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
-gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
+you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description>the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detachable">
+<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41567,6 +40180,7 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Gets the label text of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41577,7 +40191,6 @@ Gets the label text of @action.
</parameters>
<return> the label text
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -41599,7 +40212,13 @@ on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags">
<description>
-Return value: tags toggled at this point
+Returns a list of #GtkTextTag that are toggled on or off at this
+point. (If @toggled_on is %TRUE, the list contains tags that are
+toggled on.) If a tag is toggled on at @iter, then some non-empty
+range of characters following @iter has that tag applied to it. If
+a tag is toggled off, then some non-empty range following @iter
+does <emphasis>not</emphasis> have the tag applied to it.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41616,40 +40235,60 @@ Return value: tags toggled at this point
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
+<description>
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>An existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
+<parameter_description> An existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> The new #GtkRadioToolButton
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group.
-The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
-of the usual label.
-
-Since: 2.20
+If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41675,27 +40314,6 @@ Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_new">
-<description>
-Create a new key hash object for doing binding resolution.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="keymap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_destroy_notify">
-<parameter_description> function to be called when items are removed
-from the hash or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly created object. Free with _gtk_key_hash_free().
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_style_set_font">
<description>
Sets the #GdkFont to use for a given style. This is
@@ -41710,7 +40328,7 @@ use style->font_desc instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="font">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkFont, or %NULL to use the #GdkFont corresponding
+<parameter_description> a #GdkFont, or %NULL to use the #GdkFont corresponding
to style->font_desc.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -41732,35 +40350,42 @@ Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
<description>
-Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
-points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
-child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
-is returned.
+Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
+ pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
+If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
+ limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
+<parameter name="pred">
+<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="limit">
+<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> whether a match was found
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_copyright">
<description>
-Return value: The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the copyright string.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41772,13 +40397,76 @@ Return value: The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
<return> The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
+<description>
+Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
+a stock item.
+
+If no function is registered for a translation domain,
+g_dgettext() is used.
+
+The function is used for all stock items whose
+ translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
+to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
+of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
+the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
+when dealing with message contexts:
+
+|[
+GtkStockItem items[] = {
+{ MY_ITEM1, NC_("odd items", "Item 1"), 0, 0, "odd-item-domain" },
+{ MY_ITEM2, NC_("even items", "Item 2"), 0, 0, "even-item-domain" },
+};
+
+gchar *
+my_translate_func (const gchar *msgid,
+gpointer data)
+{
+gchar *msgctxt = data;
+
+return (gchar*)g_dpgettext2 (GETTEXT_PACKAGE, msgctxt, msgid);
+}
+
+/* ... */
+
+gtk_stock_add (items, G_N_ELEMENTS (items));
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("odd-item-domain", my_translate_func, "odd items");
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("even-item-domain", my_translate_func, "even items");
+]|
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> the translation domain for which @func shall be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTranslateFunc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
+no longer needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_separator_func">
<description>
-Return value: the current row separator function.
+Returns the current row separator function.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41789,7 +40477,6 @@ Return value: the current row separator function.
</parameters>
<return> the current row separator function.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -41803,6 +40490,7 @@ This function will not typically be used by applications; it
is intended principally for use in the implementation of
#GtkFileChooser.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41818,27 +40506,14 @@ about a file.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the file should be displayed
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_get_children">
<description>
-Return value: a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal children.
+Returns the container's non-internal children. See
+gtk_container_forall() for details on what constitutes an "internal" child.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41870,51 +40545,17 @@ the currently selected day.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
-<description>
-Removes an accelerator previously installed through
-gtk_accel_group_connect().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
-removed, %FALSE otherwise
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_stick">
+<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
<description>
-Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
-desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
-stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
-again, and some window managers do not support sticking
-windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
-write code that crashes if not.
-
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
-
-You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
+Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
+colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+reason to use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42022,34 +40663,7 @@ Use gtk_drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>the transparency mask for an image.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_export_filename">
-<description>
-Sets up the #GtkPrintOperation to generate a file instead
-of showing the print dialog. The indended use of this function
-is for implementing "Export to PDF" actions. Currently, PDF
-is the only supported format.
-
-"Print to PDF" support is independent of this and is done
-by letting the user pick the "Print to PDF" item from the list
-of printers in the print dialog.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the filename for the exported file
+<parameter_description> the transparency mask for an image.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42058,7 +40672,9 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_overwrite">
<description>
-Return value: whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
+Returns whether the #GtkTextView is in overwrite mode or not.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42069,24 +40685,9 @@ Return value: whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
</parameters>
<return> whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCalendar">
-<description>
-Determines whether details are shown directly in the widget, or if they are
-available only as tooltip. When this property is set days with details are
-marked.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_mode">
<description>
Gets the selection mode for @selection. See
@@ -42120,6 +40721,22 @@ Increments the reference count on @values.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction_wildcarded">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_editable_start_editing">
<description>
Begins editing on a @cell_editable. @event is the #GdkEvent that began
@@ -42133,7 +40750,7 @@ initiated through programatic means.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description>A #GdkEvent, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A #GdkEvent, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42161,31 +40778,20 @@ value changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
<description>
-If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
-should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
-example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
-the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
-menu will have an underlined 'O'.
-
-Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
-only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_input_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -42203,7 +40809,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shape_mask">
-<parameter_description>shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
+<parameter_description> shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="offset_x">
@@ -42218,27 +40824,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
-The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
-animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
-#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
-
-Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
-#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
-keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
-is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> an animation
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage widget
+<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42263,11 +40863,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
+<description>
+Returns whether the printer is the default printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is the default
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_targets_include_rich_text">
<description>
Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
provide rich text.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42287,7 +40906,6 @@ provide rich text.
<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for rich text,
otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -42339,7 +40957,9 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_visible">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is visible
+Returns the cell renderer's visibility.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42350,32 +40970,42 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is visible
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is visible
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
<description>
-Sets a filter to be used for deciding if a row should be visible or not.
-Directories are always visible.
+Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
+gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description>%NULL or filter to use
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_expand">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
+Returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on for @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42386,13 +41016,13 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_spacing">
<description>
-Return value: the spacing of @tree_column.
+Returns the spacing of @tree_column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42407,8 +41037,10 @@ Return value: the spacing of @tree_column.
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_model">
<description>
+Returns the model the #GtkEntryCompletion is using as data source.
Returns %NULL if the model is unset.
-Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42419,14 +41051,19 @@ Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
</parameters>
<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_char">
<description>
+Returns the Unicode character at this iterator. (Equivalent to
+operator* on a C++ iterator.) If the element at this iterator is a
+non-character element, such as an image embedded in the buffer, the
+Unicode "unknown" character 0xFFFC is returned. If invoked on
+the end iterator, zero is returned; zero is not a valid Unicode character.
+So you can write a loop which ends when gtk_text_iter_get_char ()
returns 0.
-Return value: a Unicode character, or 0 if @iter is not dereferenceable
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42441,7 +41078,9 @@ Return value: a Unicode character, or 0 if @iter is not dereferenceable
<function name="gtk_window_get_role">
<description>
-Return value: the role of the window if set, or %NULL. The
+Returns the role of the window. See gtk_window_set_role() for
+further explanation.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42525,6 +41164,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkFileChooserWidget. This is a file chooser widget that can
be embedded in custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by
#GtkFileChooserDialog.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42535,62 +41175,98 @@ be embedded in custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_insert">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
<description>
-Inserts @item at @position in the list of children of @group.
+Installs a global function used to create a window
+when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to insert into @group
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
-The position -1 means end of list.
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_check">
<description>
-Creates an empty status icon object.
+Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
+the given parameters.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
+<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
<description>
-Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
+If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
+text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
+for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
+to gtk_frame_new().)
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
+<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
+was no label widget or the lable widget was not
+a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
+must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -42617,36 +41293,6 @@ or should all have the same requisition in both directions
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
-<description>
-Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
-call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
-user-visible operation. The operations between
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
-an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
-a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
-outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
-from other user actions.
-
-The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
-no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
-single call to one of those functions.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the ellipsization mode which should be used by labels in @group.
@@ -42669,7 +41315,10 @@ Since: 2.20
<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+Returns whether the printer accepts input in
+PostScript format.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42680,49 +41329,39 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
<description>
-Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
+The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
+plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the human-readable name of @size
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_settings">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkPrintSettings of the print job.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the settings of @job
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_span_column">
<description>
-Returns: the row span column.
+Returns the column with row span information for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42733,7 +41372,6 @@ Returns: the row span column.
</parameters>
<return> the row span column.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -42742,6 +41380,7 @@ Since: 2.6
Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
in dots per inch.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42752,7 +41391,6 @@ in dots per inch.
</parameters>
<return> the vertical resolution of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -42786,27 +41424,20 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
<description>
-Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
-All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
- completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
- completion is set to %NULL.
+Returns the compare function currently in use.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_swap">
@@ -42869,17 +41500,35 @@ Since: 2.18
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
+<description>
+Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the title of the window, or %NULL if none has
+been set explicitely. The returned string is owned by the widget
+and must not be modified or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_reverse">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
@@ -42929,6 +41578,7 @@ as a pure output parameter.
The returned pixmap can be %NULL, if the resulting @clip_area was empty.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42937,110 +41587,99 @@ The returned pixmap can be %NULL, if the resulting @clip_area was empty.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="clip_rect">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkRectangle or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> #GdkPixmap snapshot of the widget
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
<description>
-Return value: the number of columns, or -1
+Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
+GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
+for the image, and for converting the image into the
+requested format.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of columns, or -1
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_x">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
<description>
-Obtains the horizontal resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
+Returns the value of the ::columns property.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal resolution of @context
+<return> the number of columns, or -1
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
<description>
-Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
-colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
-reason to use this function.
+Removes an accelerator previously installed through
+gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
-<description>
-Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
-must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_closure">
-<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
+removed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
+in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
+for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
+some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
+
+Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
+using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
+#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
+a #GtkIconFactory.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>the function to call
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_intersect">
@@ -43070,21 +41709,27 @@ interested in whether there was an intersection.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
+The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
+animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
+#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
+
+Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
+#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
+keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
+is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> an animation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new #GtkImage widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -43113,17 +41758,17 @@ pixbuf.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>the size to render the icon at. A size of
+<parameter_description> (type int) the size to render the icon at. A size of
(GtkIconSize)-1 means render at the size of the source and
don't scale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43154,7 +41799,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>An icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> An icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43163,7 +41808,9 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="gtk_box_get_homogeneous">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
+Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the
+same size). See gtk_box_set_homogeneous().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43176,35 +41823,28 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
<description>
+Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cclass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
-The array must be freed with g_free().
-all child properties of a container class.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkLinkButton">
-<description>
-The 'visited' state of this button. A visited link is drawn in a
-different color.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -43213,6 +41853,7 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Allocates a new #GtkBorder structure and initializes its elements to zero.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43220,48 +41861,6 @@ Allocates a new #GtkBorder structure and initializes its elements to zero.
<return> a new empty #GtkBorder. The newly allocated #GtkBorder should be
freed with gtk_border_free()
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
-in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
-for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
-some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
-
-Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
-using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
-#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
-a #GtkIconFactory.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
-<description>
-Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
-be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
-instance with gtk_plug_new().
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the window ID for the socket
</return>
</function>
@@ -43313,75 +41912,62 @@ may not be UTF-8. See g_filename_from_utf8().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
-Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
-size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
-manager will actually select). The size obtained by
-gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
-#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
-rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
-call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
-the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
-notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
-the size of the window gets updated.
-
-Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
-because the size of the window may change between the time that you
-get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
-that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
-"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
-state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-
-Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
-size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
-border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
-method of determining their size.
-
-Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
-the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
-gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
-e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
-dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
-much preferred to let the window manager handle these
-things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
-behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
-manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
-of the window decorations/border into account, while your
-application cannot.
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
-In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
-doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
-handle the details for you.
+The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>return location for width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>return location for height, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_get_vadjustment">
<description>
-Return value: the vertical adjustment of @viewport.
+Returns the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43440,7 +42026,12 @@ Selects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path inclusive.
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_icon_sizes">
<description>
-Return value: An newly allocated array describing the sizes at
+Returns an array of integers describing the sizes at which
+the icon is available without scaling. A size of -1 means
+that the icon is available in a scalable format. The array
+is zero-terminated.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43457,7 +42048,6 @@ Return value: An newly allocated array describing the sizes at
which the icon is available. The array should be freed with g_free()
when it is no longer needed.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -43548,41 +42138,32 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
<description>
-Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
-The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
-gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
+When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
+to free any allocated memory.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description>list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
-<description>
-Return value: the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> (inout) (transfer none) An empty #GValue to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete">
@@ -43617,6 +42198,7 @@ re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
<description>
Gets the type of the window. See #GtkWindowType.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43627,22 +42209,27 @@ Gets the type of the window. See #GtkWindowType.
</parameters>
<return> the type of the window
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Return value: The depth of @path
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -43657,7 +42244,7 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_file() for details.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description>a filename or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a filename or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43695,6 +42282,7 @@ for a given widget and selection.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43705,37 +42293,9 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
</parameters>
<return> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
-<description>
-Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
-given widget and selection.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> the selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> target to add.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_get_current_event">
<description>
Obtains a copy of the event currently being processed by GTK+. For
@@ -43759,6 +42319,7 @@ same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
longer needed.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43773,7 +42334,6 @@ longer needed.
</parameters>
<return> the new table.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -43811,42 +42371,30 @@ or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
<description>
-Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
-a given view.
+This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
+-1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
+"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
+set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="view_id">
-<parameter_description> view id
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_pixels">
-<parameter_description> the maximum number of pixels to validate. (No more
-than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store starting y coordinate of validated region
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="old_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store old height of validated region
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store new height of validated region
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
-entire tree was already valid.
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
</return>
</function>
@@ -43882,16 +42430,16 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>the function to use to position the search dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the function to use to position the search dialog, or %NULL
to use the default search position function
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43931,50 +42479,60 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label indicates
-the mnemonic accelerator key.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenuToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
<description>
-The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
-It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
-gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu().
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
-Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
-you must set an empty menu on the #GtkMenuToolButton beforehand,
-since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_window">
<description>
-Return value: the entry's icon window at @icon_pos.
+Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the entry's icon at
+ icon_pos This function is useful when drawing something to the
+entry in an expose-event callback because it enables the callback
+to distinguish between the text window and entry's icon windows.
+
+See also gtk_entry_get_text_window().
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43989,53 +42547,25 @@ Return value: the entry's icon window at @icon_pos.
</parameters>
<return> the entry's icon window at @icon_pos.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
-windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
-gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
-coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
-that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
-placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
-irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
-placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
-text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
-in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
-occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
-child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
-scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
-would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
-change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
-bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="which_window">
-<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_is_local">
@@ -44043,6 +42573,7 @@ bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the
scheme of its URI.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44053,32 +42584,27 @@ scheme of its URI.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the resource is local.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
+Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description>the element's tooltip.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description>used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44087,7 +42613,10 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_homogeneous">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
+Returns whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous
+items. See gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44099,63 +42628,51 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
<return> %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
items.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items_ac">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators, then pass in
+%NULL for accel_group. Next call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() with an
+appropriate path for the menu item, use gtk_stock_lookup() to look up the
+standard accelerator for the stock item, and if one is found, call
+gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback functions in @entries are of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if they are of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
<description>
-Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
-etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
-through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
-gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
+Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of chars to move
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+<return> the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -44213,7 +42730,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description>the tooltip text, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the tooltip text, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44241,17 +42758,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -44261,6 +42782,7 @@ This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
See gtk_range_set_min_slider_size().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44271,67 +42793,46 @@ See gtk_range_set_min_slider_size().
</parameters>
<return> The minimum size of the range's slider.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
+Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
+activity.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
-<description>
-Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
-accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
+<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
-in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPrintSettings object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_index">
<description>
-Return value: distance from start of line, in bytes
+Returns the byte index of the iterator, counting
+from the start of a newline-terminated line.
+Remember that #GtkTextBuffer encodes text in
+UTF-8, and that characters can require a variable
+number of bytes to represent.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44346,7 +42847,9 @@ Return value: distance from start of line, in bytes
<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_n_children">
<description>
-Return value: The number of children of @iter.
+Returns the number of children that @iter has. As a special case, if @iter
+is %NULL, then the number of toplevel nodes is returned.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44355,7 +42858,7 @@ Return value: The number of children of @iter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44367,6 +42870,7 @@ Return value: The number of children of @iter.
<description>
Gets the #GtkRecentInfo currently selected by @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44378,7 +42882,6 @@ Gets the #GtkRecentInfo currently selected by @chooser.
<return> a #GtkRecentInfo. Use gtk_recent_info_unref() when
when you have finished using it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -44424,7 +42927,7 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_image() for details.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gdk_image">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkImage or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
@@ -44439,6 +42942,7 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_image() for details.
<description>
Gets the top margin in units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44453,22 +42957,23 @@ Gets the top margin in units of @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the top margin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToggleToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
<description>
-Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
+Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
@@ -44477,6 +42982,7 @@ Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44493,36 +42999,14 @@ how to convert a pixbuf into the format
<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
-<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
-homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have
-the same width as the widest of the items.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous items
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_increment">
<description>
Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44533,7 +43017,6 @@ Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
</parameters>
<return> The current page increment of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -44564,7 +43047,11 @@ list of color names readable by gdk_color_parse().
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_name">
<description>
-Return value: The program name. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44576,9 +43063,6 @@ Return value: The program name. The string is owned by the about
<return> The program name. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
-
-Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -44607,6 +43091,24 @@ scrollbar, or %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_invisible_char">
+<description>
+Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
+for entries with visibility set to false. See gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
+show invisible text at all.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
<description>
Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
@@ -44620,15 +43122,15 @@ never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path_length">
-<parameter_description>location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path_reversed">
-<parameter_description>location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
+<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -44659,6 +43161,10 @@ Set the value of @spin_button.
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44675,13 +43181,12 @@ UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -44706,42 +43211,61 @@ values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
<description>
-Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
- foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
-#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
-this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
-saving during an accelerator map dump).
+Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
+filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreach_func">
-<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
-Gets the fixed width of the column. This value is only meaning may not be
-the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
+You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
+ path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+returned. However, unlike references created with
+gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
+The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
+gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
+gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
+
+These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
+corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
+updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
+objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
+using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
+Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
+
+This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
+carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
+generally needed by most applications.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the fixed width of the column
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -44751,6 +43275,7 @@ Gets a displayable version of the resource's URI. If the resource
is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk_recent_info_get_uri().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44762,7 +43287,6 @@ it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk_recent_info_get_uri().
<return> a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -44824,6 +43348,7 @@ gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead of making up expose events.
<description>
Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44842,7 +43367,6 @@ Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
</parameters>
<return> the internal child of the buildable object
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -44871,25 +43395,52 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererToggle">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
<description>
-The ::toggled signal is emitted when the cell is toggled.
+Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> string representation of #GtkTreePath describing the
-event location
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
+themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_max_length">
<description>
Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the widget. If
@@ -44923,6 +43474,7 @@ be clamped to the range 0-65536.
Gets the maximum number of items that the gtk_recent_manager_get_items()
function should return.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44933,7 +43485,6 @@ function should return.
</parameters>
<return> the number of items to return, or -1 for every item.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -44961,59 +43512,45 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of
-gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
-#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
-<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
-<description>
-Returns: whether the selected font is used in the label.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the selected font is used in the label.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
+Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
+You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
+ draw_indicator = %FALSE to make the button look like a normal button
+This function only affects instances of classes like #GtkCheckButton
+and #GtkRadioButton that derive from #GtkToggleButton,
+not instances of #GtkToggleButton itself.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="toggle_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the text of the button
+<parameter name="draw_indicator">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, draw the button as a separate indicator
+and label; if %FALSE, draw the button like a normal button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a new link button widget.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new_from_stock">
@@ -45022,6 +43559,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton.
The new #GtkMenuToolButton will contain an icon and label from
the stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45032,13 +43570,14 @@ the stock item indicated by @stock_id.
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkMenuToolButton
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
<description>
-Return value: The website URL. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the website URL.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45050,7 +43589,6 @@ Return value: The website URL. The string is owned by the about
<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -45087,34 +43625,39 @@ destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
+<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
<description>
-Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
-If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
-retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
-gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
-will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
-right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
-right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
-mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
-side of the text you're typing).
+Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
+The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
+this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
+padding on the left.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>mark name or %NULL
+<parameter name="alignment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_gravity">
-<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
+<parameter name="padding_top">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_bottom">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_left">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_right">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new #GtkTextMark
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set">
@@ -45172,7 +43715,9 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_minimum_key_length">
<description>
-Return value: The currently used minimum key length.
+Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45183,7 +43728,6 @@ Return value: The currently used minimum key length.
</parameters>
<return> The currently used minimum key length.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -45191,6 +43735,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Parse a binding entry from a gtkrc file.
+Deprecated: 2.12: There should be no need to call this function outside GTK+.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45201,7 +43746,6 @@ Parse a binding entry from a gtkrc file.
</parameters>
<return> expected token upon errors, %G_TOKEN_NONE on success.
-Deprecated: 2.12: There should be no need to call this function outside GTK+.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45224,88 +43768,33 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
-When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
-to free any allocated memory.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description>An empty #GValue to set.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
-<description>
-Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
+or %NULL to read the first group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
+paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_unref">
@@ -45323,33 +43812,12 @@ if the reference count reaches 0.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
-<description>
-Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-
-See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
-emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
-properties.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step_increment">
-<parameter_description> the new step increment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_artists">
<description>
-Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
+Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45362,7 +43830,6 @@ Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
the artists. The array is owned by the about dialog
and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -45371,6 +43838,7 @@ Since: 2.6
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT,
converted to @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45385,7 +43853,6 @@ converted to @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the paper height, in units of @unit
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -45435,22 +43902,28 @@ far right if added to a menu bar.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
+Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
+removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
+ end don't have to be in order.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon name
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45459,7 +43932,11 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
<function name="gtk_rc_get_module_dir">
<description>
-return value: the directory. (Must be freed with g_free())
+Returns a directory in which GTK+ looks for theme engines.
+For full information about the search for theme engines,
+see the docs for <envar>GTK_PATH</envar> in
+<xref linkend="gtk-running"/>.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45468,69 +43945,80 @@ return value: the directory. (Must be freed with g_free())
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
<description>
-Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
-If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
-gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of copies to print
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
+Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be aligned.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
+<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
+used for @tool_item
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
<description>
-Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
+Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
+gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
+that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
-be a child of @group.
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
+<description>
+Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
-The position -1 means end of list.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45541,6 +44029,7 @@ The position -1 means end of list.
<description>
Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45552,7 +44041,6 @@ Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
returned string with g_free() when done.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -45592,6 +44080,7 @@ Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
gtk_file_chooser_set_action().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45602,69 +44091,61 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_action().
</parameters>
<return> the action that the file selector is performing
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
<description>
-If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
-on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
-can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
-and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-
-This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
-not be enabled unless needed.
+Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
+of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
+and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
+Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
+depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
-Since: 2.10
+When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
+be removed from the size group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="track_status">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_sort_type">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type().
+Sets the icon for @window.
+Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
+with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the sorting order of the @chooser.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
-<description>
-If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
-that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
-%FALSE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -45688,25 +44169,13 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkOrientable">
-<description>
-The orientation of the orientable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_bool">
<description>
Sets @key to a boolean value.
@@ -45731,28 +44200,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
<description>
-Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
-specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
-treated as distinct for this operation.
+Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
+recently used item @info.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_remove_all">
@@ -45804,6 +44272,7 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
<!-- FIXME link here -->
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45814,7 +44283,6 @@ The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
</parameters>
<return> the media type
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -45836,7 +44304,10 @@ Accessor for whether the dialog has a separator.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_cell_renderers">
<description>
-Return value: A list of #GtkCellRenderers
+Returns a newly-allocated #GList of all the cell renderers in the column,
+in no particular order. The list must be freed with g_list_free().
+
+Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45847,43 +44318,25 @@ Return value: A list of #GtkCellRenderers
</parameters>
<return> A list of #GtkCellRenderers
-Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
<description>
-Removes a space from the specified position.
+Retrieves the data type of the selection.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_socket_add_grabbed_key">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- keyval: a key
- modifiers: modifiers for the key
-
-Called from the GtkSocket platform-specific backend when the
-corresponding plug has told the socket to grab a key.
+<return> the data type of the selection.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_dest_drag_data_received">
@@ -45917,7 +44370,11 @@ a @dest no longer found in the model!
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation">
<description>
-Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the text orientation
+Returns the text orientation used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be orientated.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45929,7 +44386,6 @@ Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the text orientation
<return> a #GtkOrientation indicating the text orientation
used for @tool_item
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -45953,6 +44409,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Gets one of the action widgets. See gtk_notebook_set_action_widget().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45968,7 +44425,6 @@ Gets one of the action widgets. See gtk_notebook_set_action_widget().
<return> The action widget with the given @pack_type or
%NULL when this action widget has not been set
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -45976,6 +44432,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45993,10 +44450,33 @@ types are #GTK_UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, #GTK_UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and
<return> a newly-allocated #GSList of
all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Free the returned list with g_slist_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's padding.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
<description>
Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -46010,7 +44490,7 @@ Since: 2.8
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>The path of the item to highlight, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The path of the item to highlight, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
@@ -46049,31 +44529,11 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_row_spacing">
-<description>
-Sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_spacing">
-<parameter_description> the row spacing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_printer_get_description">
<description>
Gets the description of the printer.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46084,7 +44544,6 @@ Gets the description of the printer.
</parameters>
<return> the description of @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -46110,7 +44569,7 @@ icon set; you still need to unref it if you own references.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46122,6 +44581,7 @@ icon set; you still need to unref it if you own references.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @gruup
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46132,7 +44592,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @gruup
</parameters>
<return> The new #GtkRadioToolButton
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -46200,43 +44659,45 @@ to the last row in @list_store.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_has_tooltip">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original color to be @color too.
+Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.
+See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
-to set the current color to.
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_has_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_fixed_width">
<description>
-Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
+Sets the size of the column in pixels. This is meaningful only if the sizing
+type is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to
+the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the
+column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
+the actual size when displayed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fixed_width">
+<parameter_description> The size to set @tree_column to. Must be greater than 0.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_response">
@@ -46265,6 +44726,7 @@ Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
returned.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46284,7 +44746,6 @@ returned.
<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -46312,61 +44773,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder">
-<description>
-Removes a folder from the shortcut folders in a file chooser. Internal
-function, see gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file for the folder to remove
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be removed successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
-stored here must be freed with g_free().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_expand">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is allocated extra space when there
@@ -46401,11 +44807,11 @@ Fills in @width and @height with the appropriate size of @cell.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the fixed width of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed width of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to fill in with the fixed height of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the fixed height of the cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46432,16 +44838,23 @@ release it when it is no longer needed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
<description>
-Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
-gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
-you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
+This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
+and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
+
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="range_rect">
+<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46484,6 +44897,7 @@ See also gtk_widget_get_child_requisition().
Gets the position of @group in @palette as index.
See gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46498,27 +44912,27 @@ See gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position().
</parameters>
<return> the index of group or -1 if @group is not a child of @palette
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
<description>
-Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_opacity().
+Activates the item determined by @path.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the requested opacity for this window.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
@@ -46540,6 +44954,7 @@ puts it on the clipboard.
<description>
Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46551,29 +44966,6 @@ Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
<return> a valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button
and should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
-<description>
-Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -46602,12 +44994,50 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_rich_text">
+<description>
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. When the rich
+text is later received, @callback will be called.
+
+The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
+text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
+parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
+various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
+contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_uri">
<description>
Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
provide a list or URIs.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46619,13 +45049,14 @@ provide a list or URIs.
<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_count_selected_rows">
<description>
-Return value: The number of rows selected.
+Returns the number of rows that have been selected in @tree.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46636,7 +45067,6 @@ Return value: The number of rows selected.
</parameters>
<return> The number of rows selected.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -46647,6 +45077,7 @@ chooser. Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
by the application. For example, you can use this to add a
"file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46659,14 +45090,13 @@ by the application. For example, you can use this to add a
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
otherwise. In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -46714,47 +45144,22 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
-<description>
-Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
-page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
--1 will be returned.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
-#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-
-This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
-in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
-#GtkCellEditable.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="canceled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_at_anchor">
@@ -46827,86 +45232,47 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
-to widget relative coordinates.
+Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
+with @uri inside the recent manager.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute">
-<description>
-Adds an attribute mapping to the list in @tree_column. The @column is the
-column of the model to get a value from, and the @attribute is the
-parameter on @cell_renderer to be set from the value. So for example
-if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
-"text" attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from
-column 2.
+<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer to set attributes on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="attribute">
-<parameter_description> An attribute on the renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_get_shadow_type">
@@ -46985,6 +45351,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
<description>
Gets the title for @page.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46999,7 +45366,6 @@ Gets the title for @page.
</parameters>
<return> the title for @page.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -47011,6 +45377,7 @@ is changed on the button, the 'visited' state is unset again.
The state may also be changed using gtk_link_button_set_visited().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47021,7 +45388,6 @@ The state may also be changed using gtk_link_button_set_visited().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the link has been visited, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -47056,6 +45422,28 @@ displaying the file.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
+<description>
+Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
+and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
+otherwise %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> icon set of @stock_id
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize">
<description>
This function deserializes rich text in format @format and inserts
@@ -47065,6 +45453,7 @@ it at @iter.
gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset() beforehand.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47099,31 +45488,9 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset() beforehand.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line">
-<description>
-Moves iterator @iter to the start of the line @line_number. If
- line_number is negative or larger than the number of lines in the
-buffer, moves @iter to the start of the last line in the buffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number (counted from 0)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_pointer">
<description>
Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
@@ -47139,69 +45506,86 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>return location for the X coordinate, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for the X coordinate, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description>return location for the Y coordinate, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for the Y coordinate, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
<description>
-Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
-GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
-for the image, and for converting the image into the
-requested format.
+Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
+Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
+for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
+this setting has no effect.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="blinking">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_realize">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start">
<description>
-Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
-widget. For example, @widget->window will be created when a widget
-is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
-a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
-realized and mapped automatically.
+Moves backward to the previous word start. (If @iter is currently on a
+word start, moves backward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
-Realizing a widget requires all
-the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
-gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
- widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
-when you realize it, bad things will happen.
-This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
-isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
-need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
-called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
-GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
-GtkWidget::realize signal.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_init_check">
+<description>
+This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
+a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
+initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
+
+This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
+with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unrealize">
@@ -47222,7 +45606,9 @@ associated with the widget, such as @widget->window).
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_version">
<description>
-Return value: The version string. The string is owned by the about
+Returns the version string.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47234,65 +45620,84 @@ Return value: The version string. The string is owned by the about
<return> The version string. The string is owned by the about
dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_uposition">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_set_screen">
<description>
+Sets the screen for a recent manager; the screen is used to
+track the user's currently configured recently used documents
+storage.
-Sets the position of a widget. The funny "u" in the name comes from
-the "user position" hint specified by the X Window System, and
-exists for legacy reasons. This function doesn't work if a widget
-is inside a container; it's only really useful on #GtkWindow.
-
-Don't use this function to center dialogs over the main application
-window; most window managers will do the centering on your behalf
-if you call gtk_window_set_transient_for(), and it's really not
-possible to get the centering to work correctly in all cases from
-application code. But if you insist, use gtk_window_set_position()
-to set #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, don't do the centering
-manually.
+Since: 2.10
-Note that although @x and @y can be individually unset, the position
-is not honoured unless both @x and @y are set.
+Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
+not be used in newly written code. Calling this function has
+no effect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position; -1 to unset x; -2 to leave x unchanged
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position; -1 to unset y; -2 to leave y unchanged
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
<description>
-Return value: a line number
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *msg;
+
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
<description>
-Return value: the list of menus attached to his widget.
+Returns a list of the menus which are attached to this widget.
+This list is owned by GTK+ and must not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47303,7 +45708,6 @@ Return value: the list of menus attached to his widget.
</parameters>
<return> the list of menus attached to his widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -47332,7 +45736,7 @@ and setting the background color on that.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
</parameter_description>
@@ -47341,80 +45745,55 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_new">
<description>
-Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
-the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
-want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
-display the name themselves in their preview widget.
-
-See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
-
-Since: 2.4
+Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
+contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
+be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
+popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
+you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
+dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
+In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
+On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_label">
-<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
+gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
-<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
-<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkWindow.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_grab_notify">
+<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkWidget::grab-notify signal on @widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
+various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
+text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
+action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="was_grabbed">
-<parameter_description> whether a grab is now in effect
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
+first.
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
-<description>
-Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
-item factory.
+Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47455,6 +45834,7 @@ Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()
instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47465,7 +45845,6 @@ instead.
</parameters>
<return> the current ellipsize mode of @shell
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -47503,11 +45882,11 @@ gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47515,26 +45894,6 @@ gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_color">
-<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 #gdouble to fill in with the current color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu
@@ -47556,55 +45915,95 @@ that menu item's label.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPlug">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
<description>
-Gets emitted when the plug becomes embedded in a socket.
+Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
+ stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
+except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> The id of the stock item you want to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> The text in the tooltip of the toolbar button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> The private text of the tooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> The callback called when the toolbar button is clicked.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data passed to callback
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position the button shall be inserted at.
+-1 means at the end.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the inserted widget
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_image_set">
<description>
-Return value: the "child model" being sorted
+Sets the #GtkImage.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_set_from_image() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="val">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the "child model" being sorted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
+Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right_margin">
+<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_size_wildcarded">
@@ -47664,16 +46063,16 @@ Since: 2.20
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget (may be %NULL)
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail (may be %NULL)
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="step">
@@ -47700,22 +46099,26 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
-this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
-operation before the print dialog is shown.
+Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
+(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
+be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
+and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-Since: 2.10
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
+you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47739,38 +46142,52 @@ notebook are drawn.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
+Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
+ chooser The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
+folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uris())
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+<return> a #GSList containing the filenames of all selected
+files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
+with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
<description>
-Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
-the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
-currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
+Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
+window they were spawned from. This allows <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
+dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
+main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
+functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
+gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
-you are done with it.
+Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
+
+On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
+much as the window manager would have done on X.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description>A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> parent window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47821,7 +46238,10 @@ exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
<function name="gtk_event_box_get_visible_window">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is visible
+Returns whether the event box has a visible window.
+See gtk_event_box_set_visible_window() for details.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47832,35 +46252,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is visible
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the event box window is visible
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators, then pass in
-%NULL for accel_group. Next call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() with an
-appropriate path for the menu item, use gtk_stock_lookup() to look up the
-standard accelerator for the stock item, and if one is found, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup to add the menu items accelerator to,
-or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47908,6 +46299,7 @@ bouncing block for each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse().
Determines whether @widget can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
to if it is mapped and visible.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47918,7 +46310,6 @@ to if it is mapped and visible.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -47927,6 +46318,7 @@ Since: 2.18
Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererPixbuf
to it, and makes its show @pixbuf.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47937,7 +46329,6 @@ to it, and makes its show @pixbuf.
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -47985,7 +46376,11 @@ hidden (invisible to the user).
<function name="gtk_action_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+Returns whether the action itself is sensitive. Note that this doesn't
+necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
+for that.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47996,23 +46391,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_metric">
-<description>
-Gets the units used for a #GtkRuler. See gtk_ruler_set_metric().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the units currently used for @ruler
</return>
</function>
@@ -48036,31 +46414,6 @@ title.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
-<description>
-Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new title for @page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_rich_text_available">
<description>
Test to see if there is rich text available to be pasted
@@ -48073,6 +46426,7 @@ This function is a little faster than calling
gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual text.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48087,7 +46441,6 @@ the actual text.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE is there is rich text available, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -48144,30 +46497,23 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
<description>
-Sets the position of the group as an index of the tool palette.
-If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is
--1 it will become the last child.
+This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
+the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> a new index for group
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
@@ -48209,7 +46555,7 @@ of #GtkItemFactoryEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the menu item which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
+<return> the menu item which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
if no menu item was found
</return>
</function>
@@ -48219,6 +46565,7 @@ if no menu item was found
Checks whether the label set in the menuitem is used as a
stock id to select the stock item for the item.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48230,13 +46577,15 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the item.
<return> %TRUE if the label set in the menuitem is used as a
stock id to select the stock item for the item
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_get_state_message">
<description>
-Return value: the state message of @printer
+Returns the state message describing the current state
+of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48247,7 +46596,6 @@ Return value: the state message of @printer
</parameters>
<return> the state message of @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -48255,6 +46603,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the stock id of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48265,7 +46614,6 @@ Gets the stock id of @action.
</parameters>
<return> the stock id
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -48297,7 +46645,10 @@ container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_pango_fontmap">
<description>
-Return value: the font map of @context
+Returns a #PangoFontMap that is suitable for use
+with the #GtkPrintContext.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48308,74 +46659,20 @@ Return value: the font map of @context
</parameters>
<return> the font map of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
-<description>
-Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkActionGroup">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_new">
<description>
-The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
- action_group is activated
-
-This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
-notification just after any action is activated.
+Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_width">
-<description>
-Return value: the width of a single item, or -1
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the width of a single item, or -1
+<return> A new #GtkComboBox.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -48405,13 +46702,13 @@ after use with g_object_unref().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
+<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>render detail to pass to theme engine
+<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48421,7 +46718,9 @@ multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
<function name="gtk_window_get_screen">
<description>
-Return value:a #GdkScreen.
+Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @window.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48430,61 +46729,31 @@ Return value:a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GdkScreen.
+<return> a #GdkScreen.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_numbers">
<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
-of the group.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
-<description>
-Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
-is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit
-the "response" signal with the given response_id. The button is appended
-to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
-returned, but usually you don't need it.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button_text">
-<parameter_description> text of button, or stock ID
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="response_id">
-<parameter_description> response ID for the button
+<parameter name="show_numbers">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to show numbers, %FALSE otherwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the button widget that was added
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
@@ -48502,12 +46771,12 @@ returned pixmap and mask.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description>location to store the
+<parameter_description> location to store the
pixmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>location to store the
+<parameter_description> location to store the
mask, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -48542,7 +46811,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
<description>
-Return value: the integer value of @key
+Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
+an integer, or the default value.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48561,59 +46833,48 @@ Return value: the integer value of @key
</parameters>
<return> the integer value of @key
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group">
<description>
-Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkStatusIcon
-to store image data. If the #GtkStatusIcon has no image data,
-the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
+Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
+with @self.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group to be removed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the image representation being used
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type">
<description>
-Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
-that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
-afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could iconify it
-again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkStatusIcon
+to store image data. If the #GtkStatusIcon has no image data,
+the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
-You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_pop_message">
-<description>
-Removes an event added with _gtk_xembed_push_message()
+<return> the image representation being used
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_map_unlock_path">
@@ -48676,7 +46937,7 @@ also be used for purposes internal to the input method.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> the client window. This may be %NULL to indicate
+<parameter_description> the client window. This may be %NULL to indicate
that the previous client window no longer exists.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -48708,23 +46969,6 @@ is in vertical mode
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
-<description>
-Return value: the model
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the model
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent">
<description>
This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
@@ -48757,7 +47001,7 @@ in @label indicate the mnemonic for the button.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="radio_group_member">
-<parameter_description>widget to get radio group from or %NULL
+<parameter_description> widget to get radio group from or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -48770,10 +47014,27 @@ mnemonic character
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
+<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
+If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
+returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
+originally.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<description>
+Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48790,61 +47051,36 @@ given style and orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
-<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a GIcon
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48853,7 +47089,9 @@ Since: 2.14
<function name="gtk_table_get_homogeneous">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
+Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
+width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48872,6 +47110,7 @@ Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -48887,7 +47126,6 @@ implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
if no type was found
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -48948,96 +47186,6 @@ member won't be incremented.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTextTag">
-<description>
-The ::event signal is emitted when an event occurs on a region of the
-buffer marked with this tag.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTextTag on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the object the event was fired from (typically a #GtkTextView)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the event which triggered the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter pointing at the location the event occured
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the
-event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkPrintOperation">
-<description>
-The number of pages that will be printed.
-
-Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
-(%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING), so this value should never be
-get before the data generation phase (%GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA).
-You can connect to the #GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal
-and call gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print() when
-print status is %GTK_PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA.
-This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
-<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
-gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>an icon name, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_get_recent_manager">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the recent manager for @chooser.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_selected_items">
<description>
Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are
@@ -49051,6 +47199,7 @@ g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc)gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
g_list_free (list);
]|
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49061,13 +47210,16 @@ g_list_free (list);
</parameters>
<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is paused
+Returns whether the printer is currently paused.
+A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
+printing them.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49078,7 +47230,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer is paused
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -49104,7 +47255,8 @@ account.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_row_expanded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if #path is expanded.
+Returns %TRUE if the node pointed to by @path is expanded in @tree_view.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49121,31 +47273,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if #path is expanded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
-<description>
-Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
-The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
-plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tooltips_get_info_from_tip_window">
<description>
Determines the tooltips and the widget they belong to from the window in
@@ -49154,6 +47281,9 @@ which they are displayed.
This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
applications should have little use for it.
+Since: 2.4
+
+Deprecated: 2.12:
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49174,9 +47304,6 @@ are displayed, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @tip_window is displaying tooltips, otherwise %FALSE.
-Since: 2.4
-
-Deprecated: 2.12:
</return>
</function>
@@ -49184,6 +47311,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.12:
<description>
Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49198,7 +47326,6 @@ Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -49231,22 +47358,21 @@ and %FALSE if the state of the node should be left unchanged.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_append_search_path">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_pixmap() for details.
+Appends a directory to the search path.
+See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixmap or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkBitmap or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> directory name to append to the icon path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49280,47 +47406,11 @@ views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
-<description>
-Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
-function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
-about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
-this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="needed">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
-filter function needs.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
-the file will be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_get_cells">
<description>
-Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
+Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_layout.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49333,7 +47423,6 @@ Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with
g_list_free() when no longer needed.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -49341,6 +47430,7 @@ Since: 2.12
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49359,37 +47449,9 @@ Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPrinter
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPrintOperationPreview">
-<description>
-The ::got-page-size signal is emitted once for each page
-that gets rendered to the preview.
-
-A handler for this signal should update the @context
-according to @page_setup and set up a suitable cairo
-context, using gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="preview">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup for the current page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_search">
<description>
Searches forward for @str. Any match is returned by setting
@@ -49423,15 +47485,15 @@ character in @str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="match_start">
-<parameter_description>return location for start of match, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for start of match, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="match_end">
-<parameter_description>return location for end of match, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for end of match, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description>bound for the search, or %NULL for the end of the buffer
+<parameter_description> bound for the search, or %NULL for the end of the buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49528,6 +47590,7 @@ for the widget.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkScale.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -49543,7 +47606,28 @@ Creates a new #GtkScale.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkScale
-Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
+<description>
+Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
+string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
+visible context like a list of icons.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
+the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
+is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -49571,57 +47655,22 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
-<description>
-Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Retrieve the hard margins of @printer, i.e. the margins that define
-the area at the borders of the paper that the printer cannot print to.
-
-Note: This will not succeed unless the printer's details are available,
-see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the top margin in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the bottom margin in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the left margin in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the right margin in
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE iff the hard margins were retrieved
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -49659,36 +47708,20 @@ Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
<description>
-Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
-a "selection-received" signal will be generated.
+Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> Which selection to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
- In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
+<parameter name="fd">
+<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
-request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
-this widget).
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_is_important">
@@ -49851,7 +47884,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description>kind of child or %NULL
+<parameter_description> kind of child or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49877,11 +47910,11 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description>location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49959,14 +47992,23 @@ typically "do what you mean."
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRuler">
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_underline">
<description>
-The metric used for the ruler.
+If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
+the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -50011,48 +48053,37 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
-Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
-to a stock icon.
+Unselects the row at @path.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellView">
-<description>
-The model for cell view
-
-since 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_group_id">
<description>
Sets an group identificator for @notebook, notebooks sharing
@@ -50081,6 +48112,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_set_group() instead.
<description>
Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See gtk_file_filter_set_name().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50093,7 +48125,6 @@ Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See gtk_file_filter_set_name().
or %NULL. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not
be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -50110,6 +48141,7 @@ Also note that the dialog needs to have its confirmative button
added with response %GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT or %GTK_RESPONSE_OK in
order for the button to take over the file selected in the dialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50120,102 +48152,124 @@ order for the button to take over the file selected in the dialog.
</parameters>
<return> a new button widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
-Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
+Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
+to bin_window coordinates.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current page setup
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_numeric">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_page_setup">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
+Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
+<return> the current page setup
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkIconTheme">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
<description>
-Emitted when the current icon theme is switched or GTK+ detects
-that a change has occurred in the contents of the current
-icon theme.
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
+
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> the icon theme
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
<description>
-This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
-its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
+Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
+model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
+
+Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
+call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
+cell renderers for the new model.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
<description>
-Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
-user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
-an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
-%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
+Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
+selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
Since: 2.4
@@ -50225,17 +48279,17 @@ Since: 2.4
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action that the file selector is performing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_padding">
<description>
-Return value: the padding around items
+Returns the value of the ::item-padding property.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50246,47 +48300,78 @@ Return value: the padding around items
</parameters>
<return> the padding around items
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
+This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copyright">
+<parameter_description> (allow-none) the copyright string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of the label in characters.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
+<return> the state of @widget.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<description>
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
<description>
Sets the 'previous' alpha to be @alpha. This function should be called with
@@ -50308,7 +48393,10 @@ some hesitations, as it might seem confusing to have that alpha change.
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_button_sensitivity">
<description>
-Return Value: %GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
+Returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button
+sensitive or not when there are no items in the model.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50323,7 +48411,6 @@ if the button is always insensitive or
%GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO if it is only sensitive as long as
the model has one item to be selected.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -50333,6 +48420,7 @@ Reads the page setup from the file @file_name. Returns a
new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored page setup,
or %NULL if an error occurred. See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50341,13 +48429,12 @@ or %NULL if an error occurred. See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -50418,13 +48505,13 @@ also set the original color to be @color too.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the new cell renderer
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -50477,6 +48564,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::support-selection property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50487,7 +48575,6 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::support-selection property.
</parameters>
<return> whether the application supports print of selection
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -50505,7 +48592,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description>the new label widget
+<parameter_description> the new label widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50525,7 +48612,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -50533,6 +48620,23 @@ determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<description>
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size">
<description>
Sets the size of icons in the tool palette.
@@ -50546,7 +48650,7 @@ Since: 2.20
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_size">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkIconSize that icons in the tool
+<parameter_description> the #GtkIconSize that icons in the tool
palette shall have
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -50598,32 +48702,34 @@ Since: 2.20
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gicon">
-<parameter_description>a #GIcon representing the icon, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GIcon representing the icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement">
<description>
-Gets the icon name of @action.
+Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window. See gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name
+<return> the current placement value.
-Since: 2.16
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</return>
</function>
@@ -50647,98 +48753,128 @@ Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_range">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_equal">
<description>
-Gets the range allowed for @spin_button. See
-gtk_spin_button_set_range().
+Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="min">
-<parameter_description>location to store minimum allowed value, or %NULL
+<parameter name="size1">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description>location to store maximum allowed value, or %NULL
+<parameter name="size2">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
+represent the same paper size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
<description>
-Gets the page type of @page.
+Returns the #GtkAction that @widget is a proxy for.
+See also gtk_action_get_proxies().
+
+Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page type of @page.
+<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
+%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+Returns whether menus generated by this #GtkUIManager
+will have tearoff menu items.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="sortable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+<return> whether tearoff menu items are added
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
<description>
-Return value: whether tearoff menu items are added
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
+several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
+when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
+of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
+
+Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
+larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
+
+Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
+window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+set the icon on transient windows.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether tearoff menu items are added
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
<description>
-Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was added to the recently used resources list.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
-This string is owned by the widget and should not be
-modified or freed
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -50748,6 +48884,7 @@ Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definitio
merges it with the current contents of @self. An enclosing <ui>
element is added if it is missing.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50772,7 +48909,6 @@ element is added if it is missing.
to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
the return value is 0.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -50797,52 +48933,33 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
-<description>
-Removes all rows from @tree_store
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
<description>
-Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
-Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
-
-Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
-
+Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for start of region, or %NULL
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for end of region, or %NULL
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_editable">
<description>
-Return value: whether text is editable by default
+Returns the default editability of the #GtkTextView. Tags in the
+buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50855,27 +48972,58 @@ Return value: whether text is editable by default
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
+Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
+in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> The model.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_deletable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button
+Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button
+via gtk_window_set_deletable().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -50886,7 +49034,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -50946,71 +49093,74 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_gravity().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>window gravity
+<return> window gravity
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_icon_size">
<description>
-Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+Unsets the tool palette icon size set with gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size(),
+so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
<description>
-Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for
-a given event. The results are sorted so that entries with less
-modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
-
-The matches returned by this function can be exact (i.e. keycode, level
-and group all match) or fuzzy (i.e. keycode and level match, but group
-does not). As long there are any exact matches, only exact matches
-are returned. If there are no exact matches, fuzzy matches will be
-returned, as long as they are not shadowing a possible exact match.
-This means that fuzzy matches won't be considered if their keyval is
-present in the current group.
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="hardware_keycode">
-<parameter_description> hardware keycode field from a #GdkEventKey
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> state field from a #GdkEventKey
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> mask of modifiers to consider when matching against the
-modifiers in entries.
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> group field from a #GdkEventKey
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GSList of matching entries.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_title">
<description>
Gets the title of this tray icon. See gtk_status_icon_set_title().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51021,25 +49171,23 @@ Gets the title of this tray icon. See gtk_status_icon_set_title().
</parameters>
<return> the title of the status icon
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
<description>
-Return value: an unused merge id.
+Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an unused merge id.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_source_file">
@@ -51050,6 +49198,7 @@ by the platforms printing system (typically PostScript,
but on many platforms PDF may work too). See
gtk_printer_accepts_pdf() and gtk_printer_accepts_ps().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51068,7 +49217,6 @@ gtk_printer_accepts_pdf() and gtk_printer_accepts_ps().
</parameters>
<return> %FALSE if an error occurred
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -51077,6 +49225,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Gets the human-readable name for the filter.
See gtk_recent_filter_set_name().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51088,7 +49237,6 @@ See gtk_recent_filter_set_name().
<return> the name of the filter, or %NULL. The returned string
is owned by the filter object and should not be freed.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -51121,6 +49269,7 @@ A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
Gets the number of items returned by gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()
and gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51132,7 +49281,6 @@ and gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris().
<return> A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
returned.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -51184,6 +49332,22 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
+<description>
+Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
@@ -51242,6 +49406,7 @@ their menu item when the #GtkToolItem changes. That the
@menu_item_id<!-- -->s must match ensures that a #GtkToolItem will not
inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51257,24 +49422,25 @@ inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create.
<return> The #GtkMenuItem passed to
gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @menu_item_id<!-- -->s match.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_show_arrow">
+<function name="gtk_test_text_get">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
+Retrive the text string of @widget if it is a GtkLabel,
+GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
+<return> new 0-terminated C string, needs to be released with g_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -51326,69 +49492,6 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
-<description>
-Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide an uri list.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the length of @targets
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_default">
-<description>
-Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_default().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
-<description>
-Changes the visible of @action_group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> new visiblity
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paint_tab">
<description>
Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
@@ -51413,16 +49516,16 @@ in the given rectangle on @window using the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -51500,69 +49603,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
<description>
-Sets the number of pages in the document.
+Returns the value of the ::margin property.
-This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
-before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
-#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
-
-Note that the page numbers passed to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
-and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
-the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
-will be for page @n_pages - 1.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_pages">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_binding_reset_parsed">
-<description>
-Remove all binding sets that were added by gtk_binding_parse_binding().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkImageMenuItem">
-<description>
-The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
-<description>
-If the modification time on any previously read file for the
-default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
-and then reread all previously read RC files.
-
+<return> the space at the borders
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
</return>
</function>
@@ -51653,7 +49708,9 @@ this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
<function name="gtk_action_is_sensitive">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
+Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51665,7 +49722,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
<return> %TRUE if the action and its associated action group
are both sensitive.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -51742,6 +49798,7 @@ the lifecycle of the ui manager. If you add the widgets returned by this
function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the
destruction of the ui manager.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51754,16 +49811,17 @@ destruction of the ui manager.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the widget found by following the path, or %NULL if no widget
+<return> the widget found by following the path, or %NULL if no widget
was found.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
<description>
-Returns: whether the current value is displayed as a string
+Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
+next to the slider.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51776,22 +49834,32 @@ Returns: whether the current value is displayed as a string
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
<description>
-Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
+Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
+then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
+is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_vscale_new">
@@ -51814,6 +49882,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkVScale.
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51824,7 +49893,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
</parameters>
<return> the horizontal resolution in dpi
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -51832,6 +49900,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51842,120 +49911,90 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
</parameters>
<return> the vertical resolution in dpi
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkBuilderConnectFunc">
+<function name="gtk_container_forall">
<description>
-This is the signature of a function used to connect signals. It is used
-by the gtk_builder_connect_signals() and gtk_builder_connect_signals_full()
-methods. It is mainly intended for interpreted language bindings, but
-could be useful where the programmer wants more control over the signal
-connection process.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
+that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+of the container, but were added by the container implementation
+itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
+rather than gtk_container_forall().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> object to connect a signal to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="signal_name">
-<parameter_description> name of the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="handler_name">
-<parameter_description> name of the handler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="connect_object">
-<parameter_description> a #GObject, if non-%NULL, use g_signal_connect_object()
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> #GConnectFlags to use
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a callback
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> callback user data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_unref">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_current_alpha">
<description>
-Decrease the reference count of @style.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @key has a value
+Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAccelGroup">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_alignment">
<description>
-The accel-changed signal is emitted when a #GtkAccelGroupEntry
-is added to or removed from the accel group.
+Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()
+instead.
-Widgets like #GtkAccelLabel which display an associated
-accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild
-their visual representation if the @accel_closure is theirs.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator keyval
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifier">
-<parameter_description> the modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_closure">
-<parameter_description> the #GClosure of the accelerator
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current text alignment of @shell
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
@@ -52002,55 +50041,47 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>the program name
+<parameter_description> the program name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
<description>
-Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
-See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. If the file could not be loaded
+then error is set to either a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
+See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the child pack direction
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkCellRendererAccel">
-<description>
-Gets emitted when the user has removed the accelerator.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel">
-<parameter_description> the object reveiving the signal
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_string">
-<parameter_description> the path identifying the row of the edited cell
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_translator_credits">
<description>
-Return value: The translator credits string. The string is
+Returns the translator credits string which is displayed
+in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52062,54 +50093,42 @@ Return value: The translator credits string. The string is
<return> The translator credits string. The string is
owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
+This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
+is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
+to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
+is in 'unsorted' state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper width
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
-get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
+Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
+calculating the size.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
+<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
+<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
+when calculating the size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52138,31 +50157,128 @@ then 0 is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
-gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
-negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
+print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
+
+Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
+pages is complete. You can connect to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
+information about the progress of the print operation.
+Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
+
+If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
+#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
+asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
+#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
+operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
+the print succeeds or fails).
+|[
+if (settings != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
+
+if (page_setup != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
+
+g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
+G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
+g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
+G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
+
+res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
+GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
+parent,
+&error);
+
+if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
+{
+error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+"Error printing file:\n%s",
+error->message);
+g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
+G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
+gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
+g_error_free (error);
+}
+else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
+{
+if (settings != NULL)
+g_object_unref (settings);
+settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
+}
+]|
+Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
+given #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action to start
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
+completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
+the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
+and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
+asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
+done.
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
+<description>
+Swaps @a and @b in @store. Note that this function only works with
+unsorted stores.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Another #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the combo box grabs focus when it is
+Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
+with the mouse. See gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click().
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52174,28 +50290,24 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the combo box grabs focus when it is
<return> %TRUE if the combo box grabs focus when it is
clicked with the mouse.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkUIManager">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_row_spacing">
<description>
-The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @action
-is activated.
-
-This is intended for applications to get notification
-just after any action is activated.
+Sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uimanager">
-<parameter_description> the ui manager
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action
+<parameter name="row_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the row spacing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52214,11 +50326,11 @@ pixmap or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixmap, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52280,6 +50392,7 @@ ensures that you only have to redraw one time.
This functions returns the value set with
gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags()
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52294,7 +50407,6 @@ gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags()
</parameters>
<return> whether deserializing this format may create tags
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -52322,7 +50434,9 @@ not incremented.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_show_expanders">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if expanders are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
+Returns whether or not expanders are drawn in @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52334,7 +50448,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if expanders are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
<return> %TRUE if expanders are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
otherwise.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -52392,52 +50505,62 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
<description>
-Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
-the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
-
-Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
-property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
+in the table.
-Since: 2.6
+ tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
+the same name as an already-added tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the themed icon
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_border_width">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
<description>
-Sets the border width of the container.
+Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
+is statically allocated and should not be freed.
-The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
-around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
-#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
-they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
-the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
-create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
-to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as
-a spacer.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the name of the given icon size.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
+the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
+
+Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
+property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave <emphasis>outside</emphasis>
-the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52477,24 +50600,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_get_name">
-<description>
-Gets the name of the action group.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the name of the action group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_default">
<description>
The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user
@@ -52512,7 +50617,7 @@ widget you'd like to make the default using GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="default_widget">
-<parameter_description>widget to be the default, or %NULL to unset the
+<parameter_description> widget to be the default, or %NULL to unset the
default widget for the toplevel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -52520,36 +50625,6 @@ default widget for the toplevel.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_get_style_property">
-<description>
-Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
-widget class is in the given style.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the style property to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a #GValue where the value of the property being
-queried will be stored
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new">
<description>
Creates a row reference based on @path. This reference will keep pointing
@@ -52603,59 +50678,21 @@ cast the object yourself.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkIconView">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
<description>
-The ::move-cursor signal is a
-<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
-which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
-
-Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
-g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
-programmatically.
-
-The default bindings for this signal include
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem>Arrow keys which move by individual steps</listitem>
-<listitem>Home/End keys which move to the first/last item</listitem>
-<listitem>PageUp/PageDown which move by "pages"</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-
-All of these will extend the selection when combined with
-the Shift modifier.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iconview">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
-<description>
-Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
-no themed icon
+<return> a copy of @other
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -52665,6 +50702,7 @@ Retrieves the #GIcon used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52680,7 +50718,6 @@ stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
<return> A #GIcon, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
is not a #GIcon
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -52721,20 +50758,20 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
-
+Undoes the effect of
+gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
+#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_expander_column">
@@ -52760,21 +50797,19 @@ expander column to a hidden column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
+<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
<description>
-Return value:the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
+Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
-owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
-around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_free">
@@ -52795,7 +50830,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_alignment">
<description>
-Return value: The current alignent of @tree_column.
+Returns the current x alignment of @tree_column. This value can range
+between 0.0 and 1.0.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52871,11 +50908,11 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52958,95 +50995,70 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_iter_for_file">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
-Initializes @iter to point to the row used for @file, if @file is part
-of the model. Note that upon successful return, @iter may point to an
-invisible row in the @model. Use
-_gtk_file_system_model_iter_is_visible() to make sure it is visible to
-the tree view.
+Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
+
+Note that this may return %G_TYPE_NONE to indicate that no more
+children can be added, e.g. for a #GtkPaned which already has two
+children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> the iterator to be initialized
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> the file to look up
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if file is part of the model and @iter was initialized
+<return> a #GType.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
<description>
-Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
-current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
-a list of themes to the user.)
+Sets the icon of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
-Free with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
-<description>
-Gets the child of the #GtkBin, or %NULL if the bin contains
-no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
-added, so you do not need to unref it.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="bin">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBin
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>pointer to child of the #GtkBin
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
<description>
-Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
-inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work.
+This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
+the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
+demand by this function.
-More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="object_class">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_widget">
<description>
-Returns: the default widget, or %NULL if there is none.
+Returns the default widget for @window. See gtk_window_set_default()
+for more details.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53057,7 +51069,6 @@ Returns: the default widget, or %NULL if there is none.
</parameters>
<return> the default widget, or %NULL if there is none.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -53065,6 +51076,7 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Create a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified by socket_id.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53079,7 +51091,6 @@ Create a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified by socket_id.
</parameters>
<return> the new #GtkPlug widget.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -53105,6 +51116,7 @@ Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
applications should have little use for it.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53115,23 +51127,9 @@ applications should have little use for it.
</parameters>
<return> the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_handle_modality_on">
-<description>
- plug: a #GtkPlug
-
-Called from the GtkPlug backend when the corresponding socket has
-told the plug that it modality has toggled on.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="remove_file">
<description>
Removes the given file from the model. If the file is not part of
@@ -53162,6 +51160,7 @@ In general, you should only create display specific
resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53170,43 +51169,49 @@ free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
+<return> the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_reorderable">
<description>
-Changes the location of a recently used resource from @uri to @new_uri.
-
-Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
-by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
+Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
+See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of a recently used resource
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_uri">
-<parameter_description>the new URI of the recently used resource, or %NULL to
-remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -53218,6 +51223,7 @@ added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53228,13 +51234,14 @@ gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkTargetList
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_name">
<description>
-Return value: the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
+Returns the name of the action.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53246,41 +51253,6 @@ Return value: the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
<return> the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
be freed.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkScale">
-<description>
-Signal which allows you to change how the scale value is displayed.
-Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
- value That string will then be used to display the scale's value.
-
-Here's an example signal handler which displays a value 1.0 as
-with "-->1.0<--".
-|[
-static gchar*
-format_value_callback (GtkScale *scale,
-gdouble value)
-{
-return g_strdup_printf ("-->%0.*g<--",
-gtk_scale_get_digits (scale), value);
-}
-]|
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value to format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> allocated string representing @value
</return>
</function>
@@ -53289,6 +51261,8 @@ gtk_scale_get_digits (scale), value);
Retrieves whether tooltips are enabled. See
gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips().
+Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
+is now used instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53299,8 +51273,6 @@ gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if tooltips are enabled
-Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
-is now used instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -53326,6 +51298,7 @@ Sets the width of the horizontal border of tab labels.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRuler with the given orientation.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53336,20 +51309,52 @@ Creates a new #GtkRuler with the given orientation.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRuler.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<function name="gtk_paint_string">
<description>
-Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fd">
-<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53387,6 +51392,7 @@ stored.
Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
types a file name that already exists.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53398,7 +51404,6 @@ types a file name that already exists.
<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -53474,7 +51479,7 @@ gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntry<!-- -->s
+<parameter_description> a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntry<!-- -->s
indicating the drop types that this @widget will accept, or %NULL.
Later you can access the list with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list()
and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
@@ -53494,7 +51499,6 @@ and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_create_tag">
<description>
-
Creates a tag and adds it to the tag table for @buffer.
Equivalent to calling gtk_text_tag_new() and then adding the
tag to the buffer's tag table. The returned tag is owned by
@@ -53516,11 +51520,11 @@ of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tag_name">
-<parameter_description>name of the new tag, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> name of the new tag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description>name of first property to set, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> name of first property to set, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -53532,25 +51536,20 @@ of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
<description>
-Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
-the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark this window as urgent
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points">
@@ -53559,6 +51558,7 @@ Fetches the set of attach points for an icon. An attach point
is a location in the icon that can be used as anchor points for attaching
emblems or overlays to the icon.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53567,18 +51567,17 @@ emblems or overlays to the icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description>location to store pointer to an array of points, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store pointer to an array of points, or %NULL
free the array of points with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description>location to store the number of points in @points, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the number of points in @points, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if there are any attach points for the icon.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -53659,7 +51658,10 @@ as notification of the move.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_is_visible">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are currently visible
+Returns %TRUE if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are visible.
+For this to be meaningful, you must first initialize the cells with
+gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data()
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53672,32 +51674,29 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are curren
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
<description>
-Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
-return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
-empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-
-Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
-2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
-be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
-widget.
+Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
+located at @iter, only toggles before @iter. Sets @iter
+to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer
+if no toggle is found.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
</return>
</function>
@@ -53726,6 +51725,7 @@ This function will not typically be used by applications; it
is intended principally for use in the implementation of
#GtkRecentChooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53741,7 +51741,6 @@ about a recently used resource
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the file should be displayed
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -53784,24 +51783,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_remove_from_socket">
-<description>
-Removes a plug from a socket within the same application.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
@@ -53830,7 +51811,9 @@ set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
-Return value: the space between columns
+Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53841,7 +51824,6 @@ Return value: the space between columns
</parameters>
<return> the space between columns
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -53886,41 +51868,42 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
-each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
-widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
-to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
-gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
-effect on labels containing only a single line.
+Returns %TRUE if @iter is within a range tagged with @tag.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="jtype">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
+is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
+create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
+the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -53948,6 +51931,7 @@ for #GtkIconSet.
Looks up key bindings for @object to find one matching
@event, and if one was found, activate it.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53962,7 +51946,6 @@ Looks up key bindings for @object to find one matching
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if a matching key binding was found
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -53986,28 +51969,30 @@ previously selected.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_style_init_for_settings">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Initializes the font description in @style according to the default
-font name of @settings. This is called for gtk_style_new() with
-the settings for the default screen (if any); if we are creating
-a style for a particular screen, we then call it again in a
-location where we know the correct settings.
-The reason for this is that gtk_rc_style_create_style() doesn't
-take the screen for an argument.
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
@@ -54078,6 +52063,7 @@ starts with a factory path
<description>
Gets the translation domain of @builder.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54089,7 +52075,6 @@ Gets the translation domain of @builder.
<return> the translation domain. This string is owned
by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -54121,7 +52106,10 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_flags">
<description>
-Return value: The flags supported by this interface.
+Returns a set of flags supported by this interface. The flags are a bitwise
+combination of #GtkTreeModelFlags. The flags supported should not change
+during the lifecycle of the @tree_model.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54142,6 +52130,7 @@ Gets the name of the @buildable object.
<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>
used to construct the @buildable.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54152,7 +52141,6 @@ used to construct the @buildable.
</parameters>
<return> the name set with gtk_buildable_set_name()
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -54212,7 +52200,9 @@ be removed in the future.
<function name="gtk_label_get_line_wrap_mode">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
+Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54223,10 +52213,24 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_show_all">
+<description>
+Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
+a container).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paned_set_position">
<description>
Sets the position of the divider between the two panes.
@@ -54250,6 +52254,7 @@ is unset.
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_urgency_hint()
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54260,43 +52265,22 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_urgency_hint()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if window is urgent
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_delegate_iface_init">
-<description>
-An interface-initialization function for use in cases where
-an object is simply delegating the methods, signals of
-the #GtkFileChooser interface to another object.
-_gtk_file_chooser_set_delegate() must be called on each
-instance of the object so that the delegate object can
-be found.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iface">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChoserIface structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_window_set_is_active">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
<description>
-Internal function that sets whether the #GtkWindow is part
-of the currently active toplevel window (taking into account inter-process
-embedding.)
+Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
+spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_active">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the window is in the currently active toplevel
+<parameter name="policy">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54331,43 +52315,89 @@ column ids.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_button_set_depressed">
+<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
<description>
-Sets whether the button is currently drawn as down or not. This is
-purely a visual setting, and is meant only for use by derived widgets
-such as #GtkToggleButton.
+Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
+pops up the menu. See gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() for setting
+a tooltip on the whole #GtkMenuToolButton.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip_text()
+instead.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltips">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTooltips object to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tip_text">
+<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for tool_item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="depressed">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the button should be drawn with a recessed shadow.
+<parameter name="tip_private">
+<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
+
+<note><para>
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
<description>
-Return value: the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
+Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
+drag-and-drop.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54380,39 +52410,17 @@ Return value: the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioAction">
-<description>
-The ::changed signal is emitted on every member of a radio group when the
-active member is changed. The signal gets emitted after the ::activate signals
-for the previous and current active members.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current">
-<parameter_description> the member of @action<!-- -->s group which has just been activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPrintOperation.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkPrintOperation
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -54438,7 +52446,11 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rubber_banding">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if rubber banding in @tree_view is enabled.
+Returns whether rubber banding is turned on for @tree_view. If the
+selection mode is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the
+user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54449,26 +52461,27 @@ Return value: %TRUE if rubber banding in @tree_view is enabled.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if rubber banding in @tree_view is enabled.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
<description>
-Lists the actions in the action group.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the scale in percent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
@@ -54476,6 +52489,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo structures point to the same
resource.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54491,34 +52505,23 @@ resource.
<return> %TRUE if both #GtkRecentInfo structures point to se same
resource, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_present">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
<description>
-Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
-in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
-desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
-on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
-
-If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
-as well.
-
-This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
-that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
-currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
-a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
-where the user can see it.
-
-If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
-it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
-
+Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
+then it will unset the old model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54580,7 +52583,10 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_box_set_spacing().
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_always_show_image">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
+Returns whether the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
+setting and always show the image, if available.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54591,7 +52597,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -54636,31 +52641,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
<description>
-Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
+Returns the current alpha value.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file for the folder to add
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -54673,6 +52668,7 @@ This is normally called by the default ::key_press_event and
however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54687,13 +52683,16 @@ overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if a widget in the focus chain handled the event.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_type_class">
<description>
-Returns: pointer to the class.
+Returns a pointer pointing to the class of @type or %NULL if there
+was any trouble identifying @type. Initializes the class if
+necessary.
+
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_type_class_peek() or g_type_class_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54704,7 +52703,6 @@ Returns: pointer to the class.
</parameters>
<return> pointer to the class.
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_type_class_peek() or g_type_class_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -54712,6 +52710,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_type_class_peek() or g_type_class_ref() instead.
<description>
Gets the left margin in units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54726,36 +52725,33 @@ Gets the left margin in units of @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the left margin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
+Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
+gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
+gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
+There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
+application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
+can be overridden by themes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_prepend_page">
<description>
Prepends a page to the @assistant.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54770,7 +52766,6 @@ Prepends a page to the @assistant.
</parameters>
<return> the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -54830,6 +52825,25 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
+<description>
+Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
+toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
+necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
+toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions">
<description>
This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them
@@ -54863,27 +52877,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
-
-The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-<!-- FIXME link here -->
+Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
+Note that being visible does not guarantee that
+the user can actually see the icon, see also
+gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="media_type">
-<parameter_description> the media type
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
@@ -54907,28 +52919,41 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_widget_to_tree_coords">
<description>
-Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
- child
+Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
+tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Due to historial reasons the name of this function is
+incorrect. For converting coordinates relative to the widget to
+bin_window coordinates, please see
+gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to bin_window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
-tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The
-string is owned by the widget and must not
-be freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text">
@@ -54937,6 +52962,7 @@ Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. This function
waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54964,27 +52990,51 @@ for various reasons, in particular if the
clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_group">
<description>
-Returns:the #GtkWindowGroup for a window or the default group
+Returns the group for @window or the default group, if
+ window is %NULL or if @window does not have an explicit
+window group.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GtkWindowGroup for a window or the default group
+<return> the #GtkWindowGroup for a window or the default group
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
+<description>
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
+
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
If @setting is %TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of @window
@@ -55022,11 +53072,11 @@ Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description>location to store the starting position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the starting position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description>location to store the end position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the end position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55100,38 +53150,17 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>User data to pass to the modify function, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> User data to pass to the modify function, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier of @data, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier of @data, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkActivatable">
-<description>
-Whether this activatable should reset its layout
-and appearance when setting the related action or when
-the action changes appearance.
-
-See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
-should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
-
-<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
-and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
-widget when it changes.</para></note>
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
@@ -55149,7 +53178,7 @@ gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and gtk_icon_factory_add().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55161,6 +53190,7 @@ gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and gtk_icon_factory_add().
<description>
Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55171,23 +53201,28 @@ Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the plug is embedded in a socket
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+<return> if
+the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -55198,6 +53233,7 @@ an #GtkWidget::expose-event handler.
See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55208,7 +53244,6 @@ See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -55228,100 +53263,30 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_draw_check">
-<description>
-Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
-the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
-<description>
-Return value: event mask for @widget
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> event mask for @widget
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkCellRendererText">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
<description>
-This signal is emitted after @renderer has been edited.
+Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
+call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
+user-visible operation. The operations between
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
+an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
+a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
+outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
+from other user actions.
-It is the responsibility of the application to update the model
-and store @new_text at the position indicated by @path.
+The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
+single call to one of those functions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="renderer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_text">
-<parameter_description> the new text
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55352,47 +53317,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
-<description>
-Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
-of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_text_layout_get_block_cursor">
-<description>
-If layout is to display a block cursor, calculates its position
-and returns %TRUE. Otherwise it returns %FALSE. In case when
-cursor is visible, it simply returns the position stored in
-the line display, otherwise it has to compute the position
-(see get_block_cursor()).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle to store block cursor position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_frame_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFrame, with optional label @label.
@@ -55425,11 +53349,11 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description>a stock id, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a stock id, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55443,6 +53367,7 @@ Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
specified in the UI definition.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55461,7 +53386,6 @@ specified in the UI definition.
</parameters>
<return> the constructed child
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -55489,47 +53413,20 @@ match
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_mapped">
-<description>
-Marks the widget as being realized.
-
-This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
-"map" or "unmap" implementation.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mapped">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+Returns the current depth of @path.
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The depth of @path
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
@@ -55546,6 +53443,7 @@ tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55566,50 +53464,72 @@ to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_text">
<description>
-Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
-removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
- end don't have to be in order.
+Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state. All other
+style values are left untouched. The text color is the foreground
+color used along with the base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base())
+for widgets such as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView. See also
+gtk_widget_modify_style().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> the state for which to set the text color
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_text().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars">
+<description>
+Moves backward by @count text characters (pixbufs, widgets,
+etc. do not count as characters for this). Equivalent to moving
+through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
+gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of chars to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
@@ -55676,23 +53596,37 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_shadow() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
-themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
-
+Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
+every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
+column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
+renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GIcon
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expander">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expanded">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
@@ -55708,13 +53642,13 @@ GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
]|
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -55737,15 +53671,15 @@ dropped everywhere.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>A function to determine which columns are reorderable, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> A function to determine which columns are reorderable, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description>User data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> User data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier for @user_data, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @user_data, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55831,58 +53765,30 @@ stripped before return.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_track_print_status">
<description>
-Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
-of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
-and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
-Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
-depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
-
-When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
-be removed from the size group.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+If track_status is %TRUE, the print operation will try to continue report
+on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
+can allow your application to show things like "out of paper" issues,
+and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
-<description>
-Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
+not be enabled unless needed.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
-or %NULL to read the first group
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="track_status">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to track status after printing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
-paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_text_column">
@@ -55941,27 +53847,12 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_file_system">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_path">
<description>
-Sets the file system for @chooser_entry.
+Returns the accel path for this action.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> an object implementing #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Since: 2.6
-<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_path">
-<description>
-Returns: the accel path for this action, or %NULL
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55981,6 +53872,7 @@ and must not be freed or modified.
Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
will be shown.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -55991,30 +53883,9 @@ will be shown.
</parameters>
<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_item_activated">
-<description>
-Activates the item determined by @path.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
<description>
Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
@@ -56070,7 +53941,7 @@ freed by the caller.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #PangoLayout for this label
+<return> the #PangoLayout for this label
</return>
</function>
@@ -56088,115 +53959,31 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description>a text string or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_widget_propagate_hierarchy_changed">
-<description>
-Propagates changes in the anchored state to a widget and all
-children, unsetting or setting the %ANCHORED flag, and
-emitting #GtkWidget::hierarchy-changed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="previous_toplevel">
-<parameter_description> Previous toplevel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
-<description>
-This function returns the position you need to pass to
-gtk_window_move() to keep @window in its current position. This
-means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
-gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
-
-If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
-#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
-gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
-frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
-same top-left corner.
-
-gtk_window_get_position() is not 100% reliable because the X Window System
-does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the
-decorations placed on a window by the window manager.
-Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most
-window managers.
-
-Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with
-respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to
-its current position as returned by gtk_window_get_position() tends
-to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are
-slowly getting better over time.
-
-If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
-frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
-always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
-gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
-because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
-
-If you are saving and restoring your application's window
-positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
-do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
-not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
-Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
-"GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow
-the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
+<parameter_description> a text string or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
<description>
-Sets the screen for a recent manager; the screen is used to
-track the user's currently configured recently used documents
-storage.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
-Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
-not be used in newly written code. Calling this function has
-no effect.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent_window">
@@ -56217,41 +54004,33 @@ Sets a non default parent window for @widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkImage.
+Returns the model the #GtkTreeModelSort is sorting.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_image_set_from_image() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="val">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap that indicates which parts of the image should be transparent.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the "child model" being sorted
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_builder_new">
<description>
Creates a new builder object.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkBuilder object
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -56275,63 +54054,32 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets whether the tab can be detached from @notebook to another
-notebook or widget.
-
-Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
-(see gtk_notebook_set_group_id ()) to allow automatic tabs
-interchange between them.
-
-If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
-(i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
-destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
-will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
-widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
-|[
-static void
-on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
-GdkDragContext *context,
-gint x,
-gint y,
-GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
-guint info,
-guint time,
-gpointer user_data)
-{
-GtkWidget *notebook;
-GtkWidget **child;
-
-notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
-child = (void*) selection_data->data;
-
-process_widget (*child);
-gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
-}
-]|
+Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
+<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
+the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
+added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
+about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
+gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
-If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
-you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
+Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
+considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="detachable">
-<parameter_description> whether the tab is detachable or not
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> ancestor type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_always_show_image">
@@ -56358,20 +54106,21 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-Return value: The label, or %NULL
+Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label, or %NULL
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -56397,67 +54146,62 @@ in the widget
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
-See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
+intermediate containers.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_tooltip">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
+<parameter name="ancestor">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
+grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
<description>
-Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
+Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
+ focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
+it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
+%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
+This function is often followed by @gtk_widget_grab_focus (@tree_view)
+in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing
+can only happen when the widget is realized.
-Since: 2.4
+If @path is invalid for @model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
+and the function will return without failing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> String containing new window title.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
-<description>
-Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
-intermediate containers.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ancestor">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="start_editing">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the specified cell should start being edited.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
-grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_unstick">
@@ -56483,55 +54227,21 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a GIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56557,27 +54267,6 @@ Tags in the buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_btree_is_valid">
-<description>
-Check to see if the entire #GtkTextBTree is valid or not for
-the given view.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="view_id">
-<parameter_description> ID for the view
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the entire #GtkTextBTree is valid
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_group">
<description>
Sets a group identificator pointer for @notebook, notebooks sharing
@@ -56594,7 +54283,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to identify the notebook group, or %NULL to unset it
+<parameter_description> a pointer to identify the notebook group, or %NULL to unset it
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56617,52 +54306,44 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
-"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
-always set these to the same value for all windows in an
-application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
-this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
-gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
-benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
-manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
+Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_name">
-<parameter_description> window name hint
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_class">
-<parameter_description> window class hint
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
+is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
-file. See gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label().
-
+Sets the label's text from the string @str.
+If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
+indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
+The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
+automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
-name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_locations">
@@ -56687,11 +54368,11 @@ direction of the paragraph are inserted.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="strong_pos">
-<parameter_description>location to store the strong cursor position (may be %NULL)
+<parameter_description> location to store the strong cursor position (may be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="weak_pos">
-<parameter_description>location to store the weak cursor position (may be %NULL)
+<parameter_description> location to store the weak cursor position (may be %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56718,28 +54399,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
<description>
-By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
-gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
-the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
-first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
-until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
-
-In that example, you would disable startup notification
-temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
-showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
-Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats">
@@ -56748,6 +54425,7 @@ This function returns the rich text serialize formats registered
with @buffer using gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56763,32 +54441,9 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()
<return> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s representing the registered
formats.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line">
-<description>
-Initializes @iter to the start of the given line.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_visible">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is visible. Note that this doesn't
@@ -56797,6 +54452,7 @@ or the widget is obscured in any way.
See gtk_widget_set_visible().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56807,7 +54463,6 @@ See gtk_widget_set_visible().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is visible
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -56831,44 +54486,31 @@ Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_clear_targets">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
<description>
-Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
-widget.
+Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an atom representing a selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> default widget colormap
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ctree_insert_node">
+<function name="gtk_selection_clear_targets">
<description>
+Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
+widget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixmap_closed">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_closed">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask_opened">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an atom representing a selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56975,7 +54617,8 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
<description>
-Return value: the title of the column. This string should not be
+Returns the title of the widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56989,19 +54632,21 @@ modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
<description>
-Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
-is statically allocated and should not be freed.
+If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
+that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
+%FALSE.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkIconSize.
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of the given icon size.
+<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
</return>
</function>
@@ -57100,6 +54745,7 @@ Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
was last visited.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57111,23 +54757,24 @@ was last visited.
<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_size_group_get_child_requisition">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
-Retrieve the "child requisition" of the widget, taking account grouping
-of the widget's requisition with other widgets.
+Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
+the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> location to store computed requisition.
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark this window as urgent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57179,6 +54826,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_expander_set_spacing().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57189,29 +54837,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_expander_set_spacing().
</parameters>
<return> spacing between the expander and child.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
-<description>
-If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
-to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
-path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
-#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
-factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
-modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -57234,7 +54859,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57263,55 +54888,40 @@ of @widget's outermost ancestor.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path_length">
-<parameter_description>location to store length of the path, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store length of the path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> location to store allocated path string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store allocated path string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path_reversed">
-<parameter_description> location to store allocated reverse path string, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store allocated reverse path string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
-port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
-window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
-case when using the X Window system.)
+Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
-For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
-can be used to change the size of the frame border.
+The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
+space in the notification area, if necessary.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> The width of the left border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> The height of the top border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> The width of the right border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixmap">
@@ -57393,31 +55003,13 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
-<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_modified">
<description>
Indicates whether the buffer has been modified since the last call
@@ -57465,7 +55057,9 @@ that add tags.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
<description>
-Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
+width is set.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57480,7 +55074,6 @@ Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
<description>
-
Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
@@ -57508,11 +55101,11 @@ indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description>location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57542,64 +55135,96 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_new">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
<description>
-Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+format with the passed @buffer. See
+gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tagset_name">
+<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSocket.
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
<description>
-Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
-with the action will have this accel path, so that their
-accelerators are consistent.
+Returns whether the #GtkMountOperation is currently displaying
+a window.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<description>
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
+always set these to the same value for all windows in an
+application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
+this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
+gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
+benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
+manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator path
+<parameter name="wmclass_name">
+<parameter_description> window name hint
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_class">
+<parameter_description> window class hint
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Sets the label's text from the string @str.
-If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
-indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
-The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
-automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
+Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
+file. See gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a string
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
+name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
@@ -57627,7 +55252,9 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<function name="gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the menu is currently torn off.
+Returns whether the menu is torn off. See
+gtk_menu_set_tearoff_state ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57640,24 +55267,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the menu is currently torn off.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
-<description>
-Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_find_char">
<description>
Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
@@ -57678,7 +55287,7 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description>search limit, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57717,6 +55326,30 @@ If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
+<description>
+Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
<description>
Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
@@ -57753,32 +55386,47 @@ Sets the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAdjustment.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
-
-The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
-space in the notification area, if necessary.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
+port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
+window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
+case when using the X Window system.)
+For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
+can be used to change the size of the frame border.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> The width of the left border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> The height of the top border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> The width of the right border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ctree_move">
@@ -57847,6 +55495,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Creates a new color button.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57857,7 +55506,6 @@ Creates a new color button.
</parameters>
<return> a new color button.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -57902,34 +55550,11 @@ gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
none has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
-<description>
-Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
-recently used item @info.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
<description>
Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have
@@ -57947,31 +55572,28 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
-This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
+on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
-#GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_new">
@@ -57987,11 +55609,11 @@ will cause the scrolled window to create them for you.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description>horizontal adjustment
+<parameter_description> horizontal adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description>vertical adjustment
+<parameter_description> vertical adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58077,6 +55699,10 @@ a value from a string, but takes a #GType instead of #GParamSpec.
This function calls g_value_init() on the @value argument, so it
need not be initialised beforehand.
+Upon errors %FALSE will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR domain.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58097,13 +55723,12 @@ need not be initialised beforehand.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -58120,7 +55745,29 @@ Since: 2.18
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="allocation">
-<parameter_description>a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy to
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58143,11 +55790,33 @@ returned pixbuf.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the displayed pixbuf, or %NULL if
+<return> the displayed pixbuf, or %NULL if
the image is empty
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_spacing">
+<description>
+Sets the ::spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the cells (i.e. the icon and
+the text) of an item.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the spacing
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_binding_entry_clear">
<description>
Clears a binding entry.
@@ -58193,26 +55862,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Gets the fixed width of the column. This value is only meaning may not be
+the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no header image for the page.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the fixed width of the column
</return>
</function>
@@ -58234,7 +55897,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>the new header image @page
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58245,6 +55908,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58253,40 +55917,40 @@ Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the number of items that have been removed from the
recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
+Returns the status of the print operation.
+Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> the status of the print operation
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_has_details">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer details are available
+Returns whether the printer details are available.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58297,13 +55961,16 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer details are available
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer details are available
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
+Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
+necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
+for that.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58314,29 +55981,29 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
<description>
-Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
+<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_wrap_license">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the license text is wrapped
+Returns whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58347,7 +56014,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the license text is wrapped
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the license text is wrapped
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -58390,22 +56056,45 @@ graphics context of @style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
<description>
-Gets the status of the print job.
-
+Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
+indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
+left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
+get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
+screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
+ within_margin
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="within_margin">
+<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
+get the mark onscreen)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the status of @job
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width">
@@ -58432,116 +56121,53 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
+<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
<description>
-Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
-information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
-can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
-gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
-combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
+Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
+again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
+windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
+don't write code that crashes if not.
-If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
-tries them all in the given order before falling back to
-inherited icon themes.
+You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_names">
-<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> desired icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
-about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
-gtk_icon_info_free()
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>an icon size
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
-<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
@@ -58549,6 +56175,7 @@ output should not be clipped
Gets the PPD name of the #GtkPaperSize, which
may be %NULL.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58559,7 +56186,6 @@ may be %NULL.
</parameters>
<return> the PPD name of @size
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -58618,6 +56244,7 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<description>
Creates a new tool item group with label @label.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58628,7 +56255,6 @@ Creates a new tool item group with label @label.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkToolItemGroup.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -58666,6 +56292,7 @@ A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
that require entering license keys.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58682,7 +56309,6 @@ that require entering license keys.
if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard
navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -58732,7 +56358,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="page_func">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
@@ -58747,42 +56373,57 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
<description>
-Retrieves the data type of the selection.
-
+Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
+by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
+list. If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
+name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the data type of the selection.
+If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
+of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
+to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
+Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
+directory change.
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
+if (document_is_new)
+{
+/* the user just created a new document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
+}
+else
+{
+/* the user edited an existing document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
+}
+]|
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
-<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -58790,6 +56431,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the short label text of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58800,50 +56442,49 @@ Gets the short label text of @action.
</parameters>
<return> the short label text.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
+Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
<description>
-Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
+child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
+show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
+the horizontal adjustment.
-Since: 2.10
+The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
+system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
+is moved among the descendents of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58862,52 +56503,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
-<description>
-This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
-based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
-spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
-a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
- percentage argument.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="percentage">
-<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkFontButton">
-<description>
-The ::font-set signal is emitted when the user selects a font.
-When handling this signal, use gtk_font_button_get_font_name()
-to find out which font was just selected.
-
-Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
-changes the font. If you need to react to programmatic font changes
-as well, use the notify::font-name signal.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_visible_line_index">
<description>
Like gtk_text_iter_set_line_index(), but the index is in visible
@@ -58955,25 +56550,6 @@ optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
-the display of the recently used resources.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_cursor">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
@@ -58999,7 +56575,7 @@ Since: 2.8
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description>One of the cell renderers of @icon_view, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> One of the cell renderers of @icon_view, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_editing">
@@ -59015,6 +56591,7 @@ Since: 2.8
Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59025,29 +56602,38 @@ Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
</parameters>
<return> The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
+planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
+To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-Since: 2.6
+To free the return value, use:
+|[
+g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
+g_list_free (list);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="authors">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_plug_new">
@@ -59068,29 +56654,33 @@ can later be plugged into a #GtkSocket by gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_opacity">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
-#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
-widgets have no parent widget.
+Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_opacity().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the requested opacity for this window.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_numbers">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show display numbers,
+Returns whether @chooser should display recently used resources
+prepended by a unique number.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers() instead.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59102,7 +56692,42 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show display numbers,
<return> %TRUE if the recent chooser should show display numbers,
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
+ position If @position is -1, then the newly created column is inserted at
+the end. The column is initialized with the attributes given. If @tree_view
+has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
+property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
</return>
</function>
@@ -59112,6 +56737,7 @@ This function returns the rich text deserialize formats registered
with @buffer using gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59127,7 +56753,6 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()
<return> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s representing the registered
formats.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -59173,10 +56798,37 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
+<description>
+Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
+prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
+this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
+in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_value">
<description>
Gets the current value of the scale button.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59187,7 +56839,6 @@ Gets the current value of the scale button.
</parameters>
<return> current value of the scale button
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -59235,11 +56886,11 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="columns">
-<parameter_description>an array of column numbers
+<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="values">
-<parameter_description>an array of GValues
+<parameter_description> an array of GValues
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_values">
@@ -59304,11 +56955,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
+Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_direction().
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the reading direction for the widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
+<description>
+Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59324,50 +56992,41 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_separator_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkSeparator.
-
-Since: 2.16
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spinner_new">
<description>
-Return value: a new #GtkSpinner
+Returns a new spinner widget. Not yet started.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkSpinner
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -59375,6 +57034,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59385,47 +57045,76 @@ Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog.
</parameters>
<return> an internal copy of the title string which must not be freed.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
+<function name="gtk_init">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
+applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
+toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
+ argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
+never see those standard arguments.
+
+Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
+if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
+gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
+the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
+<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
+
+<note><para>
+This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
+the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
+textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
+</para></note>
+
+<note><para>
+Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
+during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
+almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
+handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
+but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
+similar things.
+</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
+<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
+Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide an uri list.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the length of @targets
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_color">
@@ -59463,6 +57152,7 @@ has been set to the resulting #GdkColor.
Gets the current folder of @chooser as #GFile.
See gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59473,24 +57163,23 @@ See gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
</parameters>
<return> the #GFile for the current folder.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTreeSortable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_default">
<description>
-The ::sort-column-changed signal is emitted when the sort column
-or sort order of @sortable is changed. The signal is emitted before
-the contents of @sortable are resorted.
+Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
+in your application without caring about memory management. The
+returned instance will be freed when you application terminates.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="sortable">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_response">
@@ -59564,102 +57253,22 @@ the mark is deleted.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_duplex">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="duplex">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintDuplex value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_add_entry">
-<description>
-Inserts a pair of key symbol and modifier mask into the key hash.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key symbol for this binding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifiers for this binding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> value to insert in the key hash
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkIMContext">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
<description>
-The ::delete-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
-needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.
+Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset">
-<parameter_description> the character offset from the cursor position of the text
-to be deleted. A negative value indicates a position before
-the cursor.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_chars">
-<parameter_description> the number of characters to be deleted
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+<return> the buffer's tag table
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate_line">
-<description>
-Revalidate a single line of the btree for the given view, propagate
-results up through the entire tree.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line">
-<parameter_description> line to validate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="view_id">
-<parameter_description> view ID for the view to validate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag_by_name">
<description>
Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
@@ -59691,6 +57300,7 @@ get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag().
<description>
Gets the entry @completion has been attached to.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59701,7 +57311,6 @@ Gets the entry @completion has been attached to.
</parameters>
<return> The entry @completion has been attached to.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -59721,24 +57330,6 @@ Gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_freeze_updates">
-<description>
-Freezes most updates on the model, so that performing multiple
-operations on the files in the model do not cause any events.
-Use _gtk_file_system_model_thaw_updates() to resume proper
-operations. It is fine to call this function multiple times as
-long as freeze and thaw calls are balanced.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_height_rows">
<description>
Queries the height of detail cells, in rows.
@@ -59783,6 +57374,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH,
converted to @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59797,7 +57389,6 @@ converted to @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the paper width, in units of @unit
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -59807,6 +57398,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkToggleAction object. To add the action to
a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59815,11 +57407,11 @@ call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>A tooltip for the action, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -59830,7 +57422,6 @@ action, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkToggleAction
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -59868,6 +57459,26 @@ Removes a target from a target list.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
+<description>
+Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are left
+untouched. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> the font description to use, or %NULL to undo
+the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_sensitive">
<description>
Changes the sensitivity of @action_group
@@ -59910,18 +57521,23 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_not_found">
<description>
-Return value: The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show the recently used resources that
+were not found.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
+<return> %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
+%FALSE otheriwse.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -59947,18 +57563,27 @@ the window to be repositioned to satisfy the new constraint.
<function name="gtk_alternative_dialog_button_order">
<description>
-Returns: Whether the alternative button order should be used
+Returns %TRUE if dialogs are expected to use an alternative
+button order on the screen @screen. See
+gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more details
+about alternative button order.
+
+If you need to use this function, you should probably connect
+to the ::notify:gtk-alternative-button-order signal on the
+#GtkSettings object associated to @screen, in order to be
+notified if the button order setting changes.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkScreen, or %NULL to use the default screen
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL to use the default screen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> Whether the alternative button order should be used
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -59980,21 +57605,14 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the vertical scrollbar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
<description>
-Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
-maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
-width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
-fill any extra space.
+Removes all rows from @tree_store
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_width">
-<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60003,7 +57621,10 @@ fill any extra space.
<function name="gtk_print_job_get_track_print_status">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if print job status will be reported after printing
+Returns wheter jobs will be tracked after printing.
+For details, see gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60014,26 +57635,25 @@ Return value: %TRUE if print job status will be reported after printing
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if print job status will be reported after printing
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
<description>
-Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
-
+Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
-by one.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -60057,28 +57677,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
-<description>
-Calls @func on all expanded rows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_filename">
<description>
This function returns the selected filename in the GLib file name
@@ -60100,48 +57698,22 @@ If no file is selected then the selected directory path is returned.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Returns the action area of @info_bar.
-<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
-<description>
-Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
-See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
-this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
- end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_offset">
-<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_offset">
-<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the action area.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
@@ -60177,28 +57749,87 @@ result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_element">
<description>
-Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
-(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
-equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
-moves to the start of the next line. See
-gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
-a character offset.
+Inserts a new element in the toolbar at the given position.
+
+If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET, @widget is used as the new element.
+If @type == %GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, @widget is used to determine
+the radio group for the new element. In all other cases, @widget must
+be %NULL.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> a value of type #GtkToolbarChildType that determines what @widget
+will be.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the element's label.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> any data you wish to pass to the callback.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the number of widgets to insert this element after.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
+<description>
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_with_model">
@@ -60209,6 +57840,7 @@ using GTK_ENTRY (GTK_BIN (combo_box_entry)->child). To add and remove
strings from the list, just modify @model using its data manipulation
API.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60223,7 +57855,6 @@ API.
</parameters>
<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -60248,23 +57879,11 @@ inclusive.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkWidget">
-<description>
-The "scroll-arrow-vlength" style property defines the length of
-vertical scroll arrows.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_minus_button">
<description>
Retrieves the minus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60275,23 +57894,9 @@ Retrieves the minus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
</parameters>
<return> the minus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolPalette">
-<description>
-Whether the item group should receive extra space when the palette grows.
-at a given time.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
@@ -60330,7 +57935,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup to which the accelerators for the
menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -60339,42 +57944,40 @@ menu items will be added, or %NULL to create a new one
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPaned">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
<description>
-The ::cancel-position signal is a
-<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
-which gets emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key
-bindings. The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to
-moving it.
-
-The default binding for this signal is Escape.
+Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
+and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
+See gtk_drag_dest_set().
-Since: 2.0
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
+on that widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
+should support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_tabs">
@@ -60528,101 +58131,37 @@ Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description>the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description>used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_scale_format_value">
-<description>
-Emits #GtkScale::format-value signal to format the value,
-if no user signal handlers, falls back to a default format.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> adjustment value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> formatted value
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data">
-<description>
-Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
-gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
-is popped down again.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> @popup_data associated with @ifactory
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
<description>
-Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
-typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
-existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
-only some sequences of characters are allowed.
-
-This function is implemented by emitting the
-GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
-response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
-is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
-gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
-for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
-methods must be prepared to function without context.
-
+Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
+This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
-holding context around the insertion point.
-If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
-the result stored in this location with g_free().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_index">
-<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
-within @text.
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
-you must free the result stored in *text.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_starts">
<description>
Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start() up to @count times.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60637,7 +58176,6 @@ Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start() up to @count times.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -60683,15 +58221,42 @@ of #GtkItemFactoryEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the widget which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
+<return> the widget which corresponds to the given action, or %NULL
if no widget was found
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
+%TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see
+gtk_widget_get_visible().
+
+This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
+but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
+some condition.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> whether the widget should be shown or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_number_up">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60702,13 +58267,16 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
</parameters>
<return> the number of pages per sheet
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_index">
<description>
-Return value: byte index of @iter with respect to the start of the line
+Returns the number of bytes from the start of the
+line to the given @iter, not counting bytes that
+are invisible due to tags with the "invisible" flag
+toggled on.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60723,7 +58291,14 @@ Return value: byte index of @iter with respect to the start of the line
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_drop_index">
<description>
-Return value: The position corresponding to the point (@x, @y) on the toolbar.
+Returns the position corresponding to the indicated point on
+ toolbar This is useful when dragging items to the toolbar:
+this function returns the position a new item should be
+inserted.
+
+ x and @y are in @toolbar coordinates.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60742,49 +58317,25 @@ Return value: The position corresponding to the point (@x, @y) on the toolbar.
</parameters>
<return> The position corresponding to the point (@x, @y) on the toolbar.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
<description>
-Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
-indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
-left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
-If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
-get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
-screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
- within_margin
+Gets the status of the print job.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="within_margin">
-<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
-get the mark onscreen)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the status of @job
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cell_area">
@@ -60806,11 +58357,11 @@ realized.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreePath for the row, or %NULL to get only horizontal coordinates
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath for the row, or %NULL to get only horizontal coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTreeViewColumn for the column, or %NULL to get only vertical coordinates
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn for the column, or %NULL to get only vertical coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="rect">
@@ -60892,6 +58443,7 @@ or if you have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager
object or if you wish to share a common #GtkRecentManager object
among multiple #GtkRecentChooser widgets.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60902,7 +58454,6 @@ among multiple #GtkRecentChooser widgets.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu, bound to @manager.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -60910,54 +58461,16 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellView widget.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_reshow_with_initial_size">
-<description>
-Hides @window, then reshows it, resetting the
-default size and position of the window. Used
-by GUI builders only.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_child">
-<description>
-Sets, or unsets if @child is %NULL, the focused child of @container.
-
-This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
- container Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
-default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_block_activate_from">
<description>
Disables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
@@ -60987,7 +58500,8 @@ action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
+Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61000,79 +58514,25 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_new">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
<description>
-Create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.
-
-Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
+Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
+model is unset.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="initial_chars">
-<parameter_description>initial buffer text, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_initial_chars">
-<parameter_description> number of characters in @initial_chars, or -1
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window">
-<description>
-Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying
-tooltips with @custom_window. GTK+ will take care of showing and
-hiding @custom_window at the right moment, to behave likewise as
-the default tooltip window. If @custom_window is %NULL, the default
-tooltip window will be used.
-
-If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to
-have the name "gtk-tooltip", see gtk_widget_set_name().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="custom_window">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_row_span_column">
-<description>
-Sets the column with row span information for @combo_box to be @row_span.
-The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
-an item should span.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_span">
-<parameter_description> A column in the model passed during construction.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_fixed_set_has_window">
<description>
Sets whether a #GtkFixed widget is created with a separate
@@ -61161,7 +58621,7 @@ Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="base_column">
-<parameter_description>The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61173,6 +58633,7 @@ Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
Looks up an action by following a path. See gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()
for more information about paths.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61188,7 +58649,6 @@ for more information about paths.
<return> the action whose proxy widget is found by following the path,
or %NULL if no widget was found.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -61213,31 +58673,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_layout_get_line_xrange">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Find the range of X coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter. Private for 2.0 due to API freeze, could
-be made public for 2.2.
+Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- width location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available">
@@ -61291,7 +58742,9 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_recent_action_get_show_numbers">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61302,7 +58755,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -61347,7 +58799,7 @@ Since: 2.8
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>the name of the themed icon
+<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61371,12 +58823,12 @@ label in the popup menu.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description>the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
@@ -61390,25 +58842,24 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
-again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
-windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
-don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61420,6 +58871,7 @@ Since: 2.2
Selects the file referred to by @file. An internal function. See
_gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61432,14 +58884,13 @@ _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the path was
selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -61491,23 +58942,30 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
+<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
+signal.
+
+Since: 2.2
+Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
+your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
+from any other context is illegal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -61527,7 +58985,7 @@ Prepends a page to @notebook.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -61537,30 +58995,6 @@ page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
-<description>
-Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
-<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
-Note that this will be called once for each time
-gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
-is called on a builder.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column">
<description>
Sets the column with markup information for @icon_view to be
@@ -61584,19 +59018,28 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkStyle">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
<description>
-Emitted when the aspects of the style specific to a particular colormap
-and depth are being cleaned up. A connection to this signal can be useful
-if a widget wants to cache objects like a #GdkGC as object data on #GtkStyle.
-This signal provides a convenient place to free such cached objects.
+Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61659,20 +59102,6 @@ Obtains information about how @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_push_message">
-<description>
-Adds a client message to the stack of current XEMBED events.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="xevent">
-<parameter_description> a XEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard">
<description>
Pastes the contents of a clipboard at the insertion point, or at
@@ -61691,7 +59120,7 @@ the main loop runs, the paste data will be inserted.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="override_location">
-<parameter_description>location to insert pasted text, or %NULL for
+<parameter_description> location to insert pasted text, or %NULL for
at the cursor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -61715,46 +59144,42 @@ Creates a new empty #GtkImage widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Looks up a file in pixmap path for the specified #GtkSettings.
-If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
-g_warning() and returns %NULL.
+Gets the label widget of @group.
+See gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> Scanner used to get line number information for the
-warning message, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_file">
-<parameter_description> name of the pixmap file to locate.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the filename.
+<return> the label widget of @group
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
<description>
-Gets the action for this entry.
+Returns the label used by the tool button, or %NULL if the tool button
+doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
+string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action
+<return> The label, or %NULL
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -61778,30 +59203,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
-<description>
-Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
-the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
-like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
-the main area of the application.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="focus_on_click">
-<parameter_description> whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked
-with the mouse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child
@@ -61831,7 +59232,9 @@ moved among the descendents of @container
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_visible">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if visible
+Returns %TRUE if the mark is visible (i.e. a cursor is displayed
+for it).
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61844,23 +59247,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if visible
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_track_visited_links">
-<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clicked links are remembered
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_name">
<description>
Sets the name of this tray icon.
@@ -61884,21 +59270,56 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
-method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
+gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
+#GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
+modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
+style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
+returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
+
+Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
+normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
+the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
+thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
+to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
+owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
+around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<description>
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
@@ -61921,19 +59342,19 @@ See gtk_window_set_has_frame(), gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description>location to store the width of the frame at the left, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the left, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description>location to store the height of the frame at the top, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the top, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description>location to store the width of the frame at the returns, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the returns, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description>location to store the height of the frame at the bottom, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the bottom, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61979,11 +59400,12 @@ the gtk_show_uri() call. If timestamp is not known you can take
This function can be used as a replacement for gnome_vfs_url_show()
and gnome_url_show().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description>screen to show the uri on or %NULL for the default screen
+<parameter_description> screen to show the uri on or %NULL for the default screen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="uri">
@@ -62001,13 +59423,45 @@ and gnome_url_show().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE on error.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
+<description>
+Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
+#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
+style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
+See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="primary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="secondary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_sensitive">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the icon is sensitive.
+Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62022,7 +59476,6 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the icon is sensitive.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the icon is sensitive.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -62050,91 +59503,68 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the paper size
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
+Removes a space from the specified position.
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_file_part">
-<description>
-Sets the current text shown in the file chooser entry.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_part">
-<parameter_description> text to display in the entry, in UTF-8
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
<description>
-Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
- position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
-works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
-moved to the end of the level.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper size
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkImage
-to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
-the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
+Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> image representation being used
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_max_width">
<description>
-Return value: The maximum width of the @tree_column.
+Returns the maximum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no maximum
+width is set.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62151,6 +59581,7 @@ Return value: The maximum width of the @tree_column.
<description>
Gets the position of @item in @group as index.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62165,98 +59596,26 @@ Gets the position of @item in @group as index.
</parameters>
<return> the index of @item in @group or -1 if @item is no child of @group
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
<description>
-Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
-print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
-
-Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
-pages is complete. You can connect to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
-information about the progress of the print operation.
-Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
-
-If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
-#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
-asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
-#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
-operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
-the print succeeds or fails).
-|[
-if (settings != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
-
-if (page_setup != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
-
-g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
-G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
-g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
-G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
-
-res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
-GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
-parent,
-&error);
-
-if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
-{
-error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-"Error printing file:\n%s",
-error->message);
-g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
-G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
-gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
-g_error_free (error);
-}
-else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
-{
-if (settings != NULL)
-g_object_unref (settings);
-settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
-}
-]|
-
-Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
-given #GtkPrintOperation.
+Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action to start
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog
+<parameter name="n_columns">
+<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>Return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
-completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
-the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
-and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
-asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
-done.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new #GtkListStore
</return>
</function>
@@ -62348,7 +59707,8 @@ needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_column_type">
<description>
-Return value: The type of the column.
+Returns the type of the column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62365,26 +59725,6 @@ Return value: The type of the column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_space">
-<description>
-Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the number of widgets after which a space should be inserted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_icons">
<description>
Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset
@@ -62393,6 +59733,7 @@ The set of values for the context string is system dependent,
but will typically include such values as "Applications" and
"MimeTypes".
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62411,62 +59752,43 @@ icons in the theme. You must first free each element
in the list with g_free(), then free the list itself
with g_list_free().
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
-its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> the deserialize function to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> @function's user_data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
<description>
-Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of jobs on @printer
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
@@ -62474,6 +59796,7 @@ Since: 2.10
Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the item at @path.
This image is used for a drag icon.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62488,125 +59811,64 @@ This image is used for a drag icon.
</parameters>
<return> a newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_pixbuf">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use for the column. This
-function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
-setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
-cell renderer as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove an
-older one.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func_data">
-<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> The destroy notification for @func_data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the contents of the selection data as a #GdkPixbuf.
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_location">
-<description>
-Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at @iter.
-The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
-gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these
-coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> bounds of the character at @iter
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
-<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
-user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
+image type and it could be converted to a #GdkPixbuf, a
+newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise %NULL.
+If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+Gets the gicon of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
-returned string with g_free() when done.
+<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_equal">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
<description>
-Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible
-mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform
-better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and
-comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than
-gtk_text_iter_compare().
-
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
@@ -62633,6 +59895,7 @@ the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62644,7 +59907,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
mapped.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -62700,58 +59962,78 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_colormap">
<description>
-Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
-call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()
-instead.
-
+Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets.
+gtk_widget_push_colormap() is a better function to use if
+you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current text alignment of @shell
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
<description>
-Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
+Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
+ child
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+widget does not have a menu label other than
+the default menu label, or the menu label widget
+is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
+the widget and must not be freed.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
<description>
-Return value: The group @button belongs to.
+Returns the radio button group @button belongs to.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62762,7 +60044,6 @@ Return value: The group @button belongs to.
</parameters>
<return> The group @button belongs to.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -62781,7 +60062,27 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="logo">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
+<description>
+Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageOrientation value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62792,6 +60093,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Copies a #GtkPageSetup.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62802,30 +60104,26 @@ Copies a #GtkPageSetup.
</parameters>
<return> a copy of @other
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
<description>
-Creates a new custom paper dialog.
-
+Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
+opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>the title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_mode">
@@ -62846,7 +60144,13 @@ Gets the current mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
<function name="gtk_widget_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
+Returns the widget's sensitivity (in the sense of returning
+the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
+
+The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
+own and its parent widget's sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62857,13 +60161,14 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_model">
<description>
-Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
+Returns the model the #GtkTreeView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
+model is unset.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -62876,22 +60181,22 @@ Return value: A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -62919,16 +60224,16 @@ using the given style and state and shadow type.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -62969,20 +60274,24 @@ accelerators are added or removed from the associated widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkLayout">
+<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
<description>
-Set the scroll adjustments for the layout. Usually scrolled containers
-like #GtkScrolledWindow will emit this signal to connect two instances
-of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkLayout.
+This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
+based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
+spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
+a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
+ percentage argument.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="horizontal">
-<parameter_description> the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vertical">
-<parameter_description> the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="percentage">
+<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62991,7 +60300,10 @@ of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkLayout.
<function name="gtk_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
+See gtk_button_set_focus_on_click().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63003,13 +60315,15 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
<return> %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
the mouse.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_single_match">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the
+Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
+only a single match.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63021,7 +60335,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the
<return> %TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the
number of matches.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -63031,6 +60344,7 @@ Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()
instead.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63041,7 +60355,6 @@ instead.
</parameters>
<return> the current text size group of @shell
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -63066,42 +60379,91 @@ Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text() instead.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tip_text">
-<parameter_description>text to be used as tooltip text for @tool_item
+<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for @tool_item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tip_private">
-<parameter_description>text to be used as private tooltip text
+<parameter_description> text to be used as private tooltip text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
-the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
+Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
+is the first page.
-Since: 2.12
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
+<description>
+Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
+and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
+if more details about the icon are needed, use
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+
+Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
+update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
+GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
+update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
+using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
+returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
+icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
+exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
+or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
+the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
+icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_text">
<description>
-Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
+Returns the text in the range [ start,@end). Excludes undisplayed
+text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if
+ include_hidden_chars is %FALSE. Does not include characters
+representing embedded images, so byte and character indexes into
+the returned string do <emphasis>not</emphasis> correspond to byte
+and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with
+gtk_text_buffer_get_slice().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63131,6 +60493,7 @@ Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
Locks are added and removed using gtk_accel_group_lock() and
gtk_accel_group_unlock().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63142,7 +60505,6 @@ gtk_accel_group_unlock().
<return> %TRUE if there are 1 or more locks on the @accel_group,
%FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -63162,70 +60524,46 @@ Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_selected_printer">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
<description>
-Gets the currently selected printer.
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
+gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
+negative, moves backward instead of forward.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently selected printer
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererSpinner">
-<description>
-The #GtkIconSize value that specifies the size of the rendered spinner.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
<description>
-Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
-only needs to be used when the application is
-starting drags itself, and is not needed when
-gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+Sets whether selection is supported by #GtkPrintOperation.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the source widget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> The targets (data formats) in which the
-source can provide the data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> The button the user clicked to start the drag.
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> The event that triggered the start of the drag.
+<parameter name="support_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to support selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the context for this drag.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
@@ -63246,43 +60584,39 @@ Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_accept_focus">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_tree_coords">
<description>
-Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
-the input focus. This function sets this hint.
+Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
+tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to let this window receive input focus
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate relative to the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tx">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ty">
+<parameter_description> return location for tree Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
-construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
-text column using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
@@ -63301,7 +60635,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -63355,7 +60689,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_nth_page">
<description>
-Return value: The child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is out of bounds.
+Returns the child widget contained in page number @page_num.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63370,18 +60706,27 @@ Return value: The child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is out of bounds.
</parameters>
<return> The child widget, or %NULL if @page_num is out of bounds.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolbar">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
<description>
-Is %TRUE if the icon-size property has been set.
+Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
+is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
+multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -63407,36 +60752,11 @@ feedback, such as displaying it in a child of the root window.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set">
-<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_prop_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_get_model">
<description>
-Return value: A pointer to a #GtkTreeModel.
+Returns a pointer to the child model of @filter.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63447,7 +60767,6 @@ Return value: A pointer to a #GtkTreeModel.
</parameters>
<return> A pointer to a #GtkTreeModel.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -63516,30 +60835,60 @@ left-to-right insertion and right-to-left insertion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Creates up a #GtkStyle from styles defined in a RC file by providing
+the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
+when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
+don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
+would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
+
+The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
+|[
+gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
+gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
+gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
+path, class_path,
+G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
+]|
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="artists">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="widget_path">
+<parameter_description> the widget path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
+if no matching against the widget path should be done
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="class_path">
+<parameter_description> the class path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
+if no matching against the class path should be done.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> a type that will be used along with parent types of this type
+when matching against class styles, or #G_TYPE_NONE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A style created by matching with the supplied paths,
+or %NULL if nothing matching was specified and the default style should
+be used. The returned value is owned by GTK+ as part of an internal cache,
+so you must call g_object_ref() on the returned value if you want to
+keep a reference to it.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_closure">
<description>
-Returns: the accel closure for this action. The returned closure is
+Returns the accel closure for this action.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63553,23 +60902,12 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
-<description>
-Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
<description>
-Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
+Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
+GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63580,7 +60918,6 @@ Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
</parameters>
<return> current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -63590,11 +60927,12 @@ Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
+<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -63604,13 +60942,17 @@ stock item indicated by @stock_id.
</parameters>
<return> The new #GtkRadioToolItem
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_text">
<description>
-Returns: a newly allocated string containing the currently active text.
+Returns the currently active string in @combo_box or %NULL if none
+is selected. Note that you can only use this function with combo
+boxes constructed with gtk_combo_box_new_text() and with
+#GtkComboBoxEntry<!-- -->s.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63622,28 +60964,9 @@ Returns: a newly allocated string containing the currently active text.
<return> a newly allocated string containing the currently active text.
Must be freed with g_free().
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_menu_bar_cycle_focus">
-<description>
-Move the focus between menubars in the toplevel.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> direction in which to cycle the focus
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_get_size">
<description>
Obtains the width and height needed to render the column. This is used
@@ -63656,42 +60979,23 @@ primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_area">
-<parameter_description>The area a cell in the column will be allocated, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> The area a cell in the column will be allocated, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to return x offset of a cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return x offset of a cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y_offset">
-<parameter_description>location to return y offset of a cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return y offset of a cell relative to @cell_area, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description>location to return width needed to render a cell, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to return width needed to render a cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description>location to return height needed to render a cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_remove_entry">
-<description>
-Removes a value previously added to the key hash with
-_gtk_key_hash_add_entry().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> value previously added with _gtk_key_hash_add_entry()
+<parameter_description> location to return height needed to render a cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -63718,75 +61022,100 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
+<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
<description>
-Returns: the state of @widget.
+This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
+the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
+For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
+Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
+particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
+location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the state of @widget.
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_free">
+<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_enum">
<description>
-Free the given #GtkPaperSize object.
+A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
+or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a single
+enumeration value.
+
+The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
+its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
+may be surrounded by parentheses.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> a #GParamSpec
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gstring">
+<parameter_description> the #GString to be parsed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue which must hold enum values.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+has been set to the resulting #GEnumValue.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPrinter">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_free">
<description>
-Gets emitted in response to a request for detailed information
-about a printer from the print backend. The @success parameter
-indicates if the information was actually obtained.
+Free the given #GtkPaperSize object.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkPrinter on which the signal is emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="success">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the details were successfully acquired
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_skip_pager_hint">
<description>
-Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint().
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the item factory from which @widget was created, or %NULL
+<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in pager
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -63853,18 +61182,22 @@ direction, widget state, or icon size.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererProgress">
+<function name="gtk_entry_new_with_buffer">
<description>
-The "orientation" property controls the direction and growth
-direction of the progress bar (left-to-right, right-to-left,
-top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top).
+Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> The buffer to use for the new #GtkEntry.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkEntry
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_style">
@@ -63911,40 +61244,51 @@ columns with cell renderer properties).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_files">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
<description>
-Sets whether files (as opposed to folders) should be included
-in the #GtkTreeModel for display.
+Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
+
+Note that values will be restricted by
+<literal>upper - page-size</literal> if the page-size
+property is nonzero.
+
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_files">
-<parameter_description> whether files (as opposed to folders) should
-be displayed.
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> the new maximum value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_justification">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
<description>
-Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
+See also gtk_widget_get_action().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default justification
+<return> a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
+and must not be modified.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -63953,6 +61297,7 @@ Tags in the buffer may override the default.
Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
@chooser. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63965,39 +61310,6 @@ Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
-<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
-currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_get_focus_wrapped">
-<description>
-Gets whether the current focus sequence has wrapped around
-to the beginning of the ultimate toplevel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the focus sequence has wrapped around.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64006,6 +61318,7 @@ to the beginning of the ultimate toplevel.
Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
drag-and-drop.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64016,7 +61329,6 @@ drag-and-drop.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -64024,6 +61336,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Whether the widget is mapped.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64034,37 +61347,6 @@ Whether the widget is mapped.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
-<description>
-Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
-filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
-returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
-it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
-switch occurs.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -64098,11 +61380,11 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="focus_column">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="focus_cell">
-<parameter_description>A #GtkCellRenderer, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_editing">
@@ -64138,7 +61420,15 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
<description>
-Return value: the default language as a #PangoLanguage, must not be
+Returns the #PangoLanguage for the default language currently in
+effect. (Note that this can change over the life of an
+application.) The default language is derived from the current
+locale. It determines, for example, whether GTK+ uses the
+right-to-left or left-to-right text direction.
+
+This function is equivalent to pango_language_get_default(). See
+that function for details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64165,26 +61455,6 @@ pass %NULL to get an empty label widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_context_id">
-<description>
-Returns: an integer id
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_description">
-<parameter_description> textual description of what context
-the new message is being used in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer id
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_size_group_remove_widget">
<description>
Removes a widget from a #GtkSizeGroup.
@@ -64228,7 +61498,11 @@ Since: 2.20
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_orientation">
<description>
-Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the orientation
+Returns the orientation used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons
+they should use.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64240,25 +61514,6 @@ Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the orientation
<return> a #GtkOrientation indicating the orientation
used for @tool_item
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_im_module_create">
-<description>
-Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
-ID @context_id.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context ID for the context type to create
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
-if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64287,6 +61542,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Gets whether @group is collapsed or expanded.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64297,7 +61553,6 @@ Gets whether @group is collapsed or expanded.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @group is collapsed, %FALSE if it is expanded
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -64305,6 +61560,7 @@ Since: 2.20
<description>
Gets the current page of the #GtkPrintDialog.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64315,7 +61571,6 @@ Gets the current page of the #GtkPrintDialog.
</parameters>
<return> the current page of @dialog
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -64444,7 +61699,7 @@ Appends a page to @notebook.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -64476,7 +61731,10 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Return value: A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
+Returns the window that @tree_view renders to. This is used primarily to
+compare to <literal>event->window</literal> to confirm that the event on
+ tree_view is on the right window.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64489,60 +61747,63 @@ Return value: A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
-(with printf()-style).
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+Returns the @n<!-- -->'th item on @toolbar, or %NULL if the
+toolbar does not contain an @n<!-- -->'th item.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description>printf()-style format string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="n">
+<parameter_description> A position on the toolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
+isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_item_position">
<description>
-Return value: The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
+Sets the position of @item in the list of children of @group.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n">
-<parameter_description> A position on the toolbar
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to move to a new position, should
+be a child of @group.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the new position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
+The position -1 means end of list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
-isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_apply_button">
<description>
Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
+Since: 2.14
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64553,9 +61814,6 @@ Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkWidget
-Since: 2.14
-
-Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64573,24 +61831,13 @@ See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>new scroll adjustment
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_set_focus_wrapped">
-<description>
-Sets a flag indicating that the current focus sequence wrapped
-around to the beginning of the ultimate toplevel.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_alignment_get_padding">
<description>
Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
@@ -64605,40 +61852,50 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="padding_top">
-<parameter_description>location to store the padding for the top of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the padding for the top of the widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="padding_bottom">
-<parameter_description>location to store the padding for the bottom of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the padding for the bottom of the widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="padding_left">
-<parameter_description>location to store the padding for the left of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the padding for the left of the widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="padding_right">
-<parameter_description>location to store the padding for the right of the widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store the padding for the right of the widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
+Sets an alternative button order. If the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
+the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
+response ids in @new_order.
-Since: 2.10
+See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
+
+This function is for use by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
+<parameter name="n_params">
+<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64666,29 +61923,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
-<description>
-Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
-with @uri inside the recent manager.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_custom">
<description>
Adds a rule to a filter that allows resources based on a custom callback
@@ -64731,6 +61965,7 @@ the file will be displayed.
<description>
Indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64741,108 +61976,42 @@ Indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the there is text selected
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
-<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_expander_column">
-<description>
-Return value: The expander column.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The expander column.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
-attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
-You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
-gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
-attributes in effect at a given text position.
-
-The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
-and should be freed.
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
+<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_space">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label">
<description>
-Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
+Gets the label of @group.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
-<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
-is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
-create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
-the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+<return> the label of @group. The label is an internal string of @group
+and must not be modified. Note that %NULL is returned if a custom
+label has been set with gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -64850,13 +62019,13 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Creates a new font picker widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new font picker widget.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -64882,7 +62051,7 @@ have to be direct children)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="old_focus">
-<parameter_description>widget to use for the starting position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> widget to use for the starting position, or %NULL
to determine this automatically.
(Note, this argument isn't used for GTK_DIR_TAB_*,
which is the only @direction we use currently,
@@ -64896,23 +62065,23 @@ removed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_unset_focus_and_default">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Checks whether the focus and default widgets of @window are
- widget or a descendent of @widget, and if so, unset them.
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget inside of @window
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords">
@@ -64974,7 +62143,15 @@ use by language bindings.
<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Returns: the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
+Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
+The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
+selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
+positioned.
+
+This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
+or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64986,7 +62163,6 @@ Returns: the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
not be freed or modified.
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
@@ -65040,7 +62216,10 @@ mnemonic character
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_authors">
<description>
-Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
+Returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65053,7 +62232,6 @@ Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
the authors. The array is owned by the about dialog
and must not be modified.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -65087,6 +62265,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the transient parent used by the #GtkMountOperation
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65097,13 +62276,14 @@ Gets the transient parent used by the #GtkMountOperation
</parameters>
<return> the transient parent for windows shown by @op
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_is_accepting_jobs">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
+Returns whether the printer is accepting jobs
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65114,7 +62294,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -65139,22 +62318,26 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_quality">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+Unselects the file referred to by @uri. If the file
+is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
+is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI to unselect
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the print quality
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_gicon">
@@ -65164,6 +62347,7 @@ If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
will be updated appropriately.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65172,55 +62356,47 @@ will be updated appropriately.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
<description>
-Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
-<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
-the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
-added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
-about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
-gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
-
-Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
-considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
+Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
+item factory.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> ancestor type
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_item">
<description>
Gets the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItem.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged item.
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -65247,25 +62423,128 @@ class of @widget<!-- -->'s parent
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolShell">
+<function name="gtk_window_resize">
<description>
-Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
+Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry
+constraints. The default geometry constraint is that windows may
+not be smaller than their size request; to override this
+constraint, call gtk_widget_set_size_request() to set the window's
+request to a smaller value.
+
+If gtk_window_resize() is called before showing a window for the
+first time, it overrides any default size set with
+gtk_window_set_default_size().
+
+Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width in pixels to resize the window to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height in pixels to resize the window to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
<description>
-Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
-filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
+Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
+unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
+
+ iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<description>
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all">
+<description>
+Unselects all the items inside @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_previous_line">
+<description>
+Move the iterator to the beginning of the previous line. The lines
+of a wrapped paragraph are treated as distinct for this operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65316,18 +62595,6 @@ or %NULL to unset a previously set custom theme
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAlignment">
-<description>
-The padding to insert at the right of the widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page">
<description>
If @full_page is %TRUE, the transformation for the cairo context
@@ -65353,81 +62620,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
<description>
-Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
-overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
-overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
-the menu will be rebuilt.
+Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
+gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
-The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
-will do in response to the #GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy signal.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
-<description>
-Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default right margin
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
-<description>
-Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
-an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
-
-Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
-during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
-for information about runtime accelerator changes.
-
-If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
-of times.
-
-Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
-locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
-changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
-have to be unlocked.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
<description>
@@ -65440,7 +62651,9 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_hscrollbar">
<description>
-Returns: the horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
+Returns the horizontal scrollbar of @scrolled_window.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65452,7 +62665,6 @@ Returns: the horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
<return> the horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window, or
%NULL if it does not have one.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -65496,44 +62708,30 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_popup_data">
<description>
-Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
-to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
-gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
-automatically around expose events sent to the
-widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
-window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
-buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
-update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
-primitives being rendered.
-
-In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
-so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
-if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
+Obtains the @popup_data which was passed to
+gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
+is popped down again.
-Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
-expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
-pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
-gdk_window_begin_paint()).
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="double_buffered">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> @popup_data associated with @ifactory
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_text_column">
<description>
-Returns: the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns the column with text for @icon_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65544,7 +62742,6 @@ Returns: the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
</parameters>
<return> the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -65563,7 +62760,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget used as icon, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the widget used as icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65588,11 +62785,28 @@ Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
<description>
Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
was last modified.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65604,29 +62818,31 @@ was last modified.
<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
<description>
-Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
+Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStockItem
+<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_buffer">
<description>
-Return value:the buffer
+Returns the #GtkTextBuffer this iterator is associated with.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65635,46 +62851,58 @@ Return value:the buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the buffer
+<return> the buffer
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkTreeView">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
<description>
-The position of the cursor (focused cell) has changed.
+Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
+allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
+the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
+leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
+setting off will improve performance.
+
+Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
+off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
+its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
+anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
+%NO_WINDOW widget that <emphasis>does</emphasis> draw on @widget->window,
+you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
+of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
+regions newly when the widget increases size.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
+when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
+new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new">
<description>
-Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
-drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
-compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
-
-Please note that the semantics of this call will change
-in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
-window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
-channel being drawn correctly.
+<return> a new link button widget.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -65682,6 +62910,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65692,7 +62921,6 @@ Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
</parameters>
<return> the icon name for @printer
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -65727,7 +62955,15 @@ has been set to the resulting #GtkBorder.
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_slice">
<description>
-Return value: slice of text from the buffer
+Returns the text in the given range. A "slice" is an array of
+characters encoded in UTF-8 format, including the Unicode "unknown"
+character 0xFFFC for iterable non-character elements in the buffer,
+such as images. Because images are encoded in the slice, byte and
+character offsets in the returned array will correspond to byte
+offsets in the text buffer. Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal
+text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
+widget is in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65744,23 +62980,23 @@ Return value: slice of text from the buffer
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
<description>
-Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
-override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
-"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
-with pango_tab_array_free().
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
+colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
+create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
+child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
+path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
-tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
+<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -65788,23 +63024,32 @@ gtk_widget_path()), so names with embedded periods may cause confusion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only">
<description>
-Get the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION,
-converted to a #GtkPageOrientation.
+Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
+file selector. If @local_only is %TRUE (the default),
+then the selected file are files are guaranteed to be
+accessible through the operating systems native file
+file system and therefore the application only
+needs to worry about the filename functions in
+#GtkFileChooser, like gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
+rather than the URI functions like
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="local_only">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if only local files can be selected
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_resize_grip">
@@ -65869,7 +63114,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="default_page_setup">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkPageSetup, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65893,29 +63138,20 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
<description>
-Retrieves the image used for the icon.
-
-Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
-method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
-#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
+including the paragraph delimiters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
-
-Since: 2.16
+<return> number of characters in the line
</return>
</function>
@@ -65923,6 +63159,7 @@ Since: 2.16
<description>
Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65933,7 +63170,6 @@ Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
</parameters>
<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -65958,161 +63194,154 @@ is no next @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is set to be invalid.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
<description>
-Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
+Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
+entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
+will be returned.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the buffer's tag table
+<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line">
<description>
-Return value: the currently used compare function for the search code.
+Moves iterator @iter to the start of the line @line_number. If
+ line_number is negative or larger than the number of lines in the
+buffer, moves @iter to the start of the last line in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number (counted from 0)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_duplex">
<description>
-Removes @filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="duplex">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintDuplex value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items">
<description>
-Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
+Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the length of @entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s whose @callback members
+must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
-Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
- buffer See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
+Removes @filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum allowed number of characters
-in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
<description>
-Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
-Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
-for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
-this setting has no effect.
+Get the tag priority.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="blinking">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The tag's priority.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
+<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
<description>
+Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
+again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
+iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
+up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-Adds a mark at @value.
-
-A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
-and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
-marks value.
-
-If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
+onscreen.
-To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
-the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
-is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
-#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
-right.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description>Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66180,6 +63409,7 @@ Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box_gap() instead.
<description>
Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66190,7 +63420,6 @@ Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
</parameters>
<return> The current step increment of the adjustment.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -66234,16 +63463,16 @@ given style.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -66288,7 +63517,9 @@ Since: 2.18
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
<description>
-Return value: The function.
+Returns the current selection function.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66299,7 +63530,6 @@ Return value: The function.
</parameters>
<return> The function.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -66356,6 +63586,7 @@ Requests the contents of the clipboard as URIs. This function waits
for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66364,7 +63595,7 @@ timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a newly-allocated
+<return> a newly-allocated
%NULL-terminated array of strings which must
be freed with g_strfreev(), or %NULL if
retrieving the selection data failed. (This
@@ -66372,7 +63603,6 @@ could happen for various reasons, in particular
if the clipboard was empty or if the contents of
the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.)
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -66437,7 +63667,7 @@ gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the vertical focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+<return> the vertical focus adjustment, or %NULL if
none has been set.
</return>
</function>
@@ -66538,7 +63768,7 @@ gtk_widget_child_focus() is called by containers as the user moves
around the window using keyboard shortcuts. @direction indicates
what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
forward, tab backward). gtk_widget_child_focus() emits the
-#GtkWidget::focus" signal; widgets override the default handler
+#GtkWidget::focus signal; widgets override the default handler
for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
The default ::focus handler for a widget should return %TRUE if
@@ -66570,30 +63800,12 @@ currently in a focusable state, so there's no need for those checks.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_size_group_compute_requisition">
-<description>
-Compute the requisition of a widget taking into account grouping of
-the widget's requisition with other widgets.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="requisition">
-<parameter_description> location to store computed requisition.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename">
<description>
Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66606,7 +63818,6 @@ widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented
as a local filename. Free with g_free()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -66615,6 +63826,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Sets @requisition to the size needed by @cell_view to display
the model row pointed to by @path.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66633,7 +63845,6 @@ the model row pointed to by @path.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -66663,7 +63874,8 @@ function directly, so that themes are taken into account.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66676,120 +63888,83 @@ Return value: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_accel_group">
-<description>
-Return value:the #GtkAccelGroup.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GtkAccelGroup.
+<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_check">
+<function name="gtk_widget_realize">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
-a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
-initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
+Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
+widget. For example, @widget->window will be created when a widget
+is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
+a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
+realized and mapped automatically.
-This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
-with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
+Realizing a widget requires all
+the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
+gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
+ widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
+when you realize it, bad things will happen.
+This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
+isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
+need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
+called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
+GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
+GtkWidget::realize signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description>Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description>(inout)Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_style">
<description>
-Returns:the default style. This #GtkStyle object is owned
+Returns the default style used by all widgets initially.
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return>the default style. This #GtkStyle object is owned
+<return> the default style. This #GtkStyle object is owned
by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
-several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
-passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
-when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
-of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
-
-Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
-larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
+ chooser
-Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
-window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
-set the icon on transient windows.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="sort_type">
+<parameter_description> sort order that the chooser should use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66823,15 +63998,17 @@ especially useful if you use gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() to allow
non-local files and you use a more expressive vfs, such as gnome-vfs,
to load files.
+Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="action">
@@ -66843,7 +64020,7 @@ to load files.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in the first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -66853,8 +64030,6 @@ to load files.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
-Since: 2.4
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -66872,7 +64047,7 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66909,6 +64084,7 @@ will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
<description>
Sets @uri as the current URI for @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66921,21 +64097,41 @@ Sets @uri as the current URI for @chooser.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the URI was found.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
+The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
+for center, 1.0 for right.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_contexts">
<description>
Gets the list of contexts available within the current
hierarchy of icon themes
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66949,7 +64145,6 @@ contexts in the theme. You must first free each element
in the list with g_free(), then free the list itself
with g_list_free().
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -66976,16 +64171,16 @@ Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
+<parameter_description> the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
+<parameter_description> a style detail
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
@@ -67012,6 +64207,7 @@ output should not be clipped
<description>
Inserts a page in the @assistant at a given position.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67031,7 +64227,6 @@ or -1 to append the page to the @assistant
</parameters>
<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted page
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -67039,6 +64234,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67050,22 +64246,39 @@ Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
returned string with g_free() when done.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_uposition">
<description>
-Unsets the invisible char previously set with
-gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
-default invisible char is used again.
+Sets the position of a widget. The funny "u" in the name comes from
+the "user position" hint specified by the X Window System, and
+exists for legacy reasons. This function doesn't work if a widget
+is inside a container; it's only really useful on #GtkWindow.
-Since: 2.16
+Don't use this function to center dialogs over the main application
+window; most window managers will do the centering on your behalf
+if you call gtk_window_set_transient_for(), and it's really not
+possible to get the centering to work correctly in all cases from
+application code. But if you insist, use gtk_window_set_position()
+to set #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, don't do the centering
+manually.
+
+Note that although @x and @y can be individually unset, the position
+is not honoured unless both @x and @y are set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position; -1 to unset x; -2 to leave x unchanged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position; -1 to unset y; -2 to leave y unchanged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67102,7 +64315,13 @@ handler for the signal applies @tag to the given range.
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_bool">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @key maps to a true value.
+Returns the boolean represented by the value
+that is associated with @key.
+
+The string "true" represents %TRUE, any other
+string %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67117,13 +64336,14 @@ Return value: %TRUE, if @key maps to a true value.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE, if @key maps to a true value.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_get_active">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the menu item is checked.
+Returns whether the check menu item is active. See
+gtk_check_menu_item_set_active ().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67136,26 +64356,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the menu item is checked.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
-<description>
-Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_hidden">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_direction">
<description>
Obtains the current default reading direction. See
@@ -67222,17 +64422,6 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_peek_colormap">
-<description>
-Return value: the currently pushed colormap, or %NULL if there is none.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the currently pushed colormap, or %NULL if there is none.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_receives_default">
<description>
Determines whether @widget is alyways treated as default widget
@@ -67241,6 +64430,7 @@ is the default.
See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67252,51 +64442,25 @@ See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
<return> %TRUE if @widget acts as default widget when focussed,
%FALSE otherwise
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *msg;
+Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
+a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
+line in the buffer.
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_ref">
@@ -67344,6 +64508,7 @@ The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
be freed or modified.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67354,29 +64519,106 @@ be freed or modified.
</parameters>
<return> name of the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
-Installs a global function used to create a window
-when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
+Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
+to widget relative coordinates.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<description>
+Creates an empty status icon object.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
+<description>
+Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67415,7 +64657,10 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_tree_view_is_rubber_banding_active">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being
+Returns whether a rubber banding operation is currently being done
+in @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67427,7 +64672,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being
<return> %TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being
done in @tree_view.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -67521,6 +64765,42 @@ Sets the way @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
+<description>
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
+<description>
+Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="can_focus">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
@@ -67532,45 +64812,54 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixbuf or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_icon_size">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list">
<description>
-Unsets the tool palette icon size set with gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size(),
-so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
+The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
+gtk_drag_dest_set().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_list">
+<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
<description>
-Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-
+Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
+given widget and selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description>new scroll adjustment
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> target to add.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67594,7 +64883,7 @@ gtk_widget_modify_style().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description>the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
</parameter_description>
@@ -67603,30 +64892,29 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
<description>
-This inserts the @column into the @tree_view at @position. If @position is
--1, then the column is inserted at the end. If @tree_view has
-"fixed_height" mode enabled, then @column must have its "sizing" property
-set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
+Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
+
+If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
+submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
+use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be inserted.
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert @column in.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
+lead to a menu item
</return>
</function>
@@ -67643,7 +64931,7 @@ the image will be displayed or not.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description>a widget to set as the image for the menu item.
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the menu item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67662,11 +64950,11 @@ image or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkImage, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkImage, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67674,121 +64962,114 @@ image or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
<description>
-Return value: a new #GtkCellRenderer
+Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
+accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> a file containing accelerator specifications,
+in the GLib file name encoding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRenderer
-
-Since: 2.20
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
-contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
-be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
-popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
-you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
-dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
-In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
-On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
+Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
+the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
+want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
+display the name themselves in their preview widget.
-If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
-gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of window
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_label">
+<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkWindow.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
- path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
-returned. However, unlike references created with
-gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
-The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
-gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
-gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-
-These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
-corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
-updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
-objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
-using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
-Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-
-This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
-carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
-generally needed by most applications.
+Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
<description>
-Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
-various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
-text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
-action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
+Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
-If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
-first.
+Since: 2.14
-Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the length of the data of the selection.
-Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
+<description>
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
+will be updated appropriately.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_get_restrict_to_fill_level">
<description>
Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67799,7 +65080,6 @@ Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @range is restricted to the fill level.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -67824,6 +65104,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<description>
+Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original color to be @color too.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
+to set the current color to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_composite_name">
<description>
Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
@@ -67901,6 +65203,7 @@ Gets the type of representation being used by the icon
to store image data. If the icon has no image data,
the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67915,58 +65218,14 @@ the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
</parameters>
<return> image representation being used
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
-<description>
-Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
-coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
-the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
-If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
-those to buffer coordinates with
-gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-
-Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
-characters.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
-in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
-zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
-0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67977,13 +65236,16 @@ Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
</parameters>
<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_cell_renderers">
<description>
-Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
+Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -67996,9 +65258,6 @@ Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with
g_list_free() when no longer needed.
-Since: 2.6
-
-Deprecated: 2.18: use gtk_cell_layout_get_cells() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -68010,6 +65269,7 @@ as a preview of the contents of a text file.
See gtk_icon_info_set_raw_coordinates() for further
information about the coordinate system.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68026,7 +65286,6 @@ when this function returns %TRUE.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the icon has an embedded rectangle
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -68074,7 +65333,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="license">
-<parameter_description>the license information or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the license information or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68103,6 +65362,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable().
Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
resources selector. See gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68113,7 +65373,6 @@ resources selector. See gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if only local resources should be shown.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -68156,57 +65415,29 @@ persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_set_visible">
<description>
-Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
-every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
-column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
-renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
+Sets the visibility of @mark; the insertion point is normally
+visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also, the text
+widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when
+dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible.
+Marks are not visible by default.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expander">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expanded">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> visibility of mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_alignment">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the alignment
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_state">
<description>
This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
@@ -68227,6 +65458,37 @@ the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_attach">
+<description>
+Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
+involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
+been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
+
+Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
+in the following way:
+<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
+If the style is newly created, the style parameter
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+a reference count belonging to the caller.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label">
<description>
Sets @label as the label used for the tool button. The "label" property
@@ -68244,7 +65506,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>a string that will be used as label, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> a string that will be used as label, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68257,6 +65519,7 @@ Gets whether the preview widget set by gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
should be shown for the current filename. See
gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68267,61 +65530,47 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
<description>
-Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
-menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
-persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
-To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
-gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
-See also gtk_accel_map_add_entry() on the specifics of accelerator paths,
-and gtk_menu_set_accel_path() for a more convenient variant of this function.
-
-This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles calling
-gtk_widget_set_accel_path() with the appropriate accelerator group for
-the menu item.
-
-Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
-gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
+the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
+in a table.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description>accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
-functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_append_search_path">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixmap">
<description>
-Appends a directory to the search path.
-See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
-
-Since: 2.4
+See gtk_image_new_from_pixmap() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> directory name to append to the icon path
+<parameter name="pixmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixmap or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68330,7 +65579,10 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_accel_label_get_accel_width">
<description>
-Returns: the width needed to display the accelerator key(s).
+Returns the width needed to display the accelerator key(s).
+This is used by menus to align all of the #GtkMenuItem widgets, and shouldn't
+be needed by applications.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68343,41 +65595,73 @@ Returns: the width needed to display the accelerator key(s).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_markup">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_hard_margins">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
+Retrieve the hard margins of @printer, i.e. the margins that define
+the area at the borders of the paper that the printer cannot print to.
+
+Note: This will not succeed unless the printer's details are available,
+see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the top margin in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the bottom margin in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the left margin in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the right margin in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
-returned string with g_free() when done.
+<return> %TRUE iff the hard margins were retrieved
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_headers_visible">
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
<description>
-Sets the visibility state of the headers.
+Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
+if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="headers_visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the headers are visible
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_visible_range">
@@ -68387,6 +65671,7 @@ Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
The paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68395,70 +65680,36 @@ The paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for start of region, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Return location for start of region, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for end of region, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Return location for end of region, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path.
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
-<description>
-Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
<description>
-Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
-to bin_window coordinates.
+Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tx">
-<parameter_description> tree X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ty">
-<parameter_description> tree Y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate relative to bin_window
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
+by one.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_group_get_modifier_mask">
@@ -68466,6 +65717,7 @@ Since: 2.12
Gets a #GdkModifierType representing the mask for this
@accel_group. For example, #GDK_CONTROL_MASK, #GDK_SHIFT_MASK, etc.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68476,27 +65728,25 @@ Gets a #GdkModifierType representing the mask for this
</parameters>
<return> the modifier mask for this accel group.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_get_widgets">
<description>
-Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
-and appearance when setting the related action or when
-the action changes appearance.
+Returns the list of widgets associated with @size_group.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGrup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
+<return> a #GSList of
+widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
-Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -68552,43 +65802,68 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
<description>
-Frees @path.
+Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
+for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
+is in table mode.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the wrap width.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window. See gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement().
+Gets the icon name of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current placement value.
+<return> the icon name
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_option_menu_get_history">
+<description>
+Retrieves the index of the currently selected menu item. The menu
+items are numbered from top to bottom, starting with 0.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkComboBox instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="option_menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOptionMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> index of the selected menu item, or -1 if there are no menu items
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_underline">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander label
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_expander_set_use_underline().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68600,7 +65875,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander label
<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander label
indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -68609,6 +65883,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68619,47 +65894,20 @@ dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
</parameters>
<return> the page setup of @context
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkAccelMap">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_get_sensitive">
<description>
-Notifies of a change in the global accelerator map.
-The path is also used as the detail for the signal,
-so it is possible to connect to
-changed::<replaceable>accel_path</replaceable>.
+Returns %TRUE if the group is sensitive. The constituent actions
+can only be logically sensitive (see gtk_action_is_sensitive()) if
+they are sensitive (see gtk_action_get_sensitive()) and their group
+is sensitive.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the global accel map object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> the path of the accelerator that changed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> the key value for the new accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> the modifier mask for the new accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_action_group_get_sensitive">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the group is sensitive.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
<parameter name="action_group">
<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
@@ -68667,7 +65915,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the group is sensitive.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the group is sensitive.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -68701,6 +65948,28 @@ has been set to the resulting flags value.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
+<description>
+Calls @func on all expanded rows.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> User data to be passed to the function.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_custom_tab_label">
<description>
Sets the label for the tab holding custom widgets.
@@ -68714,7 +65983,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the label to use, or %NULL to use the default label
+<parameter_description> the label to use, or %NULL to use the default label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68742,27 +66011,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
-<description>
-Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
-the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
-unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
-hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan
-to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
-will also be finalized.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
<description>
Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
@@ -68802,21 +66050,23 @@ Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
<description>
-Returns: the action area.
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action area.
-
-Since: 2.18
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_activate">
@@ -68843,6 +66093,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the vertical adjustment of the tool palette.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68853,13 +66104,34 @@ Gets the vertical adjustment of the tool palette.
</parameters>
<return> the vertical adjustment of @palette
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_color">
+<description>
+Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 #gdouble to fill in with the current color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
<description>
-Returns:the action area.
+Returns the action area of @dialog.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68868,9 +66140,8 @@ Returns:the action area.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the action area.
+<return> the action area.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -68898,16 +66169,41 @@ for the context and the global default input method.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkInfoBar object.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkInfoBar object
-Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
+<description>
+Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
+See gtk_label_set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable,
+this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
+ end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_offset">
+<parameter_description> start offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_offset">
+<parameter_description> end offset (in characters not bytes)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_gicon">
<description>
Gets the #GIcon and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -68925,12 +66221,12 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gicon">
-<parameter_description>place to store a
+<parameter_description> place to store a
#GIcon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>place to store an icon size,
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size,
or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -68949,6 +66245,7 @@ The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -68957,30 +66254,54 @@ and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
+<return> the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
<description>
-Creates a list of known paper sizes.
+Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
+ row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
+where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
+0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
+center.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
+tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
+This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
+position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
+
+This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
+the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
+centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="include_custom">
-<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
-as defined in the page setup dialog
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_align">
+<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="col_align">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated list of newly
-allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id">
@@ -68998,66 +66319,42 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description>a name of a stock item, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a name of a stock item, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_copies">
-<parameter_description> the number of copies
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_screen">
-<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where the @window is displayed; if
-the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> the number of jobs on @printer
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_new">
<description>
Creates a new HSV color selector.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> A newly-created HSV color selector.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -69068,6 +66365,7 @@ It'll automatically show all created non window widgets, also
g_object_ref_sink() them (to keep them alive across a running test)
and set them up for destruction during the next test teardown phase.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69076,7 +66374,7 @@ and set them up for destruction during the next test teardown phase.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description>Name of first property to set or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Name of first property to set or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -69087,7 +66385,6 @@ name-value pairs, terminated by %NULL
</parameters>
<return> a newly created widget.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -69115,20 +66412,30 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_window_present">
<description>
-Sets the model for a #GtkTreeView. If the @tree_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is %NULL,
-then it will unset the old model.
+Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
+in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
+desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
+on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+
+If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
+as well.
+
+This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
+that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
+currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
+a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
+where the user can see it.
+
+If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction,
+it is preferable to use gtk_window_present_with_time().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeNode.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description>The model.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69174,26 +66481,12 @@ to specify your own buffer, consider gtk_text_view_new_with_buffer().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+Returns the column of @icon_view's model which is being used for
+displaying tooltips on @icon_view's rows.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69205,23 +66498,23 @@ Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
<description>
-Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right_margin">
-<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69241,11 +66534,11 @@ Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>transient parent, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description>an existing #GtkPageSetup, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> an existing #GtkPageSetup, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="settings">
@@ -69293,10 +66586,30 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
+to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
+Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
+or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
+a new icon theme object for scratch.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new_with_backend">
<description>
Creates a new file-selecting button widget using @backend.
+Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_button_new() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69315,8 +66628,6 @@ Creates a new file-selecting button widget using @backend.
</parameters>
<return> a new button widget.
-Since: 2.6
-Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_button_new() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -69338,6 +66649,24 @@ of the #GtkTreeView
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
+<description>
+Returns the current row separator function.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current row separator function.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ctree_node_set_pixmap">
<description>
@@ -69351,24 +66680,28 @@ of the #GtkTreeView
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
+By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
+gdk_notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable
+the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
+first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
+until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
+
+In that example, you would disable startup notification
+temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
+showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to automatically do startup notification
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_layout_offsets">
@@ -69389,37 +66722,33 @@ and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description>location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description>location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_settings">
<description>
-Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
-(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
-be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
-and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
-
-If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
-you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+Sets the #GtkPrintSettings for the #GtkPrintUnixDialog. Typically,
+this is used to restore saved print settings from a previous print
+operation before the print dialog is shown.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69450,29 +66779,46 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
+<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
<description>
-Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
+and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
+as @... parameters.
+Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
+incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
+The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
+creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
+resized and positioned on screen.
+The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
+will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="window_title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dialog_text">
+<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_content_area">
<description>
-Returns:the content area #GtkVBox.
+Returns the content area of @dialog.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69481,55 +66827,50 @@ Returns:the content area #GtkVBox.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the content area #GtkVBox.
+<return> the content area #GtkVBox.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>if
-the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
<description>
-Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
- chooser The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
-folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
-gtk_file_chooser_get_uris())
-
+Gets the values of one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_prop_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
+optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList containing the filenames of all selected
-files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
-with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
@@ -69539,6 +66880,7 @@ object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69547,58 +66889,36 @@ file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
-the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
+the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
+currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
+
+The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
+you are done with it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
-<description>
-Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
-window they were spawned from. This allows <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
-dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
-main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
-functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
-gtk_window_set_transient_for() on your behalf.
-
-Passing %NULL for @parent unsets the current transient window.
-
-On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
-much as the window manager would have done on X.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current cursor path, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>parent window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="focus_column">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to be filled with the current focus column, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69619,7 +66939,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description>a #GdkPixbuf or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69628,7 +66948,13 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_tag">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
+Returns %TRUE if @tag is toggled off at exactly this point. If @tag
+is %NULL, returns %TRUE if any tag is toggled off at this point. Note
+that the gtk_text_iter_ends_tag () returns %TRUE if @iter is the
+<emphasis>end</emphasis> of the tagged range;
+gtk_text_iter_has_tag () tells you whether an iterator is
+<emphasis>within</emphasis> a tagged range.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69637,7 +66963,7 @@ Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description>a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69650,6 +66976,7 @@ Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
<description>
Gets the 'Cancel' button.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69660,31 +66987,6 @@ Gets the 'Cancel' button.
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Cancel' button.
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
-<description>
-Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
-given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
-_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
-available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
-modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GSList of all matching entries.
</return>
</function>
@@ -69693,6 +66995,7 @@ modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
Translates a string using the specified translate_func(). This
is mainly intended for language bindings.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69707,130 +67010,69 @@ is mainly intended for language bindings.
</parameters>
<return> the translation of @string
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_xembed_send_message">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
<description>
-Sends a generic XEMBED message to a particular window.
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="recipient">
-<parameter_description>window to which to send the window, or %NULL
-in which case nothing will be sent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message">
-<parameter_description> type of message
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> detail field of message
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data1">
-<parameter_description> data1 field of message
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data2">
-<parameter_description> data2 field of message
+<parameter name="authors">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
<description>
-Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
-current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
+Gets the header image for @page.
Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
-<description>
-Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
-prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
-this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
-in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description>A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no header image for the page.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
+<function name="gtk_separator_new">
<description>
-Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
+Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkSeparator.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_new">
@@ -69850,6 +67092,7 @@ default.
<description>
Gets the group at position (x, y).
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69869,7 +67112,6 @@ Gets the group at position (x, y).
<return> the #GtkToolItemGroup at position or %NULL
if there is no such group
-Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
@@ -69910,11 +67152,11 @@ NULL);
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description>Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description>Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="flags">
@@ -69922,7 +67164,7 @@ NULL);
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_button_text">
-<parameter_description>stock ID or text to go in first button, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> stock ID or text to go in first button, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -69992,22 +67234,25 @@ owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkStatusbar">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_location">
<description>
-Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
+Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at @iter.
+The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
+gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these
+coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the message that was just popped.
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> bounds of the character at @iter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -70058,6 +67303,7 @@ should not be modified or freed
Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
gtk_expander_set_label_widget().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70068,7 +67314,22 @@ gtk_expander_set_label_widget().
</parameters>
<return> the label widget, or %NULL if there is none.
-Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
+<description>
+Returns the current alpha value.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</return>
</function>
@@ -70100,13 +67361,13 @@ each time something inside the list changes.
#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -70123,6 +67384,7 @@ the width/height returned by gtk_icon_size_lookup(), because themes
are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
the usual size.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70132,7 +67394,7 @@ which set of user preferences to used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description>an icon size
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
@@ -70146,7 +67408,6 @@ which set of user preferences to used.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @size was a valid size
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -70211,29 +67472,35 @@ Sets the position in which the current value is displayed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_widget">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_new_with_range">
<description>
-Obtains the widget which corresponds to @path.
+This is a convenience constructor that allows creation of a numeric
+#GtkSpinButton without manually creating an adjustment. The value is
+initially set to the minimum value and a page increment of 10 * @step
+is the default. The precision of the spin button is equivalent to the
+precision of @step.
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the submenu is returned. If you are interested in the menu
-item, use gtk_item_factory_get_item() instead.
+Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
+is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
+needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> Minimum allowable value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the widget
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> Maximum allowable value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> Increment added or subtracted by spinning the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the widget for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't lead
-to a widget
+<return> The new spin button as a #GtkWidget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -70278,49 +67545,11 @@ queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellEditable">
-<description>
-This signal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished
-editing, and the widget may now be destroyed.
-
-Implementations of #GtkCellEditable are responsible for
-emitting this signal when they are done editing. It must
-be emitted after the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal,
-to give the cell renderer a chance to update the cell's value
-before the widget is removed.
-
-gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget() is a convenience method
-for emitting ::remove-widget.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_plug_send_delete_event">
-<description>
-Send a GDK_DELETE event to the @widget and destroy it if
-necessary. Internal GTK function, called from this file or the
-backend-specific GtkPlug implementation.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_fixed_height_mode">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in fixed height mode
+Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for @tree_view.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70331,7 +67560,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in fixed height mode
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @tree_view is in fixed height mode
-Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -70380,7 +67608,8 @@ e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent">
<description>
-Return value:the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
+Returns the parent container of @widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70389,92 +67618,63 @@ Return value:the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
+<return> the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
+<function name="gtk_style_unref">
<description>
-Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
- child
+Decrease the reference count of @style.
+Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
-widget does not have a menu label other than
-the default menu label, or the menu label widget
-is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
-the widget and must not be freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
-request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
-force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
-strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
-from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
-gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
-windows than this function; setting the default size will still
-allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
-to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
-with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
-function as well.
+Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See
+gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
-Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
-translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
-basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
-correct.
-
-Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
-Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps around to the
-opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.
+Creates a new custom paper dialog.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed.
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkCustomPaperUnixDialog
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_border_copy">
@@ -70498,6 +67698,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRecentAction object. To add the action to
a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70506,11 +67707,11 @@ call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description>the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -70521,7 +67722,6 @@ action, or %NULL
</parameters>
<return> the newly created #GtkRecentAction.
-Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -70533,75 +67733,48 @@ for the "clicked" signal.
If no uri hook has been set, GTK+ defaults to calling gtk_show_uri().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description>a function called each time a #GtkLinkButton is clicked, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a function called each time a #GtkLinkButton is clicked, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description>user data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> user data to be passed to @func, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description>a #GDestroyNotify that gets called when @data is no longer needed, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that gets called when @data is no longer needed, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the previously set hook function.
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
<description>
-Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
-and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
-if more details about the icon are needed, use
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-
-Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
-update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
-GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
-update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
-using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
-returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
-icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
+Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
+the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
-exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
-or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
-the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
-icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_uri">
@@ -70629,38 +67802,33 @@ Since: 2.10
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
used to access the recently used resources list.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
<description>
-Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
-string showing text that is currently being edited and not
-yet committed into the buffer.
+Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
+quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_string">
-<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_pos">
-<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -70671,6 +67839,7 @@ yet committed into the buffer.
<description>
Determines the destination item for a given position.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70687,17 +67856,16 @@ Determines the destination item for a given position.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description>Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -70731,6 +67899,7 @@ added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70741,13 +67910,15 @@ gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
</parameters>
<return> the #GtkTargetList
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_blinking">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
+Returns whether the icon is blinking, see
+gtk_status_icon_set_blinking().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70758,7 +67929,6 @@ Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the icon is blinking
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -70823,6 +67993,7 @@ enable.
<description>
Gets the bottom margin in units of @unit.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70837,50 +68008,30 @@ Gets the bottom margin in units of @unit.
</parameters>
<return> the bottom margin
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_copy">
<description>
-Sets @palette as drag source (see gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source())
-and sets @widget as a drag destination for drags from @palette.
-See gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Creates a new #GtkTreePath as a copy of @path.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget which should be a drag destination for @palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops
-on that widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s which the widget
-should support
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDragAction<!-- -->s which the widget should suppport
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreePath.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_collate">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70891,7 +68042,6 @@ Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE.
</parameters>
<return> whether to collate the printed pages
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -70903,6 +68053,7 @@ toolbar where it will be inserted.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70941,7 +68092,6 @@ arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -70977,6 +68127,7 @@ text contents @dialog_text.
The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -70991,7 +68142,6 @@ will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
</parameters>
<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -71072,23 +68222,48 @@ page size, it is clamped between @min and @max - page-size.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreePath initialized to @path. @path is expected to be a
-colon separated list of numbers. For example, the string "10:4:0" would
-create a path of depth 3 pointing to the 11th child of the root node, the 5th
-child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child. If an invalid
-path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
+Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
+into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The string representation of a path.
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_tabs">
+<description>
+Gets the default tabs for @text_view. Tags in the buffer may
+override the defaults. The returned array will be %NULL if
+"standard" (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
+with pango_tab_array_free().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> copy of default tab array, or %NULL if "standard"
+tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
</return>
</function>
@@ -71105,6 +68280,7 @@ This function is not intended for other use cases which are
more likely to be met by one of the non-X11 specific methods, such
as gtk_status_icon_position_menu().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71116,59 +68292,9 @@ as gtk_status_icon_position_menu().
<return> An 32 bit unsigned integer identifier for the
underlying X11 Window
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_string">
-<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description>clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description>the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description>a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title for the font selection dialog.
@@ -71189,74 +68315,63 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_delegate_iface_init">
-<description>
-An interface-initialization function for use in cases where
-an object is simply delegating the methods, signals of
-the #GtkRecentChooser interface to another object.
-_gtk_recent_chooser_set_delegate() must be called on each
-instance of the object so that the delegate object can
-be found.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iface">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooserIface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
<description>
-Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
-and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
-normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
-that crashes if not.
+Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
+to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
+the @chooser is in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
+will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
-initially.
+If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
+folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
+is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
-You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
+for the directory change.
-Note that, according to the <ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
-Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
-for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
-drawing attention to their dialogs.
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
+if (document_is_new)
+{
+/* the user just created a new document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
+}
+else
+{
+/* the user edited an existing document */
+gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
+}
+]|
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether to keep @window below other windows
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> the #GFile to set as current
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkSpinner">
-<description>
-The duration in milliseconds for the spinner to complete a full cycle.
-
-Since: 2.20
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_sort_column_changed">
@@ -71284,6 +68399,11 @@ gtk_recent_manager_new() and setting the screen yourself; by using
this function a single recent manager object will be shared between
users.
+Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
+not be used in newly written code. Calling this function is
+equivalent to calling gtk_recent_manager_get_default().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71297,11 +68417,6 @@ screen. This recent manager is associated to the with the screen
and can be used as long as the screen is open. Do not ref or
unref it.
-Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
-not be used in newly written code. Calling this function is
-equivalent to calling gtk_recent_manager_get_default().
-
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -71323,33 +68438,6 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction">
<description>
Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
@@ -71404,51 +68492,6 @@ widget
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init">
-<description>
-Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
-applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
-toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
- argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
-never see those standard arguments.
-
-Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
-if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
-gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
-the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
-<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-
-<note><para>
-This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
-the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
-textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
-</para></note>
-
-<note><para>
-Since 2.18, GTK+ calls <literal>signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)</literal>
-during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
-almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
-handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after gtk_init(),
-but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
-similar things.
-</para></note>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description>Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description>(inout)Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column">
<description>
If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you
@@ -71475,16 +68518,21 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToggleAction">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-If the toggle action should be active in or not.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL if none is currently being
+used.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_columns_autosize">
@@ -71525,7 +68573,7 @@ Since: 2.16
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description>the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -71577,27 +68625,22 @@ dereferencable, returns %FALSE. Otherwise, returns %TRUE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_alignment">
<description>
-Sets the visibility of @mark; the insertion point is normally
-visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also, the text
-widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when
-dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible.
-Marks are not visible by default.
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> visibility of mark
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the alignment
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new_for_manager">
@@ -71607,6 +68650,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget with a specified recent manager.
This is useful if you have implemented your own recent manager, or if you
have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71617,7 +68661,6 @@ have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -71627,6 +68670,7 @@ Gets the #PangoLayout used to display the scale.
The returned object is owned by the scale so does
not need to be freed by the caller.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71638,10 +68682,58 @@ not need to be freed by the caller.
<return> the #PangoLayout for this scale, or %NULL
if the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE.
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute">
+<description>
+Adds an attribute mapping to the list in @tree_column. The @column is the
+column of the model to get a value from, and the @attribute is the
+parameter on @cell_renderer to be set from the value. So for example
+if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
+"text" attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from
+column 2.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer to set attributes on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="attribute">
+<parameter_description> An attribute on the renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
+<description>
+Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
+current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
+view will be updated accordingly.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_connect_accelerator">
<description>
Installs the accelerator for @action if @action has an
@@ -71670,6 +68762,7 @@ Since: 2.4
This returns the #GtkTreeView that lists font families, for
example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71680,7 +68773,6 @@ example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
</parameters>
<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
-Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -71735,6 +68827,7 @@ activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them.
<description>
Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71745,7 +68838,6 @@ Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
</parameters>
<return> a copy of @reference.
-Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
@@ -71839,58 +68931,51 @@ to use as a base image when creating icon variants for #GtkIconSet.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description>name of icon to use
+<parameter_description> name of icon to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
<description>
-Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
-method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
+typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
+existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
+only some sequences of characters are allowed.
+
+This function is implemented by emitting the
+GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
+response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
+is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
+gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
+for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
+methods must be prepared to function without context.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_button_mask">
-<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
-widget
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
+holding context around the insertion point.
+If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
+the result stored in this location with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
-<description>
-Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
-This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="cursor_index">
+<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
+within @text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
+you must free the result stored in *text.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions">
@@ -71931,7 +69016,7 @@ to a particular #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>the relevant #GtkSettings object
+<return> the relevant #GtkSettings object
</return>
</function>
@@ -71939,6 +69024,7 @@ to a particular #GdkScreen.
<description>
Gets the #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71951,7 +69037,6 @@ Gets the #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
of #GtkRecentFilter objects. You
should just free the returned list using g_slist_free().
-Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -71985,7 +69070,8 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_n_columns">
<description>
-Return value: The number of columns.
+Returns the number of columns supported by @tree_model.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -71998,32 +69084,11 @@ Return value: The number of columns.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo
-
-Since: 2.14
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder_uri">
<description>
Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -72036,7 +69101,7 @@ Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description>location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -72045,7 +69110,6 @@ In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()
-Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -72077,7 +69141,9 @@ Since: 2.16
<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices">
<description>
-Return value: The current indices, or %NULL.
+Returns the current indices of @path. This is an array of integers, each
+representing a node in a tree. This value should not be freed.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -72090,6 +69156,22 @@ Return value: The current indices, or %NULL.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_width">
+<description>
+Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current width of @tree_column.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_focus">
<description>
If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
@@ -72105,7 +69187,7 @@ gtk_widget_grab_focus() instead of this function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="focus">
-<parameter_description>widget to be the new focus widget, or %NULL to unset
+<parameter_description> widget to be the new focus widget, or %NULL to unset
any focus widget for the toplevel window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -72113,9 +69195,32 @@ any focus widget for the toplevel window.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
+Returns %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -72126,26 +69231,34 @@ Returns: %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
-Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered">
<description>
-Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-
+Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
+know that the model emitted the "rows_reordered" signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The parent path of the reordered signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The iter pointing to the parent of the reordered
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> The new order of rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
